HWQS International Technical Specification Guide A.11

HomeWorks QS
Technical Specification Guide

International Edition (220V - 240V)
Table of Contents
Spec P/N
Last Rev Date
369-353a
369-607a
369-669a
369-668a
10/29/10
05/11/12
08/27/12
09/13/12
369-349c
369-408b
03/26/12
04/25/11
369-394b
01/19/12
Multiple
Varies
369-480b
08/23/11
LOS-CDT
LOS-CIR
LOS-CUS
LOS-WDT
LOS-WIR
09/04/08
09/04/08
09/04/08
11/04/08
7/16/10
Spec P/N
Last Rev Date
Processor
Hybrid Repeater
369-376b
369-351b
05/23/12
02/10/12
Contact Closure Input/Output

Interface (QSE-IO)
360-640a
06/12/12
Front Room Equipment

Keypads
Wired Devices
seeTouch
International seeTouch
Architrave
Signature Series
RF Devices
seeTouch Table Top
Pico
Wired / RF Devices
Dynamic Keypad
Main Units
GRAFIK Eye QS
Sensors
Wireless Sensors
Occupancy/Vacancy
Wired Sensors
CDT Series
CIR Series
CUS Series
WDT Series
WIR Series
Back Room Equipment

Processor and Repeater
Interfaces
TOC Rev A.11, 7/9/2013
Wallbox Closure Interface (WCI)

DMX Interface
Cool Master HVAC Controller
QS Sensor Module (QSM)
Enclosures, Panels, and Power Modules

LV14 Low Voltage Enclosure
LV21 Low Voltage Enclosure
Wire Landing Board
Feed-Through Panels
Breaker Panels
Remote Power Modules (RPMs)
Module Interface
EcoSystem Power Module
Phase Adaptive Power Module
Motor Control Power Module
Switching/0-10V Power Module
DALI Power Module
369-681a
369-641a
09/05/12
07/04/12
Specification Sheet Coming Soon
369-703a
Spec P/N
369-604c
369-381b
369-662a
369-600a
369-548a
369-547a
369-545a
369-611a
369-583b
369-614a
369-610a
369-650a
10/15/12
Last Rev Date
12/04/12
12/14/11
08/27/12
01/10/12
06/22/12
06/22/12
06/22/12
02/17/12
01/31/12
03/02/12
02/17/12
08/16/12
369-404a
369-585a
086-101b
086-108
03/04/11
11/11/11
03/26/09
02/05/09
pb-1
elvi-1
fdbi-1
369-663a
369-247a
369-477a
01/29/07
06/13/07
06/13/07
08/31/12
03/22/10
09/01/11
369-266e
369-325d
369-543a
03/08/12
10/25/11
10/25/11
Spec P/N
Last Rev Date
n/a
n/a
05/03/12
02/14/11
Power Supplies
DIN Rail Power Supply
PNL-8 Power Kit
Smart Panel Power Supply
Plug In Power Supply
Power Boosters and Load Interfaces

Power Booster Interface
Electronic Low Voltage Interface
Fluorescent Ballast Interface
Ten Volt Module (TVM) and Kit
GRX-TVI
LUT-LBX
EcoSystem Ballasts and Drivers

H-Series Ballasts
A-Series EcoSystem/3-Wire Driver
A-Series Forward Phase Driver
Supporting Documentation
Wiring and PDU Guidelines
Networking Guide
TOC Rev A.11, 7/9/2013
TOC Rev A.11, 7/9/2013
HEADQUARTERS
EUROPEAN HEADQUARTERS
United Kingdom
Lutron EA Ltd. - London
Lutron House 6 Sovereign Close
Wapping, London E1W 3JF
England
TEL: +44.(0)20.7702.0657
FAX: +44.(0)20.7480.6899
Technical support:
+44.(0)20.7680.4481
FREEPHONE: 0800.282.107
France
Lutron LTC, S.A.R.L.
FREEPHONE 0800.90.12.18
Italy
Lutron LDV S.r.l.
FREEPHONE: 800.979.208
Germany
Lutron Electronics GmbH
FREEPHONE: 00800.5887.6635
Spain
Lutron CC, S.R.L.
FREEPHONE 0900.948.944
China, Beijing
Lutron GL Electronics (Shanghai)
Co. Ltd.
Beijing Branch
5th Floor, China Life Tower
No. 16 Chaowai Street
Chaoyang District
Beijing 100020
China
TEL: +86.10.5877.1818
FAX: +86.10.5877.1816
Technical support: 10.800.712.1536
China, Shanghai
Co. Ltd.
Suite 07, 39th Floor, Plaza 66
1266 Nan Jing West Road
Shanghai, 200040
China
TEL: +86.21.6288.1473
FAX: +86.21.6288.1751
Technical support: 10.800.120.1536
WORLD HEADQUARTERS
USA
Lutron Electronics Co., Inc.
7200 Suter Road
Coopersburg, PA 18036-1299
USA
TEL: +1.610.282.3800
FAX: +1.610.282.1243
Technical support:
+1.800.523.9466
ASIAN HEADQUARTERS
Singapore
Lutron GL Ltd.
15 Hoe Chiang Road
#07-03 Tower Fifteen
Singapore 089316
TEL: +65.6220.4666
FAX: +65.6220.4333
Technical support: 800.120.4491
Hong Kong
Lutron GL Ltd.
Unit 2808, 28/F
248 Queens Road East
Wanchai Hong Kong
TEL: +852.2104.7733
FAX: +852.2104.7633
Technical support: 800.901.849
Dubai, UAE
Lutron GL LTD (Branch)
P.O. Box 54759, Dubai, UAE
Building 2 West Wing, Office M 07
Dubai Airport Free Zone
Tel: +971.4.2991224
Fax:+971.4.2991223
China, Shanghai
Co. Ltd.
Building 2, No.1510
Chuan Qiao Road,
Jin Qiao Export Processing Zone,
Pudong, Shanghai
China
TEL: +86.21.51533600
FAX: +86.21.51533658
Technical Support: 10.800.120.1536
Japan
Lutron Asuka Co., Ltd.
No. 16 Kowa Building, 4F
1-9-20, Akasaka, Minato-ku
Tokyo 107-0052
Japan
TEL: +81.3.5575.8411
FAX: +81.3.5575.8420
FREEPHONE: 0120.083.417
India
Gurgaon
6, JMD Regent Square
Mehrauli Gurgaon Road,
Gurgaon, Haryana 122001
India
TEL: +91.124.471.1900
Technical Support
Customer Service
+1.610.282.3800
viii
Front Room Equipment
Keypads
product specifications
369-353a
10.29.10
HomeWorks QS Wired seeTouch Architectural Keypads

HomeWorks QS seeTouch keypads provide
homeowners with a simple and elegant way to
operate lights, shades / draperies, motorized
screens, thermostats, and many other devices.
HomeWorks QS seeTouch keypads feature
large, easy-to-use buttons, plus a unique backlit
engraving option that makes the keypads
readable any time of the day or night. seeTouch
buttons are rounded, allowing engraving to
be displayed at an upward angle, increasing
readability.
Replacement Kits are available in a variety of
colors and with custom engraving to clearly
identify each buttons function. The flexible
design of the keypads allows the color,
number of buttons, and button configuration
to be changed by installing a new engraved
Replacement Kit.
All HomeWorks QS wired seeTouch models
have two contact closure inputs on the back of
the unit which provide independent functions
from the front buttons. Other options include
configurations with infrared receiver and raise/
lower buttons.
Use Lutron Nova T wallplates. Wallplates are
included with the keypad. Lutron Nova T
wallplates snap on with no visible means of
attachment.
www.lutron.com
HomeWorks QS wired seeTouch architectural

keypads are available in many button
configurations, shown on the following two
pages. They are also available in insert (above
left) and non-insert (above right) styles. The
insert style allows decorator-style controls
to be easily ganged using Lutron Nova T
wallplates.
Lutron | 1
369-353a
10.29.10

Non-Insert Style Architectural Keypads
Model Numbers
HQWA-W1BN-XX*
1 Button Keypad
RKA-W1BN-XX*-E
Engraved Replacement Kit
HQWA-W2BSN-XX*
2 Button Keypad
RKA-W2BSN-XX*-E
HQWA-W3BSN-XX*
3 Button Keypad
RKA-W3BSN-XX*-E
HQWA-W3BSRLN-XX*
3 Button
with Raise/Lower Keypad
RKA-W3BSRLN-XX*-E
HQWA-W4BSN-XX*
4 Button Keypad
RKA-W4BSN-XX*-E
HQWA-W4SN-XX*
4 Scene
RKA-W4SN-XX*-E
HQWA-W5BN-XX*
5 Button Keypad
RKA-W5BN-XX*-E
HQWA-W5BRLN-XX*
5 Button
RKA-W5BRLN-XX*-E
HQWA-W5BIRN-XX*
5 Button
and Infrared Receiver
RKA-W5BIRNXX*-E
HQWA-W6BN-XX*
6 Button Keypad
RKA-W6BN-XX*-E
HQWA-W6BRLN-XX*
6 Button
RKA-W6BRLN-XX*-E
HQWA-W7BN-XX*
7 Button Keypad
RKA-W7BN-XX*-E
HQWA-W1RLDN-XX*-E
RKA-W1RLDN-XX*
Dual Group
HQWA-W2RLDN-XX*
Dual Group
with Dual Raise/Lower Keypad
RKA-W2RLDN-XX*-E
HQWA-W3BDN-XX*
Dual Group Keypad
RKA-W3BDN-XX*-E
HQWA-W1BN
HQWA-W2BSN
HQWA-W3BSN
HQWA-W3BSRLN
HQWA-W4BSN
HQWA-W4SN
HQWA-W5BN
HQWA-W5BRLN
HQWA-W5BIRN
HQWA-W6BN
HQWA-W6BRLN HQWA-W7BN
HQWA-W1RLDN HQWA-W2RLDN HQWA-W3BDN
*XX in the model number represents color / finish code. See

Colors and Finishes at end of document.
2 | Lutron
24/7 Technical Support 800.523.9466
369-353a
10.29.10

Insert Style Architectural Keypads
Model Numbers
HQWA-W1BI-XX*
1 Button Keypad
RKA-W1BI-XX*-E
HQWA-W2BSI-XX*
2 Button Keypad
RKA-W2BSI-XX*-E
HQWA-W3BSI-XX*
3 Button Keypad
RKA-W3BSI-XX*-E
HQWA-W3BSRLI-XX*
3 Button
RKA-W3BSRLI-XX*-E
HQWA-W4BSI-XX*
4 Button Keypad
RKA-W4BSI-XX*-E
HQWA-W4SI-XX*
4 Scene
RKA-W4SI-XX*-E
HQWA-W5BI-XX*
5 Button Keypad
RKA-W5BI-XX*-E
HQWA-W5BRLI-XX*
5 Button
RKA-W5BRLI-XX*-E
HQWA-W5BIRI-XX*
5 Button
and Infrared Receiver
RKA-W5BIRIXX*-E
HQWA-W6BI-XX*
6 Button Keypad
RKA-W6BI-XX*-E
HQWA-W6BRLI-XX*
6 Button
RKA-W6BRLI-XX*-E
HQWA-W7BI-XX*
7 Button Keypad
RKA-W7BI-XX*-E
HQWA-W1RLDI-XX*-E
RKA-W1RLDI-XX*
Dual Group
HQWA-W2RLDI-XX*
Dual Group
with Dual Raise/Lower Keypad
RKA-W2RLDI-XX*-E
HQWA-W3BDI-XX*
Dual Group Keypad
RKA-W3BDI-XX*-E
HQWA-W1BI
HQWA-W2BSI
HQWA-W3BSI
HQWA-W3BSRLI
HQWA-W4BSI
HQWA-W4SI
HQWA-W5BI
HQWA-W5BRLI
HQWA-W5BIRI
HQWA-W6BI
HQWA-W6BRLI HQWA-W7BI
HQWA-W1RLDI
HQWA-W2RLDI
HQWA-W3BDI
*XX in the model number represents color / finish code. See

Colors and Finishes at end of document.
www.lutron.com
Lutron | 3
369-353a
10.29.10

Specifications
Model Numbers
See pages 2 and 3 for complete lists of model numbers.
Power
24 V
Typical Power
Consumption
0.6 W
Test conditions: all backlights on medium intensity, two LEDs on (two
presets active), keypad powered at 24 V
Regulatory Approvals
UL, cUL, NOM, FCC, IC, COFETEL
Environment
Ambient operating temperature: 32 F to 104 F (0 C to 40 C),

0% to 90% humidity, non-condensing. Indoor use only.
Communications
Connects to QS wired device link on Homeworks QS processor.
ESD Protection
Tested to withstand electrostatic discharge without damage or memory

loss, in accordance with IEC 61000-4-2.
Surge Protection
Tested to withstand surge voltages without damage or loss of

operation, in accordance with IEEE C62.41-1991 Recommended
Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.
Power Failure
Power failure memory: should power be interrupted, the keypad will

return to its previous state when power is restored.
Mounting
U.S. wallbox 3 in (89 mm) deep, 2 in (57 mm) deep minimum, or

low-voltage mounting bracket
Wiring
Control wire must be 1 pair 18 AWG (1.0 mm2) PELV (Class 2: USA) for
power and 1 pair 22 to 18 AWG (0.5 to 1.0 mm2) PELV (Class 2: USA)
twisted/shielded for data (see Wiring).
Warranty
8 Year Limited Warranty. http://www.lutron.com/resiinfo
30 mA PELV (Class 2: USA)
Design Features
t
Green status LEDs.
Backlit button/engraving.
Use Lutron Nova T wallplates. Wallplates

are included with the keypad.
Field-changeable Replacement Kits make for

easy customization.
Lutron Nova T wallplates snap on with no

visible means of attachment.
All terminal block inputs are over-voltage and

miswire-protected against wire reversals and
shorts.
Use Replacement Kits to change color, button

configuration, or engraving.
4 | Lutron
369-353a
10.29.10

Dimensions
All dimensions are shown as in
(mm)
Side View
Front View
4 916
(116)
2 34
(70)
16
(8)
1 116
(27)
Mounting and Parts Identification

Wallplate
Adapter
Adapter
Mounting
Wallplate
Screws
Keypad
Mounting
Screws
Wallbox
Keypad
www.lutron.com
Replacement
Kit
Lutron | 5
369-353a
10.29.10

Operation
Status LEDs
Show which keypad button has been activated.
Keypad Buttons
Press to activate desired levels or positions.
IR Receiver
Use a compatible IR remote to activate button functions.
Raise / Lower Buttons
Lights increase or decrease in intensity and shades /
draperies move towards the open or close limit.
6 | Lutron
369-353a
10.29.10

Wiring
30 mA
24 V
24 V
CO O P E R S BURG , P A 18036 US A
30 mA
AC N
099 942 971
AC N
099 942 971
24 V
30 mA
(3) 18 AWG
(1.0 mm2)
The outputs must

stay in the closed or
open states for at
least 40 ms in order to
be recognized by the
keypad.
AC N
099 942 971
Common
Input 2
Input 1
An external power supply may be

required depending on the total
current draw of all wired devices on
the processor link.
Up to 100 devices can be connected

to the QS wired link. This can
include seeTouch keypads along
with other devices as defined in the
HomeWorks QS software.
30 mA
The total length of wire on a QS

wired link is not to exceed 2000 ft
(610 m).
24 V
PELV (Class 2: USA) control wiring:

18 AWG (1.0 mm2)
Data link: twisted, shielded pair 22 to 18 AWG
(0.5 to 1.0 mm2)
Contact Closure
Notes
t
The contact closure
inputs can be used
with either dry contact
closures or groundreferenced solid-state
outputs.
AC N
099 942 971
Wiring Notes
Keypad wiring may be in a daisychain, star or T-tap configuration.
Pins 1 and 2: 1 pair 18 AWG (1.0 mm2)

for power
Pins 3 and 4: 1 pair 22 to 18 AWG
(0.5 to 1.0 mm2)
twisted/shielded for data
(Can use Lutron cable GRX-CBL-346S-500)
www.lutron.com
Lutron | 7
369-353a
10.29.10

Colors and Finishes
Architectural Matte Finishes
Architectural Metal Finishes (wallplates only)
White
WH
Ivory
IV
Satin Brass
SB
Bright Brass
BB
Bright Chrome
BC
Almond
AL
Light
Almond
LA
Clear Anodized
Aluminum
CLA
Black Anodized
Aluminum
BLA
Brass Anodized
Aluminum
BRA
Gray
GR
Brown
BR
Antique Brass
QB
Antique Bronze
QZ
Satin Chrome
SC
Black
BL
Taupe
TP
Satin Nickel
SN
Bright Nickel
BN
Gold
AU
When ordering metal wallplates, it is recommended to order

the keypad in Black (BL).
Sienna
SI
Beige
BE
t %
VFUPQSJOUJOHMJNJUBUJPOT DPMPSTBOEmOJTIFT
shown cannot be guaranteed to perfectly
match actual product colors.
t $PMPSDIJQLFZDIBJOTBSFBWBJMBCMFGPSNPSF
precise color matching:
Architectural Matte Finishes- AM-CK-1
Architectural Metal Finishes - AMTL-CK-1
8 | Lutron
369-607a
05.11.12
Wired International seeTouch Keypads

HomeWorks QS international seeTouch
keypads provide homeowners with a simple and
elegant way to operate lights, shades / draperies,
motorized screens, thermostats, and many other
devices.
All HomeWorks QS wired international
seeTouch keypads have two contact closure
inputs on the back of the unit which provide
independent functions from the front buttons.
Some models are available with an infrared
(IR) receiver.
HomeWorks QS international seeTouch
keypads feature large, easy-to-use buttons, plus
a unique backlit engraving option that makes
the keypads readable any time of the day or
night. seeTouch buttons are rounded, allowing
engraving to be displayed at an upward angle,
increasing readability.
identify each buttons function.
Lutron wallplates snap on with no visible means
of attachment. Multi-gang wallplates sold
separately.
1 | Lutron
www.lutron.com
HomeWorks QS wired international seeTouch

keypads are available in many button
congurations, shown on the following two
pages. They are also available in insert (above
left) and non-insert (above right) styles. The insert
style keypad allows for easy ganging. Keypad
and Button/Wallplate kits sold separately.
369-607a
05.11.12

Insert Style
Model Numbers
Base Units
HQWIS-NB-NONE
Keypad without
Wallplate /Button Kit
HQWIS-NBIR-NONE
IR Keypad without
Wallplate/Button Kit
HWIS-2B-I-XX*
HWIS-3B-I-XX*
HWIS-4B-I-XX*
HWIS-5BRL-I-XX*
HWIS-5BRLIR-I-XX*
HWIS-6BRL-I-XX*
HWIS-7BRL-I-XX*
HWIS-8BRL-I-XX*
HWIS-8BRLIR-I-XX*
Button/Wallplate Kits
HWIS-2B-I-XX*
2 button
HWIS-3B-I-XX*
3 button
HWIS-4B-I-XX*
4 button
HWIS-5BRL-I-XX*
5 button with
Raise/Lower
HWIS-5BRLIR-I-XX*
5 button with
Raise/Lower and IR
HWIS-6BRL-I-XX*
6 button with
Raise/Lower
HWIS-7BRL-I-XX*
7 button with
Raise/Lower
HWIS-8BRL-I-XX*
8 button with
Raise/Lower
HWIS-8BRLIR-I-XX*
8 button with
Raise/Lower and IR
HWIS-10BRL-I-XX*
10 button with
Raise/Lower
Replacement Button Kits

SIB-2B-XX*-E
2 button
SIB-3B-XX*-E
3 button
SIB-4B-XX*-E
4 button
SIB-5BRL-XX*-E
5 button with Raise/Lower
SIB-5BRLIR-XX*-E
5 button with
Raise/Lower and IR
SIB-6BRL-XX*-E
SIB-7BRL-XX*-E
SIB-8BRL-XX*-E
SIB-8BRLIR-XX*-E
8 button with
Raise/Lower and IR
SIB-10BRL-XX*-E
HWIS-10BRL-I-XX*
Ordering Example:
HQWIS-NB-NONE (Base Unit) and
HWIS-2B-I-AW (Wallplate/Button Kit)
*XX in the model number represents color / nish code.

See Colors and Finishes at end of document.
2 | Lutron
www.lutron.com
369-607a
05.11.12

Non-Insert Style
Model Numbers
Base Units
HQWIS-NB-NONE
International seeTouch without

Wallplate or Button Kit
HQWIS-NBIR-NONE
International seeTouch with IR

without Wallplate or Button Kit
HWIS-2B-F-XX*
HWIS-3B-F-XX*
HWIS-4B-F-XX*
HWIS-5BRL-F-XX*
HWIS-5BRLIR-F-XX*
HWIS-6BRL-F-XX*
HWIS-7BRL-F-XX*
HWIS-8BRL-F-XX*
HWIS-8BRLIR-F-XX*
Button/Faceplate Kits
HWIS-2B-F-XX*
2 button non-insert
HWIS-3B-F-XX*
3 button non-insert
HWIS-4B-F-XX*
4 button non-insert
HWIS-5BRL-F-XX*
5 button non-insert with

raise/lower
HWIS-5BRLIR-F-XX*

raise/lower and IR
HWIS-6BRL-F-XX*

raise/lower
HWIS-7BRL-F-XX*

raise/lower
HWIS-8BRL-F-XX*

raise/lower
HWIS-8BRLIR-F-XX*

raise/lower and IR
HWIS-10BRL-F-XX*

raise/lower
Replacement Button Kits

SIB-2B-XX*-E
2 button replacement kit
SIB-3B-XX*-E
SIB-4B-XX*-E
SIB-5BRL-XX*-E

with raise/lower
SIB-5BRLIR-XX*-E

with raise/lower and IR
SIB-6BRL-XX*-E

with raise/lower
SIB-7BRL-XX*-E

with raise/lower
SIB-8BRL-XX*-E

with raise/lower
SIB-8BRLIR-XX*-E

with raise/lower and IR
SIB-10BRL-XX*-E

with raise/lower
HWIS-10BRL-F-XX*
Ordering Example:
HQWIS-NB-NONE (for base unit) plus
HWIS-2B-F-AW (for button/faceplate kit)
*XX in the model number represents color / nish code.

See colors and finishes at end of document.
3 | Lutron
www.lutron.com
369-607a
05.11.12

Specifications
Model Numbers
See pages 2 and 3 for complete lists of model numbers.
Power
24 V- 30 mA
Typical Power
Consumption
0.6 W; 1 Power Draw Unit (PDU)

Test conditions: all backlights on medium intensity, two LEDs on
(two presets active), keypad powered at 24 V-
Regulatory
Approvals
CE, S C-tick, UL, cUL
Environment
Ambient operating temperature: 0 C to 40 C (32 F to 104 F),

Communications
Connects to QS wired device link on Homeworks QS processor.
ESD Protection
Tested to withstand 15 kV electrostatic discharge without damage or

memory loss, in accordance with IEC 801-2.
Power Failure
Power failure memory: should power be interrupted, the keypad will return
to its previous state when power is restored.
Mounting
EBB-15 RD (Round wallbox) 71 mm (2 1116 in) diameter x 61mm (2 18 in)

Deep or EBB-15 SQ (Square wallbox) 71 mm (2 1116 in) wide x 71 mm
(21116 in) high x 47 mm (178 in) deep.
Wiring
Control wire must be 1 pair 1.2 mm2 (18 AWG) IECPELV/NECClass2

for power and 1 pair 0.5 mm2to 1.0 mm2 (22 AWG to 18 AWG)
IECPELV/NECClass2 twisted/shielded for data (see Wiring).
Warranty
8 Year Limited Warranty.

http://www.lutron.com/TechnicalDocumentLibrary/HomeWorks_Warranty.pdf
Design Features
t Green status LEDs.
t Backlit button/engraving.
t Field-changeable Button/Wallplate Kits
allow for easy customization.
t All terminal block inputs are over-voltage
and miswire-protected against wire reversals
and shorts.
4 | Lutron
www.lutron.com
t Available as an insert style control for

muti-ganging.
t Lutron wallplates snap on with no visible
means of attachment.
t Use Replacement Kits to change color,
button conguration, engraving, or to
convert between insert and non-insert
style congurations.
369-607a
05.11.12

Dimensions
All dimensions are shown as mm
(in)
Side View
Front View
Back View
QS Link
Connector
4
75
(3)
75
(3)
6
( 4)
1
Sensor/
Contact
Closure
Input
Connector
35
(1 116)
Keypad
Mounting
Screws
Adapter
Mounting
Screws
Wallplate
Wallbox
Keypad
Wallplate Adapter
5 | Lutron
www.lutron.com
Replacement Kit
Non-insert
version shown
369-607a
05.11.12

Operation
Status LEDs
Keypad Buttons
IR Receiver
Use a compatible IR remote to activate
button functions.
Lights increase or decrease in intensity and
shades /draperies move towards the open
or close limit.
Non-insert version shown
6 | Lutron
www.lutron.com
369-607a
05.11.12

Wiring
Wiring to Control Link
IECPELV/NECClass2 control wiring: 1.0 mm2
(18 AWG)
Data link: twisted, shielded pair 0.5 to 1.0 mm2
(22 AWG to 18 AWG)
Control wiring 1.0 mm2 (18 AWG)
1: Common 2: 24 V
1.0 mm2
(18 AWG)
1.0 mm2
(18 AWG)
Common
3
1.0 mm2
(18 AWG)
t .BLFDPOOFDUJPOTJOTJEFUIF
wallbox or in a switch/junction
box with a maximum wire length
of 2.5 m (8 ft) from the link to
the Wallstation.
t 5XPNN2 (18 AWG) conductors
for common (terminal 1) and 24 V
(terminal2). These will not t in
terminals. Connect as shown.
t 0
OFTIJFMEFE UXJTUFEQBJS
1.0 mm2 (22 AWG) for data link
(terminals 3 and 4).
Control Link
t Keypad wiring may be in a daisychain, star or T-tap conguration.
t The total length of wire on a QS
wired link is not to exceed
610 m (2000 ft).
t Up to 100 devices can be
connected to the QS wired
link. This can include wired
international seeTouch
keypads along with other
devices as dened in the
HomeWorks QS software.
t An external power supply may
be required depending on the
total current draw of all wired
devices on the processor link.
Input 2
Input 1
Data Link twisted, shielded pair

2
1.0 mm (22 AWG )
3: MUX
4: MUX
Note: Use appropriate wire connecting

devices as specied by local codes.
Contact Closure Input

t The contact closure inputs can be used with
either dry contact closures or ground-referenced
solid-state outputs.
t The outputs must stay in the closed or
open states for at least 40 ms in order to be
recognized by the keypad.
t Wallstation is miswire protected up to 36 V-.
t $POOFDU%SBJO4IJFMEBTTIPXO
Do not connect to Ground (Earth) or
Wallstation. Connect the bare drain
wires and cut off the outside shield.
7 | Lutron
www.lutron.com
369-607a
05.11.12

Colors and Finishes
Architectural Metal Finishes (wallplates only)
Architectural Matte Finishes
Satin Brass
SB
Bright Brass
BB
Bright Chrome
BC
Arctic White
AW
Antique Brass
QB
Antique Bronze
QZ
Satin Chrome
SC
Mica
MC
Satin Nickel
SN
Bright Nickel
BN
Gold
AU
Argentum
AR
t %
shown cannot be guaranteed to perfectly match
actual product colors.
t $
PMPSDIJQQPSUGPMJPTBOELFZDIBJOTBSFBWBJMBCMF
for more precise color matching.
Architectural Metal portfolio
Architectural Matte keychain
8 | Lutron
AMTL-CK-1
AM-CK-1
www.lutron.com
369669a
08.27.12
HomeWorks QS Wired ArchitraveT Keypads

HomeWorksR QS Wired ArchitraveT keypads
provide homeowners with a simple and elegant
way to operate lights, shades / draperies,
motorized screens, thermostats, and many other
devices.
Replacement faceplates are available in a variety
of colors and with custom engraving to clearly
identify each buttons function.
All HomeWorksR QS Wired ArchitraveT models
have two contact closure inputs on the back of
the unit which provide independent functions
from the front buttons.
HomeWorksR QS Wired ArchitraveT architectural
keypads are available in multiple configurations,
shown on the following page.
1 | Lutron
www.lutron.com
369669a
08.27.12

Model Numbers
Base Units
HQWA-KP5-DW-WH*
Door Wide, 5 Button Raise/

Lower keypad without faceplate
HQWA-KP5-DW-BL*

HQWA-KP5-DN-WH*
Door Narrow, 5 Button Raise/

HQWA-KP5-DN-BL*

HQWA-KP7-DW-WH*
Door Wide, 7 Button keypad

without faceplate
HQWA-KP7-DW-BL*
Door Wide, 7 Button keypad

without faceplate
HQWA-KP7-DN-WH*
Door Narrow, 7 Button keypad

without faceplate
HQWA-KP7-DN-BL*
Door Narrow, 7 Button keypad

without faceplate
AR-M4-DW-XX
AR-M4-DN-XX
AR-M16-DW-XX
AR-M16-DN-XX
Replacement Faceplates
AR-M4-DW-XX**-E

Lower replacement faceplate
AR-M4-DN-XX**-E

Lower replacement faceplate
AR-M16-DW-XX**-E
Door Wide, 7 Button

replacement faceplate
AR-M16-DN-XX**-E
Door Narrow, 7 Button

replacement faceplate
* WH in the model number represents white buttons; BL in the

model number represents black buttons.
** XX in the model number represents color/finish code. See
colors and finishes at end of document.
2 | Lutron
www.lutron.com
369669a
08.27.12

Specifications
Model Numbers
See page 2 for a complete list of model numbers.
Power
24 V- 30 mA IEC PELV / NEC Class 2
Typical Power
Consumption

presets active), keypad powered at 24 V-
Environment
Ambient operating temperature: 32 F to 104 F (0 C to 40 C), 0% to

90% humidity, non-condensing. Indoor use only.
Communications
Connects to QS wired device link on HomeWorksR QS processor.
ESD Protection

Surge Protection

operation, in accordance with IEC 61000-4-5.
Power Failure

Mounting
ArchitraveT Wallbox P/N 241399 (sold separately), 4.4 in (111.76 mm)

tall by 1.25 in (31.75 mm) wide by 2.75 in (69.85 mm) deep.
Wiring
Control wire must be 1 pair 18 AWG (1.0 mm2) IEC PELV / NEC Class
2 for power and 1 pair 22 to 18 AWG (0.5 to 1.0 mm2) IEC PELV /
NEC Class 2 twisted/shielded for data (see Wiring).
Warranty
www.lutron.com/TechnicalDocumentLibrary/Warranty.pdf
Design Features
t All terminal block inputs are over-voltage and
shorts.
t Field-changeable replacement faceplates make
for easy color customization and engraving.
3 | Lutron
www.lutron.com
369669a
08.27.12

Dimensions
in
All dimensions are shown as (mm)
Side View
Front View
Door Wide
HQWA-KP5-DW
Door Narrow
HQWA-KP5-DN
4.5
(114.3)
1.80
(45.72)
1.34
(34.036)
0.196
(4.9784)
1.447
(36.7538)

1.29 in
(31.75 mm)
3.825 in
(97.155 mm)
Faceplate
4.40 in
(111.76 mm)
Keypad
Mounting
Screws
2.75 in
(69.85 mm)
ArchitraveT Wallbox
P/N 241399 (Sold separately)
4 | Lutron
Keypad
www.lutron.com
369669a
08.27.12

Operation
Status LEDs
Keypad Buttons
Raise / Lower Buttons*

Lights increase or decrease in intensity and shades/draperies move
towards the open or close limit.
* Raise / Lower buttons do not have a status LED.
5 | Lutron
www.lutron.com
369669a
08.27.12

Wiring
Wiring Notes
t Keypad wiring may be in a daisychain, star or T-tap conguration.
t The total length of wire on a
HomeWorksR QS wired link is not to
exceed 2000 ft (610 m).
t Up to 100 devices can be connected
to the HomeWorksR QS wired link.
This can include seeTouch keypads
along with other devices as dened
in the HomeWorksR QS software.
t An external power supply may be
the processor link.
Contact Closure Notes
t The contact closure inputs can be used
with either dry contact closures or
ground-referenced solid-state outputs.
t The outputs must stay in the closed
or open states for at least 40 ms in
order to be recognized by the keypad.
IECPELV/NEC Class 2 control wiring:

18 AWG (1.0 mm2)
(0.5 to 1.0 mm2)
1:
2:
3:
4:
Common
24 V- power
MUX
MUX
A: Input 1
B: Input 2
C: Common
(3) 18 AWG
(1.0 mm2)

for power
(0.5 to 1.0 mm2) twisted/
shielded for data
Note:
Use LutronR cable GRX-CBL-346S-500.
6 | Lutron
www.lutron.com
369669a
08.27.12

Colors and Finishes
Architectural Matte Finishes (Metal)
Architectural Metal Finishes (faceplates only)
White
WH
Satin Brass
SB
Bright Brass
BB
Bright Chrome
BC
Clear Anodized
Aluminum
CLA
Black Anodized
Aluminum
BLA
Brass Anodized
Aluminum
BRA
Antique Brass
QB
Antique Bronze
QZ
Satin Chrome
SC
Satin Nickel
SN
Bright Nickel
BN
Gold
AU
t%VFUPQSJOUJOHMJNJUBUJPOT DPMPSTBOE
nishes shown cannot be guaranteed to
perfectly match actual product colors.
t$PMPSDIJQLFZDIBJOTBSFBWBJMBCMF
for more precise color matching:
Architectural Matte Finishes - AM-CK-1
t8IFOPSEFSJOHNFUBMGBDFQMBUFT JUJT
recommended to order the keypad in
Black (BL).
7 | Lutron
www.lutron.com
369668a
09.13.12
HomeWorks QS Wired Signature SeriesTM Keypads

HomeWorksR QS Wired Signature SeriesT
keypads provide homeowners with a simple and
elegant way to operate lights, shades/draperies,
motorized screens, thermostats,and many other
devices.
keypads feature large, easy-to-use buttons, plus
a unique backlit engraving option that makes the
keypads readable any time of the day or night.
Wired Signature SeriesT buttons are rounded,
allowing engraving to be displayed at an upward
angle, increasing readability.
identify each buttons function. The flexible
design of the keypads allows the color,
number of buttons, and button configuration
to be changed by installing a new engraved
Replacement Kit.
All HomeWorksR QS Wired Signature SeriesT
models have two contact closure inputs on the
back of the unit which provide independent
functions from the front buttons. Other options
include raise/lower buttons.
1 | Lutron
www.lutron.com

architectural keypads are available in many
button configurations, shown on the following
page.
369668a
09.13.12

Model Numbers
Base Units
HQWAS-G
Keypad with Green LED status

and backlighting without
Faceplate or Button Kit
HQWAS-B
Keypad with Blue LED status

and backlighting without
Faceplate or Button Kit
LFS-W1B-XX*
Button/Faceplate Kits
LFS-W1B-XX*
1 Button
LFS-W2BS-XX*
2 Button
LFS-W3BS-XX*
3 Button
LFS-W3BSRL-XX*
3 Button, Raise/Lower
LFS-W4BS-XX*
4 Button
LFS-W4S-XX*
4 Scene, Raise/Lower
LFS-W5B-XX*
5 Button
LFS-W5BRL-XX*
LFS-W6B-XX*
6 Button
LFS-W6BRL-XX*
LFS-W7B-XX*
7 Button
LFS-W1RLD-XX*
Dual Group, Raise/Lower (1)
LFS-W2RLD-XX*
LFS-W3BD-XX*
Dual Group
LFS-W2BS-XX*
LFS-W3BSRL-XX* LFS-W4BS-XX*
LFS-W3BS-XX*
LFS-W4S-XX*
LFS-W5B-XX*
LFS-W5BRL-XX*
LFS-W6B-XX*
LFS-W6BRL-XX*
LFS-W7B-XX*
LFS-W1RLD-XX*
Engraveable Replacement Button Kits

RKS-W1B-XX*-E
1 Button
RKS-W2BS-XX*-E
2 Button
RKS-W3BS-XX*-E
3 Button
RKS-W3BSRL-XX*-E
RKS-W4BS-XX*-E
4 Button
RKS-W4S-XX*-E
4 Scene, Raise/Lower
RKS-W5B-XX*-E
5 Button
RKS-W5BRL-XX*-E
RKS-W6B-XX*-E
6 Button
RKS-W6BRL -XX*-E
RKS-W7B-XX*-E
7 Button
RKS-W1RLD-XX*-E
RKS-W2RLD-XX*-E
RKS-W3BD-XX*-E
Dual Group
LFS-W2RLD-XX* LFS-W3BD-XX*
* XX in the model number represents color/finish

code. See colors and finishes at end of document.
2 | Lutron
www.lutron.com
369668a
09.13.12

Specifications
Model Numbers
See page 2 for a complete list of model numbers.
Power
24 V- 30 mA IEC PELV / NEC Class 2
Typical Power
Consumption

presets active), keypad powered at 24 V-
Environment
Ambient operating temperature: 32 F to 104 F (0 C to 40 C), 0% to

90% humidity, non-condensing. Indoor use only.
Communications
Connects to QS wired device link on HomeWorksR QS processor.
ESD Protection

Surge Protection

Power Failure

Mounting
Signature SeriesT Wallbox P/N WBOX-SA1-Q1 (sold separately) 4.45 in

(113.03 mm) tall by 1.55 in (39.37 mm) wide by 2.8 in (71.12 mm) deep.
Wiring
Control wire must be 1 pair 18 AWG (1.0 mm2) IEC PELV / NEC Class
2 for power and 1 pair 22 to 18 AWG (0.5 to 1.0 mm2) IEC PELV /
NEC Class 2 twisted/shielded for data (see Wiring).
Warranty
Design Features
t Green or Blue status LEDs available.
t Backlit button/engraving.
t All terminal block inputs are over-voltage and
shorts.
t Field-changeable Replacement Kits make for
easy customization.
t Use Replacement Kits to change color, button
configuration, or engraving.
3 | Lutron
www.lutron.com
369668a
09.13.12

Dimensions
in
All dimensions are shown as (mm)
Side View
Front View
4.75
(120.65)
1.80
(45.72)
0.175
(45.72)
1.62
(41.15)

1.55 in
(39.37 mm)
Button Bezel
3.85 in
(97.79 mm)
4.45 in
(113.03 mm)
Keypad Mounting Screws
2.8 in
(71.12 mm)
Signature SeriesT Wallbox

P/N WBOX-SA1-Q1 (Sold Separately)
Keypad
Button Kit
Bezel Mounting
Screws
Faceplate
4 | Lutron
www.lutron.com
369668a
09.13.12

Operation
Status LEDs
Keypad Buttons

Lights increase or decrease in intensity and shades/
draperies move towards the open or close limit.
5 | Lutron
www.lutron.com
369668a
09.13.12

Wiring
Wiring Notes
t Keypad wiring may be in a daisychain, star or T-tap configuration.
t The total length of wire on a
HomeWorksR QS wired link is not to
exceed 2000 ft (610 m).
t Up to 100 devices can be connected
to the HomeWorksR QS wired link.
This can include seeTouch keypads
along with other devices as defined
in the HomeWorksR QS software.
t An external power supply may be
the processor link.
Contact Closure Notes
t The contact closure inputs can be used
with either dry contact closures or
ground-referenced solid-state outputs.
t The outputs must stay in the closed
or open states for at least 40 ms in
order to be recognized by the keypad.
IEC PELV / NEC Class 2 control wiring:

18 AWG (1.0 mm2)
(0.5 to 1.0 mm2)
1:
2:
3:
4:
Common
24 V- power
MUX
MUX
A: Input 1
B: Input 2
C: Common
(3) 18 AWG
(1.0 mm2)

for power
(0.5 to 1.0 mm2) twisted/
shielded for data
Note:
Use LutronR cable GRX-CBL-346S-500.
6 | Lutron
www.lutron.com
369668a
09.13.12

Colors and Finishes
Architectural Matte Finishes (Metal)
Architectural Metal Finishes (faceplates only)
White
WH
Satin Brass
SB
Bright Brass
BB
Bright Chrome
BC
Clear Anodized
Aluminum
CLA
Black Anodized
Aluminum
BLA
Brass Anodized
Aluminum
BRA
Antique Brass
QB
Antique Bronze
QZ
Satin Chrome
SC
Satin Nickel
SN
Bright Nickel
BN
Gold
AU
t%VFUPQSJOUJOHMJNJUBUJPOT DPMPSTBOE
finishes shown cannot be guaranteed to
perfectly match actual product colors.
t$PMPSDIJQLFZDIBJOTBSFBWBJMBCMF
for more precise color matching:
Architectural Matte Finishes - AM-CK-1
7 | Lutron
www.lutron.com
03.26.12
369-349-c
HomeWorksR QS RF seeTouchR Tabletop Keypads

HomeWorksR QS RF seeTouchR Tabletop
Keypads provide homeowners with a
simple and elegant way to operate lights,
shades / draperies, motorized screens,
thermostats, and many other devices.
HomeWorksR QS RF seeTouchR Keypads
feature large, easy-to-use buttons, plus a
unique backlit engraving option that makes
the Keypads readable any time of the day or
night. The Keypad buttons are rounded,
making them easier to read.
The versatile design of HomeWorksR QS RF
seeTouchR Tabletop Keypads allows them
to be mounted on a wall, placed on top of
a table, or used as a cordless Keypad. The
Keypads can be powered by a DC adapter
or with 2 AAA batteries. Battery powered
Tabletop Keypads will shut off after a short
period of inactivity in order to conserve
battery power.
HQY*-T5RL
HQY*-T5CRL
HQY*-T10RL
HQY*-T10CRL
HQY*-T15RL
HQY*-T15CRL
*Y in the model number represents

frequency code
Model Numbers
HQR-T5RL-XX*, HQR-T5RL-XX*-BA,
HQK-T5RL-XX, HQM-T5RL-XX*,
HQQ-T5RL-XX*, HQN-T5RL-XX*
5 button with Master

On / Off and
Raise / Lower.
HQR-T5CRL-XX*, HQR-T5CRL-XX*-BA,
HQK-T5CRL-XX*, HQM-T5CRL-XX*,
HQQ-T5CRL-XX*, HQN-T5CRL-XX*
5 button with
Column Raise /
Lower.
LFK-T5RL-XX*-E
Engraved Faceplate
LFK-T5CRL-XX*-E
Engraved Faceplate
Engraved Button Kit
RK-T5RL-XX*-E
Engraved Button Kit
RK-T5CRL-XX*-E
HQK-T10RL-XX*, HQM-T10RL-XX*,

On / Off
and Raise / Lower.
HQR-T10CRL-XX*, HQR-T10CRL-XX*-BA, 10 button with

Column Raise /
Lower.
LFK-T10RL-XX*-E
Engraved Faceplate
LFK-T10CRL-XX*-
Engraved Faceplate
RK-T10RL-XX*-E
Engraved Button Kit
RK-T10CRL-XX*-E
Engraved Button Kit
HQK-T15RL-XX*, HQM-T15RL-XX*,

On / Off and
Raise / Lower.
HQR-T15CRL-XX*, HQR-T15CRL-XX*-BA, 15 button with

Column Raise /
Lower.
LFK-T15RL-XX*-E
Engraved Faceplate
LFK-T15CRL-XX*-
Engraved Faceplate
RK-T15RL-XX*-E
Engraved Button Kit
RK-T15CRL-XX*-E
Engraved Button Kit
* XX in the model number represents color/finish code. See Colors and Finishes at end of document.
1 | Lutron
www.lutron.com
369-349-c
03.26.12

Specifications
Model Numbers
Keypads:
HQR-T5RL-XX*;
HQR-T5RL-XX-BA;
HQM-T5RL-XX*;
HQQ-T5RL-XX*;
HQR-T10RL-XX*; HQR-T10RL-XX-BA;
HQM-T10RL-XX*; HQQ-T10RL-XX*;
HQR-T15RL-XX*; HQR-T15RL-XX-BA;
HQM-T15RL-XX*; HQQ-T15RL-XX*;
HQR-T5CRL-XX*;
HQR-T5CRL-XX-BA;
HQM-T5CRL-XX*; HQQ-T5CRL-XX*;
HQR-T10CRL-XX*; HQR-T10CRL-XX-BA;
HQR-T15CRL-XX*; HQR-T15CRL-XX-BA;
Faceplate/Button Kits:
LFK-T5RL-XX*-E;
RK-T5RL-XX*-E;
RK-T10RL-XX*-E;
LFK-T15RL-XX*-E;
LFK-T5CRL-XX*-E; RK-T5CRL-XX*-E;
RK-T10CRL-XX*-E; LFK-T15CRL-XX*-E;
HQK-T5RL-XX;
HQN-T5RL-XX*;
HQK-T10RL-XX*;
HQN-T10RL-XX*;
HQK-T15RL-XX*;
HQN-T15RL-XX*;
HQK-T5CRL-XX*;
HQN-T5CRL-XX*;
HQK-T10CRL-XX*;
HQN-T10CRL-XX*;
HQK-T15CRL-XX*;
HQN-T15CRL-XX*
LFK-T10RL-XX*-E;
RK-T15RL-XX*-E;
LFK-T10CRL-XX*-E;
RK-T15CRL-XX*-E
Power
DC adapter:
Input: 100-240 V~ 50/60 Hz 6.5 W
Output: 9 V- 300 mA
Battery powered: 2 AAA alkaline (included) 1.5 V each
Typical Power
Consumption
0.6 W
Test conditions: all backlights on medium intensity, nightlight mode
enabled, six LEDs on (two presets active per column), Keypad powered
by a 9 V- adapter (T120-9DC-3).
DC adapter: UL Listed for U.S. and Canada, NOM

Tabletop Keypad: FCC, IC, COFETEL, ANATEL, CE, TRA,
SUPERTEL; SUTEL
Environment

Communications
HomeWorksR QS RF seeTouchR Tabletop Keypads communicate with

the system through Radio Frequency (RF) and must be located within
30 ft (9 m) of an RF hybrid repeater.
ESD Protection

Surge Protection
Tested to withstand surge voltages without damage or loss of operation,

in accordance with IEEE C62.41-1991 Recommended Practice on
Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.
Power Failure
Power failure memory: should power be interrupted, the Keypad will

Mounting
Mounting bracket included for optional wall mount applications.
Warranty
http://www.lutron.com/resiinfo
2 | Lutron
www.lutron.com
369-349-c
03.26.12

Design Features
t
At the press of a single button, lights fade ON

or OFF to desired levels and shades / draperies
open or close to desired positions.
Light levels and shade / drapery positions can

be fine-tuned by pressing and holding the
raise / lower buttons.
Programmable to select whole-house or singleroom preset levels or positions.
3 | Lutron
www.lutron.com
Green LEDs for status and button / engraving

backlighting.
Adjustable backlight intensity.
Prepaid engraving included. Redeemable for

one engraved button kit.
Tabletop Keypad Button action is Wake-up
and Activate - A single button press will
wake up and activate selected button.
369-349-c
03.26.12

Dimensions
(mm)
Keypad Side View
Keypad Front View
1
(25)
3 916
(91)
3 14
(82)
3/4
(18)
Mounting Bracket Side View
Mounting Bracket Front View

3 14
(82)
2
(51)
3/8
(10)
3/8
(10)
UP
2 1516
(74)
5/8
(15)
4 | Lutron
www.lutron.com
369-349-c
03.26.12

Wall Mounting (optional)
Attach mounting bracket to wall using the
supplied wall anchors and screws.
If using the DC adapter, wrap excess cord

around the cord holder and snap Keypad onto
the mounting bracket.
UP
Operation
Status LEDs
Show which Keypad button has been activated.
Keypad Buttons
All On Button
Turn all lights to full on and shades / draperies to open.
All Off Button
Turn all lights off and shades / draperies to closed.
Lights increase or decrease in intensity and
shades / draperies move towards the open or
close limit.
5 | Lutron
www.lutron.com
369-349-c
03.26.12
Colors and Finishes

Keypads and Engraved Button Kits
Engraved Faceplate Kits
Satin Finishes
Satin Finishes
Snow
SW
Midnight
MN
t %VFUPQSJOUJOHMJNJUBUJPOT DPMPSTBOEmOJTIFT
Snow
SW
Midnight
MN
Engraved Faceplate Kits

Metal Finishes
When ordering metal faceplates, it is recommended to
order the keypad in Midnight (MN).
Satin Finishes SC-CK-1

Architectural Metal Finishes AMTL-CK-1
6 | Lutron
www.lutron.com
Satin Brass
SB
Bright Brass
BB
Bright Chrome
BC
Clear Anodized
Aluminum
CLA
Black Anodized
Aluminum
BLA
Brass Anodized
Aluminum
BRA
Antique Brass
QB
Antique Bronze
QZ
Satin Chrome
SC
Satin Nickel
SN
Bright Nickel
BN
Pico
Wireless Control and Pedestal
Control Specification
369-408b 1 04.25.11
Pico Wireless Control and Pedestal

(for regions other than North America)
The Pico wireless control is a flexible and easy to use
device that allows the user to control Lutron wireless
load control devices. It can also be configured as a
scene or zone control in GRAFIK EyeR QS wireless and
Guestroom Solutions applications. The Pico wireless
control can function as a tabletop control on a pedestal or
as a lightweight, handheld remote. The battery operated
Pico wireless control requires no external power or
communication wiring.
Features
Provides control for the following:
Sivoia QS wireless systems
t GRAFIK Eye QS wireless systems
t Rania wireless systems
t Energi Savr NodeTM and Quantum systems, through
the use of a QS sensor module
t Guestroom Solutions
t Control available in a variety of button marking options.
t Easy reconfiguration for use as a handheld remote or
table top control, with the use of the optional pedestal
(sold separately).
t Tabletop pedestal available in a single and dual
configuration in both black and white.
t Battery powered Pico wireless control requires no wiring.
t Battery included with Pico wireless control.
t Can provide control to blinds, curtains or lighting
devices within a 9 m (30 ft) range.
t For wall mount applications, inquire with Lutrons
Customer Service at www.lutron.com
t
Job Name:
Job Number:
S P E C I F I C AT I O N S U B M I T TA L
Model Numbers:
Pico wireless control
Page: 1
Pico
369-408b 2 04.25.11
Specifications
Mounting Considerations
Regulatory
t
Lutron Quality Systems registered to ISO 9001.2008.

t
t
t
t
t
t
QSRKPCE - Marked (European Union)

TRA Type Approved (United Arab Emirates)
CITC Type Approved (Kingdom of Saudi Arabia)
QSRMP- (-2, -2R, and -3R only)
SRRC Type Approved (Mainland China)
IDA Registered (Singapore)
QSRNPWPC Type Approved (India)
Environment
t
t
t
Power
t
t
Mounting of any RF devices on or in close proximity

to a metal surface will drastically reduce the effective
range of radio signal transmission or reception.
All RF devices must be mounted on non-conductive
materials to ensure proper performance.
Ambient operating temperature:

0 C to 60 C (32 F to 140 F)
Maximum 90% non-condensing relative humidity
Indoor use only
Warranty
Operating Voltage 3 V
(1) CR2032 Battery (included)
1 year limited warranty
Key Design Features

t
Configurable to be used as a handheld remote or

table top control.
Optional pedestal is available in a single configuration
for converting the Pico wireless control to a tabletop
control. The pedestal is also available in a dual
configuration for two Pico wireless controls. Pedestals
sold separately.
System Communication and Capacity

t
Pico wireless controls communicate using Radio

Frequency (RF) at 868 MHz, limited 868 MHz, or
865 MHz FM.
Thousands of system addresses prevent interference
between systems.
Pico wireless controls can be assigned to control
blinds, curtains or lighting devices that are within a
9 m (30 ft) range.
Can be configured as a scene or zone control in
GRAFIK EyeR QS wireless and Guestroom Solutions
applications.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page: 2
Pico
369-408b 3 04.25.11
Model Number
Frequency/Channel Code
Button Configuration Code
Color Code
Button Marking Code (see next page)
QSRXP-XX-TXX-IXX
Frequency/Channel Codes:
Code
K 868.1 - 869.8 MHz
M 868.1 - 868.5 MHz (-2, -2R, and -3R only)
N 865.5 - 866.5 MHz
Contact Lutrons Customer Service at www.lutron.com for

frequency / channel code compatibility with your particular
geographic region, and for integrating with other LutronR
lighting and shading products.
Button Configuration Codes:

Button Configuration
2 Button
2 Button with Raise/Lower
3 Button
2 Button
(2)
Code
2
2R
3 (not available with QSRMP-)
3R
2 Button with 3 Button

Raise/Lower (3)
(2R)
3 Button with
Raise/Lower
(3R)
Color Codes:
Color
Artic White
Black
Code
AW
BL
Continued on next page...
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page: 3
Pico
369-408b 4 04.25.11
Model Number (continued)

Frequency/Channel Code
Button Configuration Code
Color Code
Button Marking Code
QSRXP-XX-TXX-IXX
Button Marking Codes:

Button Marking Options
Light
Roller Blind
Curtain
Code
03
04
13
2 Button
Light
(03)
Roller Blind
(04)
Curtain
(13)
Light
(03)
Roller Blind
(04)
3 Button (not available with QSRMP-)
Light
(03)
Light
(03)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Roller Blind
(04)
Curtain
(13)
Model Numbers:
Roller Blind
(04)
Curtain
(13)
Curtain
(13)
Page: 4
Pico
369-408b 5 04.25.11
Operation
Top Button
LED
Flashes when a button
on the Pico wireless
control is pressed.
Preset Button
(3 & 3R models only)
Tap once:
Devices go to preset
levels / positions. Activates
scene 16 when used in scene
mode with GRAFIK EyeR
QS wireless and Guestroom
Solutions applications.
Press and hold:

To save new preset level or
position, press and hold until the
LED stops flashing (6 seconds).
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Lights brighten to full intensity and shades /

draperies go to open limit. Activates
scene 1 when used in scene mode with
GRAFIK Eye QS wireless and Guestroom
Solutions applications.
Raise Button
(2R & 3R models only)

Lights increase in intensity and shades /
draperies move towards open limit.
Lower Button
(2R & 3R models only)

Lights decrease in intensity and shades /
draperies move towards close limit.
Bottom Button
Lights dim to off and shades /draperies go
to close limit. Activates OFF scene when
used in scene mode with GRAFIK Eye QS
wireless and Guestroom Solutions
applications.
Page: 5
Pico
369-408b 6 04.25.11
Pico Pedestal Model Number
Pedestals sold separately. Available in gloss finish only.

QSAPEDX-XX
Color Code
Capacity Code
Capacity
Single
Dual
Capacity Code
1
2
Color
White
Black
Color Code
WH
BL
Dimensions
Measurements shown as: mm

(in)
Pico Wireless Control
66
(2.6)
8
(0.31)
33
(1.30)
Single Pedestal
Dual Pedestal
Pedestals sold separately.
Pedestals sold separately.

37
(1.46)
37
(1.46)
75
(2.95)
45
(1.77)
Job Name:
Job Number:
75
(2.95)
81
(3.19)
Model Numbers:
Page: 6
369-394b
01.19.12
HomeWorksR QS Dynamic Keypads

Dynamic Keypads provide the functionality of multiple
LutronR keypads in an easy-to-navigate, intuitive
arrangement. Dynamic Keypads help reduce wall
clutter by combining control of several functions
into a convenient, single point of control for multiple
systems including: lights, shades/draperies, and HVAC
equipment.
Dynamic Keypads are easy to set up and are simple and
intuitive to program and adjust to your specific needs.
The display screen clearly displays the system and
device status. The intuitive user interface combines the
cognition of a seeTouchR keypad with the flexibility of an
LCD screen touch interface.
Dynamic Keypads combine superior aesthetics with
energy savings. On screen button labeling for the
Dynamic Keypad is done automatically while you
program the system.
Model Number
HQ-J-DK420-XX* Dynamic Keypad (434 MHz / wired)
HQ-W-DK420-XX* Dynamic Keypad ( wired only)
* XX in the model number represents color/finish code.
See Colors and Finishes below.
Colors and Finishes

Dynamic Keypads are available in 2 colors.
White
WH
www.lutron.com
Black
BL
Lutron | 1
369-394b
01.19.12

Specifications
Model Number
HQ-J-DK420-XX, HQ-W-DK420-XX
Power
24 V
Typical Power
Consumption
1.5 W; 6 Power Draw Units* (PDUs). Test conditions: LCD backlight on at

80%, buttons backlight on at 28%, while in use.
*For more information about PDUs, please see the HomeWorksR QS Wiring and
Power Guidelines document on the HomeWorksR QS Resource Website.
UL, cUL, FCC, IC, SCT, CE, CTICK
Environment

0%-90% humidity, non-condensing. Indoor use only.
Communications
Dynamic Keypads communicate with the system through the Wired QS Link
or through Radio Frequency (RF). When using RF (HQ-J models only), the
Dynamic Keypad must be located within 30 ft (9 m) of a repeater. System devices
operate on frequencies between 431.0 MHz and 437.0 MHz. To improve system
commissioning time, Lutron recommends no more than ten Dynamic Keypads
per RF Link. QS Link wired installations offer faster commissioning time.
ESD Protection

Surge Protection

in accordance with IEEE C62.41-1991 Recommended Practice on Surge
Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.
Power Failure
Power failure memory: should power be interrupted, the Dynamic Keypad

will return to its previous state when power is restored.
Mounting
The Dynamic Keypad must be installed in a flat, hollow wall (i.e. not concrete
wall). If gap between wall and mounting frame is larger than the thickness of a
credit card, wall must be repaired to eliminate gap. Otherwise, damage to the
Keypad may result. Custom mounting frame included. Minimum wall depth:
2 14 in (57 mm). Wall thickness range: 1/4 in (6 mm) to 1 in (25 mm).
Wiring
RF: Two 18 AWG (1.0 mm2) IEC PELV / NECR Class 2 cable.
Wired: Two 22 AWG (0.5 mm2) twisted shielded and two 18 AWG (1.0 mm2)
IEC PELV / NECR Class 2 cable. Use LutronR cable GRX-CBL-346S.
Warranty

www.lutron.com/TechnicalDocumentLibrary/HomeWorks_Warranty.pdf
113 mA
Design Features
t
Simple, intuitive control of lights,

shades / draperies, compatible HVAC equipment,
and Audio / Visual equipment from a single
location.
The capacitive touch interface provides a rich
user experience and flexible control for a single
room or an entire home.
Use individual pages for simple control of
lighting, shades / draperies, and temperature in
rooms throughout the home.
Wireless or wired installation.
2 | Lutron
t
t
Three hard buttons provide instant access to

frequently used lighting functions.
Ensures reliable system control through Lutrons
patented Clear ConnectTM RF technology (HQ-J
models only) or through wired QS link.
Slim 0.5 in (13 mm) profile off the wall.
Reduces wall clutter by combining multiple
controls into one control.
Create or modify on-screen buttons easily
through system Design and Programming Utility.
24/7 Technical Support800.523.9466
369-394b
01.19.12

Dimensions
(mm)
Front View
Mounting Hole
Side View
1/4 (6) to 1 (25)
5 18
(130)
4 14
(108)
1 58
(41)
2 8
(60)
3
2 14
(57)
1/2
(13)
Note: The Dynamic Keypad must

be installed in a flat, hollow wall
(i.e. not concrete wall). If gap
between wall and mounting frame
is larger than the thickness of a
credit card, wall must be repaired
to eliminate gap. Otherwise,
damage to the Keypad may result.
Wall
Mounting
Hole
www.lutron.com
Mounting
Screws
Mounting
Frame
Dynamic
Keypad
Lutron | 3
369-394b
01.19.12

Operation
Front View
Lights
Control and monitor lighting
scenes or individual lights in
multiple areas of the home.
Shades
Control and monitor individual or
groups of shades / draperies in
multiple areas of the home.
Temperature
View the current temperature
and adjust set point, system
mode, and schedule.
Audio / Video
Access basic controls or A / V
equipment by integrating with a
third-party A / V control processor.
Favorites
Quickly access most frequently
used system functions.
Energy
View current energy saving
mode and adjust Green
button settings.
Backlit Hard Buttons

Provide instant access to
frequently used lighting functions.
Note: Backlighting is adjustable
and can be programmed to turn
off when in standby mode.
Connections
Rear View
Mini-B USB
For firmware upgrade.
MUX
MUX
+24 V
9D10
COM
Control Link Wiring

MUX
MUX
+24 VCOM
PELV/Class 2
Model | Modelo | Modle :
HQ-J-DK420
24 V
113 mA
4 | Lutron
01.19.12
369-394b

Wiring Diagram
L(+) N(-)
120 - 240 V
Input / Entrada / Entre
QS Shades
24 V
Output / Salida / Sortie
HomeWorksR QS
Processor
QSPS-DH-1-60
22.5 - 25 V
Power
Supply
Dynamic
Keypads
seeTouch
Keypads
QS
Links
QS Shade Power Panel

(Smart Power Panel)
(HQ-J-DK420-XX only)
HomeWorksR QS
Hybrid Repeater
Hybrid Repeater
Repeater Status
1
Communication
RF
Setup
Wired
seeTouch
Keypads
Dynamic
Keypads
Dynamic
Keypad
QS Single Output
Power Supply
Activate
Test
Add
Test
Power Repeater Link

COM
24 V
MUX
MUX
9V
Note: To improve system commissioning time, Lutron recommends no more than ten Dynamic Keypads
per RF Link. QS Link wired installations offer faster commissioning time.
www.lutron.com
Lutron | 5
Main Units
369-540a
10.28.11
GRAFIK EyeR QS
The GRAFIK EyeR QS controls up to six zones
of light. The GRAFIK EyeR QS will operate the
following sources with a continuous Square Law
dimming curve or on a full conduction non-dim
basis:
t*ODBOEFTDFOU
Open
Preset
Close
t5VOHTUFO)BMPHFO
4
Off
t&MFDUSPOJD-PX7PMUBHF &-7
4XJUDIFE
t.BHOFUJD-PX7PMUBHF .-7
5SBOTGPSNFS
LUTRON
GRAFIK EyeR QS
t.FUBM)BMJEF)JHI1SFTTVSF4PEJVN4XJUDIFE
t/FPO$PME$BUIPEF
t-VUSPO5V8JSFR Electronic Fluorescent Dimming
Ballasts
The GRAFIK EyeR QS can be configured for wired
24MJOL
PSXJSFMFTT 3'MJOL
DPNNVOJDBUJPO
Model Numbers
QSGRJ-3P-XX*
QSGRJ-4P-XX*
QSGRJ-6P-XX*
QSGRJ-3P-1XX*
QSGRJ-3P-TXX*
QSGRJ-3P-1TXX*
QSGRJ-4P-1XX*
QSGRJ-4P-TXX*
QSGRJ-4P-1TXX*
QSGRJ-6P-1XX*
QSGRJ-6P-TXX*
QSGRJ-6P-1TXX*
QSGFP-
3 zones, 120-240 V ~
4 zones, 120-240 V ~
6 zones, 120-240 V ~
3 zones, 1 extra button column, 120-240 V ~
3 zones, translucent cover, 120-240 V ~
3 zones, 1 extra button column, translucent cover, 120-240 V ~
Faceplate kit
* XX in the model number represents color/finish code. See Colors and Finishes at the end of
document.
1 | Lutron
www.lutron.com
369-540a
10.28.11
Specifications
Model Numbers
See previous page
Power
120 V~, 220240 V~ OPO$&

)[
Typical Power
Consumption
8 1PXFS%SBX6OJUT 1%6T

The GRAFIK EyeR QS is not powered from the link, Pin 2
should not be connected.5ZQJDBM1PXFS$POTVNQUJPOUFTU
conditions: all loads off, one button LED on.
6- $4" '$$ *$ 4$5 /0. $&$ 5JUMF
Environment
"NCJFOUPQFSBUJOHUFNQFSBUVSF'UP' $UP$
Ambient operating humidity: 0-90% humidity, non-condensing.

Indoor use only.
Communications
-PXWPMUBHFUZQF*&$1&-7/&$R$MBTTXJSJOHDPOOFDUT
GRAFIK EyeR QS to processor. &BDI)PNF8PSLTR QS processor
has two configurable links. GRAFIK EyeR QS communicates with
the processor via the QS link or RF link.
ESD Protection
Tested to withstand electrostatic discharge without damage or

NFNPSZMPTT JOBDDPSEBODFXJUI*&$
Surge Protection

PQFSBUJPO JOBDDPSEBODFXJUI*&&&$3FDPNNFOEFE
1SBDUJDFPO4VSHF7PMUBHFTJO-PX7PMUBHF"$1PXFS$JSDVJUT
1SPWJEFTZFBSQPXFSGBJMVSFNFNPSZ"VUPNBUJDBMMZSFTUPSFT
lighting to levels prior to power interruption.
Power Failure
Mounting
*OTUBMMTJOBTUBOEBSEHBOH64XBMMCPY `JO NN

EFFQ
is strongly recommended. Always allow at least 4`JO NN

clearance above and below the control unit to provide adequate
space for cooling8BMMQMBUFTOBQTPOXJUIOPWJTJCMFNFBOT
of attachment.
Line Voltage Wiring
&BDIMJOFWPMUBHFUFSNJOBMDBOBDDFQUPOF"8( NN2
XJSF
IEC PELV/NEC Class 2

QS System Low-Voltage
Wiring
4ZTUFNDPNNVOJDBUJPOVTFTMPXWPMUBHFXJSJOH8JSJOHDBOCF
EBJTZDIBJOFEPS5UBQQFE8JSJOHNVTUCFSVOTFQBSBUFMZGSPN
line/mains voltage.
*&$1&-7/&$$MBTTXJSJOHMJOLSFRVJSFT5XP"8(
NN2
DPOEVDUPSTGPSDPOUSPMQPXFS0OFUXJTUFE TIJFMEFE
QBJSPG"8( NN2
GPSEBUBMJOL"WBJMBCMFGSPN-VUSPO
1/(39$#-4DIFDLDPNQBUJCJMJUZJOZPVSBSFB
5PUBMMFOHUIPGDPOUSPMMJOLNVTUOPUFYDFFEGU N

Warranty
:FBS-JNJUFE8BSSBOUZIUUQXXXMVUSPODPNSFTJJOGP
Design Features
t $POUBJOT35*44&RVJQQFE technology to
compensate in real time for incoming line
WPMUBHFWBSJBUJPOT/PWJTJCMFGMJDLFSXJUI+/-2%
DIBOHFJO3.4WPMUBHFDZDMFBOE+/-2%
change in frequency/second.
2 | Lutron
www.lutron.com
t #VUUPOTBSFQSPHSBNNBCMFUPTFMFDUTDFOFPS
room preset levels or positions
t 8BMMQMBUFTOBQTPOXJUIOPWJTJCMFNFBOTPG
attachment.
t $BOCFDPOGJHVSFEGPSXJSFE 24MJOL
PSXJSFMFTT
3'MJOL
DPNNVOJDBUJPO
369-540a
10.28.11
Dimensions
%JNFOTJPOTTIPXOBTJO NN
94 in
NN
4JO
NN
2 in
NN
4$JO
NN
Side View
Front View
'JUTJOUPBHBOH64CBDLCPY JO NN
EFFQ-VUSPO1/
Mounting
Standard 4-gang
64XBMMCPY
JO NN

deep
.PVOUJOH
TDSFXT
)JOHFE
top lid
GRAFIK Eye
QS control unit
)JOHFE
bottom lid
3 | Lutron
www.lutron.com
369-540a
10.28.11
Load Capacity
Unit Capacity (watts)
Magnetic Low-Voltage
Zone Capacity (watts)
Magnetic Low-Voltage
120 V~ 50/60 Hz
220 240 V~ 50/60 Hz
8
8
7"8
7"8
o8
o8
o7"o8
o7"o8
Load Type Notes

t 8IFOEJNNJOH&MFDUSPOJD-PX7PMUBHF &-7
MJHIUJOH BO&-7JOUFSGBDF TVDIBT1)1.1"%78)

must be used with the control unit. Before installing an ELV light source, verify with the manufacturer
that their transformer can be dimmed.
t 8IFODPOUSPMMJOHo7MPBET B5FO7PMU*OUFSGBDF (3957*
NVTUCFVTFEXJUIUIFDPOUSPMVOJU
t /PUBMM[POFTNVTUCFDPOOFDUFEIPXFWFS connected zones must have a minimum load as
specified above.
t .BYJNVNUPUBMMJHIUJOHMPBEGPSB.BHOFUJD-PX7PMUBHF .-7
WBSJFTCZJOQVUWPMUBHF
(specified above):
120 V~7"8
220240 V~7"8
t /P[POFNBZCFMPBEFEXJUINPSFUIBOUIFDBQBDJUZTQFDJmFEBCPWF'PSIJHIFSXBUUBHFBQQMJDBUJPOT
or for 277 V~ applications, use LutronQPXFSNPEVMF1)1.1" 1)1.8#9 1)1.1"%7
1)1.48 PS1)1.8#9%7
A B C
1 2
24 V
P/N 500-13826 Rev. A
8 mm
.3125 in
150 mA
Power and Load Wiring
8 mm
.3125 in
To Load 1
To Load 2
To Load 3
To Load 4
To Load 5
To Load 6
N L
%JTUSJCVUJPO1BOFM
4 | Lutron
: Ground
N: Neutral
L: Hot/Live
www.lutron.com
369-540a
10.28.11
A B C
1 2
24 V
P/N 500-13826 Rev.

Rev A
8 mm
.3125 in
150 mA
QS Link Wiring
'SPN)PNF8PSLTR QS
processor
%BUBMJOLUXJTUFE TIJFMEFEQBJS"8(
UP"8( NN2 to 0.75 mm2
DO NOT CONNECT PIN 2
*&$1&-7/&$R$MBTTDPOUSPMXJSJOH
"8( NN2
)PNF8PSLTR QS Link
GU N
NBYJNVNUPUBM
wire length per run
1JOEPFTOPUHFUDPOOFDUFEUPUIF(3"'*,&ZFR QS it does not

require link power
To additional QS
devices
RF Link
)PNF8PSLTR24)ZCSJE3FQFBUFS
GRAFIK EyeR QS
GRAFIK EyeR QS
GRAFIK EyeR QS
GU N
maximum
Hybrid Repeater
Hybrid Repeater
Repeater Status
1
Wired
Activate
Setup
Add
Add
9V
5 | Lutron
GU N
maximum
www.lutron.com
Wired
Activate
Add
GU N
maximum
GU N
maximum
)PNF8PSLTR QS RF Link
GU N
NBYJNVN
wire length per run
24 V
Test
Test
Power Repeater Link

COM
RF
Setup
MUX
Communication
Wired
Activate
MUX
24 V
9V
COM
MUX
24 V
Repeater Status
3
Power Repeater Link

MUX
COM
MUX
MUX
RF
Test
Test
Power Repeater Link

9V
Communication
RF
Test
Test
Hybrid Repeater
Repeater Status
3
Communication
Setup
)PNF8PSLTR QS RF Link
GU N
NBYJNVN
wire length per run
369-540a
10.28.11
Colors and Finishes

Architectural Matte Finishes (standard)
Architectural Metal Finishes (Faceplate kit only)
8IJUF
8)
Ivory
IV
Satin Brass
SB
Bright Brass
BB
#SJHIU$ISPNF
#$
Almond
AL
Light
Almond
LA
$MFBS"OPEJ[FE
Aluminum
$-"
Black Anodized
Aluminum
BLA
Brass Anodized
Aluminum
BRA
Gray
GR
Brown
BR
Antique Brass
QB
Antique Bronze
QZ
4BUJO$ISPNF
4$
Black
BL
Beige
BE
4BUJO/JDLFM
4/
#SJHIU/JDLFM
#/
t %
"SDIJUFDUVSBM.BUUF'JOJTIFT".$,
"SDIJUFDUVSBM.FUBM'JOJTIFT".5-$,
6 | Lutron
www.lutron.com
369-540a
10.28.11
Colors and Finishes (continued)

Satin Finishes (Faceplate kit only)
)PU
)5
.FSMPU
.3
1MVN
1-
Turquoise
TQ
Taupe
51
Eggshell
ES
Biscuit
BI
Snow
48
1BMMBEJVN
1%
.JEOJHIU
./
Sienna
SI
Terracotta
5$
Greenbriar
GB
Bluestone
BG
.PDIB4UPOF
.4
Goldstone
GS
Desert Stone
DS
Stone
ST
Limestone
LS
t %
VFUPQSJOUJOHMJNJUBUJPOT DPMPSTBOEmOJTIFTTIPXODBOOPUCF
guaranteed to perfectly match actual product colors.
t $PMPSDIJQLFZDIBJOTBSFBWBJMBCMFGPSNPSFQSFDJTFDPMPS
matching:
4BUJO'JOJTIFT4$$,
7 | Lutron
www.lutron.com
Wireless Control Unit (230 V
CE)
Preset Dimming Controls

369315 Rev. A 1 03.07.11
GRAFIK Eye QS Wireless Control Unit (230 V
CE)
1
2
3
4
LUTRON
Description
GRAFIK Eye QS Wireless is the premier energy-saving light and window
treatment control. GRAFIK Eye QS includes an astronomic timeclock, intuitive
lighting presets, and direct window treatment control. Now with wireless
technology, you can use the GRAFIK Eye QS Wireless to seamlessly integrate
with a variety of Lutron wireless products and systems, including Radio Powr
SavrTM occupancy, vacancy, and daylight sensors, Sivoia QS Wireless window
treatments, Pico wireless control, and other GRAFIK Eye wireless products.
Additionally, the GRAFIK Eye QS Wireless is compatible with all Lutron wired
QS products and systems.
GRAFIK Eye QS Wireless is compatible with Quantum.
Mechanical Dimensions
239 mm
(94 in)
10 mm
(4 in)
51 mm
(2 in)
119 mm
(4$ in)
Front View
Side View
Fits into a 4-gang U.S. backbox, 89 mm (3.5 in) deep; Lutron P/N 241-400
S PEC IFICA TION SUB M IT TA L
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 1
CE)
369315 Rev. A 2 03.07.11
System Topologies
The GRAFIK Eye QS Wireless can be specified in three different system topologies. Examples of each are shown below.
Example of Wired System
Wired QS link
GRAFIK Eye QS
wireless
seeTouch
QS
LUTRON
seeTouch
QS
QSE-CI-NWK-E
QS Sensor
Module
LUTRON
0,5 Nm
24 V
MUX
8 mm
Energi Savr
NodeTM
Quantum
(optional)
Wired
occupancy
sensor
Example of GRAFIK Eye-centric

Wireless System
Example of Mixed GRAFIK Eye-centric

Wired/Wireless System
10 m
(30 ft)
wireless
range;
20 m
(60 ft)
in open air
GRAFIK Eye QS
wireless
Wireless
Sivoia QS
shade
LUTRON
Wired QS link
Pico
wireless
control
GRAFIK Eye QS
wireless
GRAFIK Eye QS
wireless
LUTRON
Wireless
Sivoia QS
shade
Wireless
occupancy
sensor
Wireless
daylight
sensor
Job Number:
LUTRON
Pico
wireless
control
Wired
occupancy
sensor
Wireless
occupancy
sensor
Wireless
daylight
sensor
Job Name:
seeTouch seeTouch
QS
QS
Model Numbers:
DALI 1 DALI 2
COM
IR
Occ
MUX
230 V~ 50/60 Hz 100 mA

www.lutron.com
+44.(0)20.7680.4481
Power
N
TM
QSNE-2DAL-D
Test
L
Com
IR
Occ
20 V
Com
Photo
Photo
Energi Savr Node QS
Hi Temp
Sivoia QS
shade
Ethernet
QS
3
20 V
GRAFIK Eye QS
wireless
Page 1
CE)

369315 Rev. A 3 03.07.11
1
2
3
4
LUTRON
Note: Symbol-based Engraving (-SGN) shown.
OK
1
2
3
4
Optional window Zone

treatment control control
keypad
Infrared USB Type Scene

mini B
control
receiver
keypad
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Info
screen
Features
t -VUSPOTQSPQSJFUBSZ$MFBS$POOFDUTM RF
technology. Operates in 868 MHz band.
t 1VTICVUUPOSFDBMMPGGPVSQSFTFUMJHIUJOH
scenes, plus Off.
t 5XFMWF
BEEJUJPOBMTDFOFTBDDFTTJCMF
through other QS devices, such as seeTouch
QS wallstations.
t 0QUJPOBMJOUFHSBUFEXJOEPXUSFBUNFOUDPOUSPM
buttons, which can also be added to the unit
after installation.
t .BTUFSPWFSSJEFCVUUPOTUPSBJTFBOEMPXFSBMM
lights.
t "MMPXTTFUVQPGMJHIUJOHTDFOFTBOEXJOEPX
treatment presets using buttons on the control
unit.
t #VJMUJOJOGSBSFE *3
SFDFJWFS
t &YUFSOBM*3DPOOFDUJPO
t #VJMUJOBTUSPOPNJDUJNFDMPDL
t *OGPTDSFFOTIPXT[POFMJHIUMFWFMQFSDFOUBHF
energy savings, zone labeling, and
programming.
t -PDLPVUPQUJPOQSFWFOUTBDDJEFOUBMDIBOHFT
t 0OFPDDVQBODZTFOTPSJOQVUBOE7
power for occupancy sensor.
t 24DPNNVOJDBUJPOMJOLGPSTFBNMFTT
integration of lights, motorised window
treatments, wallstations, and integration
interfaces.
t $PNQBUJCMFXJUIBMM-VUSPO24TZTUFN
components.
t 8JSFMFTTDPNNVOJDBUJPOGPSTFBNMFTT
integration with a variety of Lutron wireless
products and systems, including Radio
PowrSavrTM occupancy and vacancy sensors,
Sivoia QS wireless window treatments, Pico
wireless control, and other GRAFIK Eye
QS wireless products.
t #BDLMJUCVUUPOTXJUIFOHSBWJOHNBLFVOJUFBTZ
to locate and operate.
t "WBJMBCMFJOBWBSJFUZPGDPMPVSTBOEGJOJTIFT
Page 1
CE)

369315 Rev. A 4 03.07.11
Specifications
Input Power
t 7
50 Hz
Lighting Sources/Load Types
Controls the following lighting sources with a smooth,
continuous square law dimming curve or on a full
conduction non-dim basis:
t *ODBOEFTDFOU
t )BMPHFO
t .BHOFUJDMPXWPMUBHFUSBOTGPSNFS
t /FPOBOEDPMEDBUIPEF
t /POEJN JODBOEFTDFOU NBHOFUJDMPXWPMUBHF PSOFPO
cold cathode)
conduction non-dim basis through separate power
interfaces:
t &MFDUSPOJDMPXWPMUBHFUSBOTGPSNFS
t /POEJN
t 7
Key Design Features
t 3'NFFUT*&$
t -JHIUOJOHTUSJLFQSPUFDUJPONFFUT"/4**&&&TUBOEBSE
62.41-1980. Can withstand voltage surges of up to
and current surges of up to 3 000 A.
6 000 V
t 5FTUFEUPXJUITUBOEL7FMFDUSPTUBUJDEJTDIBSHFXJUIPVU
damage or memory loss.
t 35*44TM-equipped: Compensates in real time for
incoming line voltage variations (no visible flicker with
+/-2% change in RMS voltage per cycle, and +/-2% Hz
change in frequency per second).
t 1PXFSGBJMVSFNFNPSZSFUBJOTQSPHSBNNJOHBOEMJHIUMFWFM
settings for up to 10 years in the event of a power loss.
t 5IF(3"'*,&ZF QS supplies 3 Power Draw Units
(PDUs) on the QS link.
For complete information, see Power Draw Units on the
QS Link, Lutron PN 369405
t 'BDFQMBUFJTIJOHFEBUUIFUPQBOECPUUPN BOETUBZT
open at 180 for ease of access.
Environment
t UP$ UP'
t 3FMBUJWFIVNJEJUZMFTTUIBOOPODPOEFOTJOH
Compliance
t $&
S PEC IFIC AT IO N SUBM IT TAL
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Scene and Shade Buttons

t -BSHF SPVOEFECVUUPOTBSFFBTZUPVTF
t #BDLMJUCVUUPOTXJUIPQUJPOBMFOHSBWJOHNBLFJUFBTZ
to find and to operate the control unit in low light
conditions (backlight can be disabled).
t 0QUJPOBMCVUUPOFOHSBWJOHJTBOHMFEVQUPUIFFZFGPS
easy reading.
t 1SFEFGJOFEMBCFMTUJDLFSTBSFJODMVEFEGPSGJFMEMBCFMJOH
t QSFTFUMJHIUJOHTDFOFT QMVT0GG BSFBDDFTTJCMFGSPN
the front of the control unit.
t BEEJUJPOBMTDFOFTBSFTUPSFEJOUIFDPOUSPMVOJUBOE
are accessible from seeTouch QS wallstations and
QS interfaces.
t -JHIUMFWFMTGBEFTNPPUIMZCFUXFFOTDFOFT'BEFUJNF
can be set differently for each scene: 0 to 59 seconds,
or 1 to 60 minutes. Maximum fade time from Off is
3 seconds.
Shade Control
t 5IFGRAFIK Eye QS can include up to 3 shade button
columns. Each column has backlit open, preset, close,
and raise/lower buttons.
t &BDITIBEFCVUUPODPMVNODBOCFQSPHSBNNFEUP
operate one shade or a group of shades. (Shades may
be assigned to more than one shade button column).
t 'BDFQMBUFTBSFBWBJMBCMFXJUI BOETIBEFCVUUPO
columns.
Wireless shade limitations:
t "DDFTTUPUIF4JWPJB QS Wireless electronic drive unit
(EDU) is required to associate shades with the GRAFIK
Eye QS and set their raise/lower limits.
t 8JSFEBOEXJSFMFTTTIBEFTNBZOPUCFQSPHSBNNFE
into the same shade button column; however, both
may be used on the same GRAFIK Eye QS control unit.
t 4DFOFDPNNBOETUIBUBGGFDUXJSFMFTTTIBEFTBDSPTT
multiple shade button columns will have a 1-second
delay from column to column. This does not occur in
RadioRA 2 systems.
Zone Control
t &BDI[POFIBTBEFEJDBUFESBJTFBOEMPXFSCVUUPOUP
adjust the zone.
t &BDI[POFIBTBEFEJDBUFE-&%CBSHSBQIGPSMFWFM
status. Percentage of light level and energy saved is
displayed on the info screen.
t "MM[POFJOGPSNBUJPOIBTCMVFCBDLMJU-&%T#BDLMJHIU
turns off when idle for 30 seconds.
Page 1
CE)

369315 Rev. A 5 03.07.11
Specifications
Info Screen
t 0-&% PSHBOJD-&%
TDSFFOJTWJFXBCMFGSPNBMMBOHMFT
t 4DSFFOUVSOTPGGXIFOJEMFGPSTFDPOET
t 1SPHSBNNBCMF[POFMBCFMT
t 1SPHSBNNBCMFTDFOFMBCFMT
t 4UBUVTPGSFBMUJNF[POFQFSDFOUBHFBOEFOFSHZTBWJOHT
t 1SPHSBNNBCMFUJNFDMPDLTDIFEVMFT
t 1SPHSBNNBCMFXJOEPXUSFBUNFOUMBCFMT
Astronomic Timeclock
t *OUFHSBMUPBMMVOJUT
t EBJMZTDIFEVMFTBWBJMBCMF
t 0OFBWBJMBCMFIPMJEBZTDIFEVMFJTQSPHSBNNBCMFCZEBUF
up to one year in advance.
t FWFOUTQFSEBZNBYJNVN
t 5JNFDMPDLFWFOUTBSFQSPHSBNNBCMFUPDPOUSPMTDFOFT
that affect any Energi Savr NodeTM unit connected on the
QS link without changing the local scene on the GRAFIK
Eye QS.
t "TUSPOPNJDUJNFTBSFQSPHSBNNBCMFCZJOUFHSBMDJUZ
database or by entering latitude and longitude. Times
automatically adjust throughout the year based on
location.
t "VUPNBUJDBMMZBEKVTUTGPS%BZMJHIU4BWJOH5JNF %45

adjusted for the new dates; DST is programmable.
t -PDBMUJNFDMPDLFWFOUTDBOBDUJWBUFBOZPGUIFGPMMPXJOH
features:
- Scenes 1 to 16 and Off
- Any available window treatment presets
- Start and End afterhours mode
- Enable and Disable daylighting for all zones/groups
- Enable and Disable occupancy for occupancy/vacancy
sensors
- Enable and Disable occupied events for all occupancy
sensors
System Communications and Capacities
t -PXWPMUBHFUZQF*&$1&-7/&$ Class 2 wiring
connects control units, wallstations, motorised window
treatments, and control interfaces.
t "24TZTUFNDBOIBWFVQUPEFWJDFTBOE[POFT
t "24TZTUFNDBOIBWFVQUPXJSFMFTTEFWJDFT
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Infrared
t *OGSBSFE *3
SFDFJWFSBMMPXTJOGSBSFEUSBOTNJUUFSTUP
select 8 scenes, raise/lower lighting zones, or raise/
lower window treatments.
t 5SBOTNJUUFSCVUUPOTJNJUBUFCVUUPOTPOGBDFQMBUF
t N GU
MJOFPGTJHIUSBOHF
t 5FSNJOBMCMPDLJOGSBSFEJOQVUGPSDPOOFDUJPOUPBXJSFE
IR input from third-party equipment.
t *3DBOCFEJTBCMFEWJBQSPHSBNNJOH
t 8PSLTXJUI-VUSPO(39*5BOE(39*5JOGSBSFESFNPUF
controls.
Accessory Controls and Devices
t 8JSFETFF5PVDI QS keypads can be added to the
control link.
t &BDIGRAFIK Eye QS can power up to 3 wired
seeTouch QS controls.
Wireless RF Compatibility
t 'FBUVSFT-VUSPOTQSPQSJFUBSZ$MFBS$POOFDUTM
RF Technology
t 0QFSBUFTJOUIF.)[CBOE
t $PNQBUJCMFXJUIPUIFS-VUSPOXJSFMFTTQSPEVDUT
systems, such as:
- Pico (P/N QSR8P and QSRKP)
- Radio Powr SavrTM occupancy/vacancy/daylight
sensors
(P/N LRF3-)
- Sivoia QS wireless products
- Other GRAFIK Eye QS wireless units (P/N QSGRK-)
Accessory Controls: QS Sensor Module (QSM3)
t 5IF244FOTPS.PEVMFQSPWJEFTBNFBOTUPMJOL
wired or wireless occupancy and daylight sensors to a
GRAFIK Eye QS via the wired QS link.
- Occupancy sensors wired (or wirelessly linked) to
a QS Sensor Module can be used by one or more
GRAFIK Eye QS control units on the wired link.
- Daylight sensors wired (or wirelessly linked) to a
QS Sensor Module can be used by one or more
- Pico wireless controls can control either one or more
zones or scenes on the GRAFIK Eye QS.
- Infrared sensors can control either one or more zones
or scenes on the GRAFIK Eye QS. Functionality
varies; refer to the documentation for the QS Sensor
Module for details.
Page 1
CE)

369315 Rev. A 6 03.07.11
Specifications
Accessory Controls: Contact Closure Input/Output
Interface (QSE-IO)
t 3FDBMMTQSFTFUMJHIUMFWFMTGPSUIFGPMMPXJOHTFUPGTDFOFT
on the GRAFIK Eye QS:
Scenes 1-4 and Off Scenes 9-12 and Off
t 4FRVFODFTDFOFT &OBCMF%JTBCMF;POF-PDLPVU
Enable/Disable Scene Lockout, Enable/Disable Panic
Mode, Enable/Disable Timeclock.
t 0DDVQBODZ4FOTPST"OJOEJWJEVBMJOQVUDPVOUTBT
occupancy sensor for the GRAFIK Eye QS. Each input
can be assigned to either Scene Control or Zone Control
(please refer to the Occupancy Sensor(s) section of this
guide).
t ;POF5PHHMF"MMPXTBOJOQVUUPUPHHMFPOFPSNPSF[POFT
to a preset level and off.
t 4IBEF0VUQVUNPEF"4IBEF$PMVNOPOUIFGRAFIK
Eye QS can be linked to control outputs 1-3 and/or
outputs 4-5 on the QSE-IO.
Accessory Controls:
DMX Output Interface (QSE-CI-DMX)
t "OZ[POFPOUIFGRAFIK Eye QS control unit can be
NBQQFEUPBOZTJOHMF%.9$IBOOFM
TJNVMUBOFPVTMZNBQQFEUPBOZUISFF%.9DIBOOFMT
(providing RGB/CMY control).
t %.9MPBETDBOOPUCFVTFEXJUIEBZMJHIUJOH
Accessory Controls: Ethernet and RS232 Interface
(QSE-CI-NWK-E)
t "MMPXTGPSNPOJUPSJOHBOEDPOUSPMPGUIFPVUQVUTBOEMPDBM
scenes of the GRAFIK Eye QS.
Occupancy Sensor(s)
t 5IF(3"'*,&ZF24XPSLTXJUIPDDVQBODZTFOTPST
through either:
- Scene Control: Up to four sensors activate userselectable occupancy and vacancy scenes.
- Zone Control: up to four sensors per zone activate userselected occupancy and vacancy zone levels.
t 0DDVQBODZTFOTPSTNBZJODMVEF
- Contact closure sensors wired to CCI input on back of
GRAFIK Eye QS
- Wireless Radio Powr SavrTM occupancy or vacancy
sensors (model numbers starting with LRF3)
- Wired or wireless sensors connected QS Sensor Module
(QSM)
t *GBOZTFOTPSJOBHSPVQEFUFDUTPDDVQBODZ UIFOUIF
GRAFIK Eye QS will go to the designated occupancy
scene or zone level.
t *GBMMTFOTPSTJOBHSPVQEFUFDUWBDBODZ UIFOUIFGRAFIK
Eye QS will go to the designated vacancy scene or zone
level.
Accessory Controls: Pico Wireless Control
(QSR8P models)
t 5IFPico Wireless Control is battery powered. It can
control GRAFIK Eye QS wireless control units within a
10 m (30 ft) range (20 m/60 ft in open air). It provides the
following features:
- Control of one or more zones on the GRAFIK Eye QS
Wireless: turns zone(s) on or off, raises/lowers zone(s),
and goes to user-defined preset level
- Scene control: the Pico can access scene 1, scene 16,
and Off on the GRAFIK Eye QS, and can raise and lower
lighting levels
Accessory Controls: QS Keyswitch Wallstations

(QSWS2-KS)
t 3FDBMMTQSFTFUMJHIUMFWFMTGPSBOZUXPTDFOFTJODMVEJOH0GG
t "MMPXTGJOFUVOJOH SBJTFMPXFSMFWFM
PGB[POFPSHSPVQPG
zones
t 4UBSUT4UPQTTDFOFTFRVFODJOH 4DFOFTPS
Scenes 5-16)
t &OBCMFT%JTBCMFT5JNFDMPDL
t &OBCMFT%JTBCMFTPDDVQBODZTFOTPST
t &OBCMFT%JTBCMFEEBZMJHIUTFOTPST
t "MMPXTUPHHMFPG;POF T
UPBQSFTFUMFWFMBOEPGG
t &OBCMFT%JTBCMFTQBOJDNPEF
t 4UBSUT4UPQTBGUFSIPVSTNPEF
Other Accessory Controls and Devices
t &OFSHJ4BWS/PEFTM QS (ESN)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 1
CE)

369315 Rev. A 7 03.07.11
Specifications
Daylight Sensor(s)
t 5IF(3"'*,&ZF QS allows daylight sensors to control
one or more lighting zones to adjust electric light levels
based on measured daylight levels.
t %BZMJHIUTFOTPSTNBZJODMVEF
- Wireless Radio Powr SavrTM (model numbers starting
with LRF3)
- Wired or wireless sensors connected to a QS sensor
module (QSM)
t "EBZMJHIUTFOTPSDBODPOUSPMPOFPSNPSFGRAFIK Eye
QS zones:
- Each zone can be calibrated to target light levels
- A zone can be controlled by no more than one daylight
sensor
t %BZMJHIUDPOUSPMDBOCFFOBCMFEPSEJTBCMFEPOBTDFOF
by-scene basis
- By default, daylight control is enabled in all scenes
Note: Daylight control through the GRAFIK Eye QS only
affects lighting loads. Shade groups cannot be controlled
CZEBZMJHIUTFOTPST%BZMJHIUJOHEPFTOPUBGGFDU%.9PS
3(#$.:%.9MPBET
Contact Closure Input (CCI)

with Power Supply Output
t &BDIGRAFIK Eye QS has one contact closure input
(Terminal A).
- The attached device must provide a dry contact closure
or solid-state output.
- Input is miswire-protected up to 36 V .
t 5IFDPOUBDUDMPTVSFJTDBQBCMFPGBDDFQUJOHUIFGPMMPXJOH
types of inputs:
- Maintained (default): The GRAFIK Eye QS control unit
will act on both a contact closure and a contact open/
release event.
- Momentary: The GRAFIK Eye QS control unit will act on
only contact closure events.
t &BDIGRAFIK Eye QS can supply 50 mA maximum at
24 V .
- Useful for powering occupancy sensors.
- An auxiliary power supply must be used if the device
requires more than 50 mA.
t 5IF$$*JTDBQBCMFPGPQFSBUJOHJOUIFGPMMPXJOHNPEFT
- Occupancy: If an occupancy sensor is wired directly to
the GRAFIK Eye QS.
- Emergency: This setting allows the GRAFIK Eye QS to
work with a LUT-ELI. When an emergency situation is
detected, all lights will go to full on, and no operations
will be allowed until the emergency signal is cleared.
- Afterhours: Allows the CCI to start and end the
afterhours mode.
- Timeclock: Allows the CCI to enable and disable the
timeclock.
- Scene Lockout: Prevents the user from making any
changes to the control unit. The current scene will stay
on until the CCI enables normal operation.
- Save Never: Prevents any changes from being saved
while the CCI is being used.
- Disable CCI: The CCI will have no effect on the system
and will not appear on the list of available sensors.
Security Lockout Password
t "EJHJUQBTTXPSE VTJOHDIBSBDUFST"UP;BOEUP
9) can be enabled/disabled to lock out access to the
Programming Menu.
t #ZEFGBVMUUIFSFJTOPQBTTXPSEFOBCMFEPOUIFGRAFIK
Eye QS.
t *GDBTFUIFEJHJUQBTTXPSEJTGPSHPUUFO DPOUBDU-VUSPO
Technical Support to regain access.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 1
CE)

369315 Rev. A 8 03.07.11
Specifications
Capacities
Zones
Unit
Capacity
(watts)
3
1 500
4
2 000
6
2 300
Zone Capacity
Capacity
(watts)
500
500
500
Load Type Notes

t 'PSBQQMJDBUJPOTXJUI&-7MPBETPSMPBEXBUUBHFTFYDFFEJOHUIFTQFDJGJFEDBQBDJUJFT QMFBTFSFGFSUPTQFDJGJDBUJPOT
GPS-VUSPOQPXFSNPEVMFT /(391#$&/(39&-7*$&&-7*$&

t /PUBMMMPBETNVTUCFDPOOFDUFEIPXFWFS DPOOFDUFE[POFTNVTUIBWFBNJOJNVNMPBEPG8
t .BYJNVNUPUBMMJHIUJOHMPBEGPSBNBHOFUJDMPXWPMUBHF[POFJT7"8
t /P[POFNBZCFMPBEFEXJUINPSFUIBO8
System Limits
t 5IF24XJSFEDPNNVOJDBUJPOMJOLJTMJNJUFEUPEFWJDFT XJSFEPSXJSFMFTT
PS[POFT
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 1
CE)

369315 Rev. A 9 03.07.11
GRAFIK Eye QS Wireless

Standard Model Numbers
See following pages for Ordering Custom (Non-Standard) Model Numbers
See Standard Colour Combinations page for faceplate, stripe, and button colours
QSGRK - _ PCE - _
_ WH
White
(standard
colour)
Phase
Control
Triac-CE
Prefix
Number
of Zones
3 = 3 zones
4 = 4 zones
6 = 6 zones
Number of
Window Treatment
Columns
Omit = none
1 = 1 window
treatment
column
Available Standard Model Numbers

3 Zones
4 Zones
QSGRK-3PCE-WH
QSGRK-4PCE-WH
QSGRK-3PCE-TWH
QSGRK-4PCE-TWH
QSGRK-3PCE-1WH
QSGRK-4PCE-1WH
QSGRK-3PCE-1TWH QSGRK-4PCE-1TWH
Top Door
Colour
Omit = White
T = Translucent
Example:
QSGRK-6PCE-1TWH
6-zone standard white unit with
1 window treatment column and
translucent top door.
Unit will ship unengraved
with engraving certificate that
customer can redeem at no
charge.
6 Zones
QSGRK-6PCE-WH
QSGRK-6PCE-TWH
QSGRK-6PCE-1WH
QSGRK-6PCE-1TWH
Important Note:
For any non-standard units, you must order BOTH a base unit and a Faceplate Kit.
Please see the Custom Ordering Information on the following pages.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 1
CE)
369315 Rev. A 10 03.07.11

Custom Colour Options and Model Numbers
You must order a Base Unit and a Faceplate Kit
Example:
Base Unit
QSGRK - _ PCE
QSGRK-6PCE
6-zone base unit
and
QSGFP-2IV-SGN
Ivory faceplate kit with two
window treatment columns and
symbol-based engraving
Phase Control Triac-CE
Prefix
Number
of Zones
3 = 3 zones
4 = 4 zones
6 = 6 zones
Faceplate Kit
(includes coordinating stripe and buttons; see Standard Colour Combinations page)
QSGFP -
FaceNumber of
plate Window Treatment
Prefix
Columns
Omit = none
1 = 1 column
2 = 2 columns
3 = 3 columns
Colour/
Finish
Top
Door
Colour
Keypad
Engraving
Code
Omit = same as
unit
T = Translucent
Keypad Engraving Codes
Faceplate Custom Colour/Finish Codes

Architectural Matte
Finishes
Architectural Metal
Finishes
Satin Colour Matte

Finishes
Standard
(ship in 48 hours)
White
Ivory
Beige
Gray
Brown
Black
Almond
Light Almond
Bright Brass
Bright Chrome
Bright Nickel
Satin Brass
Satin Chrome
Satin Nickel
Antique Brass
Antique Bronze
Snow
Biscuit
Eggshell
Taupe
Midnight
Limestone
Stone
Desert Stone
Terracotta
Hot
Goldstone
Palladium
Plum
Turquoise
Bluestone
Sea Glass
Greenbrier
Sienna
Merlot
Mocha Stone
WH
IV
BE
GR
BR
BL
AL
LA
Anodised Aluminum
Finishes
Clear
Black
Brass
BB
BC
BN
SB
SC
SN
QB
QZ
CLA
BLA
BRA
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
SW
BI
ES
TP
MN
LS
ST
DS
TC
HT
GS
PD
PL
TQ
BG
SG
GB
SI
MR
MS
Omit = Unengraved
Ships with engraving certificate that
customer can redeem at no charge
SGN = Symbol-based Engraving
1
2
3
4
Lighting
keypad
Window
treatment
column
NST = Non-Standard
Text
Engraving
Please visit the GRAFIK Eye QS website
at www.lutron.com/grafikeyeqs
for custom engraving forms. Submit
completed form with order, and unit will
ship engraved as specified by customer.
Page 1
CE)
369315 Rev. A 11 03.07.11

Custom Options and Model Numbers
See previous pages for Standard and Other Custom Model Numbers
Custom Button Kit
QSGB - 5B - WH Custom Button

Kit Prefix
Button
Configuration
Keypad
Engraving
Code
Button
Colour/
Finish
3BRL = 3-button with

raise/lower
(window
treatment
column)
5B
= 5-button
(lighting keypad)

Omit = Unengraved
Button Kit Custom

Colour/Finish Codes
Architectural Matte
Finishes
White
Ivory
Beige
Gray
Brown
Black
Almond
Light Almond
WH
IV
BE
GR
BR
BL
AL
LA
Satin Colour Matte

Finishes
Snow
Biscuit
Eggshell
Taupe
SW
BI
ES
TP
2
3
4
Lighting
keypad
Window
treatment
column
NST = Non-Standard Text Engraving

Custom Stripe Kit
QSGS - WH
Stripe Colour/
Finish
Stripe
Kit
Prefix
Stripe Custom Colour/Finish Codes

Same as Faceplate colours on previous page
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 1
CE)

369315 Rev. A 12 03.07.11
GRAFIK Eye QS Wireless Standard Colour Combinations

See previous pages for Standard and Custom Model Numbers
F (faceplate)
S (stripe)
1
2
B (buttons)
3
4
LUTRON
Suffix
Faceplate (F)
Architectural Matte
WH
White
IV
Ivory
BE
Beige
GR
Gray
BR
Brown
BL
Black
AL
Almond
LA
Light Almond
Architectural Metal
BB
Bright Brass
BC
Bright Chrome
BN
Bright Nickel
SB
Satin Brass
SC
Satin Chrome
SN
Satin Nickel
QB
Antique Brass
QZ
Antique Bronze
Anodised
CLA
Clear
BLA
Black
BRA
Brass
International Wallbox
AR
Argentum
MC
Mica
AW
Arctic White
Stripe (S)
Button (B)
Job Number:
F (faceplate)
Example:
If you order QSGRK-4PCE-1WH, your
GRAFIK Eye QS with 4 lighting zones and 1
window treatment column will come with a
white faceplate (both top and bottom), gray
stripe, and white buttons.
Suffix
Faceplate (F)
Satin Matte
Gray
White
MN
Midnight
Beige
Ivory
TP
Taupe
Ivory
Beige
SW
Snow
Black
Gray
ES
Eggshell
Black
Brown
BI
Biscuit
Gray
Black
LS
Limestone
Light Almond Almond
ST
Stone
Almond
Light Almond DS
Desert Stone
TC
Terracotta
Black
Black
BG
Bluestone
Black
Black
HT
Hot
Black
Black
MR
Merlot
Black
Black
SI
Sienna
Black
Black
GB
Greenbrier
Black
Black
SG
Sea Glass
Black
Black
MS
Mocha Stone
Black
Black
GS
Goldstone
PD
Palladium
Black
Black
PL
Plum
Black
Black
TQ
Turquoise
Black
Black
Black
Gray
Gray
Stripe (S)
Button (B)
Gray
Gray
Gray
Beige
Eggshell
Gray
Gray
Taupe
Taupe
Gray
Taupe
Taupe
Brown
Gray
Gray
Taupe
Ivory
Gray
Taupe
Gray
Black
Taupe
Snow
Eggshell
Biscuit
Gray
Gray
Taupe
Taupe
Gray
Taupe
Taupe
Brown
Gray
Gray
Taupe
Ivory
Gray
Taupe
Gray
Black
Black
White
Job Name:
Faceplate is comprised of a top and bottom.

The bottom will always be the colour indicated
under faceplate. The top may be the same
colour or translucent. Use the chart for
faceplates that have the same colour top
and bottom. If a translucent lid is chosen, the
stripe will automatically be the same colour as
the bottom lid.
Model Numbers:
Page 1
CE)

369315 Rev. A 13 03.07.11
Wiring Diagrams
Terminations
A B C
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 L N
1 2
Communication link
Occupancy sensor/contact closure input and 24 V
power
IR input
Load wiring
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 1
CE)
369315 Rev. A 14 03.07.11
Power Group Wiring Example

On the QS link, there are devices that supply power and devices that consume power. Each device has a specific
number of Power Draw Units (PDUs) it either supplies or consumes. A Power Group consists of one device that
supplies power and one or more devices that consume power; each Power Group may have only one power-supplying
device. Refer to the QS Link Power Draw Units specification submittal (Lutron PN 369405) for more information
concerning PDUs.
Within Power Groups on the QS link, connect all 4 terminals (1, 2, 3, and 4), shown by the letter A in the diagram.
Between devices on the QS link that supply power, connect only terminals 1, 3, and 4 (NOT terminal 2), shown by the
letter B on the diagram. Refer to the specific device documentation for wiring details.
Wiring can be T-tapped or daisy-chained.
A
Power Group 1
LUTRON
GRAFIK Eye QS
control unit
Supplies PDUs
A
B
Control Interfaces
Consume PDUs
(Do not connect

terminal 2: 24 V )
Wallstations
Consume PDUs
Power Group 2
Terminals 1, 2, 3,
and 4 (Common,
24 V , and
data) connect
devices within a
power group.
B
Terminal 2
(24 V ) is NOT
connected
between power
groups.
Energi Savr NodeTM

unit Supplies PDUs
Wallstations
Consume PDUs
(Do not connect

terminal 2: 24 V )
Power Group 3
A
Wireless Occupancy Sensor
does not consume PDUs
QS Power Supply
Supplies PDUs
Control Interfaces Wallstations

Consume PDUs Consume PDUs
QS Sensor Module with

Occupancy Sensor
Consumes PDUs
(Do not connect

terminal 2: 24 V )
Quantum Processor
(if applicable)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 1
CE)

369315 Rev. A 15 03.07.11
Mounting
Mounting
screws (4)
Standard 4-gang
U.S. wallbox,
89 mm (3.5 in)
deep
Hinged
top lid
GRAFIK Eye
QS control unit
Hinged
bottom lid
Line Voltage Wiring

Rear of
QS control unit
1 2 3 4 5 6 L N
To Load 1
Line voltage (hot/live)

is labeled L.
To Load 2
To Load 3
To Load 4
To Load 5
To Load 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 L N
Distribution Panel
230 V
50 Hz
t 1VMMQPXFSXJSJOHGSPNEJTUSJCVUJPOQBOFMBOEUPMJHIUGJYUVSFT
t &BDIMJOFWPMUBHFUFSNJOBMDBOBDDFQUPOFNN2 (12 AWG) wire.
t $POTVMU-VUSPOGPSOPOEJNSFMBZXJSJOHBOEPSMPBETJEFFNFSHFODZUSBOTGFSXJSJOH
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 1
CE)
369315 Rev. A 16 03.07.11
IEC PELV/NEC Class 2 QS System Low-Voltage Wiring

t 4ZTUFNDPNNVOJDBUJPOVTFTMPXWPMUBHFXJSJOH
t 8JSJOHDBOCFEBJTZDIBJOFEPS5UBQQFE
t 8JSJOHNVTUCFSVOTFQBSBUFMZGSPNMJOFNBJOTWPMUBHF
t *&$1&-7/&$ Class 2 wiring link requires:
Two 1.0 mm2 (18 AWG) conductors for control power.
One twisted, shielded pair of 0.5 mm2 (22 AWG) for data link.
"WBJMBCMFGSPN-VUSPO 1/(39$#-4DIFDLDPNQBUJCJMJUZJOZPVSBSFB
t 5PUBMMFOHUIPGDPOUSPMMJOLNVTUOPUFYDFFEN GU

Daisy-Chain Wiring Example

QS
Control Unit
Sivoia QS
window
treatment
seeTouch QS
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
Sivoia QS
smart panel
T-Tap Wiring Example

QS
Control Unit
seeTouch QS
LUTRON
LUTRON
Sivoia QS
smart panel
LUTRON
Sivoia QS
window
treatment
LUTRON
LUTRON
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 1
Wireless Control Unit with EcoSystem

369314 Rev. B 1 11.18.11
GRAFIK Eye QS Wireless Control Unit with EcoSystem
Open
Preset
Close
3
4
Off
LUTRON
Description
GRAFIK Eye QS Wireless with EcoSystem is the premier energy-saving
lighting and shade control. The GRAFIK Eye QS control unit features an
astronomic timeclock and intuitive lighting presets, which are seamlessly
integrated with EcoSystem fluorescent ballasts and LED drivers, and Lutrons
QS components and systems. Now with wireless technology and an integral
EcoSystem bus supply, you can use the GRAFIK Eye QS Wireless control
unit with EcoSystem to control ballasts and shades without interfaces, and
integrate with a variety of Lutron wireless products and systems, including
Radio Powr SavrTM occupancy, vacancy, and daylight sensors, Sivoia
QS wireless shades, Pico wireless control, and other GRAFIK Eye QS
wireless control units. Additionally, the GRAFIK Eye QS wireless control
unit is compatible with all Lutron wired QS products and systems, including
Quantum.
94 in
(239 mm)
4 in
(10 mm)
2 in
(51 mm)
4$ in
(119 mm)
Front View
Side View
Fits into a 4-gang U.S. backbox, 3` in (89 mm) deep; Lutron P/N 241-400
SPECI F I CATI ON SU BMI TTA L
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 1

369314 Rev. B 2 11.18.11
System Topologies
The GRAFIK Eye QS Wireless control unit with EcoSystem can be specified in three different system topologies.
Examples of each are shown below.
Wired QS link
GRAFIK Eye QS
wireless control unit
GRAFIK Eye QS
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
seeTouch
QS
wallstation
Quantum
processor
QSE-CI-NWK-E
Sivoia QS
shade
QS Sensor
Module
LUTRON
Wired
occupancy
sensor
EcoSystem
ballast
Energi Savr
NodeTM unit

Wireless System

30 ft
(10 m)
wireless
range;
60 ft
(20 m) in
open air
GRAFIK Eye QS
Wireless
daylight
sensor
Wireless
Sivoia QS
shade
LUTRON
Wired QS link
Pico
wireless
control
GRAFIK Eye QS
GRAFIK Eye QS
LUTRON
Wireless
occupancy
sensor
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
Wireless
Sivoia QS
shade
EcoSystem
ballasts
EcoSystem
ballasts
Pico wireless
control
Wireless
daylight
sensor
Job Name:
Job Number:
seeTouch QS
wallstations
Model Numbers:
Wired
occupancy
sensor
Wireless
occupancy
sensor
Page 2

369314 Rev. B 3 11.18.11
Application Suggestions and Differences between GRAFIK Eye QS with EcoSystem

and Standard EcoSystem Bus Supply
GRAFIK Eye QS with
EcoSystem
Energi Savr NodeTM

with EcoSystem
Suggested/Recommended Applications
Single rooms, partitioned spaces,

e.g., conference room, classroom,
ballroom, lobby
Open spaces, multiple

enclosed rooms, e.g., open
office, window offices
Programming Method
Info Screen on the QS control unit
Via Energi Savr NodeTM App for

iPod mobile digital device
Integral Timeclock
Yes
No
Compatible with seeTouch QS Keypads
Yes
Yes
Compatible with EcoSystem Wall Controls
No
Yes
Compatible with EcoSystem IR Sensors
No
Yes
Includes dry contact closure for integration to BMS

or Security Systems
Yes
Yes
Input Voltage
120-127 or 220-240 V
Number of EcoSystem Busses
1 or 2
Number of Zones
6, 8, or 16
Programmable
50/60 Hz
120/240/277 V
Number of Line-Voltage Outputs
3 (Zones 1-3 only)
--
Compatible with other QS Devices
Yes
Yes
50/60 Hz
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the United States and other countries.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 3

369314 Rev. B 4 11.18.11
Open
Preset
Close
3
4
Off
LUTRON
Note: General Engraving (-EGN) shown.
OK
Open
Preset
Close
3
4
Off
USB type
mini B
Optional
shade
control
keypad
;POF
control
Infrared
receiver
Lighting
control
keypad
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Info
screen
Features
t -VUSPOTQSPQSJFUBSZ$MFBS$POOFDUTM RF technology.
Operates in the 434 MHz band.
t 1VTICVUUPOSFDBMMPGGPVSQSFTFUMJHIUJOHTDFOFT
plus Off.
t 5XFMWF
BEEJUJPOBMTDFOFTBDDFTTJCMFUISPVHI
other QS devices, such as seeTouch QS
wallstations.
t ;POFT BOEDBODPOUSPMNBOZMJHIUTPVSDF
types directly and others using power modules.
t 0QUJPOBMJOUFHSBUFETIBEFDPOUSPMCVUUPOT XIJDI
can also be added to the unit after installation.
t .BTUFSPWFSSJEFCVUUPOTUPSBJTFBOEMPXFSBMMMJHIUT
t "MMPXTTFUVQPGMJHIUJOHTDFOFTBOETIBEFQSFTFUT
using buttons on the control unit.
SFDFJWFS
energy savings, zone labeling, programming, and
EcoSystem setup.
t 0OFPDDVQBODZTFOTPSJOQVUBOE7 power for
occupancy sensor.
t 24DPNNVOJDBUJPOMJOLGPSTFBNMFTTJOUFHSBUJPOPG
lights, motorized window treatments, occupancy
sensors, wallstations, and integration interfaces.
t $PNQBUJCMFXJUIBMM-VUSPO24TZTUFNDPNQPOFOUT
t 8JSFMFTTDPNNVOJDBUJPOGPSTFBNMFTTJOUFHSBUJPO
with a variety of Lutron wireless products and
systems, including Radio Powr SavrTM occupancy,
vacancy, and daylight sensors, Sivoia QS wireless
shades, Pico wireless controls, and other
GRAFIK Eye QS Wireless control units.
t $POUSPMVQUP PS&DP4ZTUFN zones from
internal bus supply.
t ;POFT BOEBSFJOUFHSBMMJOFWPMUBHFEJNNJOH
zones and can be optionally programmed as
EcoSystem zones.
t 6QUP&DP4ZTUFN or Hi-lume 3D ballasts can
be addressed and grouped to zones.
t *OUFHSBM&DP4ZTUFN setup and programming
replaces the need for a handheld programmer
(C-PDA-CLR does not communicate with the
GRAFIK Eye QS with EcoSystem control unit)
t #BDLMJUCVUUPOTXJUIFOHSBWJOHNBLFVOJUFBTZUP
locate and operate.
t "WBJMBCMFJOBWBSJFUZPGDPMPSTBOEGJOJTIFT
Page 4

369314 Rev. B 5 11.18.11
Specifications
Input Power
t 7
t 7
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
Listings (120 - 127 V

t 6t $4"
t /0.
t $&$ 5JUMF
t '$$1BSU$MBTT#
t *$344
t 4$5
Environment
t UP' UP$
t &DP4ZTUFN and Hi-lume 3D ballasts, and Hi-lume
LED drivers (available on all zones).
;POFT BOEDBODPOUSPMUIFGPMMPXJOHMJHIUJOH
sources with a smooth, continuous square law dimming
curve or on a full conduction non-dim basis:
t *ODBOEFTDFOU
t )BMPHFO
t -VUSPO5V8JSF electronic fluorescent dimming ballast
t "EWBODF.BSL9 electronic dimming ballast
t /POEJN JODBOEFTDFOU NBHOFUJDMPXWPMUBHF 5V8JSF,
or neon/cold cathode)
fixtures (for loading capacities,
t $SFF-3 7
please refer to the LED report card located at
www.lutron.com/LEDtool)
Please refer to Capacities for more information.
;POFT BOEDBODPOUSPMUIFGPMMPXJOHMJHIUJOH
sources with a smooth, continuous square law dimming
curve or on a full conduction non-dim basis through
separate Lutron power modules:
Key Design Features

t 3'NFFUT'$$1BSU$MBTT#
6000 V
and current surges of up to 3000 A.
t 35*44TM-equipped: Compensates in real time for incoming
line voltage variations (no visible flicker with +/-2% change
in RMS voltage per cycle, and +/-2% Hz change in
frequency per second).
t 5IF(3"'*,&ZF QS control unit supplies 3 Power Draw
Units (PDUs) on the QS link.
t 'BDFQMBUFJTIJOHFEBUUIFUPQBOECPUUPN BOETUBZTPQFO
at 180 for ease of access.
and 277 V
EcoSystem,
t %JSFDUDPOUSPMPG7
Hi-lume 3D, and Hi-lume LED ballasts (no interface
required).
t #BDLMJUCVUUPOTXJUIPQUJPOBMFOHSBWJOHNBLFJUFBTZUP
find and to operate the control unit in low light conditions
(backlight can be disabled).
t 0QUJPOBMCVUUPOFOHSBWJOHJTBOHMFEVQUPUIFFZFGPSFBTZ
reading.
t QSFTFUMJHIUJOHTDFOFT QMVT0GG BSFBDDFTTJCMFGSPNUIF
front of the control unit.
t BEEJUJPOBMTDFOFTBSFTUPSFEJOUIFDPOUSPMVOJUBOEBSF
accessible from seeTouch QS wallstations and
QS interfaces.
t -JHIUMFWFMTGBEFTNPPUIMZCFUXFFOTDFOFT'BEFUJNFDBO
be set differently for each scene: 0 to 59 seconds, or 1 to
60 minutes. Maximum fade time from Off is 3 seconds.
t -VUSPO)JMVNF, Eco-10, and Compact SE electronic
fluorescent dimming ballast
t /POEJN
t 7
S PECI F I CAT I ON SUBM I TTA L
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 5

369314 Rev. B 6 11.18.11
Specifications
Shade Control
t 5IF(3"'*,&ZF QS control unit can include up to 3
shade button columns. Each column has backlit open,
preset, close, and raise/lower buttons.
columns.
Eye QS control unit and set their raise/lower limits.
t 8JSFEBOEXJSFMFTTTIBEFTNBZOPUCFQSPHSBNNFEJOUP
the same shade button column; however, both may be
used on the same GRAFIK Eye QS control unit.
RadioRA 2 systems.
Zone Control
adjust the zone.
Info Screen
t 0-&% PSHBOJD-&%
t 1SPHSBNNBCMFTIBEFMBCFMT
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
t 0OFBWBJMBCMFIPMJEBZTDIFEVMFJTQSPHSBNNBCMFCZEBUFVQ
to one year in advance.
t 5JNFDMPDLFWFOUTBSFQSPHSBNNBCMFUPDPOUSPMTDFOFTUIBU
affect any Energi Savr NodeTM unit connected on the QS
link without changing the local scene on the GRAFIK Eye
QS control unit.
automatically adjust throughout the year based on location.

features:
- Any available shade presets
sensors
sensors
t -PXWPMUBHFUZQF*&$1&-7/&$ Class 2 wiring connects
control units, wallstations, motorized shades, and control
interfaces.
t $MBTT$MBTTXJSJOHDPOOFDUTCBMMBTUUPDPOUSPMVOJU
Infrared
t *OGSBSFE *3
SFDFJWFSBMMPXTJOGSBSFEUSBOTNJUUFSTUPTFMFDU
scenes, raise/lower lighting zones, or raise/lower shades.
t GU N
MJOFPGTJHIUSBOHF
controls.
Page 6

369314 Rev. B 7 11.18.11
Specifications
Accessory Controls: seeTouch QS Wallstations
(QSWS2)
t 8JSFETFF5PVDI QS keypads provide the following
features:
- Access to one or more of the 16 scenes on the
GRAFIK Eye QS Wireless control unit
;POFUPHHMF QBSUJUJPOJOH TFRVFODJOH GJOFUVOF QBOJD
mode, and timeclock enable/disable
- Contact closure inputs
- Various other functions that are available on specific
wallstation configurations. Refer to the seeTouch
specification submittal.
(QSR4P or MRF2 models)
t 5IF1JDP Wireless Control is battery powered. It can
30 ft (10 m) range (60 ft/20 m in open air). It provides the
following features:
Wireless control unit: turns zone(s) on or off, raises/
lowers zone(s), and goes to user-programmable preset
level
- Scene control: the Pico wireless control can access
scene 1, scene 16, and Off on the GRAFIK Eye QS
control unit, and can raise and lower lighting levels
t 5IF244FOTPS.PEVMFQSPWJEFTBNFBOTUPMJOLXJSFE
or wireless occupancy and daylight sensors to a GRAFIK
Eye QS control unit via the wired QS link.
- Occupancy sensors wired (or wirelessly linked) to a QS
Sensor Module can be used by one or more GRAFIK
Eye QS control units on the wired link.
zones or scenes on the GRAFIK Eye QS control unit.
or scenes on the GRAFIK Eye QS control unit.
Functionality varies; refer to the documentation for the
QS Sensor Module for details.

Interface (QSE-IO)
t 3FDBMMTQSFTFUMJHIUMFWFMTGPSUIFGPMMPXJOHTFUPGTDFOFTPO
the GRAFIK Eye QS control unit:
occupancy sensor for the GRAFIK Eye QS control unit.
Each input can be assigned to either Scene Control or
;POF$POUSPM QMFBTFSFGFSUPUIF0DDVQBODZ4FOTPS T

section of this guide).
t 4IBEF0VUQVUNPEF"4IBEF$PMVNOPOUIF(3"'*,
Eye QS control unit can be linked to control outputs 1-3
and/or outputs 4-5 on the QSE-IO.
Accessory Controls:
t "OZ[POFPOUIF(3"'*,&ZF QS control unit can be
(QSE-CI-NWK-E)
scenes of the GRAFIK Eye QS control unit.
(QSWS2-KS)
PGB[POFPSHSPVQPG
zones
t 4UBSUT4UPQTTDFOFTFRVFODJOH 4DFOFTPS4DFOFT
5-16)
t &OFSHJ4BWS/PEF QS (ESN). Refer to the Specification
Submittal for complete details.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 7

369314 Rev. B 8 11.18.11
Specifications
t -VUSPOTQSPQSJFUBSZ$MFBS$POOFDUTM RF Technology
t 0QFSBUFTJOUIF.)[CBOE
t $PNQBUJCMFXJUIPUIFS-VUSPOXJSFMFTTQSPEVDUTTZTUFNT
such as:
- Pico wireless control (P/N QSR4P or MRF2)
- Radio Powr SavrTM occupancy/vacancy/daylight sensors
(P/N LRF2-)
- Other GRAFIK Eye QS wireless control units
(P/N QSGRJ-)
Occupancy Sensor(s)
t 5IF(3"'*,&ZF QS control unit works with occupancy
sensors through either:
;POF$POUSPMVQUPGPVSTFOTPSTQFS[POFBDUJWBUF
user-selected occupancy and vacancy zone levels.
GRAFIK Eye QS control unit
- Wired sensors connected to EcoSystem ballasts or
interfaces
- Wired or wireless sensors connected to a QS Sensor
Module (QSM)
GRAFIK Eye QS control unit will go to the designated
occupancy scene or zone level.
t *GBMMTFOTPSTJOBHSPVQEFUFDUWBDBODZ UIFOUIF(3"'*,
Eye QS control unit will go to the designated vacancy
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Daylight Sensor(s)
t 5IF(3"'*,&ZF QS control unit with EcoSystem works
with compatible daylight sensors to adjust electric light
levels based on measured daylight levels. Sensors can
be configured to control either GRAFIK Eye QS zones or
groups of EcoSystem loads independent of zoning.
- Wireless Radio Powr SavrTM (model numbers starting with
LRF2)
interfaces
module (QSM)
t *O;POF.PEF BEBZMJHIUTFOTPSDBODPOUSPMPOFPSNPSF
GRAFIK Eye QS zones. Each zone can be calibrated to
target light levels.
sensor
t *O(SPVQ.PEF BEBZMJHIUTFOTPSDBODPOUSPMPOFPSNPSF
EcoSystem loads, regardless of how they are zoned on the
GRAFIK Eye QS control unit.
- A group can be controlled by a single daylight sensor
- Each group can be calibrated to independent target light
levels
- Up to 16 groups are available
t %BZMJHIUDPOUSPMDBOCFFOBCMFEPSEJTBCMFEPOBTDFOFCZ
scene basis
Note: Daylight control through the GRAFIK Eye QS control
unit only affects lighting loads. Shade groups cannot be
controlled by daylight sensors. Daylighting does not affect
%.9PS3(#$.:%.9MPBET
Page 8

369314 Rev. B 9 11.18.11
Specifications
Contact Closure Input (CCI) with Power Supply Output
t &BDI(3"'*,&ZF QS control unit has one contact
closure input (Terminal A).
types of inputs:
release event.
t &BDI(3"'*,&ZF QS control unit can supply 50
mA maximum at 24 V .
the GRAFIK Eye QS control unit.
- Emergency: This setting allows the GRAFIK Eye QS
control unit to work with a LUT-ELI. When an emergency
situation is detected, all lights will go to full on, and no
operations will be allowed until the emergency signal is
cleared.
afterhours mode.
timeclock.
Programming Menu.
t #ZEFGBVMUUIFSFJTOPQBTTXPSEFOBCMFEPOUIF(3"'*,
Eye QS control unit.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 9

369314 Rev. B 10 11.18.11
Capacities
220 - 240 V
50 / 60 Hz
120 - 127 V
50 / 60 Hz
3000
2000
3000 VA / 2400 W
2000 VA / 1600 W
40 1200
25 800
40 1200 VA / 40 960 W
25 800 VA / 25 600 W
MLV
;POF$BQBDJUZ XBUUT
MLV
Load Type Notes (Zones 1, 2 and 3)

t "MMFMFDUSPOJDMPXWPMUBHF &-7
MJHIUJOHVTFEXJUIBOJOUFSGBDFNVTUCFSBUFEGPSSFWFSTFQIBTFDPOUSPMEJNNJOH#FGPSF
installing an ELV light source, verify with the manufacturer that their transformer can be dimmed. When dimming, an
ELV interface (such as the PHPM-PA-DV-WH) must be used with the control unit.
t /PUBMM[POFTNVTUCFDPOOFDUFEIPXFWFS DPOOFDUFE[POFTNVTUIBWFBNJOJNVNMPBEBTTQFDJGJFEBCPWF
t .BYJNVNUPUBMMJHIUJOHMPBEGPSBNBHOFUJDMPXWPMUBHF .-7
- 120 - 127 V : 800 VA / 600 W
- 220 - 240 V : 1200 VA / 960 W
t .BYJNVNUPUBMMJHIUJOHMPBEGPS-VUSPO5V8JSFBOE"EWBODF.BSL9 electronic dimming ballasts (120 to 127 V
only) must not exceed 6 A per zone or 16 A per unit.
t /P[POFNBZCFMPBEFEXJUINPSFUIBOUIFDBQBDJUZTQFDJGJFEBCPWF'PSIJHIFSXBUUBHFBQQMJDBUJPOT PSGPS7
BQQMJDBUJPOT VTF-VUSPOQPXFSNPEVMF1)1.1" 1)1.8#9 1)1.1"%7 1)1.48 PS1)1.8#9%7
t 'PSDPOUSPMMJOHMPXXBUUBHFMPBET $'- -&%
JOBOPOEJNBQQMJDBUJPO DPOUBDU-VUSPO5FDIOJDBM4VQQPSUGPSUIF
appropriate solution.
System Limits
t 5IF24XJSFEDPNNVOJDBUJPOMJOLJTMJNJUFEUPEFWJDFTPS[POFT
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 10

369314 Rev. B 11 11.18.11
GRAFIK Eye QS Wireless with EcoSystem

See Standard Color Combinations page for faceplate, stripe, and button colors
QSGRJ - _ E - _ _ WH
Prefix
White
(standard
color)
EcoSystem
Number
PG;POFT
6 = 6 zones
8 = 8 zones
16 = 16 zones
Number
of Shade
Columns
Omit = none
1 = 1 shade
column

;POFT
;POFT
QSGRJ-6E-WH
QSGRJ-8E-WH
QSGRJ-6E-TWH
QSGRJ-8E-TWH
QSGRJ-6E-1WH
QSGRJ-8E-1WH
QSGRJ-6E-1TWH
QSGRJ-8E-1TWH
Top Door
Color
Omit = White
T = Translucent
Example:
QSGRJ-6E-1TWH
1 shade column and translucent
top door.
charge.
;POFT
QSGRJ-16E-WH
QSGRJ-16E-TWH
QSGRJ-16E-1WH
QSGRJ-16E-1TWH
Important Note:
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 11

369314 Rev. B 12 11.18.11

Custom Color Options and Model Numbers
Example:
Base Unit
QSGRJ - _ E
QSGRJ-6E
6-zone base unit
and
QSGFP-2IV-EGN
shade columns and general
engraving
EcoSystem
Prefix
Number
PG;POFT
6 = 6 zones
8 = 8 zones
16 = 16 zones
Faceplate Kit
(includes coordinating stripe and buttons)
QSGFP Faceplate
Prefix
Number
of Shade
Columns
Omit = none
1 = 1 column
2 = 2 columns
3 = 3 columns
Top
Door
Color
Color/
Finish
Keypad
Engraving
Code
Omit = same as
unit
T = Translucent
Faceplate Custom Color/Finish Codes

Architectural Matte
Finishes
Architectural Metal
Finishes
Satin Color Matte

Finishes
Standard
(ship in 48 hours)
White
Ivory
Beige
Gray
Brown
Black
Almond
Light Almond
Bright Brass
Bright Chrome
Bright Nickel
Satin Brass
Satin Chrome
Satin Nickel
Antique Brass
"OUJRVF#SPO[F
Snow
Biscuit
Eggshell
Taupe
Midnight
Limestone
Stone
Desert Stone
Terracotta
Hot
Goldstone
Palladium
Plum
Turquoise
Bluestone
Sea Glass
Greenbriar
Sienna
Merlot
Mocha Stone
WH
IV
BE
GR
BR
BL
AL
LA
Anodized Aluminum
Finishes
Clear
Black
Brass
BB
BC
BN
SB
SC
SN
QB
2;
CLA
BLA
BRA
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
SW
BI
ES
TP
MN
LS
ST
DS
TC
HT
GS
PD
PL
TQ
BG
SG
GB
SI
MR
MS
Omit = Unengraved
EGN = General Engraving
1
Open
Preset
Close
4
Off
Lighting
keypad
Shade
column

Page 12

369314 Rev. B 13 11.18.11

Custom Button Kit

Kit Prefix
Button
Configuration
Keypad
Engraving
Code
Button
Color/
Finish

raise/lower
(shade column)
5B
= 5-button
(lighting keypad)

Omit = Unengraved
Button Kit Custom

Color/Finish Codes
Architectural Matte
Finishes
White
Ivory
Beige
Gray
Brown
Black
Almond
Light Almond
WH
IV
BE
GR
BR
BL
AL
LA
Satin Color Matte

Finishes
Snow
Biscuit
Eggshell
Taupe
SW
BI
ES
TP
Open
Preset
Close
4
Off
Lighting
keypad
Shade
column

Custom Stripe Kit
QSGS - WH
Stripe Color/
Finish
Stripe
Kit
Prefix
Stripe Custom Color/Finish Codes

Same as Faceplate colors on previous page
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 13

369314 Rev. B 14 11.18.11

Standard Color Combinations
F (faceplate)
S (stripe)
Open
Preset
Close
3
4
Off
LUTRON
Suffix
Faceplate (F)
Architectural Matte
WH
White
IV
Ivory
BE
Beige
GR
Gray
BR
Brown
BL
Black
AL
Almond
LA
Light Almond
Architectural Metal
BB
Bright Brass
BC
Bright Chrome
BN
Bright Nickel
SB
Satin Brass
SC
Satin Chrome
SN
Satin Nickel
QB
Antique Brass
2;
"OUJRVF#SPO[F
Anodized
CLA
Clear
BLA
Black
BRA
Brass
Stripe (S)
Button (B)
Job Number:
B (buttons)
F (faceplate)
Example:
If you order QSGRJ-6E-1WH, your GRAFIK
Eye QS with 6 lighting zones and 1 shade
column will come with a white faceplate
(both top and bottom), gray stripe, and white
buttons.
Suffix
Faceplate (F)
Satin Matte
Gray
White
MN
Midnight
Beige
Ivory
TP
Taupe
Ivory
Beige
SW
Snow
Black
Gray
ES
Eggshell
Black
Brown
BI
Biscuit
Gray
Black
LS
Limestone
Light Almond Almond
ST
Stone
Almond
Light Almond DS
Desert Stone
TC
Terracotta
Black
Black
BG
Bluestone
Black
Black
HT
Hot
Black
Black
MR
Merlot
Black
Black
SI
Sienna
Black
Black
GB
Greenbriar
Black
Black
SG
Sea Glass
Black
Black
MS
Mocha Stone
#MBDL
#MBDL
GS
Goldstone
PD
Palladium
Black
Black
PL
Plum
Black
Black
TQ
Turquoise
Black
Black
Job Name:

The bottom will always be the color indicated
under faceplate. The top may be the
same color or translucent. Use the chart for
faceplates that have the same color top and
bottom. If a translucent lid is chosen, the
stripe will automatically be the same color as
the bottom lid.
Model Numbers:
Stripe (S)
Button (B)
Gray
Gray
Gray
Beige
Eggshell
Gray
Gray
Taupe
Taupe
Gray
Taupe
Taupe
Brown
Gray
Gray
Taupe
Ivory
Gray
Taupe
Gray
Black
Taupe
Snow
Eggshell
Biscuit
Gray
Gray
Taupe
Taupe
Gray
Taupe
Taupe
Brown
Gray
Gray
Taupe
Ivory
Gray
Taupe
Gray
Page 14

369314 Rev. B 15 11.18.11
Overview
Terminations
Load wiring
EcoSystem bus (E1, E2)
Communication link
Occupancy sensor/contact closure input
and 24 V
power
IR input
Wire Gauge
12 AWG (4.0
14 AWG (2.5
16 AWG (1.5
18 AWG (1.0
mm2)
mm2)
mm2)
mm2)
Maximum EcoSystem
Bus Length
2200 ft (671 m)
1400 ft (427 m)
900 ft (275 m)
570 ft (175 m)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 15

369314 Rev. B 16 11.18.11

concerning PDUs.
letter B on the diagram.
A
Power Group 1
LUTRON
GRAFIK Eye QS
control unit
Supplies PDUs
A
LUTRON
Control Interfaces
Consume PDUs
(Do not connect

terminal 2: 24 V )
Wallstations
Consume PDUs
Power Group 2
Connect all 4
terminals within a
power group:
1: Common
2: 24 V
3 and 4: Data
LUTRON
Energi Savr NodeTM QS

unit Supplies PDUs
LUTRON
Connect only 3
terminals between
power groups:
1: Common
3 and 4: Data
Do not connect
Terminal 2: 24 V
LUTRON
Wallstations
Consume PDUs
B
(Do not connect
terminal 2: 24 V
Power Group 3
A
LUTRON
QS Power Supply
Supplies PDUs
Control Interfaces
Consume PDUs
Wallstations
Consume PDUs

wired Occupancy Sensor
Consumes PDUs
(Do not connect

terminal 2: 24 V )
Quantum panel
Supplies PDUs
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 16

369314 Rev. B 17 11.18.11
Line Voltage Wiring
Do not use
Rear of
QS control unit
To Load 1

is labeled L.
To Load 2
To Load 3
Loads 1, 2, 3,
120-127 V
or
220-240 V
1 2 3 4 5 6 L N
120-127 V
or
220-240 V
Distribution Panel
t &BDIMJOFWPMUBHFUFSNJOBMDBOBDDFQUPOF"8( NN2) wire.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 17

369314 Rev. B 18 11.18.11
EcoSystem Bus Wiring

EcoSystem Bus Link Terminal Detail
E2
E1
EcoSystem
ballasts
E2
E1
To additional EcoSystem
ballasts
EcoSystem Bus Wiring Example

To additional ballasts and
modules (up to 64 total)
EcoSystem Bus
EcoSystem
Ballast
LUTRON
GRAFIK Eye QS
with EcoSystem
(limit one per
EcoSystem link)
EcoSystem
Module
Job Number:
EcoSystem
Ballast
EcoSystem
Ballast
Daylight Sensor
Occupancy
Sensor
Job Name:
Eco-10 or
Hi-lume
Ballast
Model Numbers:
Page 18

369314 Rev. B 19 11.18.11
IEC PELV/NEC Class 2 QS System Wiring

t 5PUBMMFOHUIPGDPOUSPMMJOLNVTUOPUFYDFFEGU N

Wire Sizes (check compatibility in your area)
QS Link Wiring Length
Wire Gauge
Lutron Cable Part Number
Less than 500 ft (153 m)
Power (terminals 1 and 2)

1 pair 18 AWG (1.0 mm2)
(39$#-4 OPOQMFOVN
(391$#-4 QMFOVN
Data (terminals 3 and 4)

1 twisted, shielded pair 22 AWG (0.5 mm2)
500 to 2000 ft
(153 to 610 m)

1 pair 12 AWG (4.0 mm2)
(39$#-- OPOQMFOVN
(391$#-- QMFOVN


GRAFIK Eye QS
Control Unit
seeTouch QS
wallstations
Sivoia QS
Shade
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
Sivoia QS
smart panel

GRAFIK Eye QS
Control Unit
seeTouch QS
wallstations
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
Sivoia QS
smart panel
LUTRON
Sivoia QS
Shade
LUTRON
LUTRON
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 19

369314 Rev. B 20 11.18.11
Mounting
Standard 4-gang
U.S. wallbox,
3` in (89 mm) deep
(available from
Lutron, P/N 241-400)
Hinged
top lid
Mounting
screws (4)
GRAFIK Eye
QS with
EcoSystem
control unit
Hinged
bottom lid
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 20
Wireless Control Unit with DALI (CE)

369316 Rev. A 1 03.07.11
GRAFIK Eye QS Wireless Control Unit with DALI (CE)
1
2
3
4
LUTRON
Description
GRAFIK Eye QS with DALI is the premier energy-saving lighting and shade
control. GRAFIK Eye QS features an astronomic timeclock, intuitive lighting
presets, and direct shade control, which are seamlessly integrated with DALIcompliant output devices, and Lutrons QS components and systems. Now
with wireless technology and an integral DALI-compliant bus supply, you can
use the GRAFIK Eye QS Wireless with DALI to control digital loads and shades
without interfaces, and integrate with a variety of Lutron wireless products
and systems, including Radio Powr SavrTM occupancy, vacancy, and daylight
sensors, Sivoia QS Wireless shades, PicoTM wireless control, and other
GRAFIK Eye QS wireless units. Additionally, the GRAFIK Eye QS Wireless is
compatible with all Lutron wired QS products and systems.
GRAFIK Eye QS Wireless with DALI is compatible with Quantum.
239 mm
(94 in)
10 mm
(4 in)
51 mm
(2 in)
119 mm
(4$ in)
Front View
Side View
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 1

369316 Rev. A 2 03.07.11
System Topologies
The GRAFIK Eye QS Wireless with DALI can be specified in three different system topologies. Examples of each are
shown below.
Wired QS link
seeTouch QS
LUTRON
seeTouch
QSE-CI-NWK-E
QS
QS Sensor
Module
LUTRON
Quantum
(optional)
24 V
DALI 1 DALI 2
TM
230 V~ 50/60 Hz 100 mA

www.lutron.com
+44.(0)20.7680.4481
Power
Sivoia QS
shade
Ethernet
QSNE-2DAL-D
Test
N
QS
Energi Savr Node QS
Hi Temp
COM
IR
Occ
MUX
MUX
Com
IR
Occ
20 V
Com
20 V
Photo
GRAFIK Eye QS
wireless
Photo
GRAFIK Eye QS
wireless
0,5 Nm
8 mm
Energi Savr
NodeTM
Wired
occupancy
sensor
DALI devices

Wireless System

10 m
(30 ft)
wireless
range;
20 m
(60 ft) in
open air
GRAFIK Eye QS
wireless
Wireless
daylight
sensor
Wireless
Sivoia QS
shade
LUTRON
Wired QS link
Pico
wireless
control
GRAFIK Eye QS
wireless
GRAFIK Eye QS
wireless
Wireless
occupancy
sensor
LUTRON
Wireless
Sivoia QS
shade
DALI
devices
Job Name:
Job Number:
LUTRON
Pico wireless
control
DALI
devices
Wireless
daylight
sensor
seeTouch seeTouch
QS
QS
Model Numbers:
Wired
occupancy
sensor
Wireless
occupancy
sensor
Page 2

369316 Rev. A 3 03.07.11
Page LEDs
1 9
Optional Page Button

(16-zone unit)
3 11
2 10
4 12
5 13
6 14
7 15
8 16
9-16
1-8
OK
1
2
3
4
Zone
control
Optional
shade
control
columns
Infrared
receiver
USB type
mini B
Lighting
control
keypad
Note: Symbol-based (-SGN) engraving shown.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Info
screen
Features
t -VUSPOTQSPQSJFUBSZ$MFBS$POOFDUTM
RF technology. Operates in 868 MHz band.
plus Off.
t 5XFMWF
QS wallstations.
t 0QUJPOBMJOUFHSBUFETIBEFDPOUSPMCVUUPOT
which can also be added to the unit after
installation.
lights.
t "MMPXTTFUVQPGMJHIUJOHTDFOFTBOETIBEF
presets using buttons on the control unit.
SFDFJWFS
energy savings, zone labeling, programming,
and Digital Addressable Load setup.
t 24DPNNVOJDBUJPOMJOLGPSTFBNMFTTJOUFHSBUJPO
of lights, motorised window treatments,
wallstations, and integration interfaces.
components.
Powr SavrTM occupancy and vacancy sensors,
Sivoia QS wireless shades, Pico wireless
control, and other GRAFIK Eye QS wireless
products.
t $POUSPMVQUP PS[POFTPG%"-*
compliant loads from internal bus supply.
t 6QUP%"-*DPNQMJBOUPVUQVUEFWJDFTDBO
be addressed and grouped into zones.
Page 3

369316 Rev. A 4 03.07.11
Specifications
Input Power
t 7
50/60 Hz

t6QUP%"-*DPNQMJBOUPVUQVUEFWJDFT EFWJDFTNVTU
comply with IEC/EN 60929) can be addressed and
grouped into zones.
t#FGPSFTZTUFNJTBEESFTTFE ;POFXJMMUSBOTNJU
broadcast commands to all DALI-compliant loads wired
to the GRAFIK Eye QS.
Key Design Features
t 3'NFFUT*&$
t 5FTUFEUPXJUITUBOEWPMUBHFTVSHFTPGVQUP7
and current surges of up to 3 000 A. Lightning strike
protection meets ANSI/IEEE 62.41-1980 standard.
t 5IFGRAFIK Eye QS supplies 3 Power Draw Units (PDUs)
on the QS link.
QS Link, Lutron PN 369405.
Environment
t UP$ UP'
Compliance
t $&
easy reading.
QS interfaces.
can be set differently for each scene: 0 to 59 seconds, or
1 to 60 minutes. Maximum fade time from Off is
3 seconds.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Shade Control
columns.
delay from column to column.
Zone Control
adjust the zone.
Info Screen
t 0-&% PSHBOJD-&%
t 4UBUVTPGSFBMUJNF[POFQFSDFOUBHFBOEFOFSHZ
savings.
Page 4

369316 Rev. A 5 03.07.11
Specifications
Eye QS.
location.

features:
sensors
sensors
connects control units, wallstations, motorised shades,
and control interfaces.
t $MBTT$MBTTXJSJOHDPOOFDUT%"-*DPNQMJBOUPVUQVU
devices to control unit.
Infrared
t *OGSBSFE *3
8 scenes, raise/lower lighting zones, or raise/lower
shades.
t N GU
MJOFPGTJHIUSBOHF
t 5FSNJOBMCMPDLJOGSBSFEJOQVUGPSEJSFDUDPOUBDUXJUI
external IR connection.
controllers.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:

(QSWS2)
features:
- Zone toggle, partitioning, sequencing, fine tune, panic
operates in the 868 MHz band
systems, such as:
- Pico (P/N QSR8P and QSRKP)
sensors
(P/N LRF3-)
- Other GRAFIK Eye QS wireless units (P/N QSGRK-)
Module for details.
Page 5

369316 Rev. A 6 03.07.11
Specifications
Interface (QSE-IO)
guide).
t ;POF5PHHMF"MMPXTBOJOQVUUPUPHHMFPOFPSNPSF
zones to a preset level and off.
Accessory Controls:
(QSE-CI-NWK-E)
(QSWS2-KS)
PGB[POFPSHSPVQPG
zones
5-16)
Occupancy Sensor(s)
t 5IFGRAFIK Eye QS works with occupancy sensors
through either:
- Zone Control: up to four sensors per zone activate
- Contact closure sensor wired to CCI input on back of
GRAFIK Eye QS
- Wireless Radio Powr Savr occupancy or vacancy
- Wired or wireless sensors connected QS Sensor
Module (QSM)
t *GBMMTFOTPSTJOBHSPVQEFUFDUWBDBODZ UIFOUIF
GRAFIK Eye QS will go to the designated vacancy
(QSR8P models)
10 m (30 ft) range (20 m/60 ft in open air). It provides
the following features:
- Scene control: the Pico can access scene 1, scene
16, and Off on the GRAFIK Eye QS, and can raise
and lower lighting levels

t &OFSHJ4BWS/PEFTM QS(ESN)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 6

369316 Rev. A 7 03.07.11
Specifications
Daylight Sensor(s)
t 5IF(3"'*,&ZF QS with DALI works with compatible
daylight sensors to adjust electric light levels based on
measured daylight levels. Sensors can be configured to
control either GRAFIK Eye QS zones or groups of DALI
loads independent of zoning.
with LRF3)
module (QSM3)
sensor
t *O(SPVQ.PEF BEBZMJHIUTFOTPSDBODPOUSPMPOFPS
more DALI loads, regardless of how they are zoned on
the GRAFIK Eye QS.
levels
by-scene basis
3(#$.:%.9MPBET
Programming Menu.
Eye QS.

(Terminal A).
types of inputs:
release event.
24 V .
- Occupancy: If an occupancy sensor is wired directly
to the GRAFIK Eye QS, choose this setting so that the
occupancy sensor will work correctly.
afterhours mode.
timeclock.
- Never Save: Prevents any changes from being saved
Unit Dissipation
t "MMNPEFMTPGGRAFIK Eye QS Wireless for Digital
Addressable Loads dissipate no more than
35 BTUs/hour.
System Limits
t 5IF24XJSFEDPNNVOJDBUJPOMJOLJTMJNJUFEUP
devices (wired or wireless) or 100 zones.
t 5IF24XJSFMFTTDPNNVOJDBUJPOMJOLTVQQPSUTVQUP
wireless devices.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 7

369316 Rev. A 8 03.07.11
GRAFIK Eye QS Wireless for Digital Addressable Loads

QSGRK - _ D - _ _ WH
White
(standard
colour)
Digital
Addressable
Load
Prefix
Number
of Zones
6 = 6 zones
8 = 8 zones
16 = 16 zones
Number
of Shade
Columns
Omit = none
1 = 1 shade
column

6 Zones
8 Zones
QSGRK-6D-WH
QSGRK-8D-WH
QSGRK-6D-TWH
QSGRK-8D-TWH
QSGRK-6D-1WH
QSGRK-8D-1WH
QSGRK-6D-1TWH
QSGRK-8D-1TWH
Top Door
Colour
Omit = White
T = Translucent
Example:
QSGRK-16D-1TWH
1 shade column and translucent
top door.
charge.
16 Zones
QSGRK-16D-WH
QSGRK-16D-TWH
QSGRK-16D-1WH
QSGRK-16D-1TWH
Important Note:
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 8

369316 Rev. A 9 03.07.11

Example:
Base Unit
QSGRK - _ D
QSGRK-6D
6-zone base unit
and
QSGFP-2IV-SGN
shade columns and symbolbased engraving
Digital Addressable Loads
Prefix
Number
of Zones
6 = 6 zones
8 = 8 zones
16 = 16 zones
Faceplate Kit
QSGFP Faceplate
Prefix
Number
of Shade
Columns
Omit = none
1 = 1 column
2 = 2 columns
3 = 3 columns
Colour/
Finish
Top
Door
Colour
Keypad
Engraving
Code
Omit = same as
unit
T = Translucent

Architectural Matte
Finishes
Architectural Metal
Finishes
Satin Colour Matte

Finishes
White
Ivory
Beige
Gray
Brown
Black
Almond
Light Almond
Bright Brass
Bright Chrome
Bright Nickel
Satin Brass
Satin Chrome
Satin Nickel
Antique Brass
Antique Bronze
Snow
Biscuit
Eggshell
Taupe
Midnight
Limestone
Stone
Desert Stone
Terracotta
Hot
Goldstone
Palladium
Plum
Turquoise
Bluestone
Sea Glass
Greenbrier
Sienna
Merlot
Mocha Stone
WH
IV
BE
GR
BR
BL
AL
LA
BB
BC
BN
SB
SC
SN
QB
QZ
Anodised Aluminum
Finishes
Clear
Black
Brass
CLA
BLA
BRA
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
SW
BI
ES
TP
MN
LS
ST
DS
TC
HT
GS
PD
PL
TQ
BG
SG
GB
SI
MR
MS
Omit = Unengraved
SGN = International (symbol-based) Engraving
1
2
3
4
Lighting
keypad
Shade
column

Page 9

369316 Rev. A 10 03.07.11

Custom Button Kit

Kit Prefix
Button
Configuration
Keypad
Engraving
Code
Button
Colour/
Finish

raise/lower
(shade column)
5B
= 5-button
(lighting keypad)

Omit = Unengraved
Button Kit Custom

Colour/Finish
Codes
Architectural Matte
Finishes
White
Ivory
Beige
Gray
Brown
Black
Almond
Light Almond
WH
IV
BE
GR
BR
BL
AL
LA
Satin Colour Matte

Finishes
Snow
Biscuit
Eggshell
Taupe
SW
BI
ES
TP
2
3
4
Lighting
keypad
Shade
column

Custom Stripe Kit
QSGS - ___
Stripe Colour/
Finish
Stripe
Kit
Prefix

Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 10

369316 Rev. A 11 03.07.11

Standard Colour Combinations
F (faceplate)
S (stripe)
1
2

the bottom lid.
B (buttons)
3
4
F (faceplate)
LUTRON
Suffix
Faceplate (F)
Architectural Matte
WH
White
IV
Ivory
BE
Beige
GR
Gray
BR
Brown
BL
Black
AL
Almond
LA
Light Almond
Architectural Metal
BB
Bright Brass
BC
Bright Chrome
BN
Bright Nickel
SB
Satin Brass
SC
Satin Chrome
SN
Satin Nickel
QB
Antique Brass
QZ
Antique Bronze
Anodised
CLA
Clear
BLA
Black
BRA
Brass
Suffix
Faceplate (F)
Satin Matte
Gray
White
MN
Midnight
Beige
Ivory
TP
Taupe
Ivory
Beige
SW
Snow
Black
Gray
ES
Eggshell
Black
Brown
BI
Biscuit
Gray
Black
LS
Limestone
Light Almond Almond
ST
Stone
Almond
Light Almond DS
Desert Stone
TC
Terracotta
Black
Black
BG
Bluestone
Black
Black
HT
Hot
Black
Black
MR
Merlot
Black
Black
SI
Sienna
Black
Black
GB
Greenbrier
Black
Black
SG
Sea Glass
Black
Black
MS
Mocha Stone
Black
Black
GS
Goldstone
PD
Palladium
Black
Black
PL
Plum
Black
Black
TQ
Turquoise
Black
Black
Stripe (S)
Button (B)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Stripe (S)
Button (B)
Gray
Gray
Gray
Beige
Eggshell
Gray
Gray
Taupe
Taupe
Gray
Taupe
Taupe
Brown
Gray
Gray
Taupe
Ivory
Gray
Taupe
Gray
Black
Taupe
Snow
Eggshell
Biscuit
Gray
Gray
Taupe
Taupe
Gray
Taupe
Taupe
Brown
Gray
Gray
Taupe
Ivory
Gray
Taupe
Gray
Page 11

369316 Rev. A 12 03.07.11
Overview
Terminations
DALI-compliant bus
(D1, D2)
Input Power
QS Communication link
and 24 V power
D1 D1 D2 D2
IR input
Wire Gauge
4.0 mm2 "8(

2.5 mm2 "8(

1.5 mm2 "8(

1.0 mm2 "8(
Maximum DALI-compliant
Bus Wire Length
N GU
N GU
N GU
N GU
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 12

369316 Rev. A 13 03.07.11

concerning PDUs.
A
Power Group 1
LUTRON
GRAFIK Eye QS
control unit
Supplies PDUs
A
B
Control Interfaces
Consume PDUs
(Do not connect

terminal 2: 24 V )
Wallstations
Consume PDUs
Power Group 2
Terminals 1, 2, 3,
and 4 (Common,
24 V , and
data) connect
devices within a
power group.
B
Terminal 2
(24 V ) is NOT
connected
between power
groups.
Energi Savr NodeTM

unit Supplies PDUs
Wallstations
Consume PDUs
(Do not connect

terminal 2: 24 V )
Power Group 3
A
QS Power Supply
Supplies PDUs


Occupancy Sensor
Consumes PDUs
(Do not connect

terminal 2: 24 V )
Quantum Processor
(if applicable)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 13

369316 Rev. A 14 03.07.11
Line Voltage Wiring
Not used
Rear of
QS control unit

is labeled L.
220-240 V
only
1 2 3 4 5 6 L N
Distribution Panel
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 14

369316 Rev. A 15 03.07.11
DALI-Compliant Bus Wiring

DALI-Compliant Bus Link Terminal Detail
D1 D1 D2 D2
D2
D1
DALI-compliant
loads
D2
Note: DALI-compliant bus link wires are

polarity-insensitive. Labels for D1 and
D2 are for illustration purposes only.
D1
To additional
DALI-compliant loads
DALI-Compliant Bus Wiring Example
DALI-compliant Bus
DALI-compliant
load
DALI-compliant
load
LUTRON
GRAFIK Eye QS
wireless for Digital
Addressable Loads
(limit one per DALIcompliant link)
DALI-compliant
load
Job Name:
Job Number:
To additional
DALI-compliant
loads (up to 64
total)
Model Numbers:
Page 15

369316 Rev. A 16 03.07.11
IEC PELV/NEC Class 2 QS Link Wiring

- Two 1.0 mm2 (18 AWG) conductors for control power.
- One twisted, shielded pair of 1.0 mm2 (22 AWG) for data link.

DALI-compliant Bus
QS
Control Unit
Sivoia QS
Shade
seeTouch QS
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
Sivoia QS smart
panel

DALI-compliant Bus
QS
Control Unit
seeTouch QS
LUTRON
LUTRON
DALI-compliant Bus
Sivoia QS
smart panel
LUTRON
Sivoia QS
Shade
LUTRON
LUTRON
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 16

369316 Rev. A 17 03.07.11
Mounting
Standard 4-gang
U.S. wallbox,
89 mm (3.5 in) deep
(available from
Hinged
top lid
Mounting
screws (4)
GRAFIK Eye
QS control unit
Hinged
bottom lid
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 17
Wireless Control Unit with DALI (CE Limited)

369318 Rev. B 1 11.18.11
GRAFIK Eye QS Wireless Control Unit with DALI (CE Limited)
1
2
3
4
LUTRON
Description
GRAFIK Eye QS with DALI is the premier energy-saving lighting and shade
control. GRAFIK Eye QS features an astronomic timeclock, intuitive lighting
presets, and direct shade control, which are seamlessly integrated with DALIcompliant output devices, and Lutrons QS components and systems. Now
with wireless technology and an integral DALI-compliant bus supply, you can
use the GRAFIK Eye QS Wireless with DALI to control digital loads and shades
without interfaces, and integrate with a variety of Lutron wireless products
and systems, including Radio Powr SavrTM occupancy, vacancy, and daylight
sensors, Sivoia QS Wireless shades, PicoTM wireless control, and other
GRAFIK Eye QS wireless units. Additionally, the GRAFIK Eye QS Wireless is
compatible with all Lutron wired QS products and systems.
GRAFIK Eye QS Wireless with DALI is compatible with Quantum.
239 mm
(94 in)
10 mm
(4 in)
51 mm
(2 in)
119 mm
(4$ in)
Front View
Side View
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 1

369318 Rev. B 2 11.18.11
System Topologies
The GRAFIK Eye QS Wireless with DALI can be specified in three different system topologies. Examples of each are
shown below.
seeTouch QS
LUTRON
seeTouch
QSE-CI-NWK-E
QS
LUTRON
Quantum
(optional)
24 V
DALI 1 DALI 2
TM
QSNE-2DAL-D
Test
QS Sensor
Module
Ethernet
Energi Savr Node QS
Hi Temp
230 V~ 50/60 Hz 100 mA

www.lutron.com
+44.(0)20.7680.4481
Power
Sivoia QS
shade
QS
COM
IR
Occ
IR
Occ
20 V
2
4
MUX
MUX
Com
Photo
20 V
GRAFIK Eye QS
wireless
Photo
GRAFIK Eye QS
wireless
Com
Wired QS link
0,5 Nm
8 mm
Energi Savr
NodeTM
Wired
occupancy
sensor
DALI devices

Wireless System

10 m
(30 ft)
wireless
range;
20 m
(60 ft) in
open air
GRAFIK Eye QS
wireless
Wireless
daylight
sensor
Wireless
Sivoia QS
shade
LUTRON
Wired QS link
Pico
wireless
control
GRAFIK Eye QS
wireless
GRAFIK Eye QS
wireless
Wireless
occupancy
sensor
seeTouch seeTouch
QS
QS
LUTRON
Wireless
Sivoia QS
shade
DALI
devices
Job Name:
Job Number:
Pico wireless
control
DALI
devices
Wireless
daylight
sensor
LUTRON
Model Numbers:
Wired
occupancy
sensor
Wireless
occupancy
sensor
Page 2

369318 Rev. B 3 11.18.11
Page LEDs
1 9

(16-zone unit)
3 11
2 10
4 12
5 13
6 14
7 15
8 16
9-16
1-8
OK
1
2
3
4
Zone
control
Optional
shade
control
columns
Infrared
receiver
USB type
mini B
Lighting
control
keypad
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Info
screen
Features
technology. Operates in limited 868 MHz band.
plus Off.
t 5XFMWF
QS wallstations.
installation.
lights.
SFDFJWFS
energy savings, zone labeling, programming,
components.
Powr SavrTM occupancy and vacancy sensors,
Sivoia QS wireless shades, Pico wireless
control, and other GRAFIK Eye QS wireless
products.
be addressed and grouped into zones.
Page 3

369318 Rev. B 4 11.18.11
Specifications
Input Power
t 7
50/60 Hz

comply with IEC/EN 60929) can be addressed and
grouped into zones.
to the GRAFIK Eye QS.
Key Design Features
t 3'NFFUT*&$
protection meets ANSI/IEEE 62.41-1980 standard.
Environment
t UP$ UP'

Compliance
t $&
easy reading.
QS interfaces.
1 to 60 minutes. Maximum fade time from Off is
3 seconds.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Shade Control
t 5IF(3"'*,&ZF QS can include up to 3 shade button
columns.
may be used on the same GRAFIK Eye QS control
unit.
Zone Control
adjust the zone.
Info Screen
t 0-&% PSHBOJD-&%
savings.
Page 4

369318 Rev. B 5 11.18.11
Specifications
Eye QS.
location.

features:
sensors
sensors
Infrared
t *OGSBSFE *3
t N GU
MJOFPGTJHIUSBOHF
external IR connection.
controllers.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:

(QSWS2)
features:
t 'FBUVSFT-VUSPOTQSPQSJFUBSZ$MFBS$POOFDUTM RF
Technology
t 0QFSBUFTJOUIFMJNJUFE.)[CBOE
such as:
- Pico (P/N QSRMP-)
sensors (P/N LRF4-)
- Other GRAFIK Eye QS wireless units (P/N QSGRM-)
(P/N QSRMP-)
- Control of one or more zones on the GRAFIK Eye
QS Wireless: turns zone(s) on or off, raises/lowers
zone(s), and goes to user-defined preset level
Page 5

369318 Rev. B 6 11.18.11
Specifications
Eye QS via the wired QS link.
or scenes on the GRAFIK Eye QS. Functionality varies;
refer to the documentation for the QS Sensor Module
for details.
Interface (QSE-IO)
guide).
zones to a preset level and off.
Accessory Controls:
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:

(QSE-CI-NWK-E)
t "MMPXTGPSNPOJUPSJOHBOEDPOUSPMPGUIFPVUQVUTBOE
local scenes of the GRAFIK Eye QS.
(QSWS2-KS)
t 3FDBMMTQSFTFUMJHIUMFWFMTGPSBOZUXPTDFOFTJODMVEJOH
Off
PGB[POFPSHSPVQ
of zones
Scenes 5-16)
t &OFSHJ4BWS/PEF QS (ESN)
Occupancy Sensor(s)
t 5IF(3"'*,&ZF QS works with occupancy sensors
through either:
- Zone Control: up to four sensors per zone activate
GRAFIK Eye QS
Module (QSM)
GRAFIK Eye QS will go to the designated vacancy
Page 6

369318 Rev. B 7 11.18.11
Specifications
Daylight Sensor(s)
t 5IF(3"'*,&ZF QS with DALI works with compatible
control either GRAFIK Eye QS zones or groups of DALI
loads independent of zoning.
with LRF4)
module (QSM4)
sensor
t *O(SPVQ.PEF BEBZMJHIUTFOTPSDBODPOUSPMPOFPSNPSF
DALI loads, regardless of how they are zoned on the
GRAFIK Eye QS.
levels
by-scene basis
3(#$.:%.9MPBET
Programming Menu.
Eye QS.

t &BDI(3"'*,&ZF QS has one contact closure input
(Terminal A).
- The attached device must provide a dry contact closure or
solid-state output.
types of inputs:
- Maintained (default): The GRAFIK Eye QS control unit will
act on both a contact closure and a contact open/release
event.
t &BDI(3"'*,&ZF QS can supply 50 mA maximum at
24 V .
the GRAFIK Eye QS, choose this setting so that the
detected, all lights will go to full on, and no operations will
be allowed until the emergency signal is cleared.
- Afterhours: Allows the CCI to start and end the afterhours
mode.
timeclock.
changes to the control unit. The current scene will stay on
until the CCI enables normal operation.
- Never Save: Prevents any changes from being saved while
the CCI is being used.
Unit Dissipation
t "MMNPEFMTPG(3"'*,&ZF QS Wireless for Digital
Addressable Loads dissipate no more than
35 BTUs/hour.
System Limits
t 5IF24XJSFEDPNNVOJDBUJPOMJOLJTMJNJUFEUPEFWJDFT
(wired or wireless) or 100 zones.
t 5IF24XJSFMFTTDPNNVOJDBUJPOMJOLTVQQPSUTVQUP
wireless devices.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 7

369318 Rev. B 8 11.18.11

Example:
Base Unit
QSGRM - _ D
QSGRM-6D
6-zone base unit
and
QSGFP-2IV-SGN
Prefix
Number
of Zones
6 = 6 zones
8 = 8 zones
16 = 16 zones
Faceplate Kit
QSGFP Faceplate
Prefix
Number
of Shade
Columns
Omit = none
1 = 1 column
2 = 2 columns
3 = 3 columns
Colour/
Finish
Top
Door
Colour
Keypad
Engraving
Code
Omit = same as
unit
T = Translucent

Architectural Matte
Finishes
Architectural Metal
Finishes
Satin Colour Matte

Finishes
White
Ivory
Beige
Gray
Brown
Black
Almond
Light Almond
Bright Brass
Bright Chrome
Bright Nickel
Satin Brass
Satin Chrome
Satin Nickel
Antique Brass
Antique Bronze
Snow
Biscuit
Eggshell
Taupe
Midnight
Limestone
Stone
Desert Stone
Terracotta
Hot
Goldstone
Palladium
Plum
Turquoise
Bluestone
Sea Glass
Greenbriar
Sienna
Merlot
Mocha Stone
WH
IV
BE
GR
BR
BL
AL
LA
BB
BC
BN
SB
SC
SN
QB
QZ
Anodised Aluminum
Finishes
Clear
Black
Brass
CLA
BLA
BRA
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
SW
BI
ES
TP
MN
LS
ST
DS
TC
HT
GS
PD
PL
TQ
BG
SG
GB
SI
MR
MS
Omit = Unengraved
1
2
3
4
Lighting
keypad
Shade
column

Page 8

369318 Rev. B 9 11.18.11

Custom Button Kit

Kit Prefix
Button
Configuration
Keypad
Engraving
Code
Button
Colour/
Finish

raise/lower
(shade column)
5B
= 5-button
(lighting keypad)

Omit = Unengraved
Button Kit Custom

Colour/Finish
Codes
Architectural Matte
Finishes
White
Ivory
Beige
Gray
Brown
Black
Almond
Light Almond
WH
IV
BE
GR
BR
BL
AL
LA
Satin Colour Matte

Finishes
Snow
Biscuit
Eggshell
Taupe
SW
BI
ES
TP
2
3
4
Lighting
keypad
Shade
column

Custom Stripe Kit
QSGS - ___
Stripe Colour/
Finish
Stripe
Kit
Prefix

Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 9

369318 Rev. B 10 11.18.11

F (faceplate)
S (stripe)
1
2

the bottom lid.
B (buttons)
3
4
F (faceplate)
LUTRON
Suffix
Faceplate (F)
Architectural Matte
WH
White
IV
Ivory
BE
Beige
GR
Gray
BR
Brown
BL
Black
AL
Almond
LA
Light Almond
Architectural Metal
BB
Bright Brass
BC
Bright Chrome
BN
Bright Nickel
SB
Satin Brass
SC
Satin Chrome
SN
Satin Nickel
QB
Antique Brass
QZ
Antique Bronze
Anodised
CLA
Clear
BLA
Black
BRA
Brass
Suffix
Faceplate (F)
Satin Matte
Gray
White
MN
Midnight
Beige
Ivory
TP
Taupe
Ivory
Beige
SW
Snow
Black
Gray
ES
Eggshell
Black
Brown
BI
Biscuit
Gray
Black
LS
Limestone
Light Almond Almond
ST
Stone
Almond
Light Almond DS
Desert Stone
TC
Terracotta
Black
Black
BG
Bluestone
Black
Black
HT
Hot
Black
Black
MR
Merlot
Black
Black
SI
Sienna
Black
Black
GB
Greenbriar
Black
Black
SG
Sea Glass
Black
Black
MS
Mocha Stone
Black
Black
GS
Goldstone
PD
Palladium
Black
Black
PL
Plum
Black
Black
TQ
Turquoise
Black
Black
Stripe (S)
Button (B)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Stripe (S)
Button (B)
Gray
Gray
Gray
Beige
Eggshell
Gray
Gray
Taupe
Taupe
Gray
Taupe
Taupe
Brown
Gray
Gray
Taupe
Ivory
Gray
Taupe
Gray
Black
Taupe
Snow
Eggshell
Biscuit
Gray
Gray
Taupe
Taupe
Gray
Taupe
Taupe
Brown
Gray
Gray
Taupe
Ivory
Gray
Taupe
Gray
Page 10

369318 Rev. B 11 11.18.11
Overview
Terminations
DALI-compliant bus
(D1, D2)
Input Power
and 24 V power
D1 D1 D2 D2
IR input
Wire Gauge
4.0 mm2 "8(

2.5 mm2 "8(

1.5 mm2 "8(

1.0 mm2 "8(
Bus Wire Length
N GU
N GU
N GU
N GU
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 11

369318 Rev. B 12 11.18.11

concerning PDUs.
A
Power Group 1
LUTRON
GRAFIK Eye QS
control unit
Supplies PDUs
A
B
Control Interfaces
Consume PDUs
(Do not connect

terminal 2: 24 V )
Wallstations
Consume PDUs
Power Group 2
Terminals 1, 2, 3,
and 4 (Common,
24 V , and
data) connect
devices within a
power group.
B
Terminal 2
(24 V ) is NOT
connected
between power
groups.
Energi Savr NodeTM

unit Supplies PDUs
Wallstations
Consume PDUs
(Do not connect

terminal 2: 24 V )
Power Group 3
A
QS Power Supply
Supplies PDUs


Occupancy Sensor
Consumes PDUs
(Do not connect

terminal 2: 24 V )
Quantum panel
Supplies PDUs
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 12

369318 Rev. B 13 11.18.11
Line Voltage Wiring
Not used
Rear of
QS control unit

is labeled L.
220-240 V
50/60 Hz
1 2 3 4 5 6 L N
Distribution Panel
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 13

369318 Rev. B 14 11.18.11

D1 D1 D2 D2
D2
D1
DALI-compliant
loads
D2

D1
To additional
DALI-compliant Bus
DALI-compliant
load
DALI-compliant
load
LUTRON
GRAFIK Eye QS
wireless for Digital
Addressable Loads
(limit one per DALIcompliant link)
DALI-compliant
load
Job Name:
Job Number:
To additional
DALI-compliant
loads (up to 64
total)
Model Numbers:
Page 14

369318 Rev. B 15 11.18.11


DALI-compliant Bus
QS
Control Unit
Sivoia QS
Shade
seeTouch QS
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
Sivoia QS
smart panel

DALI-compliant Bus
QS
Control Unit
seeTouch QS
LUTRON
LUTRON
DALI-compliant Bus
Sivoia QS
smart panel
LUTRON
Sivoia QS
Shade
LUTRON
LUTRON
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 15

369318 Rev. B 16 11.18.11
Mounting
Standard 4-gang
U.S. wallbox,
89 mm (3.5 in) deep
(available from
Hinged
top lid
Mounting
screws (4)
GRAFIK Eye
QS control unit
Hinged
bottom lid
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 16

369318 Rev. B 17 11.18.11
Lutron Approved DALI Ballasts

The Lutron policy requires that all DALI ballasts connected to Lutron DALI controllers be tested to meet the DALI
specification called out in the IEC Standard 60929. We have found that although many DALI device manufacturers
claim to make devices that meet the DALI standard, the devices fail when tested against a standard DALI
qualification tester.
As a service to our customers, we have pre-qualified ballasts from reputed vendors. To lower installation and
commissioning costs, we strongly encourage our customers to use devices from the approved list. Please check
for updates to this list at www.lutron.com.
If it is not possible to find an approved device that meets your job needs, please contact your Lutron salesperson,
applications engineer or construction manager. We might be able to recommend an alternative. If not we might, at
our discretion, charge a fee to test the ballast of your choice for compliance to the DALI standard.
If you need to send a DALI device to us for testing, please contact your Lutron salesperson, applications engineer
or construction manager for a quote.
Our goal is to create a hassle free commissioning process for our customers.
Manufacturer
Model Number
Date Tested
# of Lamps
Wattage
Lamp Type
Phillips
HF-R TD 14-35 TL5 EII
March 11th 2010
14-35 W
TL5
Phillips
HF-R TD 240 PL-L EII
March 11th 2010
40 W
PL-L
Phillips
HF-R TD 318 TLD EII
March 11th 2010
18 W
TL-D
Osram
QTI DALI 2x28/54 DIM
March 11th 2010
28,54 W
T5
Osram
March 11th 2010
14,24 W
T5
Osram
March 11th 2010
28,54 W
T5
Osram
25J%"-*9%*.
March 11th 2010
14,24 W
T5
Osram
25J%"-*9%*.
March 11th 2010
35?9,80 W
T5
Osram
25J%"-*9%*.
March 11th 2010
14,24 W
T5
Osram
25J%"-*9%*.
March 11th 2010
14,24 W
T5
Osram
25J%"-*5&9%*.
March 11th 2010
8
T8
Osram
25J%"-*9%*.
March 11th 2010
18 W
T8
Osram
QTi DALI 1x35/49/80 DIM
March 11th 2010
35,49,80 W
T5
Osram
25*%"-*5&9
March 11th 2010
18,42 W
T8
TRIDONIC.ATCO
1$"5&9$&-POFBMM-1
March 11th 2010
14 W
T5
TRIDONIC.ATCO
1$"5&9$&-POFBMM-1
March 11th 2010
28 W
T5
TRIDONIC.ATCO
DALI-PCD 300 one4all
March 11th 2010
30-300 VA
INC LV HAL
TRIDONIC.ATCO
1$"5$%&9$&-POFBMM
March 11th 2010
26 W
TC-TEL
TRIDONIC.ATCO
1$"5D&9$&-POFBMM
March 11th 2010
40 W
T5C
TRIDONIC.ATCO
1$"5$-&9$&-POFBMM
March 11th 2010
40 W
TC-L
TRIDONIC.ATCO
1$"5&9$&-POFBMM-1
March 11th 2010
35 W
T5
TRIDONIC.ATCO
1$"5&9$&-POFBMM
March 11th 2010
14 W
T5
TRIDONIC.ATCO
TE-DC2 0300 D101 one4all
March 11th 2010
300 VA
ELV
TRIDONIC.ATCO
TE-0150 one4all sc
March 11th 2010
150 VA
ELV
TRIDONIC.ATCO
TE-0105 one4all sc
March 11th 2010
20-105 W
INC LV HAL
Helvar
&-9TJ
March 11th 2010
28 W
T5
Sylvania
QTP 1x14 T5/UNV Dali
March 11th 2010
14 W
T5
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 17
CE Limited)

369317 Rev. A 1 03.07.11
CE Limited)
1
2
3
4
LUTRON
Description
GRAFIK Eye QS Wireless is the premier energy-saving light and window treatment
control. GRAFIK Eye QS includes an astronomic timeclock, intuitive lighting
presets, and direct window treatment control. Now with wireless technology, you
can use the GRAFIK Eye QS Wireless to seamlessly integrate with a variety of
Lutron wireless products and systems, including Radio Powr SavrTM occupancy,
vacancy, and daylight sensors, Sivoia QS Wireless window treatments, Pico
wireless control, and other GRAFIK Eye wireless products. Additionally, the
GRAFIK Eye QS Wireless is compatible with all Lutron wired QS products and
systems.
GRAFIK Eye QS Wireless is compatible with Quantum.
Fits into a 4-gang U.S. backbox, 89 mm (3.5 in) deep;
Lutron P/N 241-400
239 mm
(94 in)
10 mm
(4 in)
51 mm
(2 in)
119 mm
(4$ in)
Front View
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Side View
Page 1
CE Limited)
369317 Rev. A 2 03.07.11
System Topologies
20 V
GRAFIK Eye QS
wireless
LUTRON
seeTouch
QS
QSE-CI-NWK-E
LUTRON
24 V
MUX
IR
0,5 Nm
8 mm
Energi Savr
NodeTM
Quantum
(optional)
Wired
occupancy
sensor

Wireless System

10 m
(30 ft)
wireless
range;
20 m
(60 ft) in
open air
GRAFIK Eye QS
wireless
LUTRON
Wireless
Sivoia QS
shade
Wired QS link
Pico
wireless
control
GRAFIK Eye QS
wireless
GRAFIK Eye QS
wireless
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
Wireless
Sivoia QS
shade
Wireless
occupancy
sensor
Wired
occupancy
sensor
Pico
wireless
control
Wireless
daylight
sensor
Job Name:
Job Number:
seeTouch seeTouch
QS
QS
Model Numbers:
DALI 1 DALI 2
COM
TM
QSNE-2DAL-D
230 V~ 50/60 Hz 100 mA
www.lutron.com
+44.(0)20.7680.4481
Power
QS Sensor
Module
MUX
Energi Savr Node QS
Test
Sivoia QS
shade
Com
IR
Occ
Occ
20 V
Photo
Hi Temp
seeTouch
QS
Ethernet
QS
3
Photo
GRAFIK Eye QS
wireless
Com
Wired QS link
Wireless
occupancy
sensor
Wireless
daylight
sensor
Page 2
CE Limited)

369317 Rev. A 3 03.07.11
1
2
3
4
LUTRON
OK
1
2
3
4
Optional window Zone

treatment control control
keypad

mini B
control
receiver
keypad
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Info
screen
Features
RF technology. Operates in limited 868 MHz
band.
scenes, plus Off.
t 5XFMWF
QS wallstations.
after installation.
lights.
unit.
SFDFJWFS
programming.
integration of lights, motorised window
interfaces.
components.
PowrSavrTM occupancy and vacancy sensors,
Sivoia QS wireless window treatments, Pico
wireless control, and other GRAFIK Eye
QS wireless products.
Page 3
CE Limited)

369317 Rev. A 4 03.07.11
Specifications
Input Power
t 7
50 Hz
t *ODBOEFTDFOU
t )BMPHFO
cold cathode)
interfaces:
t /POEJN
Key Design Features
t 3'NFFUT*&$
6 000 V
Environment
t UP$ UP'
Compliance
t $&
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:

easy reading.
QS interfaces.
3 seconds.
Shade Control
columns.
Zone Control
adjust the zone.
Page 4
CE Limited)

369317 Rev. A 5 03.07.11
Specifications
Info Screen
t 0-&% PSHBOJD-&%
Eye QS.
location.

features:
sensors
sensors
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Infrared
t *OGSBSFE *3
t N GU
MJOFPGTJHIUSBOHF
controls.
Accessory Controls and Devices
t 8JSFETFF5PVDI QS keypads can be added to the
control link.
t &BDIGRAFIK Eye QS can power up to 3 wired
seeTouch QS controls.
Technology
t 0QFSBUFTJOUIFMJNJUFE.)[CBOE
such as:
- Pico Wireless Control (P/N QSRMP-)
sensors
(P/N LRF4-)
- Other GRAFIK Eye QS wireless units (P/N QSGRM-)
Module for details.
Page 5
CE Limited)

369317 Rev. A 6 03.07.11
Specifications
Interface (QSE-IO)
guide).
Accessory Controls:
(QSE-CI-NWK-E)
Occupancy Sensor(s)
through either:
GRAFIK Eye QS
- Wireless Radio Powr Savr occupancy or vacancy
(QSM)
level.
(P/N QSRMP-)
following features:
lighting levels

(QSWS2-KS)
PGB[POFPSHSPVQPG
zones
5-16)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 6
CE Limited)

369317 Rev. A 7 03.07.11
Specifications
Daylight Sensor(s)
with LRF4)
module (QSM4)
QS zones:
sensor
by-scene basis
3(#$.:%.9MPBET

(Terminal A).
types of inputs:
release event.
24 V .
the GRAFIK Eye QS.
afterhours mode.
timeclock.
Programming Menu.
Eye QS.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 7
CE Limited)

369317 Rev. A 8 03.07.11
Specifications
Capacities
Zones
Unit
Capacity
(watts)
3
1 500
4
2 000
6
2 300
Zone Capacity
Capacity
(watts)
500
500
500
Load Type Notes


System Limits
PS[POFT
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 8
CE Limited)

369317 Rev. A 9 03.07.11

Example:
Base Unit
QSGRM - _ PCE
QSGRM-6PCE
6-zone base unit
and
QSGFP-2IV-SGN
Prefix
Number
of Zones
3 = 3 zones
4 = 4 zones
6 = 6 zones
Faceplate Kit
QSGFP -
FaceNumber of
Prefix
Columns
Omit = none
1 = 1 column
2 = 2 columns
3 = 3 columns
Colour/
Finish
Top
Door
Colour
Keypad
Engraving
Code
Omit = same as
unit
T = Translucent

Architectural Matte
Finishes
Architectural Metal
Finishes
Satin Colour Matte

Finishes
Standard
(ship in 48 hours)
White
Ivory
Beige
Gray
Brown
Black
Almond
Light Almond
Bright Brass
Bright Chrome
Bright Nickel
Satin Brass
Satin Chrome
Satin Nickel
Antique Brass
Antique Bronze
Snow
Biscuit
Eggshell
Taupe
Midnight
Limestone
Stone
Desert Stone
Terracotta
Hot
Goldstone
Palladium
Plum
Turquoise
Bluestone
Sea Glass
Greenbrier
Sienna
Merlot
Mocha Stone
WH
IV
BE
GR
BR
BL
AL
LA
International
Wallbox Finishes
Argentum
Mica
Arctic White
AR
MC
AW
BB
BC
BN
SB
SC
SN
QB
QZ
Anodised Aluminum
Finishes
Clear
Black
Brass
CLA
BLA
BRA
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
SW
BI
ES
TP
MN
LS
ST
DS
TC
HT
GS
PD
PL
TQ
BG
SG
GB
SI
MR
MS
Omit = Unengraved
1
2
3
4
Lighting
keypad
Window
treatment
column

Page 9
CE Limited)

369317 Rev. A 10 03.07.11

Custom Button Kit

Kit Prefix
Button
Configuration
Keypad
Engraving
Code
Button
Colour/
Finish

raise/lower
(window
treatment
column)
5B
= 5-button
(lighting keypad)

Omit = Unengraved
Button Kit Custom

Colour/Finish Codes
Architectural Matte
Finishes
White
Ivory
Beige
Gray
Brown
Black
Almond
Light Almond
WH
IV
BE
GR
BR
BL
AL
LA
Satin Colour Matte

Finishes
Snow
Biscuit
Eggshell
Taupe
SW
BI
ES
TP
2
3
4
Lighting
keypad
Window
treatment
column

Custom Stripe Kit
QSGS - WH
Stripe Colour/
Finish
Stripe
Kit
Prefix

Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 10
CE Limited)

369317 Rev. A 11 03.07.11
GRAFIK Eye QS Wireless Standard Colour Combinations

F (faceplate)
S (stripe)
1
2

the bottom lid.
B (buttons)
3
4
F (faceplate)
LUTRON
Suffix
Faceplate (F)
Architectural Matte
WH
White
IV
Ivory
BE
Beige
GR
Gray
BR
Brown
BL
Black
AL
Almond
LA
Light Almond
Architectural Metal
BB
Bright Brass
BC
Bright Chrome
BN
Bright Nickel
SB
Satin Brass
SC
Satin Chrome
SN
Satin Nickel
QB
Antique Brass
QZ
Antique Bronze
Anodised
CLA
Clear
BLA
Black
BRA
Brass
AR
Argentum
MC
Mica
AW
Arctic White
Stripe (S)
Button (B)
Suffix
Faceplate (F)
Satin Matte
Gray
White
MN
Midnight
Beige
Ivory
TP
Taupe
Ivory
Beige
SW
Snow
Black
Gray
ES
Eggshell
Black
Brown
BI
Biscuit
Gray
Black
LS
Limestone
Light Almond Almond
ST
Stone
Almond
Light Almond DS
Desert Stone
TC
Terracotta
Black
Black
BG
Bluestone
Black
Black
HT
Hot
Black
Black
MR
Merlot
Black
Black
SI
Sienna
Black
Black
GB
Greenbrier
Black
Black
SG
Sea Glass
Black
Black
MS
Mocha Stone
Black
Black
GS
Goldstone
PD
Palladium
Black
Black
PL
Plum
Black
Black
TQ
Turquoise
Black
Black
Black
Gray
Gray
Job Number:
Button (B)
Gray
Gray
Gray
Beige
Eggshell
Gray
Gray
Taupe
Taupe
Gray
Taupe
Taupe
Brown
Gray
Gray
Taupe
Ivory
Gray
Taupe
Gray
Black
Taupe
Snow
Eggshell
Biscuit
Gray
Gray
Taupe
Taupe
Gray
Taupe
Taupe
Brown
Gray
Gray
Taupe
Ivory
Gray
Taupe
Gray
Black
Black
White
Job Name:
Stripe (S)
Model Numbers:
Page 11
CE Limited)

369317 Rev. A 12 03.07.11
Wiring Diagrams
Terminations
Communication link
A B C
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 L N
1 2
power
IR input
Load wiring
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 12
CE Limited)
369317 Rev. A 13 03.07.11

concerning PDUs.
A
Power Group 1
LUTRON
GRAFIK Eye QS
control unit
Supplies PDUs
A
B
Control Interfaces
Consume PDUs
(Do not connect

terminal 2: 24 V )
Wallstations
Consume PDUs
Power Group 2
Terminals 1, 2, 3,
and 4 (Common,
24 V , and
data) connect
devices within a
power group.
B
Terminal 2
(24 V ) is NOT
connected
between power
groups.
Energi Savr NodeTM

unit Supplies PDUs
Wallstations
Consume PDUs
(Do not connect

terminal 2: 24 V )
Power Group 3
A
QS Power Supply
Supplies PDUs


Occupancy Sensor
Consumes PDUs
(Do not connect

terminal 2: 24 V )
Quantum Processor
(if applicable)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 13
CE Limited)

369317 Rev. A 14 03.07.11
Mounting
Mounting
screws (4)
Standard 4-gang
U.S. wallbox,
89 mm (3.5 in)
deep
Hinged
top lid
GRAFIK Eye
QS control unit
Hinged
bottom lid
Line Voltage Wiring

Rear of
QS control unit
1 2 3 4 5 6 L N
To Load 1

is labeled L.
To Load 2
To Load 3
To Load 4
To Load 5
To Load 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 L N
Distribution Panel
230 V
50 Hz
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 14
CE Limited)

369317 Rev. A 15 03.07.11

Two 1.0 mm2 (18 AWG) conductors for control power.
One twisted, shielded pair of 0.5 mm2 (22 AWG) for data link.


QS
Control Unit
Sivoia QS
window
treatment
seeTouch QS
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
Sivoia QS
smart panel

QS
Control Unit
seeTouch QS
LUTRON
LUTRON
Sivoia QS
smart panel
LUTRON
Sivoia QS
window
treatment
LUTRON
LUTRON
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 15
Limited 434 MHz)

369469 Rev. A 1 10.25.11
Limited 434 MHz)
1
2
3
4
LUTRON
Description
GRAFIK Eye QS Wireless is the premier energy-saving light and window
treatment control. GRAFIK Eye QS includes an astronomic timeclock, intuitive
lighting presets, and direct window treatment control. Now with wireless
technology, you can use the GRAFIK Eye QS Wireless to seamlessly integrate
with a variety of Lutron wireless products and systems, including Radio Powr
SavrTM occupancy, vacancy, and daylight sensors, Sivoia QS Wireless window
treatments, Pico wireless controls, and other GRAFIK Eye wireless products.
QS products and systems, including Quantum.
239 mm
(94 in)
10 mm
(4 in)
51 mm
(2 in)
119 mm
(4$ in)
Front View
Side View
Fits into a 4-gang U.S. backbox, 89 mm (3.5 in) deep; Lutron P/N 245-254 or
76 mm (3.0 in) deep; Lutron P/N 241-400.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 1
Limited 434 MHz)
369469 Rev. A 2 10.25.11
System Topologies
Wired QS link
GRAFIK Eye QS
wireless
seeTouch
QS
seeTouch QS
LUTRON
QS Sensor
Module
LUTRON
QSE-CI-NWK-E
Quantum
(optional)
24 V
MUX
COM
IR
Occ
MUX
DALI 1 DALI 2
230 V~ 50/60 Hz 100 mA

www.lutron.com
+44.(0)20.7680.4481
Power
N
TM
QSNE-2DAL-D
Test
L
Com
IR
Occ
20 V
Com
Photo
Photo
Energi Savr Node QS
Hi Temp
Sivoia QS
shade
Ethernet
QS
3
20 V
GRAFIK Eye QS
wireless
0,5 Nm
8 mm
Energi Savr
NodeTM
Wired
occupancy
sensor

Wireless System
Example of Mixed Wired/GRAFIK Eye-centric

Wireless System
10 m
(30 ft)
wireless
range;
20 m
(60 ft)
in open air
GRAFIK Eye QS
wireless
Wireless
Sivoia QS
shade
LUTRON
Wired QS link
Pico
wireless
control
GRAFIK Eye QS
wireless
GRAFIK Eye QS
wireless
LUTRON
Wireless
Sivoia QS
shade
Wireless
occupancy
sensor
Wireless
daylight
sensor
Job Number:
LUTRON
Pico
wireless
control
Wired
occupancy
sensor
Wireless
occupancy
sensor
Wireless
daylight
sensor
Job Name:
seeTouch seeTouch
QS
QS
Model Numbers:
Page 2
Limited 434 MHz)

369469 Rev. A 3 10.25.11
Features
technology. Operates in Limited 434 MHz band.
plus Off.
t 5XFMWF
wallstations.
buttons, which can also be added to the unit after
installation.
treatment presets using buttons on the control unit.
SFDFJWFS
energy savings, zone labeling, and programming.
occupancy sensor.
lights, motorised window treatments, wallstations,
and integration interfaces.
systems, including Radio Powr SavrTM occupancy
and vacancy sensors, Sivoia QS wireless window
treatments, Pico wireless control, and other
GRAFIK Eye QS wireless products.
locate and operate.
1
2
3
4
LUTRON
OK
1
2
3
4
Zone
control
Optional window
treatment
control keypad

mini B
control
receiver
keypad
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Info
screen
Page 3
Limited 434 MHz)

369469 Rev. A 4 10.25.11
Specifications
Input Power
t 7
50/60 Hz
Note: Maximum load 500 W per zone; 2 300 W total
t *ODBOEFTDFOU
t )BMPHFO
t /POEJN JODBOEFTDFOU NBHOFUJDMPXWPMUBHF PSOFPODPME
cathode)
interfaces:
t /POEJN
t 7
Key Design Features
1980. Can withstand voltage surges of up to
6 000 V
line voltage variations (no visible flicker with +/-2% change in
RMS voltage per cycle, and +/-2% Hz change in frequency
per second).
t 5IF(3"'*,&ZF QS supplies 3 Power Draw Units (PDUs)
on the QS link.
For complete information, see Power Draw Units on the QS
Link, Lutron PN 369405.
Environment
t UP$ UP'
Listings
t 3'NFFUT'$$
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:

easy reading.
QS interfaces.
3 seconds.
Shade Control
columns.
may be used on the same GRAFIK Eye QS control
unit.
RadioRA 2 systems.
Zone Control
adjust the zone.
Page 4
Limited 434 MHz)

369469 Rev. A 5 10.25.11
Specifications
Info Screen
t 0-&% PSHBOJD-&%
Eye QS.
location.
features:
sensors
sensors
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Infrared
t *OGSBSFE *3
t N GU
MJOFPGTJHIUSBOHF
controls.
operates in the Limited 434 MHz band
systems, such as:
- Pico (P/N QSRQP-)
sensors (P/N LRF7-)
- Other GRAFIK Eye QS wireless units (P/N QSGRQ-)
(QSWE)
t 8JSFETFF5PVDI QS wallstations provide the following
features:
- Certain functions are only available on specific
wallstation configurations. Refer to the seeTouch QS
(QSRQP models)
- Control of one or more zones on the GRAFIK Eye
QS Wireless: turns zone(s) on or off, raises/lowers
Page 5
Limited 434 MHz)

369469 Rev. A 6 10.25.11
Specifications
t 5IF244FOTPS.PEVMFQSPWJEFTBNFBOTUPMJOLXJSFEPS
wireless occupancy and daylight sensors to a
- Occupancy sensors wired (or wirelessly linked) to a
for details.

(QSWS2-KS)
PGB[POFPSHSPVQPG
zones.
5-16)

Interface (QSE-IO)
guide).
Unit Dissipation
t "MMNPEFMTPG(3"'*,&ZF QS Wireless control units
Limited 434 MHz) dissipate no more than
(230 V
100 BTUs/hour (29.3 W).

Accessory Controls:
(QSE-CI-NWK-E)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 6
Limited 434 MHz)

369469 Rev. A 7 10.25.11
Specifications
Occupancy Sensor(s)
through either:
GRAFIK Eye QS
(QSM7)
level.
Daylight Sensor(s)
with LRF7)
module (QSM7)
t "EBZMJHIUTFOTPSDBODPOUSPMPOFPSNPSF(3"'*,&ZF
QS zones:
sensor
by-scene basis
3(#$.:%.9MPBET
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:

(Terminal A).
types of inputs:
release event.
24 V .
the GRAFIK Eye QS.
afterhours mode.
timeclock.
Programming Menu.
Eye QS.
t *ODBTFUIFEJHJUQBTTXPSEJTGPSHPUUFO DPOUBDU-VUSPO
Page 7
Limited 434 MHz)

369469 Rev. A 8 10.25.11
Specifications
Capacities
Zones
Unit
Capacity
(watts)
6
2 300
Zone Capacity
Capacity
(watts)
500
Load Type Notes

GPS-VUSPOQPXFSNPEVMFT /(391#"6/(39&-7*"6/(39'%#*"6

System Limits
PS[POFT
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 8
Limited 434 MHz)

369469 Rev. A 9 10.25.11

Example:
Base Unit
QSGRQ - 6 PCE
QSGRQ-6PCE
6-zone base unit
and
QSGFP-2IV-SGN
Prefix
6 Zones
Faceplate Kit
QSGFP -
FaceNumber of
Prefix
Columns
Omit = none
1 = 1 column
2 = 2 columns
3 = 3 columns
Top
Door
Colour
Colour/
Finish
Keypad
Engraving
Code
Omit = same as
unit
T = Translucent

Architectural Matte
Finishes
Architectural Metal
Finishes
Satin Colour Matte

Finishes
Standard
(ship in 48 hours)
White
Ivory
Beige
Gray
Brown
Black
Almond
Light Almond
Bright Brass
Bright Chrome
Bright Nickel
Satin Brass
Satin Chrome
Satin Nickel
Antique Brass
Antique Bronze
Snow
Biscuit
Eggshell
Taupe
Midnight
Limestone
Stone
Desert Stone
Terracotta
Hot
Goldstone
Palladium
Plum
Turquoise
Bluestone
Sea Glass
Greenbrier
Sienna
Merlot
Mocha Stone
WH
IV
BE
GR
BR
BL
AL
LA
Anodised Aluminum
Finishes
Clear
Black
Brass
BB
BC
BN
SB
SC
SN
QB
QZ
CLA
BLA
BRA
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
SW
BI
ES
TP
MN
LS
ST
DS
TC
HT
GS
PD
PL
TQ
BG
SG
GB
SI
MR
MS
Omit = Unengraved
1
2
3
4
Lighting
keypad
Window
treatment
column

Page 9
Limited 434 MHz)

369469 Rev. A 10 10.25.11

Custom Button Kit

Kit Prefix
Button
Configuration
Keypad
Engraving
Code
Button
Colour/
Finish

raise/lower
(window
treatment
column)
5B
= 5-button
(lighting keypad)

Omit = Unengraved
Button Kit Custom

Colour/Finish Codes
Architectural Matte
Finishes
White
Ivory
Beige
Gray
Brown
Black
Almond
Light Almond
WH
IV
BE
GR
BR
BL
AL
LA
Satin Colour Matte

Finishes
Snow
Biscuit
Eggshell
Taupe
2
3
SW
BI
ES
TP
Lighting
keypad
Window
treatment
column

Custom Stripe Kit
QSGS - WH
Stripe Colour/
Finish
Stripe
Kit
Prefix

Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 10
Limited 434 MHz)

369469 Rev. A 11 10.25.11
Wiring Diagrams
Terminations
A B C
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 L N
1 2
Communication link
and 24 V power
IR input
Load wiring
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 11
Limited 434 MHz)

369469 Rev. A 12 10.25.11

concerning PDUs.
A
Power Group 1
LUTRON
GRAFIK Eye QS
control unit
Supplies PDUs
A
B
Control Interfaces
Consume PDUs
(Do not connect

terminal 2: 24 V )
Wallstations
Consume PDUs
Power Group 2
Terminals 1, 2, 3,
and 4 (Common,
24 V , and
data) connect
devices within a
power group.
B
Terminal 2
(24 V ) is NOT
connected
between power
groups.
Energi Savr NodeTM unit

Supplies PDUs
Wallstations
Consume PDUs
(Do not connect

terminal 2: 24 V )
Power Group 3
A
QS Power Supply
Supplies PDUs


Occupancy Sensor
Consumes PDUs
(Do not connect

terminal 2: 24 V )
Quantum Processor
(if applicable)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 12
Limited 434 MHz)

369469 Rev. A 13 10.25.11
Mounting
Mounting
screws (4)
Standard 4-gang
U.S. wallbox,
89 mm (3.5 in)
deep
Hinged
top lid
GRAFIK Eye
QS control unit
Hinged
bottom lid
Line Voltage Wiring

Rear of
QS control unit
1 2 3 4 5 6 L N
To Load 1

is labeled L.
To Load 2
To Load 3
To Load 4
To Load 5
To Load 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 L N
Distribution Panel
230 V
50/60 Hz
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 13
Limited 434 MHz)

369469 Rev. A 14 10.25.11


t *&$1&-7/&$ Class 2 wiring link:
Wire Gauge
Less than 153 m (500 ft)

1 pair 1.0 mm2 (18 AWG)
(39$#-4 OPOQMFOVN
(391$#-4 QMFOVN

1 twisted, shielded pair 0.5 mm2 (22 AWG)
153 to 610 m
(500 to 2 000 ft)

1 pair 4.0 mm2 (12 AWG)
(39$#-- OPOQMFOVN
(391$#-- QMFOVN

1 twisted, shielded pair 0.5 mm2 (22 AWG)

QS
Control Unit
Sivoia QS
window
treatment
seeTouch QS
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
Sivoia QS
smart panel

QS
Control Unit
seeTouch QS
LUTRON
LUTRON
Sivoia QS
smart panel
LUTRON
Sivoia QS
window
treatment
LUTRON
LUTRON
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 14
Wireless Control Unit

369416 Rev. B 1 09.30.11
GRAFIK Eye QS Wireless Control Unit
Open
Preset
Close
3
4
Off
LUTRON
Description
GRAFIK Eye QS Wireless is the premier energy-saving light and shade
control. GRAFIK Eye QS includes an astronomic timeclock, intuitive lighting
presets, and direct shade control. Now with wireless technology, you can use
the GRAFIK Eye QS Wireless to seamlessly integrate with a variety of Lutron
wireless products and systems, including RadioRA 2, Radio Powr SavrTM
occupancy, vacancy, and daylight sensors, Sivoia QS Wireless shades,
Pico wireless controls, and other GRAFIK Eye QS Wireless control units.
QS products and systems, including Quantum systems.
94 in
(239 mm)
4 in
(10 mm)
2 in
(51 mm)
4$ in
(119 mm)
Front View
Side View
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 1
369416 Rev. B 2 09.30.11
System Topologies
The GRAFIK Eye QS Wireless can be specified in four different system topologies. Examples of each are shown below.
Wired QS link
GRAFIK Eye QS
wireless
GRAFIK Eye QS
wireless
LUTRON
Quantum
(optional)
Sivoia QS
shade
LUTRON
LUTRON
seeTouch
QS
seeTouch
QS
QSE-CI-NWK-E
QS Sensor
Module
LUTRON
Wired
occupancy
sensor
Energi Savr NodeTM

Wireless System

Wireless System
30 ft
(10 m)
wireless
range;
60 ft
(20 m) in
open air
GRAFIK Eye QS
wireless
Wireless
Sivoia QS
shade
LUTRON
Wired QS link
Pico
wireless
control
GRAFIK Eye QS
wireless
GRAFIK Eye QS
wireless
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
seeTouch QS
wallstations
LUTRON
Wireless
Sivoia QS
shade
Wireless
occupancy
sensor
Pico
wireless
control
Wireless
daylight
sensor
Example of Wireless
System with Main Repeater
(RadioRA 2)
Refer to RadioRA 2
documentation (www.lutron.
com/radiora2) for specification
information.
Note: Wired QS link is
disabled when the GRAFIK
Eye QS is added to a
RadioRA 2 system.
Job Number:
Wireless
daylight
sensor
GRAFIK Eye QS
wireless
LUTRON
Wireless
occupancy
sensor
Main
repeater
RA 2
keypad
RA 2
dimmer
Job Name:
Wired
occupancy
sensor
Wireless
occupancy
sensor
Model Numbers:
Page 2

369416 Rev. B 3 09.30.11
Open
Preset
Close
3
4
Off
LUTRON
OK
Open
Preset
Close
3
4
Off
USB type
mini B
Optional
shade control
keypad
Zone
control
Infrared
receiver
Lighting
control
keypad
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Info
screen
Features
technology. Operates in the 431.0 437.0
MHz band.
scenes, plus Off.
t 5XFMWF
QS wallstations.
installation.
lights.
SFDFJWFS
programming.
integration of lights, motorized window
treatments, occupancy sensors, wallstations,
components.
products and systems, including RadioRA 2,
Radio Powr SavrTM occupancy, vacancy, and
daylight sensors, Sivoia QS wireless shades,
Pico wireless control, HomeWorks QS, and
other GRAFIK Eye QS wireless control units.
Page 3

369416 Rev. B 4 09.30.11
Specifications
Input Power and Ratings
240 V
MLV
MLV
50 / 60 Hz
1200
2400 VA / 1920 W
1200 VA / 960 W
40 1200
25 800
40 1200 VA / 40 960 W
25 800 VA / 25 600 W

t *ODBOEFTDFOU
t )BMPHFO
t /POEJN JODBOEFTDFOU NBHOFUJDMPXWPMUBHF 5V8JSF, or
neon/cold cathode)
fixtures
t $SFF-3 7
For loading capacities, refer to the LED report card located
at www.lutron.com/LEDtool
conduction non-dim basis through separate Lutron power
interfaces:
t -VUSPO)JMVNF and Eco-10 electronic fluorescent
dimming ballasts
t /POEJN
t 7
t "/"5&-
Job Name:
Job Number:
50 / 60 Hz
2400
Environment
t UP' UP$
120 V
Model Numbers:
Key Design Features

6000 V
t 5FTUFEUPXJUITUBOEL7FMFDUSPTUBUJDEJTDIBSHF
without damage or memory loss.
t 35*44 equipped: Compensates in real time for
t 1PXFSGBJMVSFNFNPSZSFUBJOTQSPHSBNNJOHBOEMJHIU
level settings for up to 10 years in the event of a power
loss.
For complete information, see Power Draw Units on
the QS Link, Lutron PN 369405.
easy reading.
QS interfaces.
3 seconds.
Page 4

369416 Rev. B 5 09.30.11
Specifications
Shade Control
columns. Each column has backlit open, preset, close, and
raise/lower buttons.
t &BDITIBEFCVUUPODPMVNODBOCFQSPHSBNNFEUPPQFSBUF
one shade or a group of shades. (Shades may be assigned
to more than one shade button column).
columns.
t 8JSFEBOEXJSFMFTTTIBEFTNBZOPUCFQSPHSBNNFEJOUP
the same shade button column; however, both may be
used on the same GRAFIK Eye QS control unit.
multiple shade button columns will have a 1-second delay
from column to column. This does not occur in RadioRA 2
systems.
Zone Control
t &BDI[POFIBTBEFEJDBUFESBJTFBOEMPXFSCVUUPOUPBEKVTU
the zone.
t "MM[POFJOGPSNBUJPOIBTCMVFCBDLMJU-&%T#BDLMJHIUUVSOT
off when idle for 30 seconds.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Info Screen
t 0-&% PSHBOJD-&%
savings.
t 0OFBWBJMBCMFIPMJEBZTDIFEVMFJTQSPHSBNNBCMFCZ
date up to one year in advance.
that affect any Energi Savr NodeTM unit connected on
the QS link without changing the local scene on the
GRAFIK Eye QS.
location.
t "VUPNBUJDBMMZBEKVTUTGPS%BZMJHIU4BWJOHT5JNF %45

features:
- Enable and Disable occupancy for occupancy/
vacancy sensors
sensors
Page 5

369416 Rev. B 6 09.30.11
Specifications
control units, wallstations, motorized shades, and control
interfaces.
t "(3"'*,&ZF can have up to 30 wireless devices
associated to it.
Infrared
t *OGSBSFE *3
t GU N
MJOFPGTJHIUSBOHF
controls.
(QSWS2 or QSWE)
features:
- Certain functions are only available on specific wallstation
configurations. Refer to the seeTouch QS specification
submittal.
(QSR4P or MRF2 models)
30 ft (10 m) range (60 ft/20 m in open air). It provides the
following features:
lighting levels
t 6TFUIF2431JOTZTUFNTXJUIB3BEJP3" 2 main
repeater. The MRF2 models will NOT work with
RadioRA 2.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:

t 0DDVQBODZTFOTPST EBZMJHIUTFOTPST BOE1JDP wireless
devices can be shared by one or more GRAFIK Eye
control units on the QS link.
for details.
Interface (QSE-IO)
guide).
t 4IBEF0VUQVUNPEF"4IBEF$PMVNOPOUIF
GRAFIK Eye QS can be linked to control outputs 1-3
t 3FGFSUPUIF4QFDJGJDBUJPO4VCNJUUBMGPSUIF24&*0GPSB
full list of its available features.
Accessory Controls:
Page 6

369416 Rev. B 7 09.30.11
Specifications
(QSE-CI-NWK-E)
(QSWS2-KS)
PGB[POFPSHSPVQPG
zones
5-16)
Technology
t 0QFSBUFTJOUIFo.)[CBOE
such as:
- Pico (P/N QSR4P or MRF2)
(P/N LRF2-)
- RadioRA 2 wireless system
- Other GRAFIK Eye QS wireless units (P/N QSGRJ-)
- HomeWorks QS system
Occupancy Sensor(s)
through either:
- Zone Control: Up to four sensors per zone activate userselected occupancy and vacancy zone levels.
GRAFIK Eye QS
(QSM)
GRAFIK Eye QS will go to the designated vacancy scene
or zone level.
Daylight Sensor(s)
t 5IFGRAFIK Eye QS allows daylight sensors to control
with LRF2)
module (QSM)
QS zones:
sensor
by-scene basis
3(#$.:%.9MPBET
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 7

369416 Rev. B 8 09.30.11
Specifications
(Terminal A).
solid-state output.
types of inputs:
event.
24 V .
the GRAFIK Eye QS, choose this setting so that the
detected, all lights will go to full on, and no operations will
be allowed until the emergency signal is cleared.
mode.
timeclock.
- Never Save: Prevents any changes from being saved while

t "EJHJUQBTTXPSE VTJOHDIBSBDUFST"UP;BOE
0 to 9) can be enabled/disabled to lock out access
to the Programming Menu.
t #ZEFGBVMUUIFSFJTOPQBTTXPSEFOBCMFEPOUIF
GRAFIK Eye QS.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 8

369416 Rev. B 9 09.30.11
Capacities
240 V
MLV
MLV
50 / 60 Hz
120 V
50 / 60 Hz
2400
1200
2400 VA / 1920 W
1200 VA / 960 W
40 1200
25 800
40 1200 VA / 40 960 W
25 800 VA / 25 600 W
Load Type Notes

installing an ELV light source, verify with the manufacturer that their transformer can be dimmed. When dimming, an ELV
interface (check compatibility in your area for correct model; see www.lutron.com/qs for more information) must be used
with the control unit.
- 120 V : 800 VA / 600 W
- 240 V : 1200 VA / 960 W
t .BYJNVNUPUBMMJHIUJOHMPBEGPS-VUSPO5V8JSFBOE"EWBODF.BSL9 electronic dimming ballasts (120 V
only) must
not exceed 6 A per zone or 10 A per unit.
t /P[POFNBZCFMPBEFEXJUINPSFUIBOUIFDBQBDJUZTQFDJGJFEBCPWF'PSIJHIFSXBUUBHFBQQMJDBUJPOT VTFB-VUSPO
PHPM power module (check compatibility in your area for correct model; see www.lutron.com/qs for more information).
System Limits
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 9
369416 Rev. B 10 09.30.11

Example:
Base Unit
QSGRJ - _ PBA
QSGRJ-6PBA
6-zone base unit
and
QSGFP-2IV-EGN
engraving
Phase Control Triac
Prefix
Number
of Zones
3 = 3 zones
4 = 4 zones
6 = 6 zones
Faceplate Kit
QSGFP Faceplate
Prefix
Number
of Shade
Columns
Omit = none
1 = 1 column
2 = 2 columns
3 = 3 columns
Top
Door
Color
Color/
Finish
Keypad
Engraving
Code
Omit = same as
unit
T = Translucent

Architectural Matte
Finishes
Architectural Metal
Finishes
Satin Color Matte

Finishes
Standard
(ship in 48 hours)
White
Ivory
Beige
Gray
Brown
Black
Almond
Light Almond
Bright Brass
Bright Chrome
Bright Nickel
Satin Brass
Satin Chrome
Satin Nickel
Antique Brass
Antique Bronze
Snow
Biscuit
Eggshell
Taupe
Midnight
Limestone
Stone
Desert Stone
Terracotta
Hot
Goldstone
Palladium
Plum
Turquoise
Bluestone
Sea Glass
Greenbrier
Sienna
Merlot
Mocha Stone
WH
IV
BE
GR
BR
BL
AL
LA
Anodized Aluminum
Finishes
Clear
Black
Brass
BB
BC
BN
SB
SC
SN
QB
QZ
CLA
BLA
BRA
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
SW
BI
ES
TP
MN
LS
ST
DS
TC
HT
GS
PD
PL
TQ
BG
SG
GB
SI
MR
MS
Omit = Unengraved
1
Open
Preset
Close
4
Off
Lighting
keypad
Shade
column

Page 10
369416 Rev. B 11 09.30.11

Custom Button Kit

Kit Prefix
Button
Configuration
Keypad
Engraving
Code
Button
Color/
Finish

raise/lower
(shade column)
5B
= 5-button
(lighting keypad)

Omit = Unengraved
Button Kit Custom

Color/Finish Codes
Architectural Matte
Finishes
White
Ivory
Beige
Gray
Brown
Black
Almond
Light Almond
WH
IV
BE
GR
BR
BL
AL
LA
Satin Color Matte

Finishes
Snow
Biscuit
Eggshell
Taupe
SW
BI
ES
TP
Open
Preset
Close
4
Off
Lighting
keypad
Shade
column

Custom Stripe Kit
QSGS - WH
Stripe Color/
Finish
Stripe
Kit
Prefix

Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 11

369416 Rev. B 12 09.30.11
Wiring Diagrams
Terminations
Communication link
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 L N
A B C
power
1 2
IR input
Load wiring
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 12
369416 Rev. B 13 09.30.11

concerning PDUs.
A
Power Group 1
LUTRON
GRAFIK Eye QS
control unit
Supplies PDUs
A
LUTRON
Control Interfaces
Consume PDUs
(Do not connect

terminal 2: 24 V )
Wallstations
Consume PDUs
Power Group 2
Connect all 4
terminals within a
power group:
1: Common
2: 24 V
3 and 4: Data
LUTRON

unit Supplies PDUs
LUTRON
Connect only 3
terminals between
power groups:
1: Common
3 and 4: Data
Do not connect
Terminal 2: 24 V
LUTRON
Wallstations
Consume PDUs
B
(Do not connect
terminal 2: 24 V
Power Group 3
A
LUTRON
QS Power Supply
Supplies PDUs
Control Interfaces
Consume PDUs
Wallstations
Consume PDUs

Consumes PDUs
(Do not connect

terminal 2: 24 V )
Quantum Processor
(if applicable)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 13
369416 Rev. B 14 09.30.11
Mounting
Mounting
screws (4)
Standard 4-gang
U.S. wallbox,
3` in (89 mm)
deep
Hinged
top lid
GRAFIK Eye QS
control unit
Hinged
bottom lid
Line Voltage Wiring

Rear of
QS control unit
1 2 3 4 5 6 L N
To Load 1

is labeled L.
To Load 2
To Load 3
To Load 4
To Load 5
To Load 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 L N
Distribution Panel
50 / 60 Hz
120 V
or
240 V
50 / 60 Hz
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 14
369416 Rev. B 15 09.30.11

t 4ZTUFNDPNNVOJDBUJPOXJSJOHDBOCFEBJTZDIBJOFEPS5UBQQFE
Two 18 AWG (1.0 mm2) conductors for control power.
One twisted, shielded pair of 22 AWG (0.5 mm2) for data link.


QS
Control Unit
seeTouch QS
Sivoia QS
Shade
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
Sivoia QS
smart panel

QS
Control Unit
seeTouch QS
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
Sivoia QS
smart panel
LUTRON
Sivoia QS
Shade
LUTRON
LUTRON
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 15
865 MHz)

369420 Rev. B 1 11.18.11
865 MHz)
1
2
3
4
LUTRON
Description
The GRAFIK Eye QS Wireless control unit is the premier energy-saving light
and window treatment control. The GRAFIK Eye QS control unit includes an
astronomic timeclock, intuitive lighting presets, and direct window treatment
control. Now with wireless technology, you can use the GRAFIK Eye
QS Wireless control unit to seamlessly integrate with a variety of Lutron
wireless products and systems, including Radio Powr SavrTM occupancy,
vacancy, and daylight sensors, Sivoia QS Wireless window treatments, Pico
wireless controls, and other GRAFIK Eye wireless products. Additionally,
the GRAFIK Eye QS Wireless control unit is compatible with all Lutron wired
QS products and systems, including Quantum.
239 mm
(94 in)
10 mm
(4 in)
51 mm
(2 in)
119 mm
(4$ in)
Front View
Side View
Fits into a 4-gang U.S. backbox, 89 mm (3` in) deep, Lutron P/N 245-254;
or 76 mm (3 in) deep, Lutron P/N 241-400.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 1
865 MHz)
369420 Rev. B 2 11.18.11
System Topologies
The GRAFIK Eye QS Wireless control unit can be specified in three different system topologies. Examples of each are
shown below.
Wired QS link
GRAFIK Eye QS
Quantum
processor
seeTouch
QS
wallstation
LUTRON
seeTouch QS
wallstation
QSE-CINWK-E
QS Sensor
Module
LUTRON
0,5 Nm
24 V
MUX
8 mm
Energi Savr
NodeTM unit
Wired
occupancy
sensor

Wireless System

Wireless System
10 m
(30 ft)
wireless
range;
20 m
(60 ft)
in open air
GRAFIK Eye QS
Wireless
Sivoia QS
shade
LUTRON
Wired QS link
Pico
wireless
control
GRAFIK Eye QS
GRAFIK Eye QS
LUTRON
Wireless
Sivoia QS
shade
Wireless
occupancy
sensor
Wireless
daylight
sensor
Job Number:
LUTRON
Pico
wireless
control
Wired
occupancy
sensor
Wireless
occupancy
sensor
Wireless
daylight
sensor
Job Name:
seeTouch seeTouch
QS
QS
wallstation wallstation
Model Numbers:
DALI 1 DALI 2
COM
IR
Occ
MUX
230 V~ 50/60 Hz 100 mA

www.lutron.com
+44.(0)20.7680.4481
Power
N
TM
QSNE-2DAL-D
Test
L
Com
IR
Occ
20 V
Com
Photo
Photo
Energi Savr Node QS
Hi Temp
Sivoia QS
shade
Ethernet
QS
3
20 V
GRAFIK Eye QS
Page 2
865 MHz)

369420 Rev. B 3 11.18.11
1
2
3
4
LUTRON
OK
1
2
3
4
Zone
Optional
control
window
treatment
control keypad

mini B
control
receiver
keypad
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Info
screen
Features
RF technology. Operates in 865 MHz band.
plus Off.
t 5XFMWF
wallstations.
buttons, which can also be added to the unit after
installation.
lights.
treatment presets using buttons on the control unit.
SFDFJWFS
energy savings, zone labeling, and programming.
occupancy sensor.
lights, motorized window treatments, wallstations,
components.
systems, including Radio Powr SavrTM occupancy
and vacancy sensors, Sivoia QS wireless window
treatments, Pico wireless control, and other
GRAFIK Eye QS wireless products.
locate and operate.
Page 3
865 MHz)

369420 Rev. B 4 11.18.11
Specifications
Input Power
t 7
50 Hz
Note: Maximum load 500 W per zone; 2 300 W total.
t *ODBOEFTDFOU
t )BMPHFO
cold cathode)
interfaces:
t /POEJN
t 7
Key Design Features
t 1SPUFDUJPO$MBTT*1
6 000 V
Environment
t UP$ UP'
t 81$
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:

reading.
QS interfaces.
60 minutes. Maximum fade time from Off is 3 seconds.
Shade Control
t 5IF(3"'*,&ZF QS control unit can include up to 3 shade
button columns. Each column has backlit open, preset,
close, and raise/lower buttons.
t &BDITIBEFCVUUPODPMVNODBOCFQSPHSBNNFEUPPQFSBUF
one shade or a group of shades. (Shades may be assigned
to more than one shade button column).
columns.
t "DDFTTUPUIF4JWPJB QS Wireless electronic drive unit (EDU)
is required to associate shades with the GRAFIK Eye QS
control unit and set their raise/lower limits.
t 8JSFEBOEXJSFMFTTTIBEFTNBZOPUCFQSPHSBNNFEJOUPUIF
same shade button column; however, both may be used on
the same GRAFIK Eye QS control unit.
multiple shade button columns will have a 1-second delay
from column to column. This does not occur in RadioRA 2
systems.
Zone Control
t &BDI[POFIBTBEFEJDBUFESBJTFBOEMPXFSCVUUPOUPBEKVTU
the zone.
t &BDI[POFIBTBEFEJDBUFE-&%CBSHSBQIGPSMFWFMTUBUVT
Percentage of light level and energy saved is displayed on
the info screen.
t "MM[POFJOGPSNBUJPOIBTCMVFCBDLMJU-&%T#BDLMJHIUUVSOT
off when idle for 30 seconds.
Page 4
865 MHz)

369420 Rev. B 5 11.18.11
Specifications
Info Screen
t 0-&% PSHBOJD-&%
BVUPNBUJDBMMZBEKVTUUISPVHIPVUUIFZFBSCBTFEPO
location.
features:
sensors
sensors
connects control units, wallstations, motorized window
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Infrared
t *OGSBSFE *3
scenes, raise/lower lighting zones, or raise/lower window
treatments.
t N GU
MJOFPGTJHIUSBOHF
controls.
operates in the 865 MHz band.
such as:
- Pico wireless control (P/N QSRNP-)
(P/N LRF5-)
- Other GRAFIK Eye QS wireless control units
(P/N QSGRN-)
(QSWS2)
t 8JSFETFF5PVDI QS wallstations provide the following
features:
- Certain functions are only available on specific wallstation
configurations. Refer to the seeTouch QS specification
submittal.
(QSRNP models)
following features:
Wireless control unit: turns zone(s) on or off, raises/lowers
and Off on the GRAFIK Eye QS control unit, and can
raise and lower lighting levels
Page 5
865 MHz)

369420 Rev. B 6 11.18.11
Specifications
zones or scenes on the GRAFIK Eye QS control unit.
Interface (QSE-IO)
on the GRAFIK Eye QS control unit:
Zone Control (please refer to the Occupancy Sensor(s)
t 'PSBGVMMMJTUPGGFBUVSFT SFGFSUPUIF24&*04QFDJGJDBUJPO
Submittal.

(QSE-CI-NWK-E)
(QSWS2-KS)
PGB[POFPSHSPVQPG
zones.
Scenes 5-16).
t &OFSHJ4BWS/PEFTM QS (ESN). Refer to the Specification
Submittal for details.
Accessory Controls:
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 6
865 MHz)

369420 Rev. B 7 11.18.11
Specifications
Occupancy Sensor(s)
(QSM5)
occupancy scene or zone level.
Daylight Sensor(s)
t 5IF(3"'*,&ZF QS control unit allows daylight sensors
UPDPOUSPMPOFPSNPSFMJHIUJOH[POFTUPBEKVTUFMFDUSJDMJHIU
levels based on measured daylight levels.
- Wireless Radio Powr SavrTM units (model numbers
starting with LRF5)
module (QSM5)
QS control unit zones:
sensor
by-scene basis:
Note: Daylight control through the GRAFIK Eye QS
control unit only affects lighting loads. Shade groups
cannot be controlled by daylight sensors. Daylighting does
OPUBGGFDU%.9PS3(#$.:%.9MPBET
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:

t &BDI(3"'*,&ZF QS control unit has one contact closure
input (Terminal A).
solid-state output.
types of inputs:
event.
- Occupancy: If an occupancy sensor is wired directly to the
cleared.
mode.
timeclock.
- Save Never: Prevents any changes from being saved while
t "DIBSBDUFSQBTTXPSE VTJOHDIBSBDUFST"UP;BOE
0 to 9) can be enabled/disabled to lock out access to the
Programming Menu.
t *ODBTFUIFEJHJUQBTTXPSEJTGPSHPUUFO DPOUBDU-VUSPO
Page 7
865 MHz)

369420 Rev. B 8 11.18.11
Specifications
Capacities
Zones
Unit
Capacity
(watts)
6
2 300
Zone
Capacity
(watts)
500
Load Type Notes

GPS-VUSPOQPXFSNPEVMFTPSJOUFSGBDFT /(391#"6/(39&-7*"6/(39'%#*"6

System Limits
PS[POFT
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 8
865 MHz)

369420 Rev. B 9 11.18.11

Example:
QSGRN -6PCE
6-zone base unit
and
QSGFP-2IV-SGN
Base Unit
QSGRN - 6 PCE
Prefix
6 Zones
Faceplate Kit
(includes coordinating stripe and buttons; see Standard Color Combinations page)
QSGFP -
FaceNumber of
Prefix
Columns
Omit = none
1 = 1 column
2 = 2 columns
3 = 3 columns
Top
Door
Color
Color/
Finish
Keypad
Engraving
Code
Omit = same as
unit
T = Translucent

Architectural Matte
Finishes
Architectural Metal
Finishes
Satin Color Matte

Finishes
Standard
(ship in 48 hours)
White
Ivory
Beige
Gray
Brown
Black
Almond
Light Almond
Bright Brass
Bright Chrome
Bright Nickel
Satin Brass
Satin Chrome
Satin Nickel
Antique Brass
Antique Bronze
Snow
Biscuit
Eggshell
Taupe
Midnight
Limestone
Stone
Desert Stone
Terracotta
Hot
Goldstone
Palladium
Plum
Turquoise
Bluestone
Sea Glass
Greenbriar
Sienna
Merlot
Mocha Stone
WH
IV
BE
GR
BR
BL
AL
LA
Anodized Aluminum
Finishes
Clear
Black
Brass
BB
BC
BN
SB
SC
SN
QB
QZ
CLA
BLA
BRA
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
SW
BI
ES
TP
MN
LS
ST
DS
TC
HT
GS
PD
PL
TQ
BG
SG
GB
SI
MR
MS
Omit = Unengraved
1
2
3
4
Lighting
keypad
Window
treatment
column

Page 9
865 MHz)

369420 Rev. B 10 11.18.11

Custom Button Kit

Kit Prefix
Button
Configuration
Keypad
Engraving
Code
Button
Color/
Finish

raise/lower
(window
treatment
column)
5B
= 5-button
(lighting keypad)

Omit = Unengraved
Button Kit Custom

Color/Finish Codes
Architectural Matte
Finishes
White
Ivory
Beige
Gray
Brown
Black
Almond
Light Almond
WH
IV
BE
GR
BR
BL
AL
LA
Satin Color Matte

Finishes
Snow
Biscuit
Eggshell
Taupe
2
3
SW
BI
ES
TP
Lighting
keypad
Window
treatment
column

Custom Stripe Kit
QSGS - WH
Stripe Color/
Finish
Stripe
Kit
Prefix

Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 10
865 MHz)

369420 Rev. B 11 11.18.11
Wiring Diagrams
Terminations
A B C
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 L N
1 2
Communication link
and 24 V power
IR input
Load wiring
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 11
865 MHz)
369420 Rev. B 12 11.18.11

concerning PDUs.
A
Power Group 1
LUTRON
GRAFIK Eye QS
control unit
Supplies PDUs
A
B
Control Interfaces
Consume PDUs
(Do not connect

terminal 2: 24 V )
Wallstations
Consume PDUs
Power Group 2
Terminals 1, 2, 3,
and 4 (Common,
24 V , and
data) connect
devices within a
power group.
B
Terminal 2
(24 V ) is NOT
connected
between power
groups.
Energi Savr NodeTM unit

Supplies PDUs
Wallstations
Consume PDUs
(Do not connect

terminal 2: 24 V )
Power Group 3
A
QS Power Supply
Supplies PDUs


Occupancy Sensor
Consumes PDUs
(Do not connect

terminal 2: 24 V )
Quantum panel
Supplies PDUs
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 12
865 MHz)

369420 Rev. B 13 11.18.11
Mounting
Mounting
screws (4)
Standard 4-gang
U.S. wallbox,
89 mm (3` in)
deep
Hinged
top lid
GRAFIK Eye
QS control unit
Hinged
bottom lid
Line Voltage Wiring

Rear of
QS control unit
1 2 3 4 5 6 L N
To Load 1

is labeled L.
To Load 2
To Load 3
To Load 4
To Load 5
To Load 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 L N
Distribution Panel
230 V
50/60 Hz
t &BDIMJOFWPMUBHFUFSNJOBMDBOBDDFQUPOF NN2 (12 AWG) wire.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 13
865 MHz)

369420 Rev. B 14 11.18.11


Wire Gauge
Less than 153 m

1 pair 1,0 mm2

(39$#-4 OPOQMFOVN
(391$#-4 QMFOVN

1 twisted, shielded pair 0,5 mm2
153 to 610 m

1 pair 4,0 mm2
(39$#-- OPOQMFOVN
(391$#-- QMFOVN

1 twisted, shielded pair 0,5 mm2

GRAFIK Eye QS
Control Unit
seeTouch QS
wallstations
Sivoia QS
window
treatment
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
Sivoia QS
smart panel

GRAFIK Eye QS
Control Unit
seeTouch QS
wallstations
LUTRON
LUTRON
Sivoia QS
smart panel
LUTRON
Sivoia QS
window
treatment
LUTRON
LUTRON
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 14
Control Unit (230 V
CE)
369311 Rev. A 1 03.07.11
GRAFIK Eye QS Control Unit (230 V
CE)
Description
GRAFIK Eye QS is the premier energy-saving light and
window treatment control. GRAFIK Eye QS includes
an astronomic timeclock, intuitive lighting presets,
and direct window treatment control. Additionally, the
GRAFIK Eye QS is compatible with all Lutron wired
2
3
GRAFIK Eye QS is compatible with Quantum.
LUTRON
Fits into a 4-gang U.S. backbox, 3.5 in (89 mm) deep;
Lutron P/N 241-400
239 mm
(94 in)
10 mm
(4 in)
51 mm
(2 in)
119 mm
(4$ in)
Front View
Side View
System Topology
20 V
GRAFIK Eye QS
wireless
seeTouch
QS
LUTRON
seeTouch
QSE-CI-NWK-E
QS
Quantum
(optional)
LUTRON
24 V
TM
230 V~ 50/60 Hz 100 mA

www.lutron.com
+44.(0)20.7680.4481
0,5 Nm
8 mm
QS Sensor
Module
Energi Savr
NodeTM
Wired
occupancy
sensor
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
DALI 1 DALI 2
COM
IR
Occ
MUX
MUX
Energi Savr Node QS

QSNE-2DAL-D
Test
Power
L
Com
IR
Occ
20 V
Photo
Hi Temp
Sivoia QS
shade
Ethernet
QS
3
Photo
GRAFIK Eye QS
wireless
Com
Wired QS link
Page 1
Control Unit (230 V
CE)

369311 Rev. A 2 03.07.11
Features
TDFOFT QMVT0GG
t 5XFMWF
QS wallstations.
BGUFSJOTUBMMBUJPO
lights.
unit.
SFDFJWFS
FOFSHZTBWJOHT [POFMBCFMJOH BOE
programming.
QPXFSGPSPDDVQBODZTFOTPS
JOUFHSBUJPOPGMJHIUT NPUPSJTFEXJOEPX
JOUFSGBDFT
components.
1
2
3
4
LUTRON
OK
1
2
3
4
Optional
window
treatment
control keypad
Zone
control
*OGSBSFE USB Type

mini B
receiver
Lighting
control
keypad
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
*OGP
screen
Page 2
Control Unit (230 V
CE)

369311 Rev. A 3 03.07.11
Specifications
Input Power
t 7 )[
$POUSPMTUIFGPMMPXJOHMJHIUJOHTPVSDFTXJUIBTNPPUI
DPOUJOVPVTTRVBSFMBXEJNNJOHDVSWFPSPOBGVMM
t *ODBOEFTDFOU
t )BMPHFO
cold cathode)
JOUFSGBDFT
t /POEJN
t 7
Key Design Features
$BOXJUITUBOEWPMUBHFTVSHFTPGVQUP
6 000 V BOEDVSSFOUTVSHFTPGVQUP"
t 35*44TMFRVJQQFE$PNQFOTBUFTJOSFBMUJNFGPS
JODPNJOHMJOFWPMUBHFWBSJBUJPOT OPWJTJCMFGMJDLFSXJUI
DIBOHFJO3.4WPMUBHFQFSDZDMF BOE)[
DIBOHFJOGSFRVFODZQFSTFDPOE

t 1PXFSGBJMVSFSFUBJOTQSPHSBNNJOHBOEMJHIUMFWFMTFUUJOHT
GPSVQUPZFBSTJOUIFFWFOUPGBQPXFSMPTT
t 5IFGRAFIK Eye24TVQQMJFT1PXFS%SBX6OJUT 1%6T

on the QS link.
'PSDPNQMFUFJOGPSNBUJPO TFFi1PXFS%SBX6OJUTPOUIF
PQFOBUGPSFBTFPGBDDFTT
Environment
t UP' UP$

Compliance
t $&
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Scene and Window Treatment Buttons

UPGJOEBOEUPPQFSBUFUIFDPOUSPMVOJUJOMPXMJHIU
easy reading.
UIFGSPOUPGUIFDPOUSPMVOJU
BSFBDDFTTJCMFGSPNTFF5PVDI QS wallstations and
24JOUFSGBDFT
DBOCFTFUEJGGFSFOUMZGPSFBDITDFOFUPTFDPOET
PSUPNJOVUFT.BYJNVNGBEFUJNFGSPN0GGJT
3 seconds.
Shade Control
PQFSBUFPOFTIBEFPSBHSPVQPGTIBEFT 4IBEFTNBZ
columns.
Zone Control
BEKVTUUIF[POF
TUBUVT1FSDFOUBHFPGMJHIUMFWFMBOEFOFSHZTBWFEJT
EJTQMBZFEPOUIFJOGPTDSFFO
UVSOTPGGXIFOJEMFGPSTFDPOET
Info Screen
t 0-&% PSHBOJD-&%
savings.
Page 3
Control Unit (230 V
CE)

369311 Rev. A 4 03.07.11
Specifications
UIBUBGGFDUBOZ&OFSHJ4BWS/PEFTM QS unit connected
on the QS link without changing the local scene on the
(3"'*,&ZF QS.
location.

BEKVTUFEGPSUIFOFXEBUFT%45JTQSPHSBNNBCMF
GFBUVSFT
4DFOFTUPBOE0GG
4UBSUBOE&OEBGUFSIPVSTNPEF
&OBCMFBOE%JTBCMFEBZMJHIUJOHGPSBMM[POFTHSPVQT
&OBCMFBOE%JTBCMFPDDVQBODZGPSPDDVQBODZWBDBODZ
sensors
&OBCMFBOE%JTBCMFPDDVQJFEFWFOUTGPSBMMPDDVQBODZ
sensors
USFBUNFOUT BOEDPOUSPMJOUFSGBDFT
Infrared
t *OGSBSFE *3
TDFOFT SBJTFMPXFSMJHIUJOH[POFT PSSBJTFMPXFS
window treatments.
t N GU
MJOFPGTJHIUSBOHF
t 5FSNJOBMCMPDLJOGSBSFEJOQVUGPSDPOOFDUJPOUPBXJSFE*3
JOQVUGSPNUIJSEQBSUZFRVJQNFOU
controls.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:

(QSWS2)
t 8JSFEseeTouch24LFZQBETQSPWJEFUIFGPMMPXJOH
GFBUVSFT
"DDFTTUPPOFPSNPSFPGUIFTDFOFTPOUIF
$FSUBJOGVODUJPOTBSFPOMZBWBJMBCMFPOTQFDJGJD
XBMMTUBUJPODPOGJHVSBUJPOT3FGFSUPUIFseeTouch QS
TQFDJGJDBUJPOTVCNJUUBM
Accessory Controls: QS Sensor Module (QSM)
%BZMJHIUTFOTPSTXJSFE PSXJSFMFTTMZMJOLFE
UPB
*OGSBSFETFOTPSTDBODPOUSPMFJUIFSPOFPSNPSF[POFT
WBSJFTSFGFSUPUIFEPDVNFOUBUJPOGPSUIF244FOTPS
.PEVMFGPSEFUBJMT
[POFTPSTDFOFTPOUIFGRAFIK Eye QS.
Interface (QSE-IO)
4DFOFTBOE0GG 4DFOFTBOE0GG
&OBCMF%JTBCMF4DFOF-PDLPVU &OBCMF%JTBCMF1BOJD
.PEF &OBCMF%JTBCMF5JNFDMPDL
PDDVQBODZTFOTPSGPSUIFGRAFIK Eye QS. Each
input can be assigned to either Scene Control or Zone
$POUSPM QMFBTFSFGFSUPUIF0DDVQBODZ4FOTPS T

TFDUJPOPGUIJTHVJEF

[POFTUPBQSFTFUMFWFMBOEPGG
Page 4
Control Unit (230 V
CE)

369311 Rev. A 5 03.07.11
Specifications
Accessory Controls:
QSPWJEJOH3(#$.:DPOUSPM

(QSE-CI-NWK-E)
TDFOFTPGUIFGRAFIK Eye QS.
(QSWS2-KS)
PGB[POFPSHSPVQPG
[POFT
Scenes 5-16)
t 5IFGRAFIK Eye QS allows daylight sensors to control

POFPSNPSFMJHIUJOH[POFTUPBEKVTUFMFDUSJDMJHIUMFWFMT
module (QSM)
24[POFT
&BDI[POFDBOCFDBMJCSBUFEUPUBSHFUMJHIUMFWFMT
"[POFDBOCFDPOUSPMMFECZOPNPSFUIBOPOFEBZMJHIU
sensor
by-scene basis
#ZEFGBVMU EBZMJHIUDPOUSPMJTFOBCMFEJOBMMTDFOFT
Note:%BZMJHIUDPOUSPMUISPVHIUIFGRAFIK Eye QS only
BGGFDUTMJHIUJOHMPBET4IBEFHSPVQTDBOOPUCFDPOUSPMMFE
3(#$.:%.9MPBET

t &OFSHJ4BWS/PEF QS (ESN)
Occupancy Sensor(s)
through either:
4DFOF$POUSPM6QUPGPVSTFOTPSTBDUJWBUFVTFS
selectable occupancy and vacancy scenes.
VTFSTFMFDUFEPDDVQBODZBOEWBDBODZ[POFMFWFMT
$POUBDUDMPTVSFTFOTPSTXJSFEUP$$*JOQVUPOCBDLPG
GRAFIK Eye QS
- Wired sensors connected to Energi Savr Node
Module (QSM)
TDFOFPS[POFMFWFM
Eye24XJMMHPUPUIFEFTJHOBUFEWBDBODZTDFOFPS[POF
level.
Daylight Sensor(s)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 5
Control Unit (230 V
CE)

369311 Rev. A 6 03.07.11

(Terminal A).
UZQFTPGJOQVUT
.BJOUBJOFE EFGBVMU
5IFGRAFIK Eye QS control unit
release event.
24 V .
6TFGVMGPSQPXFSJOHPDDVQBODZTFOTPST
"OBVYJMJBSZQPXFSTVQQMZNVTUCFVTFEJGUIFEFWJDF
0DDVQBODZ*GBOPDDVQBODZTFOTPSJTXJSFEEJSFDUMZUP
the GRAFIK Eye QS.
EFUFDUFE BMMMJHIUTXJMMHPUPGVMMPO BOEOPPQFSBUJPOT
"GUFSIPVST"MMPXTUIF$$*UPTUBSUBOEFOEUIF
BGUFSIPVSTNPEF
timeclock.
4DFOF-PDLPVU1SFWFOUTUIFVTFSGSPNNBLJOHBOZ
4BWF/FWFS1SFWFOUTBOZDIBOHFTGSPNCFJOHTBWFE
%JTBCMF$$*5IF$$*XJMMIBWFOPFGGFDUPOUIFTZTUFN
BOEXJMMOPUBQQFBSPOUIFMJTUPGBWBJMBCMFTFOTPST
Programming Menu.
Eye QS.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 6
Control Unit (230 V
CE)

369311 Rev. A 7 03.07.11
Specifications
Capacities
Zones
Unit
Capacity
(watts)
3
1 500
4
2 000
6
2 300
Zone Capacity
Capacity
(watts)
500
500
500
Load Type Notes


System Limits
PS[POFT
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 7
Control Unit (230 V
CE)
369311 Rev. A 8 03.07.11
GRAFIK Eye QS
Example:
Base Unit
QSGR
- _ PCE
1SFGJY
QSGR-6PCE
[POFCBTFVOJU
and
QSGFP-2IV-SGN
*WPSZGBDFQMBUFLJUXJUIUXP

Number
PG;POFT
[POFT
[POFT
[POFT
Faceplate Kit
QSGFP Faceplate
1SFGJY
/VNCFSPG
Window Treatment
Columns
Omit = none
1 = 1 column
2 = 2 columns
3 = 3 columns
Colour/
Finish
Top
%PPS
Colour
Keypad
Engraving
Code
Omit = same as
unit
T = Translucent

Architectural Matte
Finishes
Architectural Metal
Finishes
Satin Colour Matte

Finishes
Standard
(ship in 48 hours)
White
Ivory
Beige
(SBZ

#SPXO
Black
Almond
Light Almond
Bright Brass
Bright Chrome
Bright Nickel
Satin Brass
Satin Chrome
Satin Nickel
Antique Brass
"OUJRVF#SPO[F
Snow
Biscuit
Eggshell
Taupe
Midnight
Limestone
Stone
%FTFSU4UPOF
Terracotta
Hot
Goldstone
1BMMBEJVN
Plum
Turquoise
Bluestone
Sea Glass
Greenbrier
Sienna
.FSMPU
Mocha Stone
WH
IV
BE
(3
#3
BL
AL
LA
Anodised Aluminum
Finishes
Clear
Black
#SBTT
BB
BC
BN
SB
SC
SN
QB
2;
CLA
BLA
#3"
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
SW
BI
ES
TP
MN
LS
ST
%4
TC
HT
GS
1%
PL
TQ
BG
SG
GB
SI
.3
MS
Omit = Unengraved
4IJQTXJUIFOHSBWJOHDFSUJGJDBUFUIBU
1
2
3
4
Lighting
keypad
Window
treatment
column

GPSDVTUPNFOHSBWJOHGPSNT4VCNJU
DPNQMFUFEGPSNXJUIPSEFS BOEVOJUXJMM
TIJQFOHSBWFEBTTQFDJGJFECZDVTUPNFS
Page 8
Control Unit (230 V
CE)
369311 Rev. A 9 03.07.11
GRAFIK Eye QS
See previous page for Custom Model Numbers
Custom Button Kit

,JU1SFGJY
Button
$POGJHVSBUJPO
Keypad
Engraving
Code
Button
Colour/
Finish
#3-CVUUPOXJUI
raise/lower
(window
treatment
column)
5B
= 5-button
(lighting keypad)

Omit = Unengraved
Button Kit Custom

Colour/Finish Codes
Architectural Matte
Finishes
White
Ivory
Beige
(SBZ

#SPXO
Black
Almond
Light Almond
WH
IV
BE
(3
#3
BL
AL
LA
Satin Colour Matte

Finishes
Snow
Biscuit
Eggshell
Taupe
SW
BI
ES
TP
1
2
3
4
Lighting
keypad
Window
treatment
column

Custom Stripe Kit
QSGS - WH
Stripe Colour/
Finish
Stripe
Kit
1SFGJY

Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 9
Control Unit (230 V
CE)
369311 Rev. A 10 03.07.11
GRAFIK Eye QS Standard Colour Combinations

See previous pages for Custom Model Numbers
' GBDFQMBUF
S (stripe)
1
2
B (buttons)
3
4
LUTRON
Suffix
Faceplate (F)
Architectural Matte
WH
White
IV
Ivory
BE
Beige
(3
(SBZ
#3
#SPXO
BL
Black
AL
Almond
LA
Light Almond
Architectural Metal
BB
Bright Brass
BC
Bright Chrome
BN
Bright Nickel
SB
Satin Brass
SC
Satin Chrome
SN
Satin Nickel
QB
Antique Brass
2;
"OUJRVF#SPO[F
Anodised
CLA
Clear
BLA
Black
#3"
#SBTT
"3
"SHFOUVN
MC
Mica
AW
Arctic White
Stripe (S)
Button (B)
Job Number:
' GBDFQMBUF
Example:
*GZPVPSEFS24(31$&8) ZPVS
GRAFIK Eye24XJUIMJHIUJOH[POFTBOE
window treatment column will come with a
XIJUFGBDFQMBUF CPUIUPQBOECPUUPN
HSBZ
stripe, and white buttons.
Suffix
Faceplate (F)
Satin Matte
Gray
White
MN
Midnight
Beige
Ivory
TP
Taupe
Ivory
Beige
SW
Snow
#MBDL
(SBZ
ES
Eggshell
#MBDL
#SPXO
BI
Biscuit
Gray
Black
LS
Limestone
Light Almond Almond
ST
Stone
Almond
Light Almond %4
%FTFSU4UPOF
TC
Terracotta
Black
Black
BG
Bluestone
Black
Black
HT
Hot
Black
Black
.3
.FSMPU
Black
Black
SI
Sienna
Black
Black
GB
Greenbrier
Black
Black
SG
Sea Glass
Black
Black
MS
Mocha Stone
#MBDL
#MBDL
GS
Goldstone
1%
1BMMBEJVN
Black
Black
PL
Plum
Black
Black
TQ
Turquoise
#MBDL
#MBDL
#MBDL
Gray
Gray
Stripe (S)
Button (B)
Gray
Gray
Gray
Beige
Eggshell
Gray
Gray
5BVQF
Taupe
Gray
Taupe
5BVQF
Brown
Gray
Gray
Taupe
Ivory
(SBZ
Taupe
Gray
Black
Taupe
Snow
Eggshell
Biscuit
Gray
Gray
5BVQF
Taupe
Gray
Taupe
5BVQF
Brown
Gray
Gray
Taupe
Ivory
(SBZ
Taupe
Gray
#MBDL
Black
White
Job Name:
'BDFQMBUFJTDPNQSJTFEPGBUPQBOECPUUPN
VOEFSiGBDFQMBUFw5IFUPQNBZCFUIFTBNF
DPMPVSPSUSBOTMVDFOU6TFUIFDIBSUGPS
GBDFQMBUFTUIBUIBWFUIFTBNFDPMPVSUPQ
BOECPUUPN*GBUSBOTMVDFOUMJEJTDIPTFO UIF
the bottom lid.
Model Numbers:
Page 10
Control Unit (230 V
CE)
369311 Rev. A 11 03.07.11
Wiring Diagrams
Terminations
Communication link
A B C
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 L N
1 2
power
*3JOQVU
Load wiring
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 11
Control Unit (230 V
CE)
369311 Rev. A 12 03.07.11
0OUIF24MJOL UIFSFBSFEFWJDFTUIBUTVQQMZQPXFSBOEEFWJDFTUIBUDPOTVNFQPXFS&BDIEFWJDFIBTBTQFDJGJD
OVNCFSPG1PXFS%SBX6OJUT 1%6T
JUFJUIFSTVQQMJFTPSDPOTVNFT"1PXFS(SPVQDPOTJTUTPGPOFEFWJDFUIBU
EFWJDF3FGFSUPUIF24-JOL1PXFS%SBX6OJUTTQFDJGJDBUJPOTVCNJUUBM -VUSPO1/
GPSNPSFJOGPSNBUJPO
DPODFSOJOH1%6T
MFUUFS#POUIFEJBHSBN3FGFSUPUIFTQFDJGJDEFWJDFEPDVNFOUBUJPOGPSXJSJOHEFUBJMT
A
Power Group 1
LUTRON
GRAFIK Eye QS
control unit
Supplies PDUs
A
B
Control Interfaces
Consume PDUs
(Do not connect

terminal 2: 24 V )
Wallstations
Consume PDUs
Power Group 2
Terminals 1, 2, 3,
and 4 (Common,
24 V , and
data) connect
devices within a
power group.
B
Terminal 2
(24 V ) is NOT
connected
between power
groups.
Energi Savr NodeTM

unit Supplies PDUs
Wallstations
Consume PDUs
(Do not connect

terminal 2: 24 V )
Power Group 3
A
QS Power Supply
Supplies PDUs


Occupancy Sensor
Consumes PDUs
(Do not connect

terminal 2: 24 V )
Quantum Processor
(if applicable)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 12
Control Unit (230 V
CE)
369311 Rev. A 13 03.07.11
Mounting
Mounting
screws (4)
Standard 4-gang
U.S. wallbox,
89 mm (3.5 in)
deep
Hinged
top lid
(3"'*,&ZF
QS control unit
Hinged
bottom lid
Line Voltage Wiring

Rear of
QS control unit
1 2 3 4 5 6 L N
To Load 1

is labeled L.
To Load 2
To Load 3
To Load 4
To Load 5
To Load 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 L N
Distribution Panel
50 Hz
230 V
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 13
Control Unit (230 V
CE)
369311 Rev. A 14 03.07.11

Two 1.0 mm2 "8(
DPOEVDUPSTGPSDPOUSPMQPXFS
0OFUXJTUFE TIJFMEFEQBJSPGNN2 "8(
GPSEBUBMJOL


QS
Control Unit
Sivoia QS
Window
Treatment
seeTouch QS
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
Sivoia QS
smart panel

QS
Control Unit
seeTouch QS
LUTRON
LUTRON
Sivoia QS
smart panel
LUTRON
Sivoia QS
Window
Treatment
LUTRON
LUTRON
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 14
Control Unit
369309 Rev. B 1 11.17.11
GRAFIK Eye QS Control Unit
Open
Preset
Close
Description
GRAFIK Eye QS is the premier energy-saving light
and shade control. The GRAFIK Eye QS control unit
includes an astronomic timeclock, intuitive lighting
presets, and direct shade control. Additionally, the
GRAFIK Eye QS control unit is compatible with all
Lutron wired QS products and systems, including
Quantum systems.
4
Off
LUTRON
94 in
(239 mm)
4 in
(10 mm)
2 in
(51 mm)
4$ in
(119 mm)
Front View
Side View
System Topology
Wired QS link
GRAFIK Eye QS
GRAFIK Eye QS
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
Quantum
processor
seeTouch
QS
wallstation
seeTouch
QS
wallstation
QSE-CI-NWK-E
Wired
occupancy
sensor
Job Number:
LUTRON
QS Sensor
Module
Energi Savr
NodeTM unit
Job Name:
Sivoia QS
shade
Model Numbers:
Page 1
Control Unit

369309 Rev. B 2 11.17.11
Open
Preset
Close
Features
t 1VTICVUUPOSFDBMMPGGPVSQSFTFUMJHIUJOHTDFOFT QMVT
0GG
t 5XFMWF
wallstations.
DBOBMTPCFBEEFEUPUIFVOJUBGUFSJOTUBMMBUJPO
SFDFJWFS
FOFSHZTBWJOHT [POFMBCFMJOH BOEQSPHSBNNJOH
t 0OFPDDVQBODZTFOTPSJOQVUBOE7 QPXFSGPS
occupancy sensor.
MJHIUT NPUPSJ[FEXJOEPXUSFBUNFOUT PDDVQBODZ
TFOTPST XBMMTUBUJPOT BOEJOUFHSBUJPOJOUFSGBDFT
locate and operate.
4
Off
LUTRON
OK
Open
Preset
Close
3
4
Off
USB type
mini B
Optional
shade
control
keypad
Zone
control
*OGSBSFE
receiver
Lighting
control
keypad
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
*OGP
screen
Page 2
Control Unit

369309 Rev. B 3 11.17.11
Specifications
Input Power
t 7
t 7
)[
)[

t 6t $4"
t /0.
t $&$ 5JUMF
Environment
t UP' UP$

t *ODBOEFTDFOU
t )BMPHFO
t -VUSPO5V8JSFFMFDUSPOJDGMVPSFTDFOUEJNNJOHCBMMBTU
t $SFF-3 7 GJYUVSFT GPSMPBEJOHDBQBDJUJFT
QMFBTFSFGFSUPUIF-&%SFQPSUDBSEMPDBUFEBU
1MFBTFSFGFSUPi$BQBDJUJFTwGPSNPSFJOGPSNBUJPO
JOUFSGBDFT
t -VUSPO)JMVNF and Eco-10FMFDUSPOJDGMVPSFTDFOU
dimming ballast
t /POEJN
t 7
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Key Design Features

6000 V BOEDVSSFOUTVSHFTPGVQUP"

TFUUJOHTGPSVQUPZFBSTJOUIFFWFOUPGBQPXFSMPTT
'PSDPNQMFUFJOGPSNBUJPO TFFi1PXFS%SBX6OJUTPOUIF
GJOEBOEUPPQFSBUFUIFDPOUSPMVOJUJOMPXMJHIUDPOEJUJPOT
easy reading.
GSPOUPGUIFDPOUSPMVOJU
24JOUFSGBDFT
DBOCFTFUEJGGFSFOUMZGPSFBDITDFOFUPTFDPOET PS
UPNJOVUFT.BYJNVNGBEFUJNFGSPN0GGJT
3 seconds.
Page 3
Control Unit

369309 Rev. B 4 11.17.11
Specifications
Shade Control
columns.
Zone Control
BEKVTUUIF[POF
Info Screen
t 0-&% PSHBOJD-&%
UIBUBGGFDUBOZ&OFSHJ4BWS/PEFTM unit connected on the
location.

BEKVTUFEGPSUIFOFXEBUFT%45JTQSPHSBNNBCMF
GFBUVSFT
4DFOFTUPBOE0GG
&OBCMFBOE%JTBCMFPDDVQBODZGPSPDDVQBODZWBDBODZ
sensors
sensors
DPOOFDUTDPOUSPMVOJUT XBMMTUBUJPOT NPUPSJ[FETIBEFT
BOEDPOUSPMJOUFSGBDFT
t "24TZTUFNDBOIBWFVQUPEFWJDFTBOE
[POFT
Infrared
t *OGSBSFE *3
shades.
t GU N
MJOFPGTJHIUSBOHF
*3JOQVUGSPNUIJSEQBSUZFRVJQNFOU
controls.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 4
Control Unit

369309 Rev. B 5 11.17.11
Specifications
(QSWS2)
t 8JSFETFF5PVDI24XBMMTUBUJPOTQSPWJEFUIFGPMMPXJOH
GFBUVSFT
"DDFTTUPPOFPSNPSFPGUIFTDFOFTPOUIF(3"'*,
Eye QS control unit
XBMMTUBUJPODPOGJHVSBUJPOT3FGFSUPUIFTFF5PVDI QS
'VODUJPOBMJUZWBSJFTSFGFSUPUIFEPDVNFOUBUJPOGPSUIF
244FOTPS.PEVMFGPSEFUBJMT
- Pico wireless controls wirelessly linked to a QS Sensor
.PEVMFDBOCFVTFEUPDPOUSPMPOFPSNPSF[POFTPS
scenes on the GRAFIK Eye QS control unit.
Interface (QSE-IO)
PDDVQBODZTFOTPSGPSUIF(3"'*,&ZF QS control unit.

TFDUJPOPGUIJTHVJEF

Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Accessory Controls:
(QSE-CI-NWK-E)
TDFOFTPGUIF(3"'*,&ZF QS control unit.
(QSWS2-KS)
PGB[POFPSHSPVQPG
[POFT
t 4UBSUT4UPQTTDFOFTFRVFODJOHT 4DFOFTPS4DFOFT
5-16)
t &OFSHJ4BWS/PEFTM QS &4/
4FFUIFTQFDJGJDBUJPO
TVCNJUUBMGPSDPNQMFUFEFUBJMT
Occupancy Sensor(s)
4DFOF$POUSPM6QUPGPVSTFOTPSTBDUJWBUFVTFSTFMFDUBCMF
occupancy and vacancy scenes.
;POF$POUSPMVQUPGPVSTFOTPSTQFS[POFBDUJWBUFVTFS
TFMFDUFEPDDVQBODZBOEWBDBODZ[POFMFWFMT
(QSM)
PDDVQBODZTDFOFPS[POFMFWFM
TDFOFPS[POFMFWFM
Page 5
Control Unit

369309 Rev. B 6 11.17.11
Specifications
Daylight Sensor(s)
t 5IF(3"'*,&ZF QS control unit allows daylight sensors
UPDPOUSPMPOFPSNPSFMJHIUJOH[POFTUPBEKVTUFMFDUSJD
light levels based on measured daylight levels.
module (QSM)
24DPOUSPMVOJU[POFT
sensor
by-scene basis
DPOUSPMVOJUPOMZBGGFDUTMJHIUJOHMPBET4IBEFHSPVQT
cannot be controlled by daylight sensors. Daylighting does
OPUBGGFDU%.9PS3(#$.:%.9MPBET

input (Terminal A).
solid-state output.
UZQFTPGJOQVUT
.BJOUBJOFE EFGBVMU
5IF(3"'*,&ZF QS control unit will
event.
TJUVBUJPOJTEFUFDUFE BMMMJHIUTXJMMHPUPGVMMPO BOEOP
cleared.
"GUFSIPVST"MMPXTUIF$$*UPTUBSUBOEFOEUIFBGUFSIPVST
mode.
timeclock.
4BWF/FWFS1SFWFOUTBOZDIBOHFTGSPNCFJOHTBWFEXIJMF
t "DIBSBDUFSQBTTXPSE VTJOHDIBSBDUFST"UP;BOE
to 9) can be enabled/disabled to lock out access to the
Programming Menu.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 6
Control Unit
369309 Rev. B 7 11.17.11
Capacities
220 - 240 V
MLV
MLV
50 / 60 Hz
120 - 127 V
50 / 60 Hz
3000
2000
3000 VA / 2400 W
2000 VA / 1600 W
40 1200
25 800
40 1200 VA / 40 960 W
25 800 VA / 25 600 W

JOTUBMMJOHBO&-7MJHIUTPVSDF WFSJGZXJUIUIFNBOVGBDUVSFSUIBUUIFJSUSBOTGPSNFSDBOCFEJNNFE8IFOEJNNJOH BO
&-7JOUFSGBDF TVDIBTUIF1)1.1"%78)
NVTUCFVTFEXJUIUIFDPOUSPMVOJU
7 : 800 VA / 600 W
- 220 - 240 V : 1200 VA / 960 W
t .BYJNVNUPUBMMJHIUJOHMPBEGPS-VUSPO5V8JSFBOE"EWBODF.BSL9FMFDUSPOJDEJNNJOHCBMMBTUT UP7
POMZ
NVTUOPUFYDFFE"QFS[POFPS"QFSVOJU
System Limits
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 7
Control Unit
369309 Rev. B 8 11.17.11

Example:
Base Unit
QSGR
- _P
1SFGJY
QSGR-6P
[POFCBTFVOJU
and
QSGFP-2IV-EGN
engraving
Phase Control Triac

Number
PG;POFT
[POFT
[POFT
[POFT
Faceplate Kit
QSGFP Faceplate
1SFGJY
Number
PG4IBEF
Columns
Omit = none
1 = 1 column
2 = 2 columns
3 = 3 columns
Top
Door
Color
Color/
Finish
Keypad
Engraving
Code
Omit = same as
unit
T = Translucent

Architectural Matte
Finishes
Architectural Metal
Finishes
Satin Color Matte

Finishes
Standard
(ship in 48 hours)
White
Ivory
Beige
Gray
Brown
Black
Almond
Light Almond
Bright Brass
Bright Chrome
Bright Nickel
Satin Brass
Satin Chrome
Satin Nickel
Antique Brass
"OUJRVF#SPO[F
Snow
Biscuit
Eggshell
Taupe
Midnight
Limestone
Stone
Desert Stone
Terracotta
Hot
Goldstone
Palladium
Plum
Turquoise
Bluestone
Sea Glass
Greenbriar
Sienna
Merlot
Mocha Stone
WH
IV
BE
GR
BR
BL
AL
LA
Anodized Aluminum
Finishes
Clear
Black
Brass
BB
BC
BN
SB
SC
SN
QB
2;
CLA
BLA
BRA
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
SW
BI
ES
TP
MN
LS
ST
DS
TC
HT
GS
PD
PL
TQ
BG
SG
GB
SI
MR
MS
Omit = Unengraved
1
Open
Preset
Close
4
Off
Lighting
keypad
Shade
column

Page 8
Control Unit
369309 Rev. B 9 11.17.11

See previous page for Other Custom Model Numbers
Custom Button Kit

,JU1SFGJY
Button
$POGJHVSBUJPO
Keypad
Engraving
Code
Button
Color/
Finish

raise/lower
(shade column)
5B
= 5-button
(lighting keypad)

Omit = Unengraved
Button Kit Custom

Color/Finish Codes
Architectural Matte
Finishes
White
Ivory
Beige
Gray
Brown
Black
Almond
Light Almond
WH
IV
BE
GR
BR
BL
AL
LA
Satin Color Matte

Finishes
Snow
Biscuit
Eggshell
Taupe
SW
BI
ES
TP
Open
Preset
Close
4
Off
Lighting
keypad
Shade
column

Custom Stripe Kit
QSGS - WH
Stripe Color/
Finish
Stripe
Kit
1SFGJY

Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 9
Control Unit
369309 Rev. B 10 11.17.11
GRAFIK Eye QS Control Unit Standard Color Combinations

' GBDFQMBUF
S (stripe)
Open
Preset
Close
3
4
Off
LUTRON
Suffix
Faceplate (F)
Architectural Matte
WH
White
IV
Ivory
BE
Beige
GR
Gray
BR
Brown
BL
Black
AL
Almond
LA
Light Almond
Architectural Metal
BB
Bright Brass
BC
Bright Chrome
BN
Bright Nickel
SB
Satin Brass
SC
Satin Chrome
SN
Satin Nickel
QB
Antique Brass
2;
"OUJRVF#SPO[F
Anodized
CLA
Clear
BLA
Black
BRA
Brass
Stripe (S)
Button (B)
Job Number:
B (buttons)
' GBDFQMBUF
Example:
*GZPVPSEFS24(318) ZPVS(3"'*,
Eye24DPOUSPMVOJUXJUIMJHIUJOH[POFTBOE
TIBEF[POFXJMMDPNFXJUIBXIJUFGBDFQMBUF
(both top and bottom), gray stripe, and white
buttons.
Suffix
Faceplate (F)
Satin Matte
Gray
White
MN
Midnight
Beige
Ivory
TP
Taupe
Ivory
Beige
SW
Snow
Black
Gray
ES
Eggshell
Black
Brown
BI
Biscuit
Gray
Black
LS
Limestone
Light Almond Almond
ST
Stone
Almond
Light Almond DS
Desert Stone
TC
Terracotta
Black
Black
BG
Bluestone
Black
Black
HT
Hot
Black
Black
MR
Merlot
Black
Black
SI
Sienna
Black
Black
GB
Greenbriar
Black
Black
SG
Sea Glass
Black
Black
MS
Mocha Stone
#MBDL
#MBDL
GS
Goldstone
PD
Palladium
Black
Black
PL
Plum
Black
Black
TQ
Turquoise
Black
Black
Job Name:
VOEFSiGBDFQMBUFw5IFUPQNBZCFUIF
TBNFDPMPSPSUSBOTMVDFOU6TFUIFDIBSUGPS
GBDFQMBUFTUIBUIBWFUIFTBNFDPMPSUPQBOE
CPUUPN*GBUSBOTMVDFOUMJEJTDIPTFO UIF
the bottom lid.
Model Numbers:
Stripe (S)
Button (B)
Gray
Gray
Gray
Beige
Eggshell
Gray
Gray
Taupe
Taupe
Gray
Taupe
Taupe
Brown
Gray
Gray
Taupe
Ivory
Gray
Taupe
Gray
Black
Taupe
Snow
Eggshell
Biscuit
Gray
Gray
Taupe
Taupe
Gray
Taupe
Taupe
Brown
Gray
Gray
Taupe
Ivory
Gray
Taupe
Gray
Page 10
Control Unit
369309 Rev. B 11 11.17.11
Wiring Diagrams
Terminations
Communication link
A B C
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 L N
1 2
power
IR input
Load wiring
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 11
Control Unit
369309 Rev. B 12 11.17.11
GPSNPSFJOGPSNBUJPO
concerning PDUs.
A
Power Group 1
LUTRON
GRAFIK Eye QS
control unit
Supplies PDUs
A
LUTRON
Control Interfaces
Consume PDUs
(Do not connect

terminal 2: 24 V )
Wallstations
Consume PDUs
Power Group 2
Connect all 4
terminals within a
power group:
1: Common
2: 24 V
3 and 4: Data
LUTRON

unit Supplies PDUs
LUTRON
Connect only 3
terminals between
power groups:
1: Common
3 and 4: Data
Do not connect
Terminal 2: 24 V
LUTRON
Wallstations
Consume PDUs
B
(Do not connect
terminal 2: 24 V
Power Group 3
A
LUTRON
QS Power Supply
Supplies PDUs
Control Interfaces
Consume PDUs
Wallstations
Consume PDUs

Consumes PDUs
(Do not connect

terminal 2: 24 V )
Quantum panel
Supplies PDUs
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 12
Control Unit
369309 Rev. B 13 11.17.11
Mounting
Mounting
screws (4)
Standard 4-gang
U.S. wallbox,
3.5 in (89 mm)
deep
Hinged
top lid
GRAFIK Eye
QS control unit
Hinged
bottom lid
Line Voltage Wiring

Rear of
QS control unit
1 2 3 4 5 6 L N
To Load 1

is labeled L.
To Load 2
To Load 3
To Load 4
To Load 5
To Load 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 L N
Distribution Panel
50 / 60 Hz
120 - 127 V
or
220 - 240 V
50 / 60 Hz
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 13
Control Unit
369309 Rev. B 14 11.17.11


Wire Gauge
-FTTUIBOGU N

1 pair 18 AWG (1.0 mm2)
(39$#-4 OPOQMFOVN
(391$#-4 QMFOVN

UPGU
(153 to 610 m)

1 pair 12 AWG (4.0 mm2)
(39$#-- OPOQMFOVN
(391$#-- QMFOVN


GRAFIK Eye QS
Control Unit
seeTouch QS
wallstations
Sivoia QS
Shade
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
Sivoia QS
smart panel

GRAFIK Eye QS
Control Unit
seeTouch QS
wallstations
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
Sivoia QS
smart panel
LUTRON
Sivoia QS
Shade
LUTRON
LUTRON
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 14
Control Unit with EcoSystem

369310 Rev. B 1 11.17.11
GRAFIK Eye QS Control Unit with EcoSystem
Open
Preset
Close
3
4
Off
Description
GRAFIK Eye QS with EcoSystem is the premier energysaving lighting and shade control. The GRAFIK Eye
QS control unit features an astronomic timeclock and
intuitive lighting presets, which are seamlessly integrated
with EcoSystem fluorescent ballasts and LED drivers,
and Lutrons QS components and systems. Additionally,
the GRAFIK Eye QS with EcoSystem control unit is
compatible with all Lutron wired QS products and systems,
including Quantum.
LUTRON
Application Suggestions and Differences between GRAFIK Eye QS with EcoSystem

and Standard EcoSystem Bus Supply
GRAFIK Eye QS with
EcoSystem
Energi Savr NodeTM

with EcoSystem
Suggested/Recommended Applications
Single rooms, partitioned spaces,

e.g., conference room, classroom,
ballroom, lobby
Open spaces, multiple

enclosed rooms, e.g., open
office, window offices
Programming Method
Info Screen on the QS control unit
Via Energi Savr NodeTM App for

iPod mobile digital device
Integral Timeclock
Yes
No
Compatible with seeTouch QS Keypads
Yes
Yes
Compatible with EcoSystem Wall Controls
No
Yes
Compatible with EcoSystem IR Sensors
No
Yes
Includes dry contact closure for integration to BMS

or Security Systems
Yes
Yes
Input Voltage
120-127 or 220-240 V
Number of EcoSystem Busses
50/60 Hz
120/240/277 V
1 or 2
Number of Zones
6, 8, or 16
Programmable
Number of Line-Voltage Outputs
3 (Zones 1-3 only)
--
Compatible with other QS Devices
Yes
Yes
50/60 Hz
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the United States and other countries.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 1

369310 Rev. B 2 11.17.11
94 in
(239 mm)
4 in
(10 mm)
2 in
(51 mm)
4$ in
(119 mm)
Front View
Side View
System Topology
Wired QS link
GRAFIK Eye QS
wireless
GRAFIK Eye QS
wireless
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
Quantum
(optional)
seeTouch QS
EcoSystem
ballast
seeTouch
QS
QSE-CI-NWK-E
Wired
occupancy
sensor
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Sivoia QS
shade
LUTRON
QS Sensor
Module
Energi Savr
NodeTM
Page 2

369310 Rev. B 3 11.17.11
Open
Preset
Close
3
4
Off
LUTRON
OK
Open
Preset
Close
3
4
Off
USB
type
mini B
Optional
shade
control
keypad
;POF
control
Infrared
receiver
Lighting
control
keypad
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Info
screen
Features
t 1VTICVUUPOSFDBMMPGGPVSQSFTFUMJHIUJOHTDFOFT QMVT
Off.
t 5XFMWF
wallstations.
t ;POFT BOEDBODPOUSPMNBOZMJHIUTPVSDF
types directly and others using power modules.
can also be added to the unit after installation.
SFDFJWFS
FOFSHZTBWJOHT [POFMBCFMJOH QSPHSBNNJOH BOE
EcoSystem setup.
occupancy sensor.
MJHIUT NPUPSJ[FEXJOEPXUSFBUNFOUT PDDVQBODZ
sensors, wallstations, and integration interfaces.
t $POUSPMVQUP PS&DP4ZTUFN[POFTGSPN
internal bus supply.
t ;POFT BOEBSFJOUFHSBMMJOFWPMUBHFEJNNJOH
[POFTBOEDBOCFPQUJPOBMMZQSPHSBNNFEBT
EcoSystem[POFT
t 6QUP&DP4ZTUFN or Hi-lume 3D ballasts can
CFBEESFTTFEBOEHSPVQFEUP[POFT
t *OUFHSBM&DP4ZTUFN setup and programming
replaces the need for a handheld programmer
(C-PDA-CLR does not communicate with
GRAFIK Eye QS with EcoSystem)
locate and operate.
Page 3

369310 Rev. B 4 11.17.11
Specifications
Input Power
t 7
t 7
)[
)[

t 6t $4"
t /0.
t $&$ 5JUMF
Environment
t UP' UP$

t &DP4ZTUFN, Hi-lume 3D, and Hi-lume LED ballasts
BWBJMBCMFPOBMM[POFT

;POFT BOEDPOUSPMUIFGPMMPXJOHMJHIUJOHTPVSDFT
with a smooth, continuous square law dimming curve or
on a full conduction non-dim basis:
t *ODBOEFTDFOU
t )BMPHFO
t $SFF-3 7
fixtures (for loading capacities,
please refer to the LED report card located at
Please refer to Capacities for more information.
;POFT BOEDPOUSPMUIFGPMMPXJOHMJHIUJOHTPVSDFT
with a smooth, continuous square law dimming curve
or on a full conduction non-dim basis through separate
Lutron power modules:
t -VUSPO)JMVNF, Eco-10, and Compact SETM electronic
fluorescent dimming ballast
t /POEJN
t 7
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Key Design Features

7
line voltage variations (no visible flicker with +/-2% change in
3.4WPMUBHFQFSDZDMF BOE)[DIBOHFJOGSFRVFODZ
per second).
t 5IF(3"'*,&ZF QS supplies 3 Power Draw Units (PDUs)
on the QS link.
For complete information, see Power Draw Units on the QS
-JOL w-VUSPO1/
and 277 V
EcoSystem,
t %JSFDUDPOUSPMPG7
Hi-lume 3D, and Hi-lume LED ballasts (no interface
required).
reading.
QS interfaces.
NJOVUFT.BYJNVNGBEFUJNFGSPN0GGJTTFDPOET
Page 4

369310 Rev. B 5 11.17.11
Specifications
Shade Control
columns.
Zone Control
BEKVTUUIF[POF
Info Screen
t 0-&% PSHBOJD-&%
t 0OFBWBJMBCMFIPMJEBZTDIFEVMFJTQSPHSBNNBCMFCZEBUFVQ
to one year in advance.
that affect any Energi Savr NodeTM QS unit connected
on the QS link without changing the local scene on the
automatically adjust throughout the year based on location.

features:
4DFOFTUPBOE0GG
sensors
sensors
DPOUSPMVOJUT XBMMTUBUJPOT NPUPSJ[FETIBEFT BOEDPOUSPM
interfaces.
t $MBTT$MBTTXJSJOHDPOOFDUTCBMMBTUUPDPOUSPMVOJU
Infrared
t *OGSBSFE *3
TDFOFT SBJTFMPXFSMJHIUJOH[POFT PSSBJTFMPXFSTIBEFT
t GU N
MJOFPGTJHIUSBOHF
controls.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 5

369310 Rev. B 6 11.17.11
Specifications
(QSWS2)
features:
Accessory Controls:

GRAFIK Eye QS control unit via the wired QS link.
- Pico wireless controls wirelessly linked to a QS Sensor
.PEVMFDBOCFVTFEUPDPOUSPMPOFPSNPSF[POFTPS
scenes on the GRAFIK Eye QS control unit.

(QSWS2-KS)
t 3FDBMMTQSFTFUMJHIUMFWFMTGPSBOZUXPTDFOFTJODMVEJOH
Off.
PGB[POFPSHSPVQPG
[POFT


Interface (QSE-IO)

t 4IBEF0VUQVUNPEF"4IBEF$PMVNOPOUIF
GRAFIK Eye QS control unit can be linked to control
outputs 1-3 and/or outputs 4-5 on the QSE-IO.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:

(QSE-CI-NWK-E)

t &OFSHJ4BWS/PEFTM QS (ESN). See the SPecification
SUbmittal for complete details.
Occupancy Sensor(s)
;POF$POUSPM6QUPGPVSTFOTPSTQFS[POFBDUJWBUFVTFS
(QSM)
PDDVQBODZTDFOFPS[POFMFWFM
WBDBODZTDFOFPS[POFMFWFM
Page 6

369310 Rev. B 7 11.17.11
Specifications
Daylight Sensor(s)
t 5IF(3"'*,&ZF QS with EcoSystem control unit works
with compatible daylight sensors to adjust electric light
levels based on measured daylight levels. Sensors can
be configured to control either GRAFIK Eye24[POFTPS
groups of EcoSystemMPBETJOEFQFOEFOUPG[POJOH
interfaces
module (QSM)
GRAFIK Eye24[POFT&BDI[POFDBOCFDBMJCSBUFEUP
sensor
more EcoSystem loads, regardless of how they are
[POFEPOUIF(3"'*,&ZF QS control unit.
levels
6QUPHSPVQTBSFBWBJMBCMF
by-scene basis
control unit only affects lighting loads. Shade groups
cannot be controlled by daylight sensors. Daylighting
EPFTOPUBGGFDU%.9PS3(#$.:%.9MPBET
Contact Closure Input (CCI) with Power Supply Output

input (Terminal A).
*OQVUJTNJTXJSFQSPUFDUFEVQUP7 .
types of inputs:
event.
cleared.
mode.
timeclock.
Programming Menu.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 7

369310 Rev. B 8 11.17.11
Capacities
220 - 240 V
MLV
;POF$BQBDJUZ XBUUT
MLV
50 / 60 Hz
120 - 127 V
50 / 60 Hz
3000
2000
3000 VA / 2400 W
7"8
40 1200
25 800
o7"o8
o7"o8

installing an ELV light source, verify with the manufacturer that their transformer can be dimmed. When dimming, an
ELV interface (such as the PHPM-PA-DV-WH) must be used with the control unit.
- 120 - 127 V 7"8
- 220 - 240 V 7"8
t .BYJNVNUPUBMMJHIUJOHMPBEGPS-VUSPO5V8JSFBOE"EWBODF.BSL9 electronic dimming ballasts (120 to 127 V
POMZ
NVTUOPUFYDFFE"QFS[POFPS"QFSVOJU
System Limits
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 8

369310 Rev. B 9 11.17.11
GRAFIK Eye QS with EcoSystem Control Unit

Example:
Base Unit
QSGR - _ E
QSGR-6E
[POFCBTFVOJU
and
QSGFP-2IV-EGN
engraving
EcoSystem
Prefix
Number
PG;POFT
[POFT
[POFT
[POFT
Faceplate Kit
QSGFP Faceplate
Prefix
Number
of Shade
Columns
Omit = none
1 = 1 column
2 = 2 columns
3 = 3 columns
Top
Door
Color
Color/
Finish
Keypad
Engraving
Code
Omit = same as
unit
T = Translucent

Architectural Matte
Finishes
Architectural Metal
Finishes
Satin Color Matte

Finishes
Standard
(ship in 48 hours)
White
Ivory
Beige
Gray
Brown
Black
Almond
Light Almond
Bright Brass
Bright Chrome
Bright Nickel
Satin Brass
Satin Chrome
Satin Nickel
Antique Brass
"OUJRVF#SPO[F
Snow
Biscuit
Eggshell
Taupe
Midnight
Limestone
Stone
Desert Stone
Terracotta
Hot
Goldstone
Palladium
Plum
Turquoise
Bluestone
Sea Glass
Greenbriar
Sienna
Merlot
Mocha Stone
WH
IV
BE
GR
BR
BL
AL
LA
Anodized Aluminum
Finishes
Clear
Black
Brass
BB
BC
BN
SB
SC
SN
QB
2;
CLA
BLA
BRA
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
SW
BI
ES
TP
MN
LS
ST
DS
TC
HT
GS
PD
PL
TQ
BG
SG
GB
SI
MR
MS
Omit = Unengraved
1
Open
Preset
Close
4
Off
Lighting
keypad
Shade
column

Page 9

369310 Rev. B 10 11.17.11

See previous page for Custom Model Numbers
Custom Button Kit

Kit Prefix
Button
Configuration
Keypad
Engraving
Code
Button
Color/
Finish

raise/lower
(shade column)
5B
= 5-button
(lighting keypad)

Omit = Unengraved
Button Kit Custom

Color/Finish Codes
Architectural Matte
Finishes
White
Ivory
Beige
Gray
Brown
Black
Almond
Light Almond
WH
IV
BE
GR
BR
BL
AL
LA
Satin Color Matte

Finishes
Snow
Biscuit
Eggshell
Taupe
SW
BI
ES
TP
Open
Preset
Close
4
Off
Lighting
keypad
Shade
column

Custom Stripe Kit
QSGS - WH
Stripe Color/
Finish
Stripe
Kit
Prefix

Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 10

369310 Rev. B 11 11.17.11

Standard Color Combinations
F (faceplate)
S (stripe)
Open
Preset
Close
3
4
Off
LUTRON
Suffix
Faceplate (F)
Architectural Matte
WH
White
IV
Ivory
BE
Beige
GR
Gray
BR
Brown
BL
Black
AL
Almond
LA
Light Almond
Architectural Metal
BB
Bright Brass
BC
Bright Chrome
BN
Bright Nickel
SB
Satin Brass
SC
Satin Chrome
SN
Satin Nickel
QB
Antique Brass
2;
"OUJRVF#SPO[F
Anodized
CLA
Clear
BLA
Black
BRA
Brass
Stripe (S)
Button (B)
Job Number:
B (buttons)
F (faceplate)
Example:
*GZPVPSEFS24(3&8) ZPVS(3"'*,
Eye24DPOUSPMVOJUXJUIMJHIUJOH[POFT
and 1 shade column will come with a white
faceplate (both top and bottom), gray stripe,
and white buttons.
Suffix
Faceplate (F)
Satin Matte
Gray
White
MN
Midnight
Beige
Ivory
TP
Taupe
Ivory
Beige
SW
Snow
Black
Gray
ES
Eggshell
Black
Brown
BI
Biscuit
Gray
Black
LS
Limestone
Light Almond Almond
ST
Stone
Almond
Light Almond DS
Desert Stone
TC
Terracotta
Black
Black
BG
Bluestone
Black
Black
HT
Hot
Black
Black
MR
Merlot
Black
Black
SI
Sienna
Black
Black
GB
Greenbriar
Black
Black
SG
Sea Glass
Black
Black
MS
Mocha Stone
#MBDL
#MBDL
GS
Goldstone
PD
Palladium
Black
Black
PL
Plum
Black
Black
TQ
Turquoise
Black
Black
Job Name:

under faceplate. The top may be the
same color or translucent. Use the chart for
faceplates that have the same color top and
bottom. If a translucent lid is chosen, the
the bottom lid.
Model Numbers:
Stripe (S)
Button (B)
Gray
Gray
Gray
Beige
Eggshell
Gray
Gray
Taupe
Taupe
Gray
Taupe
Taupe
Brown
Gray
Gray
Taupe
Ivory
Gray
Taupe
Gray
Black
Taupe
Snow
Eggshell
Biscuit
Gray
Gray
Taupe
Taupe
Gray
Taupe
Taupe
Brown
Gray
Gray
Taupe
Ivory
Gray
Taupe
Gray
Page 11

369310 Rev. B 12 11.17.11
Overview
Terminations
Load wiring
EcoSystem bus (E1, E2)
Communication link
and 24 V power
IR input
Power wiring
Wire Gauge
12 AWG (4.0 mm2

14 AWG (2.5 mm2)
"8( NN2)
18 AWG (1.0 mm2)
Maximum EcoSystem
Bus Length
GU N
1400 ft (427 m)
900 ft (275 m)
570 ft (175 m)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 12

369310 Rev. B 13 11.17.11

GPSNPSFJOGPSNBUJPO
concerning PDUs.
A
Power Group 1
LUTRON
GRAFIK Eye QS
control unit
Supplies PDUs
A
LUTRON
Control Interfaces
Consume PDUs
(Do not connect

terminal 2: 24 V )
Wallstations
Consume PDUs
Power Group 2
Connect all 4
terminals within a
power group:
1: Common
2: 24 V
3 and 4: Data
LUTRON

unit Supplies PDUs
LUTRON
Connect only 3
terminals between
power groups:
1: Common
3 and 4: Data
Do not connect
Terminal 2: 24 V
LUTRON
Wallstations
Consume PDUs
B
(Do not connect
terminal 2: 24 V
Power Group 3
A
LUTRON
QS Power Supply
Supplies PDUs
Control Interfaces
Consume PDUs
Wallstations
Consume PDUs

Consumes PDUs
(Do not connect

terminal 2: 24 V )
Quantum panel
Supplies PDUs
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 13

369310 Rev. B 14 11.17.11
Line Voltage Wiring
Do not use
Rear of
GRAFIK Eye QS
control unit
To Load 1

is labeled L.
To Load 2
To Load 3
Loads 1, 2, 3
120-127 V
or
220-240 V
1 2 3 4 5 6 L N
120-127 V
or
220-240 V
Distribution Panel
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 14

369310 Rev. B 15 11.17.11
EcoSystem Bus Wiring

EcoSystem Bus Link Terminal Detail
E2
E1
EcoSystem
ballasts
E2
E1
To additional EcoSystem
ballasts
EcoSystem Bus Wiring Example

To additional ballasts and
NPEVMFT VQUPUPUBM
EcoSystem Bus
EcoSystem
Ballast
LUTRON
GRAFIK Eye QS
with EcoSystem
(limit one per
EcoSystem link)
EcoSystem
Module
Job Number:
EcoSystem
Ballast
EcoSystem
Ballast
Daylight Sensor
Occupancy
Sensor
Job Name:
Eco-10 or
Hi-Lume
Ballast
Model Numbers:
Page 15

369310 Rev. B 16 11.17.11


Wire Gauge
Less than 500 ft (153 m)

1 pair 18 AWG (1.0 mm2)
(39$#-4 OPOQMFOVN
(391$#-4 QMFOVN

500 to 2000 ft
UPN

1 pair 12 AWG (4.0 mm2)
(39$#-- OPOQMFOVN
(391$#-- QMFOVN


GRAFIK Eye QS
Control Unit
seeTouch QS
wallstations
Sivoia QS
Shade
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
Sivoia QS
smart panel

GRAFIK Eye QS
Control Unit
seeTouch QS
wallstations
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
Sivoia QS
smart panel
LUTRON
Sivoia QS
Shade
LUTRON
LUTRON
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 16

369310 Rev. B 17 11.17.11
Mounting
Standard 4-gang
U.S. wallbox,
3` in (89 mm) deep
(available from
Hinged
top lid
Mounting
screws (4)
GRAFIK Eye QS
with EcoSystem
control unit
Hinged
bottom lid
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 17
Control Unit with DALI (CE)

369312 Rev. A 1 03.07.11
GRAFIK Eye QS Control Unit with DALI (CE)

Description
GRAFIK Eye QS with DALI is the premier energy-saving lighting
and shade control. GRAFIK Eye QS features an astronomic
timeclock, intuitive lighting presets, and direct shade control,
which are seamlessly integrated with DALI-compliant output
devices, and Lutrons QS components and systems. Now
with an integral DALI-compliant bus supply, you can use the
GRAFIK Eye QS with DALI to control digital loads and shades
without interfaces, and integrate with a variety of Lutron products
and systems, including Sivoia QS shades and all Lutron wired
GRAFIK Eye QS with DALI is compatible with Quantum.
1
2
3
4
LUTRON
239 mm
(94 in)
10 mm
(4 in)
51 mm
(2 in)
119 mm
(4$ in)
Front View
Side View
System Topology
LUTRON
seeTouch
QSE-CI-NWK-E
QS
Quantum
(optional)
LUTRON
24 V
230 V~ 50/60 Hz 100 mA

www.lutron.com
+44.(0)20.7680.4481
Power
QS Sensor
Module
MUX
TM
QSNE-2DAL-D
Test
Sivoia QS
shade
Ethernet
Energi Savr Node QS
Hi Temp
seeTouch QS
QS
0,5 Nm
8 mm
Energi Savr
NodeTM
DALI devices
Wired
occupancy
sensor
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
DALI 1 DALI 2
COM
IR
IR
Occ
20 V
Photo
2
4
Occ
MUX
Com
Photo
20 V
GRAFIK Eye QS
wireless
GRAFIK Eye QS
wireless
Com
Wired QS link
Page 1

369312 Rev. A 2 03.07.11
Page LEDs
1 9

[POFVOJU
3 11
2 10
4 12
5 13
6 14
7 15
8 16
9-16
1-8
OK
1
2
3
4
Zone
control
Optional
shade
control
columns
Infrared
receiver
USB type
mini B
Lighting
control
keypad
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Info
screen
Features
plus Off.
t 5XFMWF
QS wallstations.
installation.
lights.
SFDFJWFS
FOFSHZTBWJOHT [POFMBCFMJOH QSPHSBNNJOH
components.
CFBEESFTTFEBOEHSPVQFEJOUP[POFT
Page 2

369312 Rev. A 3 03.07.11
Specifications
Input Power
t 7 )[
DPNQMZXJUI*&$&/
DBOCFBEESFTTFEBOE
HSPVQFEJOUP[POFT
UPUIF(3"'*,&ZF QS.
Key Design Features
t 3'NFFUT*&$
QSPUFDUJPONFFUT"/4**&&&TUBOEBSE
t 5IFGRAFIK Eye QS supplies 3 Power Draw Units (PDUs)
on the QS link.
24-JOL w-VUSPO1/
Environment
t UP$ UP'

Shade Control
columns.
Zone Control
BEKVTUUIF[POF
Info Screen
t 0-&% PSHBOJD-&%
savings.
Compliance
t $&
easy reading.
QS interfaces.
UPNJOVUFT.BYJNVNGBEFUJNFGSPN0GGJT
3 seconds.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 3

369312 Rev. A 4 03.07.11
Specifications
Eye QS.
location.

features:
4DFOFTUPBOE0GG
sensors
sensors
Infrared
t *OGSBSFE *3
shades.
t N GU
MJOFPGTJHIUSBOHF
FYUFSOBM*3DPOOFDUJPO
controllers.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:

(QSWS2)
t 8JSFEseeTouch QS keypads provide the following
features:
- Certain functions are only available on specific
Accessory Controls: QS Sensor Module (QSM)
Module for details.
[POFTPSTDFOFTPOUIFGRAFIK Eye QS.
Interface (QSE-IO)
1 occupancy sensor for the GRAFIK Eye QS. Each
input can be assigned to either Scene Control or Zone
Control (please refer to the Occupancy Sensor(s)
Page 4

369312 Rev. A 5 03.07.11
Specifications
Accessory Controls:
QSPWJEJOH3(#$.:DPOUSPM

(QSE-CI-NWK-E)
(QSWS2-KS)
PGB[POFPSHSPVQPG
[POFT

t 5IFGRAFIK Eye QS with DALI works with compatible

control either GRAFIK Eye24[POFTPSHSPVQTPG%"-*
MPBETJOEFQFOEFOUPG[POJOH
module (QSM)
t *O;POF.PEF BEBZMJHIUTFOTPSDBODPOUSPMPOF
or more GRAFIK Eye24[POFT&BDI[POFDBOCF
calibrated to target light levels.
"[POFDBOCFDPOUSPMMFECZOPNPSFUIBOPOF
daylight sensor
NPSF%"-*MPBET SFHBSEMFTTPGIPXUIFZBSF[POFEPO
the GRAFIK Eye QS.
- Each group can be calibrated to independent target
light levels
6QUPHSPVQTBSFBWBJMBCMF
t %BZMJHIUDPOUSPMDBOCFFOBCMFEPSEJTBCMFEPOB
scene-by-scene basis
only affects lighting loads. Shade groups cannot be
controlled by daylight sensors. Daylighting does not
BGGFDU%.9PS3(#$.:%.9MPBET
Occupancy Sensor(s)
through either:
VTFSTFMFDUFEPDDVQBODZBOEWBDBODZ[POFMFWFMT
GRAFIK Eye QS
- Wired sensors connected to Energi Savr Node
Module (QSM)
TDFOFPS[POFMFWFM
level.
Daylight Sensor(s)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 5

369312 Rev. A 6 03.07.11
Specifications
(Terminal A).
*OQVUJTNJTXJSFQSPUFDUFEVQUP7 .
types of inputs:
release event.
24 V .
- Occupancy: If an occupancy sensor is wired directly
to the GRAFIK Eye QS, choose this setting so that the
afterhours mode.
timeclock.
- Never Save: Prevents any changes from being saved
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Unit Dissipation
t "MMNPEFMTPGGRAFIK Eye QS for Digital Addressable
Loads dissipate no more than 35 BTUs/hour.
System Limits
t 5IF24XJSFEDPNNVOJDBUJPOMJOLJTMJNJUFEUPEFWJDFT
PS[POFT
Programming Menu.
Eye QS.
Page 6

369312 Rev. A 7 03.07.11
GRAFIK Eye QS for Digital Addressable Loads

Example:
Base Unit
QSGR - _ D
QSGR-6D
[POFCBTFVOJU
and
QSGFP-2IV-SGN
Prefix
Number
of Zones
[POFT
[POFT
[POFT
Faceplate Kit
QSGFP Faceplate
Prefix
Number
of Shade
Columns
Omit = none
1 = 1 column
2 = 2 columns
3 = 3 columns
Colour/
Finish
Top
Door
Colour
Keypad
Engraving
Code
Omit = same as
unit
T = Translucent

Architectural Matte
Finishes
Architectural Metal
Finishes
8IJUF
Ivory
Beige
(SBZ

#SPXO
Black
Almond
Light Almond
Satin Colour Matte

Finishes
Bright Brass
Bright Chrome
Bright Nickel
Satin Brass
Satin Chrome
Satin Nickel
Antique Brass
"OUJRVF#SPO[F
Snow
Biscuit
Eggshell
Taupe
Midnight
Limestone
Stone
Desert Stone
Terracotta
)PU

Goldstone
Palladium
Plum
Turquoise
Bluestone
Sea Glass
Greenbrier
Sienna
.FSMPU
Mocha Stone
8)
IV
BE
(3
#3
BL
AL
LA
BB
BC
BN
SB
SC
SN
QB
2;
Anodised Aluminum
Finishes
Clear
Black
#SBTT
CLA
BLA
#3"
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
SW
BI
ES
TP
MN
LS
ST
DS
TC
)5
GS
PD
PL
TQ
BG
SG
GB
SI
.3
MS
Omit = Unengraved
1
2
3
4
Lighting
keypad
Shade
column

Page 7

369312 Rev. A 8 03.07.11

Custom Button Kit

Kit Prefix
Button
Configuration
Keypad
Engraving
Code
Button
Colour/
Finish
#3-CVUUPOXJUI
raise/lower
(shade column)
5B
= 5-button
(lighting keypad)

Omit = Unengraved
Button Kit Custom

Colour/Finish
Codes
Architectural Matte
Finishes
8IJUF
Ivory
Beige
(SBZ

#SPXO
Black
Almond
Light Almond
8)
IV
BE
(3
#3
BL
AL
LA
Satin Colour Matte

Finishes
Snow
Biscuit
Eggshell
Taupe
SW
BI
ES
TP
2
3
4
Lighting
keypad
Shade
column

Custom Stripe Kit
QSGS - ___
Stripe Colour/
Finish
Stripe
Kit
Prefix

Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 8

369312 Rev. A 9 03.07.11

F (faceplate)
S (stripe)
1
2

the bottom lid.
B (buttons)
3
4
F (faceplate)
LUTRON
Suffix
Faceplate (F)
Architectural Matte
8)
8IJUF
IV
Ivory
BE
Beige
(3
(SBZ
#3
#SPXO
BL
Black
AL
Almond
LA
Light Almond
Architectural Metal
BB
Bright Brass
BC
Bright Chrome
BN
Bright Nickel
SB
Satin Brass
SC
Satin Chrome
SN
Satin Nickel
QB
Antique Brass
2;
"OUJRVF#SPO[F
Anodised
CLA
Clear
BLA
Black
#3"
#SBTT
Suffix
Faceplate (F)
Satin Matte
(SBZ
8IJUF
MN
Midnight
Beige
Ivory
TP
Taupe
Ivory
Beige
SW
Snow
#MBDL
(SBZ
ES
Eggshell
#MBDL
#SPXO
BI
Biscuit
Gray
Black
LS
Limestone
Light Almond Almond
ST
Stone
Almond
Light Almond DS
Desert Stone
TC
Terracotta
Black
Black
BG
Bluestone
Black
Black
)5
)PU
Black
Black
.3
.FSMPU
Black
Black
SI
Sienna
Black
Black
GB
Greenbrier
Black
Black
SG
Sea Glass
Black
Black
MS
Mocha Stone
#MBDL
#MBDL
GS
Goldstone
PD
Palladium
Black
Black
PL
Plum
Black
Black
TQ
Turquoise
#MBDL
#MBDL
Stripe (S)
Button (B)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Stripe (S)
Button (B)
Gray
Gray
Gray
Beige
Eggshell
Gray
Gray
Taupe
Taupe
Gray
5BVQF
5BVQF
Brown
Gray
Gray
Taupe
Ivory
Gray
Taupe
Gray
Black
Taupe
Snow
Eggshell
Biscuit
Gray
Gray
Taupe
Taupe
Gray
5BVQF
5BVQF
Brown
Gray
Gray
Taupe
Ivory
Gray
Taupe
Gray
Page 9

369312 Rev. A 10 03.07.11
Overview
Terminations
DALI-compliant bus
(D1, D2)
Input Power
and 24 V power
D1 D1 D2 D2
*3JOQVU
Wire Gauge
4.0 mm2 "8(

2.5 mm2 "8(

1.5 mm2 "8(

1.0 mm2 "8(
Bus Wire Length
N GU
N GU
N GU
N GU
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 10

369312 Rev. A 11 03.07.11

GPSNPSFJOGPSNBUJPO
concerning PDUs.
MFUUFS#POUIFEJBHSBN3FGFSUPUIFTQFDJGJDEFWJDFEPDVNFOUBUJPOGPSXJSJOHEFUBJMT
A
Power Group 1
LUTRON
GRAFIK Eye QS
control unit
Supplies PDUs
A
B
Control Interfaces
Consume PDUs
(Do not connect

terminal 2: 24 V )
Wallstations
Consume PDUs
Power Group 2
Terminals 1, 2, 3,
and 4 (Common,
24 V , and
data) connect
devices within a
power group.
B
Terminal 2
(24 V ) is NOT
connected
between power
groups.
Energi Savr NodeTM

unit Supplies PDUs
Wallstations
Consume PDUs
(Do not connect

terminal 2: 24 V )
Power Group 3
A
QS Power Supply
Supplies PDUs


Occupancy Sensor
Consumes PDUs
(Do not connect

terminal 2: 24 V )
Quantum Processor
(if applicable)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 11

369312 Rev. A 12 03.07.11
Line Voltage Wiring
Not used
Rear of
QS control unit

is labeled L.
220-240 V
only
1 2 3 4 5 6 L N
Distribution Panel
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 12

369312 Rev. A 13 03.07.11

D1 D1 D2 D2
D2
D1
DALI-compliant
loads
D2

D1
To additional
DALI-compliant Bus
DALI-compliant
load
DALI-compliant
load
LUTRON
(3"'*,&ZF QS for
Digital Addressable
Loads (limit one per
DALI-compliant link)
To additional
DALI-compliant
MPBET VQUP
total)
DALI-compliant
load
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 13

369312 Rev. A 14 03.07.11


DALI-compliant Bus
QS
Control Unit
Sivoia QS
Shade
seeTouch QS
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
Sivoia QS smart
panel

DALI-compliant Bus
QS
Control Unit
seeTouch QS
LUTRON
LUTRON
DALI-compliant Bus
Sivoia QS smart
panel
LUTRON
Sivoia QS
Shade
LUTRON
LUTRON
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 14

369312 Rev. A 15 03.07.11
Mounting
Standard 4-gang
U.S. wallbox,
89 mm (3.5 in) deep
(available from
)JOHFE
top lid
Mounting
screws (4)
(3"'*,&ZF
QS control unit
)JOHFE
bottom lid
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 15
100 V
Control Unit
369430 Rev. A 1 04.25.11
Open
Preset
Close
Description
GRAFIK Eye QS is the premier energy-saving light
and shade control. GRAFIK Eye QS includes an
astronomic timeclock, intuitive lighting presets, and
direct shade control. Additionally, the GRAFIK Eye QS
is compatible with all Lutron wired QS products and
systems, including Quantum.
4
Off
LUTRON
94 in
(239 mm)
4 in
(10 mm)
2 in
(51 mm)
4$ in
(119 mm)
Front View
Side View
Fits into a 4-gang U.S. backbox, 3` in (89 mm) deep; Lutron P/N 241-400.
System Topology
Wired QS link
GRAFIK Eye QS
GRAFIK Eye QS
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
Quantum
(optional)
seeTouch
QS
seeTouch
QS
QSE-CI-NWK-E
Wired
occupancy
sensor
Job Number:
LUTRON
QS Sensor
Module
Energi Savr NodeTM
Job Name:
Sivoia QS
shade
Model Numbers:
Page 1
100 V
Control Unit

369430 Rev. A 2 04.25.11
Open
Preset
Close
Features
TDFOFT QMVT0GG
t 5XFMWF
QS wallstations.
XIJDIDBOBMTPCFBEEFEUPUIFVOJUBGUFS
installation.
lights.
SFDFJWFS
FOFSHZTBWJOHT [POFMBCFMJOH BOE
programming.
QPXFSGPSPDDVQBODZTFOTPS
JOUFHSBUJPOPGMJHIUT NPUPSJ[FEXJOEPX
treatments, occupancy sensors, wallstations,
BOEJOUFHSBUJPOJOUFSGBDFT
components.
4
Off
LUTRON
OK
Open
Preset
Close
3
4
Off
USB type
mini B
Optional
shade control
keypad
Zone
control
*OGSBSFE
receiver
Lighting
control
keypad
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
*OGP
screen
Page 2
100 V
Control Unit

369430 Rev. A 3 04.25.11
Specifications
Input Power
t 7 )[
Environment
t UP' UP$

t *ODBOEFTDFOU
t )BMPHFO
t /POEJN JODBOEFTDFOU NBHOFUJDMPXWPMUBHF
1MFBTFSFGFSUPi$BQBDJUJFTwGPSNPSFJOGPSNBUJPO
JOUFSGBDFT
t /POEJN
t 7
Capacities
100 V
MLV
50 / 60 Hz
1600
1600 VA / 1200 W

MLV
25 600
25 600 VA / 25 480 W
Load Type Notes

MJHIUJOHVTFEXJUIBO
JOUFSGBDFNVTUCFSBUFEGPSSFWFSTFQIBTFDPOUSPM
EJNNJOH#FGPSFJOTUBMMJOHBO&-7MJHIUTPVSDF WFSJGZXJUI
UIFNBOVGBDUVSFSUIBUUIFJSUSBOTGPSNFSDBOCFEJNNFE
8IFOEJNNJOH BO&-7JOUFSGBDF TVDIBTUIF1)1.1"
DV-WH) must be used with the control unit.
t /PUBMM[POFTNVTUCFDPOOFDUFEIPXFWFS DPOOFDUFE
[POFTNVTUIBWFBNJOJNVNMPBEBTTQFDJGJFEBCPWF
t /P[POFNBZCFMPBEFEXJUINPSFUIBOUIFDBQBDJUZ
TQFDJGJFEBCPWF'PSIJHIFSXBUUBHFBQQMJDBUJPOT VTF
Lutron power module PHPM-PA-JA or PHPM-SW-JA.
Key Design Features

6000 V BOEDVSSFOUTVSHFTPGVQUP"
t 5FTUFEUPXJUITUBOEL7FMFDUSPTUBUJDEJTDIBSHF
without damage or memory loss.

t 1PXFSGBJMVSFNFNPSZSFUBJOTQSPHSBNNJOHBOEMJHIU
MFWFMTFUUJOHTGPSVQUPZFBSTJOUIFFWFOUPGBQPXFS
loss.
'PSDPNQMFUFJOGPSNBUJPO TFFi1PXFS%SBX6OJUTPO
the QS Link, Lutron PN 369405.
UPGJOEBOEUPPQFSBUFUIFDPOUSPMVOJUJOMPXMJHIU
easy reading.
UIFGSPOUPGUIFDPOUSPMVOJU
24JOUFSGBDFT
DBOCFTFUEJGGFSFOUMZGPSFBDITDFOFUPTFDPOET
PSUPNJOVUFT.BYJNVNGBEFUJNFGSPN0GGJT
3 seconds.
System Limits
t 5IF24XJSFEDPNNVOJDBUJPOMJOLJTMJNJUFEUP
EFWJDFTPS[POFT
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 3
100 V
Control Unit

369430 Rev. A 4 04.25.11
Specifications
Shade Control
columns.
Zone Control
BEKVTUUIF[POF
Info Screen
t 0-&% PSHBOJD-&%
t 0OFBWBJMBCMFIPMJEBZTDIFEVMFJTQSPHSBNNBCMFCZ
date up to one year in advance.
UIBUBGGFDUBOZ&OFSHJ4BWS/PEFTM unit connected on
the QS link without changing the local scene on the
GRAFIK Eye QS.
location.
GFBUVSFT
4DFOFTUPBOE0GG
&OBCMFBOE%JTBCMFPDDVQBODZGPSPDDVQBODZ
vacancy sensors
sensors
DPOOFDUTDPOUSPMVOJUT XBMMTUBUJPOT NPUPSJ[FETIBEFT
BOEDPOUSPMJOUFSGBDFT
t "24TZTUFNDBOIBWFVQUPEFWJDFTBOE
[POFT
Infrared
t *OGSBSFE *3
TFMFDUTDFOFT SBJTFMPXFSMJHIUJOH[POFT PSSBJTF
lower shades.
t GU N
MJOFPGTJHIUSBOHF
*3JOQVUGSPNUIJSEQBSUZFRVJQNFOU
controls.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 4
100 V
Control Unit

369430 Rev. A 5 04.25.11
Specifications
(QSWS2)
t 8JSFETFF5PVDI24LFZQBETQSPWJEFUIFGPMMPXJOH
GFBUVSFT
GRAFIK Eye QS
Accessory Controls: QS Sensor Module (QSMX-4W)
occupancy and daylight sensors to a GRAFIK Eye QS
via the wired QS link.
- Occupancy sensors wired to a QS Sensor Module can
be used by one or more GRAFIK Eye QS control units
on the wired link.
- Daylight sensors wired to a QS Sensor Module can be
used by one or more GRAFIK Eye QS control units on
the wired link.
SFGFSUPUIFEPDVNFOUBUJPOGPSUIF244FOTPS.PEVMF
GPSEFUBJMT
Interface (QSE-IO)
PDDVQBODZTFOTPSGPSUIF(3"'*,&ZF QS. Each input
QMFBTFSFGFSUPUIF0DDVQBODZ4FOTPS T
TFDUJPOPGUIJT
guide).
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Accessory Controls:
(QSE-CI-NWK-E)
TDFOFTPGUIF(3"'*,&ZF QS.
(QSWS2-KS)
PGB[POFPSHSPVQPG
[POFT
t 4UBSUT4UPQTTDFOFTFRVFODJOHT 4DFOFTPS4DFOFT
5-16)
Occupancy Sensor(s)
through either:
4DFOF$POUSPM6QUPGPVSTFOTPSTBDUJWBUFVTFS
selectable occupancy and vacancy scenes.
;POF$POUSPMVQUPGPVSTFOTPSTQFS[POFBDUJWBUFVTFS
GRAFIK Eye QS
- Wired sensors connected QS Sensor Module (QSM)
TDFOFPS[POFMFWFM
level.
Page 5
100 V
Control Unit

369430 Rev. A 6 04.25.11
Specifications
Daylight Sensor(s)
POFPSNPSFMJHIUJOH[POFTUPBEKVTUFMFDUSJDMJHIUMFWFMT
- Wired sensors connected to a QS sensor module (QSM)
24[POFT
sensor
by-scene basis
BGGFDUTMJHIUJOHMPBET4IBEFHSPVQTDBOOPUCFDPOUSPMMFE
3(#$.:%.9MPBET

(Terminal A).
UZQFTPGJOQVUT
.BJOUBJOFE EFGBVMU
5IF(3"'*,&ZF QS control unit
release event.
24 V .
the GRAFIK Eye QS.
EFUFDUFE BMMMJHIUTXJMMHPUPGVMMPO BOEOPPQFSBUJPOT
"GUFSIPVST"MMPXTUIF$$*UPTUBSUBOEFOEUIF
BGUFSIPVSTNPEF
timeclock.
4BWF/FWFS1SFWFOUTBOZDIBOHFTGSPNCFJOHTBWFE
Programming Menu.
Eye QS.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 6
100 V
Control Unit
369430 Rev. A 7 04.25.11
GRAFIK Eye QS
Example:
Base Unit
QSGR
- _ PJA
1SFGJY
QSGR-6PJA
[POFCBTFVOJU
and
QSGFP-2IV-EGN
engraving
Phase Control Triac

Number
PG;POFT
[POFT
[POFT
[POFT
Faceplate Kit
QSGFP Faceplate
1SFGJY
Number
PG4IBEF
Columns
Omit = none
1 = 1 column
2 = 2 columns
3 = 3 columns
Color/
Finish
Top
Door
Color
Keypad
Engraving
Code
Omit = same as
unit
T = Translucent

Architectural Matte
Finishes
Architectural Metal
Finishes
Satin Color Matte

Finishes
Standard
(ship in 48 hours)
White
Ivory
Beige
Gray
Brown
Black
Almond
Light Almond
Bright Brass
Bright Chrome
Bright Nickel
Satin Brass
Satin Chrome
Satin Nickel
Antique Brass
"OUJRVF#SPO[F
Snow
Biscuit
Eggshell
Taupe
Midnight
Limestone
Stone
Desert Stone
Terracotta
Hot
Goldstone
Palladium
Plum
Turquoise
Bluestone
Sea Glass
Greenbrier
Sienna
Merlot
Mocha Stone
WH
IV
BE
GR
BR
BL
AL
LA
Anodized Aluminum
Finishes
Clear
Black
Brass
BB
BC
BN
SB
SC
SN
QB
2;
CLA
BLA
BRA
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
SW
BI
ES
TP
MN
LS
ST
DS
TC
HT
GS
PD
PL
TQ
BG
SG
GB
SI
MR
MS
Omit = Unengraved
1
Open
Preset
Close
4
Off
Lighting
keypad
Shade
column

Page 7
100 V
Control Unit
369430 Rev. A 8 04.25.11
GRAFIK Eye QS
See previous page for Other Custom Model Numbers
Custom Button Kit

,JU1SFGJY
Button
$POGJHVSBUJPO
Keypad
Engraving
Code
Button
Color/
Finish

raise/lower
(shade column)
5B
= 5-button
(lighting keypad)

Omit = Unengraved
Button Kit Custom

Color/Finish Codes
Architectural Matte
Finishes
White
Ivory
Beige
Gray
Brown
Black
Almond
Light Almond
WH
IV
BE
GR
BR
BL
AL
LA
Satin Color Matte

Finishes
Snow
Biscuit
Eggshell
Taupe
SW
BI
ES
TP
Open
Preset
Close
4
Off
Lighting
keypad
Shade
column

Custom Stripe Kit
QSGS - WH
Stripe Color/
Finish
Stripe
Kit
1SFGJY

Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 8
100 V
Control Unit
369430 Rev. A 9 04.25.11
GRAFIK Eye QS Standard Color Combinations

' GBDFQMBUF
S (stripe)
Open
Preset
Close
3
4
Off
LUTRON
Suffix
Faceplate (F)
Architectural Matte
WH
White
IV
Ivory
BE
Beige
GR
Gray
BR
Brown
BL
Black
AL
Almond
LA
Light Almond
Architectural Metal
BB
Bright Brass
BC
Bright Chrome
BN
Bright Nickel
SB
Satin Brass
SC
Satin Chrome
SN
Satin Nickel
QB
Antique Brass
2;
"OUJRVF#SPO[F
Anodized
CLA
Clear
BLA
Black
BRA
Brass
Stripe (S)
Button (B)
Job Number:
B (buttons)
' GBDFQMBUF
Example:
*GZPVPSEFS24(318) ZPVS(3"'*,
Eye24XJUIMJHIUJOH[POFTBOETIBEF
[POFXJMMDPNFXJUIBXIJUFGBDFQMBUF CPUI
top and bottom), gray stripe, and white
buttons.
Suffix
Faceplate (F)
Satin Matte
Gray
White
MN
Midnight
Beige
Ivory
TP
Taupe
Ivory
Beige
SW
Snow
Black
Gray
ES
Eggshell
Black
Brown
BI
Biscuit
Gray
Black
LS
Limestone
Light Almond Almond
ST
Stone
Almond
Light Almond DS
Desert Stone
TC
Terracotta
Black
Black
BG
Bluestone
Black
Black
HT
Hot
Black
Black
MR
Merlot
Black
Black
SI
Sienna
Black
Black
GB
Greenbrier
Black
Black
SG
Sea Glass
Black
Black
MS
Mocha Stone
#MBDL
#MBDL
GS
Goldstone
PD
Palladium
Black
Black
PL
Plum
Black
Black
TQ
Turquoise
Black
Black
Job Name:
VOEFSiGBDFQMBUFw5IFUPQNBZCFUIF
TBNFDPMPSPSUSBOTMVDFOU6TFUIFDIBSUGPS
GBDFQMBUFTUIBUIBWFUIFTBNFDPMPSUPQBOE
CPUUPN*GBUSBOTMVDFOUMJEJTDIPTFO UIF
the bottom lid.
Model Numbers:
Stripe (S)
Button (B)
Gray
Gray
Gray
Beige
Eggshell
Gray
Gray
Taupe
Taupe
Gray
Taupe
Taupe
Brown
Gray
Gray
Taupe
Ivory
Gray
Taupe
Gray
Black
Taupe
Snow
Eggshell
Biscuit
Gray
Gray
Taupe
Taupe
Gray
Taupe
Taupe
Brown
Gray
Gray
Taupe
Ivory
Gray
Taupe
Gray
Page 9
100 V
Control Unit

369430 Rev. A 10 04.25.11
Wiring Diagrams
Terminations
Communication link
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 L N
A B C
power
1 2
IR input
Load wiring
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 10
100 V
Control Unit
369430 Rev. A 11 04.25.11
GPSNPSFJOGPSNBUJPO
concerning PDUs.
A
Power Group 1
LUTRON
GRAFIK Eye QS
control unit
Supplies PDUs
A
LUTRON
Control Interfaces
Consume PDUs
(Do not connect

terminal 2: 24 V )
Wallstations
Consume PDUs
Power Group 2
Connect all 4
terminals within a
power group:
1: Common
2: 24 V
3 and 4: Data
LUTRON

Supplies PDUs
LUTRON
LUTRON
Wallstations
Consume PDUs
B
(Do not connect
terminal 2: 24 V
Connect only 3
terminals between
power groups:
1: Common
3 and 4: Data
Do not connect
Terminal 2: 24 V
Power Group 3
LUTRON
QS Power Supply
Supplies PDUs
Control Interfaces
Consume PDUs
Wallstations
Consume PDUs

Consumes PDUs
(Do not connect

terminal 2: 24 V )
Quantum
Supplies PDUs
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 11
100 V
Control Unit
369430 Rev. A 12 04.25.11
Mounting
Mounting
screws (4)
Standard 4-gang
U.S. wallbox,
3` in (89 mm)
deep
Hinged
top lid
GRAFIK Eye
QS control unit
Hinged
bottom lid
Line Voltage Wiring

Rear of
QS control unit
1 2 3 4 5 6 L N
To Load 1

is labeled L.
To Load 2
To Load 3
To Load 4
To Load 5
To Load 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 L N
Distribution Panel
50 / 60 Hz
100 V
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 12
100 V
Control Unit
369430 Rev. A 13 04.25.11

- Two 18 AWG (1.0 mm2
DPOEVDUPSTGPSDPOUSPMQPXFS
0OFUXJTUFE TIJFMEFEQBJSPG"8( NN2
GPSEBUBMJOL


GRAFIK Eye QS
Control Unit
seeTouch QS
wallstations
Sivoia QS
Shade
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
Sivoia QS
smart panel

GRAFIK Eye QS
Control Unit
seeTouch QS
wallstations
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
LUTRON
Sivoia QS
smart panel
LUTRON
Sivoia QS
Shade
LUTRON
LUTRON
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 13
Sensors
Radio Powr SavrTM
Wireless Occupancy and Vacancy Sensor

369-480 Rev B 1 08.23.11
Wireless Ceiling Mount Sensor

Lutrons ceiling-mounted occupancy/vacancy
sensors are wireless, battery-powered passive
infrared (PIR) sensors that automatically control lights
via RF communication to compatible dimming and
switching devices. These sensors detect the heat
from people (IR radiation of 9.5 m) moving within an
area to determine when the space is occupied. The
sensors then wirelessly transmit the appropriate
commands to the associated dimming and switching
devices to turn the lights on or off automatically. They
combine both convenience and exceptional energy
savings potential along with ease of installation.
Models Available
Features
t-3'90$3#18)
t8JSFMFTTPDDVQBODZTFOTPSIBTTFUUJOHTBWBJMBCMF
Auto-On/Auto-Off, Auto-On Low-Light/Auto-Off, and
Manual-On/Auto-Off
t"VUP0O-PX-JHIUGFBUVSFXJMMPOMZUVSOMJHIUTPO
automatically if there is less than approximately
10 Lux (1 fc) of ambient light
t7BDBODZPOMZNPEFMBWBJMBCMFUPNFFU$BMJGPSOJB 64"

Title 24 requirements
t6TFT$MFBS$POOFDU technology
t1BTTJWFJOGSBSFENPUJPOEFUFDUJPOXJUIFYDMVTJWF
-VUSPO9$5TM Technology for ne motion detection
tDPWFSBHFSBOHFTGSPNTRGU TRN
UP
TRGU TRN
EFQFOEJOHPONPVOUJOHIFJHIU
t4JNQMFBOEJOUVJUJWFBEKVTUNFOUTBWBJMBCMFGPS
Timeout, Auto-On, and Activity settings
t4VQQPSUTBEWBODFEPDDVQBODZGFBUVSFT TVDIBT
dependent occupancy groups and customizable
occupied/unoccupied presets in some systems
t.VMUJQMFTFOTPSTDBOCFBEEFEGPSFYUFOEFE
coveragerefer to product specication submittal of
receiving device to determine system limits
t-FOTJMMVNJOBUFTEVSJOHUFTUNPEFUPWFSJGZJEFBM
locations
t.VMUJQMFDFJMJOHNPVOUNFUIPETBWBJMBCMFGPSEJGGFSFOU
ceiling materials
t'SPOUBDDFTTJCMFUFTUCVUUPOTNBLFTFUVQFBTZ
tZFBSCBUUFSZMJGFEFTJHO
t3P)4DPNQMJBOU
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
$PMPS$PEF
'SFRVFODZ$IBOOFM$PEF
t-3'7$3#18)
Vacancy Only Sensor
Available for
$IBOOFM$PEF0OMZ
Frequency/Channel Codes
2o.)[ 64 $BOBEB .FYJDP #SB[JM
3o.)[ &VSPQFBOE6"&
4o.)[ $IJOBBOE4JOHBQPSF
5o.)[ *OEJB
6o.)[ +BQBO
7o.)[ )POH,POH
Color Code
WH8IJUF
Compatible RF Devices
t'PSVTFXJUI-VUSPO products only
t$PNNVOJDBUFTUPWBSJPVTXJSFMFTT-VUSPO systems*
* Contact Lutron Customer Service at
www.lutron.com for frequency/channel code
compatibility with your particular geographic region,
and for integrating with other Lutron lighting and
shading products.
Page
Radio Powr SavrTM

369-480 Rev B 2 08.23.11
Specifications
Regulatory
Range
t-VUSPOR2VBMJUZ4ZTUFNT3FHJTUFSFEUP
*40
Standards
LRF2t'$$DFSUJmFE
t*$DFSUJmFE
t$0'&5&-DFSUJmFE
t"/"5&-DFSUJmFE
t465&-DFSUJmFE
t.FFUT$" 64"
&OFSHZ$PNNJTTJPO5JUMF
requirements
LRF3t$&.BSLFE &VSPQFBO6OJPO
<FYQFDUFE2>
t53"5ZQF"QQSPWFE 6OJUFE"SBC&NJSBUFT

<FYQFDUFE2>
LRF4t433$5ZQF"QQSPWFE .BJOMBOE$IJOB
<FYQFDUFE
2>
tJ%"3FHJTUFSFE 4JOHBQPSF
<FYQFDUFE2>
LRF5t81$5ZQF"QQSPWFE *OEJB
:66-
LRF7t'$$DFSUJmFE
Power/Performance
t0QFSBUJOHWPMUBHF7 t0QFSBUJOHDVSSFOU"OPNJOBM
t3FRVJSFTPOF$3MJUIJVNCBUUFSZ
tZFBSCBUUFSZMJGFEFTJHO
t/POWPMBUJMFNFNPSZ TBWFEDIBOHFTBSFTUPSFE
during power loss)
Environment
Job Number:
Sensor Coverage Test

t'SPOUBDDFTTJCMFUFTUCVUUPO
t-FOTJMMVNJOBUFTPSBOHFJOSFTQPOTFUPNPUJPO
EVSJOHUFTUNPEFBOEJTWJTJCMFGSPNGU N
Wireless Communication Test

t'SPOUBDDFTTJCMFUFTUCVUUPO
t5VSOBTTPDJBUFEMPBETPOBOEPGG
Timeout Options
tNJOVUF
tNJOVUFT
tNJOVUFToEFGBVMUTFUUJOH
tNJOVUFT
ti&OBCMFEwo4FOTPSUVSOTMJHIUT0/BOE0''
BVUPNBUJDBMMZoEFGBVMUTFUUJOH
ti-PX-JHIUwo4FOTPSUVSOTMJHIUT0/BVUPNBUJDBMMZ
POMZJOMPXBNCJFOUMJHIUDPOEJUJPOT4FOTPSUVSOT
lights OFF automatically.
ti%JTBCMFEwo-JHIUTNVTUCFUVSOFE0/NBOVBMMZ
GSPNEJNNJOHPSTXJUDIJOHEFWJDF4FOTPSUVSOT
lights OFF automatically.
Activity Options
t-PX"DUJWJUZ
oEFGBVMUTFUUJOH
t.FEJVN"DUJWJUZ )
t)JHI"DUJWJUZ )
* Intended for use in high-activity, briey occupied areas only
t5FNQFSBUVSF'UP' $UP$
t'PSJOEPPSVTFPOMZ
Job Name:
tLRF6
Local load controls must be located within 40 ft
N
MJOFPGTJHIUPSGU N
UISPVHIXBMMT PG
a sensor.
Auto-On Options (Occupancy Versions Only)
LRF6t
tLRF2, LRF3, LRF4, LRF5, LRF7

-PDBMMPBEDPOUSPMTNVTUCFMPDBUFEXJUIJOGU
N
MJOFPGTJHIU PSGU N
UISPVHIXBMMT PG
a sensor.
Model Numbers:
** There is a 15-second grace period that begins when the lights are
automatically turned off, during which the lights will automatically turn
CBDLPOJOSFTQPOTFUPNPUJPO5IJTHSBDFQFSJPEJTQSPWJEFEBTBTBGFUZ
and convenience feature in the event the lights turn off while the room is
still occupied, so that the user does not need to manually turn the lights
CBDLPO"GUFSTFDPOET UIFHSBDFQFSJPEFYQJSFTBOEUIFMJHIUTNVTU
be manually turned on.
Page
Radio Powr SavrTM

369-480 Rev B 3 08.23.11
Dimensions
1.13 in
(28.7 mm)
3.57 in
(90.7mm)
2.85 in
(72.4 mm)
0.887 in
(22.5 mm)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
Radio Powr SavrTM

369-480 Rev B 4 08.23.11
Range Diagrams
Ceiling
8 ft
(2.4 m)
Ceiling
height
Floor
15 ft 12 ft
9 ft
6 ft
3 ft
0 ft
3 ft
6 ft
9 ft
12 ft 15 ft
(4.6 m) (3.7 m) (2.7 m) (1.8 m) (0.9 m) (0 m) (0.9 m) (1.8 m) (2.7 m) (3.7 m) (4.6 m)
Radius of Coverage at Floor
Sensor
Occupant
r
18 x 18 ft (5.5 x 5.5 m)
Maximum Room Dimensions
for Complete Coverage when
mounted on an 8 ft (2.4 m) Ceiling
13 ft (4.0 m)
Radius of Coverage at Floor when
mounted on an 8 ft (2.4 m) Ceiling
Sensor Coverage Chart (for sensor mounted in center of room)
Maximum room dimensions
Ceiling height
for complete floor coverage*
8 ft (2.4 m)
18 ft x 18 ft (5.5 m 5.5 m)
324 ft2 (30.2 m2)
9 ft (2.7 m)
20 ft x 20 ft (6.1 m 6.1 m)
400 ft2 (37.2 m2)
10 ft (3.0 m)
22 ft x 22 ft (6.7 m 6.7 m)
484 ft2 (44.9 m2)
12 ft (3.7 m)
26 ft x 26 ft (7.9 m 7.9 m
676 ft2 (62.4 m2)
GU N
JTUIFSFDPNNFOEFENBYJNVNNPVOUJOHIFJHIU
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
Radio Powr SavrTM

369-480 Rev B 5 08.23.11
Installation Overview
Sensor Placement
t5IFTFOTPSTBCJMJUZUPEFUFDUNPUJPOSFRVJSFTMJOFPGTJHIUPGSPPNPDDVQBOUT5IFTFOTPSNVTUIBWFBO
unobstructed view of the room. DO NOT mount behind or near tall cabinets, shelves, hanging xtures, ceiling
GBOT FUD5IFTFOTPSDBOOPUTFFUISPVHIHMBTTPCKFDUTTVDIBTQBUJPPSTIPXFSEPPST
t)PUPCKFDUTBOENPWJOHBJSDVSSFOUTDBOBGGFDUUIFTFOTPSTQFSGPSNBODF5PFOTVSFQSPQFSPQFSBUJPO UIFTFOTPS
TIPVMECFNPVOUFEBUMFBTUGU N
BXBZGSPN)7"$WFOUTBOEMJHIUCVMCTUIBUBSFCFMPXUIFDFJMJOHMJOF
t5IFTFOTPSTQFSGPSNBODFEFQFOETPOBUFNQFSBUVSFEJGGFSFOUJBMCFUXFFOUIFBNCJFOUSPPNUFNQFSBUVSFBOE
UIBUPGSPPNPDDVQBOUT8BSNFSSPPNTNBZSFEVDFUIFTFOTPSTBCJMJUZUPEFUFDUPDDVQBOUT
tLRF2, LRF3, LRF4, LRF5, LRF7: 5IFTFOTPSTIPVMECFNPVOUFEXJUIJOGU N
MJOFPGTJHIUPSGU N

through walls of the associated dimming and switching receiving devices.
tLRF6: 5IFTFOTPSTIPVMECFNPVOUFEXJUIJOGU N
MJOFPGTJHIUPSGU N
UISPVHIXBMMT PGUIF
associated dimming and switching receiving devices.
Mounting
t5FNQPSBSZNPVOUJOHJTPQUJPOBMUPUFTUTFOTPSDPWFSBHFBOEXJSFMFTTDPNNVOJDBUJPOCFGPSFQFSNBOFOUMZ
installing the sensor.
Drop Ceiling (Compressed Fiber Ceiling Tile)
t5IFDFJMJOHUJMFNPVOUJOHXJSFJTQSPWJEFEGPSCPUIUFNQPSBSZBOEQFSNBOFOUNPVOUJOHPGUIFTFOTPSUPDFJMJOH
tiles. It is designed to allow temporary mounting, testing, and repositioning (if necessary) of the sensor without
damaging a ceiling tile. Once the sensors nal position has been chosen, the mounting wire should be twisted
UPMPDLUIFTFOTPSJOQMBDFQFSNBOFOUMZ
Solid Ceiling (Drywall, Plaster, Concrete, or Wood)
t5FNQPSBSZNPVOUJOH5FO
UFNQPSBSZNPVOUJOHTUSJQTDBOCFQVSDIBTFEJOUIFLJU-$.%1*3,*5GPS
temporarily mounting and testing the sensor.
t1FSNBOFOUNPVOUJOH4DSFXTBOEBODIPST GPSESZXBMMPSQMBTUFS
QSPWJEFEUPNPVOUTFOTPS
Recess Mount
t%POPUSFDFTTNPVOUDFJMJOHTFOTPSJOBNFUBMTVSGBDF
t$FJMJOHNPVOUDMBNQTJOUFSOBMMZUPDFJMJOH4FOTPSUXJTUMPDLTJOUPNPVOU TJUTnVTIXJUIDFJMJOH BTTIPXOCFMPX

t0QFOJOHJTJO NN
JOEJBNFUFS
t1VSDIBTFEBTBTFQBSBUFLJU-$3.,8)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
Radio Powr SavrTM

369-480 Rev B 6 08.23.11
Lens Masking
8IFOFWFSQPTTJCMF UIFTFOTPSTIPVMECFJOTUBMMFEJOBMPDBUJPOXIFSFJUDBOOPUFBTJMZTFFJOUPBSFBTPVUTJEFUIF
JOUFOEFETQBDF TVDIBTIBMMXBZTPSBEKBDFOUSPPNT*GUIJTTJUVBUJPODBOOPUCFBWPJEFE QPSUJPOTPGUIFMFOT
NBZCFNBTLFEUPCMPDLUIFTFOTPSTWJFXPGUIFVOEFTJSFEBSFBT5FO
1*3-FOT.BTLTDBOCFQVSDIBTFE
JOUIFLJU-$.%1*3,*5
Lens sections
shown in gray
have not been
NBTLFE
Lens sections
shown in white are
NBTLFEXJUIMBCFMT
-FOTMBCFMNBTLJOHTIFFU
(-$.%1*3,*5TPMETFQBSBUFMZ)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
LOS-CDT Series
Sensors
Occupant Sensors
LOS-CDT 1 09.04.08
Dual Technology Ceiling Mount Sensor

The LOS-CDT Series ceiling-mount dual-technology sensors
can integrate into Lutron systems or function as stand-alone
controls using a Lutron power pack. The technology
eliminates manual sensitivity and timer adjustments during
installation and over the life of the product.
Features
Intelligent, continually adapting sensor
Ultrasonic (US) combined with passive infrared (PIR)
sensing provide high sensitivity, high noise immunity, and
excellent false tripping immunity
Suited for complex environments that are difficult to
control with single-technology sensors
Snap-locks to ceiling-mounted cover plate
Non-Volatile Memory: settings saved in protected
memory are not lost during power outages
500 to 2000 sq.ft. (46 to 186 m2) coverage when
mounted on an 8 - 12 ft. (2.4 to 3.7 m) ceiling; 180 and
360 field of view
Affords choice of turning lights off or dimming to a preset
level in the unoccupied state when integrated with a
Lutron system.
Models Available
Cat. No.
LOS-CDT-500-WH
LOS-CDT-500R-WH
LOS-CDT-1000-WH
LOS-CDT-1000R-WH
LOS-CDT-2000-WH
LOS-CDT-2000R-WH
Color
White
White
White
White
White
White
Coverage
500 sq.ft. (46 m2)
500 sq.ft. (46 m2)
1000 sq.ft. (93 m2)
1000 sq.ft. (93 m2)
2000 sq.ft. (186 m2)
2000 sq.ft. (186 m2)
Field of View
180
180
180
180
360
360
Self-Adaptive Feature
The LOS-CDT Series ceiling-mount occupant sensors combine both (US) motion detection for maximum
sensitivity and passive infrared (PIR) motion detection for false triggering immunity. The self-adapting internal
microprocessor analyzes the composite sum of both signals to eliminate time-consuming adjustments and
callbacks found in non-intelligent sensors.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 1
LOS-CDT Series
Sensors
Occupant Sensors
LOS-CDT 2 09.04.08
Specifications
Timer Adjustment
Operating Environment
Automatic mode: Continually adapting

sensor automatically adjusts settings to
the space
Manual mode: 8 to 30 minutes
Test mode: 8 seconds
Temperature: 32 to 104 F (0 to 40 C)
Relative humidity: less than 95%,
non-condensing
For indoor use only
Adaptive Functions
LED Lamp
Installation: 60 minutes
Learning: 4 weeks for response to error
conditions, air current adaptation, and timer
optimization
Post-learning occupancy periods
24-hour circadian occupancy periods learned
Weekly occupancy periods learned
Adjustments in post-learning period
Generally occupied periods
(threshold = high-sensitivity mode)
Generally unoccupied periods
(threshold = miser mode)
Red: infrared motion detected

Green: ultrasonic motion detected
Housing
Rugged, high-impact, injection-molded
plastic
Color-coded leads 6 in. (15 cm)
Power
Operating voltage: 20 - 24 V , PELV
(Class 2: USA) low-voltage
Operating current: 33 mA nominal
Control output: 20 - 24 V
active high
logic control signal with short-circuit
protection, open collector when
unoccupied
Contact Rating (R Models only)

SPDT 500 mA rated at 24 V
isolated relay
Photo Cell (R Models only)

Prevents light from turning on when there is
sufficient natural light
Sensitivity: 0 - 1,000 LUX adjustable
Dimensions
1.4
(38)
4.5
(114)
Measurements are in inches (mm)

Front View
Side View
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 2
LOS-CDT Series
Sensors
Occupant Sensors
LOS-CDT 3 09.04.08
Wiring
Note: Power pack may be required when interfaced to lighting control system; see below.
2 or More Sensors to System
Single Sensor to System

Lighting
control
system
Lighting
control
system
Red (+20 - 24 V
Red (+20 - 24 V
Blue* (signal)
Blue* (signal)
Black (common)
Black (common)
To additional
sensors, maximum
determined by
lighting controller
)
*Note: Use gray wire for -R model.
Power Supply Options

Lutron Lighting Control System
Power Pack Required?
Digital microWATTTM
EcoSystem
GRAFIK 5000 / 6000 / 7000TM
No
No
No, when used with seeTouch wallstations with occupant sensor
connections.
Yes
Yes
connections.
No
Yes
No
connections.
GRAFIK Eye 3000 / 4000

HomeWorks
LCP128TM
microWATT
RadioRA
RadioTouch
Softswitch128
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 3
LOS-CDT Series
Sensors
Occupant Sensors
LOS-CDT 4 09.04.08
Wiring: Stand-Alone Control

1 to 3 Sensors with Power Pack
Hot
120 / 277 / 347 V
60 Hz;
230 V
50 / 60 Hz
Neutral
Red (+20 - 24 V
Black
White
Red
Red
)
Power
Pack
Blue* (signal)
Black
(common)
Lighting
Load
Manual
switch off
(optional)
Note: Maximum 3 occupant sensors.
Switching Multiple Loads with Auxiliary Power Packs

Hot
Manual switch off (optional)
120 / 277 /
347 V
230 V
60 Hz; 50 / 60 Hz
Neutral
Lighting
Load
Red
Red
Auxiliary
Power
Pack
Red (+20-24 V
Blue* (signal)
Black
(common)
Power
Pack
Black
White
Red
Red
Lighting
Load
Note: Maximum of 3 devices total

(occupant sensors and auxiliary power packs)
can be connected to a power pack.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 4
LOS-CDT Series
Sensors
Occupant Sensors
LOS-CDT 5 09.04.08
Wiring
Relay Model Option
LOS-CDT-xxxxR only
Red (+20-24 V
Lighting
Control
system*
Gray (control: occupancy and photo cell signal)

Blue: Cap off
Black (common)
Gray wire logic with photo cell active:

Room First Occupied
Lights:
Light level:
Below set value
Turn on
Above set value
Remain off
During Occupancy
Light level:
Lights:
Falls below set value
Turn on
Moves above set value Remain on
*Note: May require power pack
Yellow/White (NO)
Black/White (NC)
Choose wire based on functionality):

Yellow/White: NO (normally open)
Open: Unoccupied
Closed: Occupied
Black/White: NC (normally closed)
Open: Occupied
Closed: Unoccupied
Cap off unused wire.
Blue/White (Relay, Common)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 5
LOS-CDT Series
Sensors
Occupant Sensors
LOS-CDT 6 09.04.08
Installation
Sensor Placement
The occupant sensor must have an unobstructed view of the room. Do not mount behind or near tall
cabinets, shelves, indirect hanging fixtures, etc.
Keep the occupant sensor away from air flow from ventilation outlets, windows, fans, etc.
If installing a 180 occupant sensor (500 and 1000 models), place the sensor on the same wall as the
doorway so that traffic in a hallway will not affect the sensor; otherwise, place in center of room.
Closely follow the diagrams shown concerning major and minor motion coverage. The sensor can detect
major motion (such as a person taking a half-step) at a greater distance than it can detect minor motion
(such as writing or typing at a desk).
Decrease total coverage area by 15% for soft rooms (for example, heavy draperies or heavy carpeting).
Range Diagrams
32 ft. (9.8 m)
22 ft. (6.7 m)
23 ft. (7 m)
16 ft. (4.9 m)
23 ft.
(7 m)
23 ft.
(7 m)
32 ft.
(9.8 m)
32 ft.
(9.8 m)
12 ft. (3.7 m)
12 ft. (3.7 m)
22 ft. (6.7 m)
22 (6.7)
LOS-CDT-500
LOS-CDT-1000
64 ft. (19.5 m)
45 ft. (13.7 m)
Major motion detection

Minor motion detection
23 ft.
(7 m)
32 ft.
(9.8 m)
12 ft. (3.7 m)
22 ft. (6.7 m)
LOS-CDT-2000
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 6
LOS-CDT Series
Sensors
Occupant Sensors
LOS-CDT 7 09.04.08
Installation
Mounting
Mounting to Non-Standard Ceiling or Fixture
Mount twist-lock cover plate using mounting
screws, nuts, and washers (included). Drill/punch
wire routing hole through ceiling tile at center of
cover plate.
Normal Mounting
Twist and lock threaded mounting post onto cover
plate. Drill through ceiling tile with assembly, using
cutter end of the threaded mounting post. Secure
with washer and nut.
13/16 in (21 mm)
Cutter end
Mounting Plate Dimensions

Wire Lengths
# Sensors
# Aux. PP
22 AWG
0.5 mm2
20 AWG
0.75 mm2
18 AWG
1
2
3
0
0
0
750 ft. 375 ft. 250 ft.
365 m 180 m 120 m
1200 ft. 600 ft. 400 ft.
730 m 365 m 240 m
2400 ft. 1200 ft. 800 ft.
1
2
1
1
375 ft. 250 ft.
90 m 120 m
600 ft. 400 ft.
365 m 240 m
1200 ft. 800 ft.
1
2
250 ft.
120 m
400 ft.
365 m
800 ft.
Using the Infrared Mask
Center Ceiling Mount

(Mask blocks sensor seeing
out doorway into hall)
Job Number:
2.5 in.
(63 mm)
4.2 in.
(106.6 mm)
Typical Mask Patterns
Corner Ceiling Mount

(No mask needed)
Job Name:
.52 in.
(13.3 mm)
Model Numbers:
Conference
Room Mask
180 Mask
Full Mask
Rectangular
Areas
Over the Door
Specific Areas
You Wish to
Mask
Page 7
LOS-CDT Series
Sensors
Occupant Sensors
LOS-CDT 8 09.04.08
Sensor Adjustments
Override Settings
A
Auto/Manual
Threshold
LED Motion Indicator
Reset Learned Settings
1
2
3
4
Off (Default)
Automatic (Normal)
Auto Threshold Adjustment
Lights indicate motion
Retain Settings (Normal)
On
Manual on/off (Override)
High Sensitivity (Low turn-on threshold)
Disable LED Indicator
Erase all learned settings,
restart Learning (Toggle On)
Off
Disable Compensation (Normal)
No (Normal)
Adjust Timer Automatically
Adjust Sensitivity Automatically
On
Enable Compensation
Yes (Use increased turn-on threshold)
Use Manual Setting (No adjustment)
Adjust Sensitivity Manually
ON
B
Strong Airflow Compensation
Over Doorway Installation
Timer Adjust
Auto Sensitivity
1
2
3
4
ON
Timer Test Mode
Factory Settings
1. Remove the retainer cover.

2. Rotate the black timer adjustment knob to
about midway (12 oclock).
3. Return setting to minimum setting (full CCW).
Factory Settings
12 oclock
Full CCW
Red: Infrared
sensitivity
75% default
Black: Timer
8 min.
ON
1
2
3
4
B
1
2
3
4
ON
Green:
Ultrasonic
range
50% default
Blue: Photo
cell (R model
only)
100% default
Note: The timer will remain in the 8-second test

mode for 1 hour, then automatically reset to
8 minutes.
4. To manually take the timer out of the 8-second
test mode, turn the timer adjustment approximately
1/16" clockwise to make the setting slightly above
minimum (just above the 8-minute setting).
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 8
Occupant Sensors
LOS-CDT Series
Sensors
LOS-CDT 9 09.04.08
Installation
Adjusting the Lights Not On Level
LOS-CDT-xxxxR only
1. Place timer in Test Mode (see page 7).
2. Set photo cell to max.
Turn the blue knob full clockwise (lights on no
matter how bright the natural light is), then about
30 degrees counterclockwise.
3. Check for Lights-Out.
Move from underneath the sensor, and remain
still until the lights turn off. Move around normally
to turn the light on.
4. Adjust to desired level.
If lights remain off, adjust the blue knob another
30 degrees counterclockwise and repeat step 3
until the lights turn on.
Note: Set blue knob to 100% to disable photo
cell functionality and leave secondary dry contact
closure output functionality intact.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Control Settings (Blue Knob)

LOS-CDT-xxxxR only
Minimum (low):
Lights will never come on,
even though room is
occupied.
0
1000
Maximum (high):
Photo cell has no effect on
operation (factory setting).
1000
Normal:
200 to 600 LUX is normal
range.
1000
Page 9
LOS-CIR Series
Sensors
Occupant Sensors
LOS-CIR 1 09.04.08
Infrared Ceiling Mount Sensor

The LOS-CIR Series ceiling-mount passive infrared sensors
can integrate into Lutron systems or function as standalone controls using a Lutron power pack. The sensor uses
a small semiconductor heat detector that resides behind a
multi-zone optical lens. The sensors detector is sensitive to
the heat emitted by the human body. In order to trigger the
sensor, the source of heat must move from one range of
detection to another. Non-moving hot objects will not
cause the lights to turn on.
Features
Intelligent, continually adapting passive infrared (PIR) sensor

Passive infrared sensing
Reliable motion detection with high error immunity
Non-Volatile Memory: settings saved in protected memory are not lost during power outages
450 to 1500 sq.ft. (42 to 140 m2) coverage when mounted on an 8 - 12 ft. (2.4 - 3.7 m) ceiling
Affords choice of turning lights off or dimming to a preset level in the unoccupied state when integrated with
a Lutron system.
Models Available
Cat. No.
LOS-CIR-450-WH
LOS-CIR-1500-WH
Color
White
White
Coverage
450 sq.ft. (42 m2)
1500 sq. ft. (140 m2)
Field of View
360
360
The LOS-CIR Series ceiling-mount occupant sensors provides reliable detection with high error immunity.
The internal microprocessor analyzes the information from the PIR technology and determines the optimum
setting to use in order to properly cover the space.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 1
LOS-CIR Series
Sensors
Occupant Sensors
LOS-CIR 2 09.04.08
Specifications
Timer Adjustment
Power

the space

active high
unoccupied
UL and CUL listed
LED Lamp
Red: infrared motion detected
Housing

plastic
non-condensing
For indoor use only
Dimensions
1.4
(38)
4.5
(114)
Measurements are in inches (mm)

Front View
Side View
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 2
LOS-CIR Series
Sensors
Occupant Sensors
LOS-CIR 3 09.04.08
Wiring
Lighting
control
system

Lighting
control
system
Red (+20 - 24 V )
Red (+20 - 24 V )
Blue (signal)
Black (common)
To additional
sensors, maximum
determined by
lighting controller
Blue (signal)
Black (common)

Digital microWATTTM
EcoSystem
GRAFIK 5000 / 6000 / 7000
No
No
connections.
Yes
Yes
connections.
No
Yes
No
connections.

HomeWorks
LCP128TM
microWATT
RadioRA
RadioTouch
Softswitch128
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 3
LOS-CIR Series
Sensors
Occupant Sensors
LOS-CIR 4 09.04.08

Hot
120 / 277 / 347 V
60 Hz;
230 V
50 / 60 Hz
Neutral
Red (+20 - 24 V )
Blue (signal)
Power
Pack
Black
(common)
Black
White
Red
Red
Lighting
Load
Manual
switch off
(optional)

Hot
120 / 277 /
347 V
230 V
60 Hz; 50 / 60 Hz
Neutral
Lighting
Load
Red
Red
Auxiliary
Power
Pack
Red (+20 - 24 V )
Blue (signal)
Black
(common)
Power
Pack
Black
White
Red
Red
Lighting
Load

Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 4
LOS-CIR Series
Sensors
Occupant Sensors
LOS-CIR 5 09.04.08
Installation
Sensor Placement
May not detect occupancy with no significant difference between ambient and body temperatures.
Range Diagrams
12 ft. (3.7 m)
6.5 ft. (1.9 m)
22 ft. (6.7 m)
12 ft. (3.7 m)
LOS-CIR-450
LOS-CIR-1500

Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 5
Occupant Sensors
LOS-CIR Series
Sensors
LOS-CIR 6 09.04.08
Installation
Mounting
cover plate.
Normal Mounting
13/16 in. (21 mm)
Cutter end

.52 in.
(13.3 mm)
Wire Lengths
# Sensors
# Aux. PP
22 AWG
0.5 mm2
20 AWG
0.75 mm2
18 AWG
1
2
3
0
0
0
750 ft. 375 ft. 250 ft.
365 m 180 m 120 m
1200 ft. 600 ft. 400 ft.
730 m 365 m 240 m
2400 ft. 1200 ft. 800 ft.
1
2
1
1
375 ft. 250 ft.
90 m 120 m
600 ft. 400 ft.
365 m 240 m
1200 ft. 800 ft.
1
2
250 ft.
120 m
400 ft.
365 m
800 ft.
Using the Infrared Mask
Center Ceiling Mount

(Mask blocks sensor seeing
out doorway into hall)
Job Number:
4.2 in.
(106.6 mm)
Typical Mask Patterns
Corner Ceiling Mount

(No mask needed)
Job Name:
2.5 in.
(63 mm)
Model Numbers:
Conference
Room Mask
180 Mask
Full Mask
Rectangular
Areas
Over the Door
Specific Areas
You Wish to
Mask
Page 6
LOS-CIR Series
Sensors
Occupant Sensors
LOS-CIR 7 09.04.08
Sensor Adjustments
Override Settings
A
Auto/Manual
Threshold
1
2
3
4
Off (Default)
Automatic (Normal)
On
Restart Learning (Toggle On)
ON
B
Timer Adjust
Auto Sensitivity
1
2
3
4
Off
On
Disable Compensation (Normal) Enable Compensation
No (Normal)
ON
Timer Test Mode
Factory Settings

2. Rotate the black timer adjustment knob to about
midway (12 oclock).
Red: Infrared
sensitivity
75% default
Black: Timer
8 min.
Factory Settings
12 oclock
A
1
2
3
4
ON
B
1
2
3
4
ON
Full CCW

8 minutes.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 7
LOS-CUS Series
Sensors
Occupant Sensors
LOS-CUS 1 09.04.08
Ultrasonic Ceiling Mount Sensor

The LOS-CUS Series ceiling-mount ultrasonic sensors can
integrate into Lutron systems or function as stand-alone
controls using a Lutron power pack. Any movement within
the sensors range causes a shift in the original emitted
frequency. The sensors receiver identifies any change in
frequency as motion and either turns the lights on or
maintains lights on.
Features
Intelligent, continually adapting ultrasonic sensor

Excellent minor motion sensitivity
Non-Volatile Memory: settings saved in protected
memory are not lost during power outages
500 to 2000 sq.ft. (46 to 186 m2) coverage when
mounted on an 8 - 12 ft. (2.4 to 3.7 m) ceiling
Lutron system.
Models Available
Cat. No.
LOS-CUS-500-WH
LOS-CUS-1000-WH
LOS-CUS-2000-WH
Color
White
White
White
Coverage
500 sq.ft. (46 m2)
1000 sq.ft. (93 m2)
2000 sq.ft. (186 m2)
Field of View
180
180
360
Designed to meet the challenges found in a wide variety of spaces, the LOS-CUS Series provides reliable
detection with high minor motion detection. The intelligent, continually adapting sensor technology
eliminates manual sensitivity and timer adjustments during installation and over the life of the product. The
internal microprocessor analyzes the information from the ultrasonic technology and determines the optimum
setting to use in order to properly cover the space. Should the room be reconfigured (e.g., new furniture),
the software will adapt to continue to provide correct time out for the lights.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 1
LOS-CUS Series
Sensors
Occupant Sensors
LOS-CUS 2 09.04.08
Specifications
Timer Adjustment
Power

the space

active high
unoccupied
UL and CUL listed
LED Lamp
Green: ultrasonic motion detected
Housing

plastic
non-condensing
For indoor use only
Dimensions
1.4 in.
(38 mm)
4.5 in.
(114 mm)
Front View
Side View
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 2
LOS-CUS Series
Sensors
Occupant Sensors
LOS-CUS 3 09.04.08
Wiring
Lighting
control
system

Lighting
control
system
Red (+20 - 24 V )
Red (+20 - 24 V )
Blue (signal)
Black (common)
To additional
sensors, maximum
determined by
lighting controller
Blue (signal)
Black (common)

Digital microWATTTM
EcoSystem
GRAFIK 5000 / 6000 / 7000
No
No
connections.
Yes
Yes
connections.
No
Yes
No
connections.

HomeWorks
LCP128TM
microWATT
RadioRA
RadioTouch
Softswitch128
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 3
LOS-CUS Series
Sensors
Occupant Sensors
LOS-CUS 4 09.04.08

Hot
120 / 277 / 347 V
60 Hz;
230 V
50 / 60 Hz
Neutral
Red (+20 - 24 V )
Blue (signal)
Power
Pack
Black
(common)
Black
White
Red
Red
Lighting
Load
Manual
switch off
(optional)

Hot
120 / 277 /
347 V
230 V
60 Hz; 50 / 60 Hz
Neutral
Lighting
Load
Red
Red
Auxiliary
Power
Pack
Red (+20 - 24 V )
Blue (signal)
Black
(common)
Power
Pack
Black
White
Red
Red
Lighting
Load

Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 4
Occupant Sensors
LOS-CUS Series
Sensors
LOS-CUS 5 09.04.08
Installation
Sensor Placement
Mount the sensor so the grilles face the open portion of the room and are not facing a nearby wall,
window, or other obstructing object.
If installing a 180 occupant sensor (500 and 1000 models), place the sensor on the same wall as the
doorway so that traffic in a hallway will not affect the sensor; otherwise, place in center of room.
Range Diagrams
22 ft. (6.7 m)
32 ft. (9.8 m)
16 ft. (4.9 m)
23 ft. (7 m)
16 ft.
(4.9 m) 22 ft.
(6.7 m)
LOS-CUS-500
23 ft.
(7 m)
32 ft.
(9.8 m)
LOS-CUS-1000
64 ft. (19.5 m)
45 ft. (13.7 m)
23 ft. 32 ft.
(7 m) (9.8 m)
LOS-CUS-2000
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 5
LOS-CUS Series
Sensors
Occupant Sensors
LOS-CUS 6 09.04.08
Installation
Mounting
Normal Mounting

cover plate.
13/16 in (21 mm)

Cutter end

.52 in.
(13.3 mm)
Wire Lengths
# Sensors
# Aux. PP
22 AWG
0.5 mm2
20 AWG
0.75 mm2
18 AWG
1
2
3
0
0
0
750 ft. 375 ft. 250 ft.
365 m 180 m 120 m
1200 ft. 600 ft. 400 ft.
730 m 365 m 240 m
2400 ft. 1200 ft. 800 ft.
1
2
1
1
375 ft. 250 ft.
90 m 120 m
600 ft. 400 ft.
365 m 240 m
1200 ft. 800 ft.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
1
2
250 ft.
120 m
400 ft.
365 m
800 ft.
2.5 in.
(63 mm)
4.2 in.
(106.6 mm)
Page 6
LOS-CUS Series
Sensors
Occupant Sensors
LOS-CUS 7 09.04.08
Sensor Adjustments
Override Settings
A
Auto/Manual
Threshold
1
2
3
4
Off (Default)
Automatic (Normal)
On
Restart Learning (Toggle On)
Off
Disable Compensation (Normal)
No (Normal)
On
Enable Compensation
ON
B
Timer Adjust
Auto Sensitivity
1
2
3
4
ON
Timer Test Mode
Factory Settings

2. Rotate the black timer adjustment knob to about
midway (12 oclock).
Black: Timer
8 min.
Factory Settings
12 oclock
1
2
3
4
ON
B
1
2
3
4
Green:
Ultrasonic
range
50% default
ON
Full CCW

8 minutes.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 7
LOS-WDT Series
Sensors
Occupant Sensors
LOS-WDT 1 11.04.08
Dual Technology Wall Mount Occupancy Sensor

The LOS-WDT Series wall-mount dual-technology sensors are
used to control lighting in spaces that have pendant fixtures,
ceiling fans, or high ceilings (more than 12 ft./ 3.7 m), where
ceiling-mount occupant sensors would not function reliably.
The adaptive technology eliminates manual sensitivity and
timer adjustments during installation and over the life of the
product.
Features
Ultrasonic (US) combined with passive infrared (PIR) sensing
provide high sensitivity, high noise immunity, and excellent
false tripping immunity
Suited for complex environments that are difficult to control
with single-technology sensors
Flexible base mounting on wall or ceiling
Aim and lock: base mount permits fast alignment
Non-Volatile Memory: settings saved in protected memory
are not lost during power outages
1600 sq.ft. (488 m2) of coverage when used where the
ceiling height is between 8 - 12 ft. (2.4 - 3.7 m)
Lutron system.
Models Available
Color
White
White
Cat. No.
LOS-WDT-WH
LOS-WDT-R-WH
Coverage
1600 sq.ft. (488 m2)
1600 sq.ft. (488 m2)
Field of View
110
110
The LOS-WDT Series wall-mount occupancy sensors combine both ultrasonic (US) motion detection for
maximum sensitivity and passive infrared (PIR) motion detection for false triggering immunity. The self-adapting
internal microprocessor analyzes the composite sum of both signals to eliminate time-consuming adjustments
and callbacks found in non-intelligent sensors.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 1
LOS-WDT Series
Sensors
Occupant Sensors
LOS-WDT 2 11.04.08
Specifications
Timer Settings
Power

the space
Operating voltage: 20 - 24 V , Class 2

(PELV) low-voltage
active high
unoccupied
UL and CUL listed
LED Lamp
Red: infrared motion
Green: ultrasonic motion
Housing
Relative humidity: 0% to 95%,
non-condensing
For indoor use only
High-impact, injection molded plastic

housing
6 in. (15 cm) color-coded lead wires
Contact Rating (R Models only)

SPDT 500 mA rated at 24 V
relay
isolated
Photo Cell (R Models only)

Prevents light from turning on when there
is sufficient natural light
Sensitivity: 20 - 3,000 LUX adjustable
Dimensions
3.6 in.
(92 mm)
3.9 in.
(99 mm)
2.7 in.
(69 mm)
5.25 in.
(133 mm)
Front View
Side View
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 2
LOS-WDT Series
Sensors
Occupant Sensors
LOS-WDT 3 11.04.08
Wiring

Lighting
control
system
Lighting
control
system
Red (+20 - 24 V )
To additional
sensors, maximum
determined by
lighting controller
Red (+20 - 24 V )
Blue* (signal)
Blue* (signal)
Black (common)
Black (common)

Digital microWATTTM
EcoSystem
GRAFIK 5000 / 6000 / 7000
No
No
connections.
Yes
Yes
connections.
No
Yes
No
connections.

HomeWorks
LCP128TM
microWATT
RadioRA
RadioTouch
Softswitch128
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 3
LOS-WDT Series
Sensors
Occupant Sensors
LOS-WDT 4 11.04.08

Hot
120 / 277 / 347 V
60 Hz;
230 V
50 / 60 Hz
Neutral
Red (+20 - 24 V )
Blue* (signal)
Power
Pack
Black
(common)
Black
White
Red
Red
Lighting
Load
Manual
switch off
(optional)
Note: Maximum 3 occupancy sensors.

Hot
120 / 277 /
347 V
230 V
60 Hz; 50 / 60 Hz
Neutral
Lighting
Load
Red
Red
Auxiliary
Power
Pack
Red (+20 - 24 V )
Blue* (signal)
Black
(common)
Power
Pack
Black
White
Red
Red
Lighting
Load

(occupancy sensors and auxiliary power packs)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 4
LOS-WDT Series
Sensors
Occupant Sensors
LOS-WDT 5 11.04.08
Wiring
Relay Model Option
LOS-WDT-R only
Red (+20-24 V )
Lighting
Control
system*
Gray (control: occupancy & photo cell signal)

Blue: Cap off
Black (common)
Gray wire logic with photo cell active:

Room First Occupied
Light level
Lights
Below set value
Turn on
Above set value
Remain off
During Occupancy
Light level
Lights
Falls below set value
Turn on
Moves above set value Remain on
*Note: May require power pack
Yellow/White (NO)
Black/White (NC)
Choose wire based on functionality:

Yellow/White: NO (normally open)
Open: Unoccupied
Closed: Occupied
Black/White: NC (normally closed)
Open: Occupied
Closed: Unoccupied
Blue/White (Relay, Common)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 5
LOS-WDT Series
Sensors
Occupant Sensors
LOS-WDT 6 11.04.08
Installation
Sensor Placement
The occupant sensor must have an unobstructed view of the room entrance. Do not mount behind or
near tall cabinets, shelves, indirect hanging fixtures, etc.
Place the sensor on the same wall as the doorway so that traffic in a hallway will not affect the sensor.
Range Diagrams
32 ft. (9.8 m)
23 ft. (7.0 m)
23 ft.
(7 m)
32 ft.
(9.8 m)
40 ft. (12.2 m)
20 ft. (6.1 m)

Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 6
LOS-WDT Series
Sensors
Occupant Sensors
LOS-WDT 7 11.04.08
Installation
Mounting
Mounting to Wall or Ceiling Tile
Mounting in Acoustic Ceiling Tile
Redrill wiring routing hole and (2) mounting holes

using Mounting Bracket as template. Route wires
through wall and mounting bracket. Secure
mounting bracket to wall/ceiling tile using
mounting screws, nuts, and washers (included).
Twist threaded mounting post onto Mounting

Bracket. Drill through ceiling tile with assembly.
Secure with washer and nut.
Route wiring through
Mounting Bracket and
connect to wire harness.
Snap bracket cover in place
to conceal wiring and
bracket.
Either Method
Feed wiring harness through the back
of the sensor body and out the exit
slot. Snap sensor onto mounting post.
Plug wiring harness into connector on
the left side (opposite exit slot) and
place wiring under wire tabs. Align
sensor and tighten position locking
screw.
Wire Lengths
# Sensors
# Aux. PP
22 AWG
0.5 mm2
20 AWG
0.75 mm2
18 AWG

1
2
3
0
0
0
750 ft. 375 ft. 250 ft.
365 m 180 m 120 m
1200 ft. 600 ft. 400 ft.
730 m 365 m 240 m
2400 ft. 1200 ft. 800 ft.
1
2
1
1
375 ft. 250 ft.
90 m 120 m
600 ft. 400 ft.
365 m 240 m
1200 ft. 800 ft.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
1
2
250 ft.
120 m
400 ft.
365 m
800 ft.
.52 in.
(13.3 mm)
2.5 in.
(63 mm)
2.25 in. 3.35 in.

(58 mm) (86 mm)
Page 7
LOS-WDT Series
Sensors
Occupant Sensors
LOS-WDT 8 11.04.08
Sensor Adjustments
Override Settings
1
2
3
4
1
On
Manual lights on (Override)
Not used
LED off
Any change resets learned settings
Off
OFF 8
OFF 4
OFF min. ON
min.
Auto Timer Adjust On
Auto Sensitivity Adjust On
On
ON
15
ON
30
OFF
min. ON
min.
Auto Timer Adjust Off
Auto Sensitivity Adjust Off
2
3
Off (Default)
Automatic (Normal)
Not used
LED on (Normal)
Factory Settings
Blue: Photo cell

(R model only)
100% default
Timer Test Mode

Push and Release:
8 sec. test timer
(resets to Normal
after 1 hour)
Push and Hold (flash):
Normal timer
Red:
Infrared
sensitivity
75% default
Green:
Ultrasonic
range
50% default
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 8
LOS-WDT Series
Sensors
Occupant Sensors
LOS-WDT 9 11.04.08
Installation
Adjusting the Lights Not On Level
LOS-WDT-R only
1. Place timer in Test Mode (see page 7).
2. Set photo cell to max.
Turn the blue knob full clockwise (lights on no
matter how bright the natural light is), then 30
degrees counterclockwise.
3. Check for Lights-Out.
Move from underneath the sensor, and remain
still until the lights turn off. Move around normally
to turn the light on.
4. Adjust to desired level.
If lights remain off, adjust the blue knob another
30 degrees counterclockwise and repeat step 3
until the lights turn on.
Note: Set blue knob to 100% to disable photo
cell functionality and leave secondary dry contact
closure output functionality intact.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Control Settings (Blue Knob)

LOS-WDT-R only
Minimum (low):
Lights will never come on,
even though room is
occupied.
20
3000
Maximum (high):
Photo cell has no effect on
operation (factory setting).
20
3000
Normal:
200 to 600 LUX is normal
range.
20
3000
Page 9
LOS-WIR Series
Sensors
Occupant Sensors
LOS-WIR 1 07.16.10
Infrared Wall Mount Occupancy Sensor

The LOS-WIR wall-mounted passive infrared sensor is used in
spaces with pendant fixtures, ceiling fans, or high ceilings
(more than 12 ft./3.7 m). The sensor detects large body
motions over 40 ft. (12 m) away, and smaller motions such as
hand movements up to 25 ft. (7.6 m) away.
Features

Passive infrared (PIR) sensing
Excellent false tripping immunity
Use in rooms with pendant fixtures and storage areas
Flexible base mounting on wall or ceiling
Aim and lock: base mount permits fast alignment
Non-Volatile Memory: settings saved in protected memory
are not lost during power outages
1,600 sq.ft. (488 m2) of coverage when used where the ceiling
height is between 8 - 12 ft. (2.4 - 3.7 m)
Lutron system.
Models Available
Cat. No.
LOS-WIR-WH
Color
White
Coverage
1600 sq.ft. (288 m2)
Field of View
110
Designed to meet the challenges found in a wide variety of spaces, the LOS-WIR works well in spaces with
overhead fans and space heaters. Work areas, storage facilities, storerooms, indoor garages, and rooms
with pendant fixtures are ideal. The internal microprocessor analyzes the information from the PIR technology
and determines the optimum setting to use in order to properly cover the space.
The LOS-WIR identifies, records, and learns normal occupancy cycles of a space. Over an initial
4-week period, the sensor logs room occupancy for each 24-hour period. The information gathered by the
sensor is used to automatically adjust the dual internal sensitivity bias threshold. This technology eliminates
time-consuming adjustments and callbacks found in non-intelligent sensors.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 1
LOS-WIR Series
Sensors
Occupant Sensors
LOS-WIR 2 07.16.10
Specifications
Timer Settings
Power

the space
Temperature: 32 to 104 F
(0 to 40 C)
Relative humidity: 0% to 95%,
non-condensing
For indoor use only

active high
unoccupied
UL and CUL listed
Dimensions
3.6 in.
(92 mm)
2.7 in.
(69 mm)
3.7 in.
(94 mm)
6.6 in.
(168 mm)
Front View
Side View
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 2
LOS-WIR Series
Sensors
Occupant Sensors
LOS-WIR 3 07.16.10
Wiring
Lighting
control
system

Lighting
control
system
Red (+20 - 24 V )
Red (+20 - 24 V )
Blue (signal)
Black (common)
To additional
sensors, maximum
determined by
lighting controller
Blue (signal)
Black (common)

Digital microWATTTM
EcoSystem
GRAFIK 5000 / 6000 / 7000
No
No
connections.
Yes
Yes
connections.
No
Yes
No
connections.

HomeWorks
LCP128TM
microWATT
RadioRA
RadioTouch
Softswitch128
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 3
LOS-WIR Series
Sensors
Occupant Sensors
LOS-WIR 4 07.16.10

Hot
120 / 277 / 347 V
60 Hz;
230 V
50 / 60 Hz
Neutral
Red (+20 - 24 V )
Blue (signal)
Power
Pack
Black
(common)
Black
White
Red
Red
Lighting
Load
Manual
switch off
(optional)
Note: Maximum 3 occupancy sensors.

Hot
120 / 277 /
347 V
230 V
60 Hz; 50 / 60 Hz
Neutral
Lighting
Load
Red
Red
Auxiliary
Power
Pack
Red (+20 - 24 V )
Blue (signal)
Black
(common)
Power
Pack
Black
White
Red
Red
Lighting
Load

(occupancy sensors and auxiliary power packs)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 4
Occupant Sensors
LOS-WIR Series
Sensors
LOS-WIR 5 09.05.08
Installation
Sensor Placement
May not detect occupancy with no significant difference between ambient and body temperatures.
Range Diagram
Sensor Placement
Incorrect
Correct
Hallway
40 ft. (12.2 m)
20 ft. (6.1 m)

Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 5
LOS-WIR Series
Sensors
Occupant Sensors
LOS-WIR 6 07.16.10
Installation
Mounting
Mounting to Wall or Ceiling Tile
Mounting in Acoustic Ceiling Tile
Redrill wiring routing hole and (2) mounting holes

using Mounting Bracket as template. Route wires
through wall and mounting bracket. Secure
mounting bracket to wall/ceiling tile using
mounting screws, nuts, and washers (included).
Twist threaded mounting post

onto Mounting Bracket. Drill
through ceiling tile with
assembly. Secure with washer
and nut. Route wiring through
Mounting Bracket and connect
to wire harness. Snap bracket
cover in place to conceal
wiring and bracket.
Either Method
Feed wiring harness through the back
of the sensor body and out the exit
slot. Snap sensor onto mounting post.
Plug wiring harness into connector on
the left side (opposite exit slot) and
place wiring under wire tabs. Align
sensor and tighten position locking
screw.
Wire Lengths
# Sensors
# Aux. PP
22 AWG
0.5 mm2
20 AWG
0.75 mm2
18 AWG

1
2
3
0
0
0
750 ft. 375 ft. 250 ft.
365 m 180 m 120 m
1200 ft. 600 ft. 400 ft.
730 m 365 m 240 m
2400 ft. 1200 ft. 800 ft.
1
2
1
1
375 ft. 250 ft.
90 m 120 m
600 ft. 400 ft.
365 m 240 m
1200 ft. 800 ft.
1
2
250 ft.
120 m
400 ft.
365 m
800 ft.
.52
(13.3)
2.5
(63)
2.25 3.35
(58) (86)
Measurements are in
inches (mm)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 6
LOS-WIR Series
Sensors
Occupant Sensors
LOS-WIR 7 07.16.10
Sensor Adjustments
Override Settings
1
2
3
4
1
On
Manual lights on (Override)
Not used
LED off
Any change resets learned settings
Off
OFF 8
OFF 4
OFF min. ON
min.
Auto Timer Adjust On
Auto Sensitivity Adjust On
On
ON
15
ON
30
OFF
min. ON
min.
Auto Timer Adjust Off
Auto Sensitivity Adjust Off
2
3
Off (Default)
Automatic (Normal)
Not used
LED on (Normal)
Factory Settings
Timer Test Mode

Push and Release:
8 sec. test timer
(resets to Normal
after 1 hour)
Push and Hold (flash):
Normal timer
Red: Infrared
sensitivity
75% default
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 7
Back Room Equipment
Processor and Repeater
369376b
05.23.12
HomeWorks QS Processor
The HomeWorksQS processor provides control
and communication to HomeWorksQS system
components.
The Ethernet links allow communication to the
HomeWorksQS software, integration with third
party systems and communication between multiple
processors. HomeWorksQS processors may be
connected using either standard networking or
using ad-hoc networking. All processors on a
project must be connected to a single network.
The HomeWorksQS software and all integration
equipment must be connected to the same network
as the processors.
The processor is powered from the QSPS-DH-1-60
power supply. Refer to the HomeWorksQS
software to determine link power requirements.
The HomeWorksQS processor can be installed in
a HQ-LV21, L-LV21, L-LV14, or PNL-8 enclosure.
Processor Capabilities
Each HomeWorksQS processor has 2 links that
can be individually configured as one of three
types:
t HomeWorks / HomeWorksQS Power Panels
16 addresses / 256 zones
t HomeWorksQS Wired Device Link
99 devices / 512 zones
t HomeWorksQS RF Link
Model Number
HQP6-2
HomeWorksQS Processor
www.lutron.com
Lutron | 1
369376b
05.23.12
Specifications
Model Numbers
HQP6-2
Power
Processor (P): 24 V- 250 mA

Links (L1 / L2): 24 V- 2 A per link
Typical Power
Consumption
5 W; 8 Power Draw Units (PDUs)

Test conditions: Two Ethernet links connected, both device links in use
UL, cUL, CE, CTICK
Environment
Indoor use only. 32F to 104F (0C to 40C), 0%to90%humidity,

non-condensing
Heat Generated
17 BTU/hr typical
(24 BTU/hr with 2 links at 2 A each output)
Cooling Method
Passive Cooling
Power Failure Memory
System data stored in non-volatile memory. Timeclock retention for

10years
Internal Timeclock
1 minute per year
Miswire Protection
All terminal block inputs are over-voltage and miswire protected against wire
reversals and shorts.
Low-Voltage Link
Wire Type
Two pair one pair 18 AWG (0.75mm 2 ), one pair 18 to 22 AWG

(0.34 to 0.75mm 2 ) twisted shielded IEC PELV / NEC Class 2 cable
Low-Voltage Power
Wire Type
18 AWG (0.75mm 2 )
Communications
Ethernet, RS485 (QS, RF, Power Panel)
Link Capacities
HomeWorks / HomeWorksQS Power Panels

HomeWorksQS Wired Device Link
HomeWorksQS RF Link
ESD Protection
Meets or exceeds the IEC 61000-4-2 standard
Surge Protection
Meets or exceeds ANSI/IEEE C62.41 standard
Mounting
Mounts in HQ-LV21, L-LV14, L-LV21, or PNL-8 enclosure
Dimensions
With terminal blocks (as shown): 4.27 in (108 mm) x 6.0 in (152 mm)
Without terminal blocks: 4.27 in (108 mm) x 5.26 in (134 mm)
Connections
Two 5-pin removable terminal blocks* for Links 1 and 2.

One 5-pin removable terminal block* for Power Input.
Two RJ 45 standard Ethernet connections.
*Each terminal will accept up to two 18 AWG (0.75mm 2 ) wires.
Warranty
16 addresses / 256 zones

http://www.lutron.com/TechnicalDocumentLibrary/ HomeWorks_Intl_Warranty.pdf
NEC is a registered trademark of the National Fire Protection Association, Quincy, Massachusetts.
2 | Lutron
05.23.12
369376b
Dimensions
Dimensions shown as: in (mm)
Front View
Side View
4.27 (108)
5.26 (134)
6.0 (152)
1.06
(26.9)
www.lutron.com
Lutron | 3
product specications
369376b
05.23.12
Mounting
L(+) N(-)
L(+) N(-)
120 - 240 V
24 V
QSPS-DH-1-60
120 - 240 V
24 V
DIN Rail
Power Supply
(QSPS-DH-1-60)
QSPS-DH-1-60
22.5 - 25 V
Ground
(4)
Red L2 (Link 2) Power
(3)
Red L1 (Link 1) Power
(2)
Red P (Processor) Power
(1)
Black COM (Common)
22.5 - 25 V
PWR
PWR
ERR
P
ERR
P
L1
L1 TX/RX
L2
L1
L1 TX/RX
L2
L2 TX/RX
L2 TX/RX
(5)
Wire Landing Boards

(QS-WLB)
L-LV21/HQ-LV21
L(+) N(-)
120 - 240 V
L(+) N(-)
24 V
QSPS-DH-1-60
4 | Lutron
24 V
QSPS-DH-1-60
22.5 - 25 V
L-LV14
120 - 240 V
22.5 - 25 V
PNL-8
369376b
05.23.12
Wiring DiagramsNetworking
Standard Networking: Connection using an Ethernet hub/switch/router
HQ-LV21 Panel with
2 HomeWorksQS processors
L(+) N(-)
120 - 240 V
L(+) N(-)
24 V
QSPS-DH-1-60
120 - 240 V
24 V
QSPS-DH-1-60
22.5 - 25 V
22.5 - 25 V
Ethernet cable:
Cat5/Cat5e
328 ft (100 m) maximum per home run
HomeWorksQS
processors
Ethernet Router
WAN
LAN
Laptop PC
Ethernet cable:
Cat5/Cat5e
328 ft (100 m) maximum per home run
HomeWorksQS
processor
Ad-hoc Networking: Direct Ethernet connection from PC to processors

Ethernet cable:
Cat5/Cat5e
328 ft (100 m) maximum each run
328 ft (100 m) max
328 ft (100 m) max
328 ft (100 m) max
Laptop PC
HomeWorksQS
processor
HomeWorksQS
processor
HomeWorksQS
processor
Up to 5 processors can be daisy-chained
www.lutron.com
Lutron | 5
369376b
05.23.12
Wiring DiagramsPower Panel Link
L(+) N(-)
120 - 240 V
24 V
QSPS-DH-1-60
22.5 - 25 V
HomeWorks QS
Power Panel Link*
Up to 16 addresses total
* Pin 2 does not get connected when using a power panel link.
6 | Lutron
05.23.12
369376b
Wiring DiagramsHomeWorksQS RF Link
HQP6-2-120
HomeWorks QS RF Device
HomeWorks QS Hybrid Repeater
HomeWorks QS
RF Device
HomeWorks QS
RF Device
30 ft (9 m)
maximum
Hybrid Repeater
Hybrid Repeater
Repeater Status
1
RF
Setup
Setup
Add
Wired
Activate
Test
Add
Test
9V
24 V
Setup
Power Repeater Link

COM
RF
Wired
Activate
Add
MUX
24 V
Communication
MUX
COM
9V
MUX
24 V
Repeater Status
3
Test
Test
Power Repeater Link

MUX
COM
MUX
MUX
RF
Wired
Activate
Test
Test
Communication
Power Repeater Link

9V
Hybrid Repeater
Repeater Status
3
Communication
30 ft (9 m)
maximum
30 ft (9 m)
maximum
HomeWorks QS RF Link*
1000 ft (305 m) maximum
wire length per run
60 ft (18 m)
maximum
HomeWorks QS RF Link*
1000 ft (305 m) maximum wire length per run
* HomeWorksQS Hybrid Repeaters can be powered from the Processor link or a wall-mount transformer.
If powering from a wall-mount transformer, Pin 2 does not get connected.
www.lutron.com
Lutron | 7
369376b
05.23.12
Wiring DiagramsQS Link
L(+) N(-)
120 - 240 V
24 V
QSPS-DH-1-60
22.5 - 25 V
QS Link
up to 99 device addresses
QS Link
up to 99 device addresses
Max 2A combined Draw from

processor when powering both
links from the same power supply
Wiring DiagramsLink Power

More current can be supplied by
an additional power supply
L(+) N(-)
120 - 240 V
(1) Black COM

(Common)
(4) Red L2
(Link 2) Power
L(+) N(-)
24 V
QSPS-DH-1-60
120 - 240 V
(5) Ground
(3) Red L1 (Link 1) Power
(2) Red P (Processor) Power
(1) Black COM (Common)
24 V
QSPS-DH-1-60
22.5 - 25 V
22.5 - 25 V
2A
2A
Max 2 A per link when
using a separate power
supply for each link
8 | Lutron
369376b
05.23.12
Wiring DiagramsQS Wired Device Link
with Shades / Draperies (Controllable Window Solutions)
L(+) N(-)
120 - 240 V
24 V
QSPS-DH-1-60
22.5 - 25 V
120 V
60 Hz
QS Link
HomeWorks QS wired devices
QSPS-P1-10-60
QS Smart Power Panel
HomeWorks QS wired devices
www.lutron.com
Lutron | 9
369-351b
02.10.12
HomeWorksR QS Hybrid Repeaters

HomeWorksRQS Hybrid Repeaters add
wireless Radio Frequency (RF) communication
and extend the range of RF signals that are
sent between dimmers, switches, keypads,
visor control receivers, shades / draperies, and
other devices. Repeaters ensure error-free
communication between system components
and prevent interference from neighboring
systems.
The rst repeater connects to the
HomeWorksRQS processor to provide RF
communication that extends up to 30 ft (9 m)
in every direction. Up to four (4) total Hybrid
Repeaters can be used per link to extend
the RF range for larger system applications.
Each Repeater has an RF range of 30 ft (9 m)
between repeater and devices or 60 ft (18 m)
between repeaters, covering a total area of
approximately 2500 sq ft (232 m().
Model Numbers
Frequency
HQR-REP-120
434 MHz
HQK-REP
868 MHz
HQM-REP
868 MHz Limited
HQN-REP
865 MHz
HQR-REP-120-BA
434 MHz (Brazil)
HQQ-REP
434 MHz Limited
Only available in White (WH).
HomeWorksRQS software will select the correct frequency/channel code for compatibility with your
particular geographic region.
www.lutron.com
Lutron | 1
369-351b
02.10.12

Specifications
Model Number
HQR-REP-120; HQK-REP; HQM-REP; HQN-REP; HQR-REP-120-BA;

HQQ-REP
Power
Hybrid Repeater:
DC adapter: 9 V- 300 mA
Link: 24 V- 50 mA
DC adapter:
Input: 100-240 V~ 50/60 Hz 6.5 W
Output: 9 V- 300 mA
Typical Power
Consumption
Hybrid Repeater: 0.6 W

Test conditions: one LED on, powered by a 9 V- adapter.
Hybrid Repeater: FCC, IC, COFETEL, CE, CCC, TRA, CTICK, ANATEL,
IDA, SUPERTEL, SUTEL
Environment

Low-Voltage Wire Type Two pair one pair 18 AWG (1.0 mm2), one pair 22 AWG to 18 AWG
(0.5 mm2 to 1.0 mm2) twisted shielded NEC Class 2 / PELV cable.
Required for connecting the first repeater to the processor and may be
used to connect additional Hybrid Repeaters.
Communications
The first Hybrid Repeater communicates with the HomeWorksR QS

processor on the RF wired link. Subsequent Repeaters may be wired on
this link or may communicate over Radio Frequency (RF). All RF devices
must be located within 30 ft (9 m) of a Repeater. All Repeaters must be
within 60 ft (18 m) of another Repeater.
ESD Protection

Surge Protection

Power Failure
Power failure memory: should power be interrupted, the Repeater will

Mounting
Mount on a wall, ceiling, or level surface using the two #6 (M3) screws
provided.
Connections
Hybrid Repeater: RS485
Warranty
http://www.lutron.com/resiinfo
Design Features
t
t
Test button - enters the RF repeater test mode.

Activate button - provides repeater activation
within system.
2 | Lutron
RS485 port to connect to the HomeWorksR

QS RF link and to other repeaters through a
wired link (daisy-chain).
02.10.12
369-351b

Dimensions
Measurements shown as: in (mm)
Side View
Front View
see table below
Hybrid Repeater
Repeater Status
1
5 14
(133)
Communication
RF
Setup
Wired
1/4
(6)
Activate
Test
Add
Test
2 34
(70)
Power Repeater Link
24 V
MUX
MUX
COM
9V
Mounting Holes
3 34 (95)
1 116
(27)
4 14 (108)
Model
HQR-REP-120, HQR-REP-120-BA,
HQQ-REP
HQK-REP, HQM-REP, HQN-REP
Mounting
Vertical
Dimension
6.25 (158.8)
3.13 (79.4)
Horizontal
Ceiling
Wall
#6 (M3) screw
recommended
(2 included)
Level Surface
www.lutron.com
Lutron | 3
369-351b
02.10.12

Operation
Hybrid Repeater
Repeater Status
1
Repeater Status LEDs

Displays the activation status or
test status of the Repeaters in
the system.
Communication
RF
Setup
Wired
Activate
Test
Add
Test
Repeater Status
P
Power Repeater Link

24 V
MUX
COM
MUX
9V
Communication
RF
Setup
Test
Test
Wired
Add
Activate
RF and wired LEDs

Displays the Tx / Rx activity on
the RF and wired links.
(Green=Tx; Orange=Rx)
Test and Activate Buttons
Press and hold to enter the
system into Test mode or
Activate mode.
Test and Activate LEDs
Flashes green to indicate that
the system is in Test mode or
Activate mode.
Wired and RF Configuration

Hybrid Repeater
30 ft (9m)
maximum
30 ft (9m)
maximum
30 ft (9m)
maximum
HWQS
Processor
RF Link
60 ft (18 m)
maximum
4 | Lutron
Wired Link (Daisy-chain)

1000 ft (305m)maximum
IEC PELV / NECR Class 2 cable
Two pair one pair 18 AWG
(1.0 mm2), one pair 22 AWG to
18 AWG (0.5 mm2 to 1.0 mm2)
twisted shielded.
369-351b
02.10.12

Connections
Top View
RF range:
To Repeater:
60 ft (18 m)
To other devices:
30 ft (9 m)
Antenna
Bottom View
Wired Link (Daisy Chain)
maximum 1000 ft (305 m)
COM
24 V Power Input
MUX
MUX
9V
RS485
Power Jack (to adapter)

IEC PELV / NECR Class 2
www.lutron.com
NOTE: Power must be provided by a

9 V- adapter or 24 V- power on the
HomeWorksR QS processor link.
Lutron | 5
Interfaces
369-640a
06.12.12
QSE-IO Control Interface

Description
Integrates a HomeWorks QS control system
with equipment that has contact-closure I/O.
Inputs/Outputs
t
Provides five inputs and five dry contact

closure outputs.
t Provides both normally open (NO) and normally
closed (NC) contacts.
t Using the inputs, contact closures in other
equipment, such as those listed below, can
trigger HomeWorks QS system events (e.g.:
shades, lights, HVAC):
Motion and occupant sensors;
Timeclocks and push buttons;
AV equipment;
Security systems.
t Outputs can be used to control:
Shades, motorized projection screens,
skylights, shutters, and movable walls;
AV equipment;
Security systems;
LEDs and lamps for status indication.
www.lutron.com
Lutron | 1
369-640a
06.12.12

Specifications
Model
QSE-IO
Power
requirements
Low-voltage IEC PELV/NEC Class 2. Operating voltage: 12 24 V-, 200 mA.
Typical power
consumption
2.0 W; 3 power draw units (PDUs)
Regulatory
approvals
CE, S C-tick, CUL
Environment
32 F to 104 F (0 C to 40 C). Relative humidity less than 90%, non-condensing.
System
communications
and capacity
Low-voltage type IEC PELV/NEC Class 2 wiring connects the QSE-IO Interface to
control units and other components.
QSE-IO counts as one device toward link maximum of 100 devices.
Electrostatic
discharge (ESD)
Meets or exceeds IEC 61000-4-2 standard.

Meets or exceeds ANSI/IEEE standard c62.41.
Power failure
Output relays are non-latching (if relays are closed and power is lost, relays will open).
Mounting
Mounts on surface or in LV14, LV21, PNL8, LUT-5x10-ENC, LUT-19AV-1U
Wiring
Control wire must be 1 pair 18 AWG (1.2 mm2) IEC PELV/NEC Class 2
for power and 1 pair 22 AWG to 18 AWG (0.5 mm2 to 1.0 mm2)
IEC PELV/NEC Class 2 twisted/shielded for data (see Wiring)
System
Provides 5 inputs and 5 outputs. Outputs can control other manufacturers equipment.
capabilities/limits Five Input Terminals:
Accept maintained inputs and momentary inputs with 40 msec minimum pulse times.
Off-state leakage current must be less than 100 A.
Open circuit voltage: 24 V- maximum.
Inputs must be dry contact closure, solid state, open collector, or active-low (NPN) /
active-high (PNP) output.
Open collector NPN or active-low on-state voltage must be less than 2 Vand sink 3.0 mA.
Open collector PNP or active-high on-state voltage must be greater than 12 Vand source 3.0 mA.
Five Output Terminals:
Provide selectable maintained or momentary (1/4 sec) outputs (IEC PELV/NEC Class 2).
Status LEDs
Five Status LEDs light when associated output is active (on).
Operating modes Dip switches do not operate when QSE-IO is part of a HomeWorks QS system.
and DIP switch
settings
Warranty
2 | Lutron
http://www.lutron.com/TechnicalDocumentLibrary/HomeWorks_Intl_Warranty.pdf
369-640a
06.12.12

Dimensions
Dimensions are in inches (mm)
Side View
1.06
(26.9)
Top View
5.26
(133.6)
Terminal blocks
on this side
LEDs and addressing

switches on this side
3.75
(95.3)
4.26
(108.2)
2.50
(63.5)
Mounting holes
Mounting Hole Detail
0.31 (7.9) diam

0.18 (4.6) diam
0.23
(5.8)
#6 (M3) screw recommended
www.lutron.com
Lutron | 3
369-640a
06.12.12

Mounting
Mounting Diagram
1. Mount the control interface directly on a wall, as

shown in the mounting diagram, using screws (not
included). When mounting, provide sufficient space for
connecting cables.
The unit can be mounted in the LV14, LV21, and
PNL8 enclosures; the unit can also be placed in the
LUT-19AV-1U AV rack using the screws provided with
the unit (the LUT-19AV-1UAV will hold up to four units).
If conduit is desired for wiring, the LUT-5x10-ENC can
be used to mount one unit.
Mount where terminal blocks, switches, and LEDs are
accessible.
2. Strip 3/8in(10mm) of insulation from wires. Each data
link terminal will accept up to two 18AWG(1.0mm2)
wires.
3. Connect wiring as shown in the wiring diagram (next
page).
Note: Contact closure output relays click audibly
when switching. Mount where this will not cause
inconvenience.
Control Interface
Wall
Wire Strip Length

3/8 in
(10 mm)
Mounting Options
LV14
LV21
STAT
CCO 1
CCO 2
CCO 3
CCO 4
CCO 5
N
O
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
LUT-5x10-ENC
PNL8
L(+) N(-)
L(+) N(-)
24 V
120 - 240 V
24 V
N
O
120 - 240 V
CCO 1
CCO 2
CCO 3
CCO 4
CCO 5
24 V
STAT
QSE-IO
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
100 mA
800.523.9466
+1.610.282.3800
243C IND. CONT. EQ.
www.lutron.com/qs
QSPS-DH-1-60
V
0-24 V
0-24 V
1A
A
24 V
22.5 - 25 V
5 COM
CCO 5 NO
CCO 5 NC
CCO 4 NO
CCO 4 NC
3-4 COM
CCO 3 NO
CCO 3 NC
22.5 - 25 V
100 mA
800.523.9466
+1.610.282.3800
243C IND. CONT. EQ.
www.lutron.com/qs
COM
CCI 5
CCI 4
CCI 3
CCI 2
CCI 1
MUX
MUX
COM
V+
CCO 2 NO
CCO 2 NC
1-2 COM
CCO 1 NO
CCO 1 NC
QS
4 3 2 1
QSE-IO
QSPS-DH-1-60
V
0-24 V
0-24 V
N
O
24 V
N
O
100 mA
800.523.9466
+1.610.282.3800
243C IND. CONT. EQ.
www.lutron.com/qs
0-24 V
0-24 V
COM
CCI 5
CCI 4
CCI 3
CCI 2
CCI 1
QSE-IO
100 mA
800.523.9466
+1.610.282.3800
243C IND. CONT. EQ.
www.lutron.com/qs
1A
A
0-24 V
0-24 V
1A
A
L(+) N(-)
COM
CCI 5
CCI 4
CCI 3
CCI 2
CCI 1
4 3 2 1
5 COM
CCO 5 NO
CCO 5 NC
MUX
MUX
COM
V+
COM
CCI 5
CCI 4
CCI 3
CCI 2
CCI 1
MUX
4 3 2 1
CCO 4 NO
CCO 4 NC
3-4 COM
CCO 3 NO
CCO 3 NC
QS
CCO 2 NO
CCO 2 NC
1-2 COM
CCO 1 NO
CCO 1 NC
5 COM
CCO 5 NO
CCO 5 NC
CCO 4 NO
CCO 4 NC
3-4 COM
CCO 3 NO
CCO 3 NC
MUX
COM
V+
CCO 2 NO
CCO 2 NC
1-2 COM
CCO 1 NO
CCO 1 NC
QS
5 COM
CCO 5 NO
CCO 5 NC
QSE-IO
24 V
CCO 4 NO
CCO 4 NC
3-4 COM
CCO 3 NO
CCO 3 NC
MUX
MUX
COM
V+
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1A
A
CCO 1
CCO 2
CCO 3
CCO 4
CCO 5
STAT
STAT
CCO 1
CCO 2
CCO 3
CCO 4
CCO 5
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CCO 2 NO
CCO 2 NC
1-2 COM
CCO 1 NO
CCO 1 NC
QS
4 3 2 1
120 - 240 V
24 V
QSPS-DH-1-60
22.5 - 25 V
CCO 1
CCO 2
CCO 3
CCO 4
CCO 5
STAT
N
O
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
QSE-IO
24 V
100 mA
800.523.9466
+1.610.282.3800
243C IND. CONT. EQ.
www.lutron.com/qs
MUX
MUX
COM
V+
4 3 2 1
CCO 2 NO
CCO 2 NC
1-2 COM
CCO 1 NO
CCO 1 NC
COM
CCI 5
CCI 4
CCI 3
CCI 2
CCI 1
QS
0-24 V
0-24 V
5 COM
CCO 5 NO
CCO 5 NC
1A
A
5 COM
CCO 5 NO
CCO 5 NC
MUX
MUX
COM
V+
CCO 4 NO
CCO 4 NC
3-4 COM
CCO 3 NO
CCO 3 NC
CCO 4 NO
CCO 4 NC
3-4 COM
CCO 3 NO
CCO 3 NC
COM
CCI 5
CCI 4
CCI 3
CCI 2
CCI 1
0-24 V
0-24 V
QS
4 3 2 1
CCO 2 NO
CCO 2 NC
1-2 COM
CCO 1 NO
CCO 1 NC
1A
A
LUT-19AV-1U
www.lutron.com/qs
+1.610.282.3800
243C IND. CONT. EQ.
800.523.9466
24 V
100 mA
QSE-IO
STAT
CCO 1
CCO 2
CCO 3
CCO 4
CCO 5
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
4 | Lutron
N
O
369-640a
06.12.12

Wiring
Low-Voltage IEC PELV/NEC Class 2 Wiring
t
Wire the QSE-IO Interface to the IEC PELV/NEC Class 2 QS link using the MUX terminal (3) on the
front of the unit.
t Each terminal accepts up to two 18 AWG (1.0 mm2) wires.
t Wiring may be daisy-chain, star, or T-top configuation.
t Total length of wire on a QS link must not exceed 2000 ft (610 m)
QSE-IO
1234567
LED 1: CCO 1
Note: LED is ON
when CCO NO
(normally open
contact) is closed.
LED 2: CCO 2
DIP switches
LED 3: CCO 3
Program button
LED 4: CCO 4
LED 5: CCO 5
LED 6: Unused
LED 7: Status
QS Data Link (to processor and other devices)

1: Common
2: 24 V-
4: MUX
www.lutron.com
Contact Closure
Inputs
CCO 1 NC
CCO 1 NO
1 2 COM
CCO2 NC
CCO 2 NO
CCO3 NC
CCO 3 NO
3 4 COM
CCO4 NC
CCO 4 NO
CCO5 NC
CCO 5 NO
5 COM
CCI 1
CCI 2
CCI 3
CCI 4
CCI 5
COM
Contact Closure Outputs

3: MUX
Note: CCO and CCI terminals

each hold one
28 AWG to 16 AWG
(0.08 mm2 to 1.5 mm2) wire
Lutron | 5
369-640a
06.12.12

IEC PELV/NEC Class 2 Terminal Connections
Note: Do not connect drain/shield to
ground (earth) or wallstation/control
interfaces. Connect the bare drain
wires and cut off the outside shield.
Control Interface Wiring
Drain Shield
(2) 18 AWG (1.0 mm2)
Data Link:
(1) shielded, twisted pair
18 AWG (1.0 mm2)
IEC PELV/NEC Class 2 power wiring:
(2) 18AWG (1.0 mm2) pigtails,
6in (152 mm) maximum length
4: MUX
(2) 18 AWG (1.0 mm2)
3: MUX
2: 24 V- power
1: Common
Note: 12AWG (2.5mm2) conductors for

Common (terminal 1) and
24V- power (terminal 2)
will not fit in terminals;
use 18AWG (1.0mm2) pigtails (< 6in)
Note: Use Lutron Cable GRX-CBL-46L
Control of Unclamped, Inductive Loads

The QSE-IO is not rated to control unclamped, inductive loads. Inductive loads include, but are not
limited to, relays, solenoids, and motors. To control these types of equipment, a flyback diode must be
used (DC voltages only). See diagram below.
Flyback Diode
(required for
inductive loads)
Inductive
Load
Supply
Voltage
Resistive
Load R
0 24 V0 24 V~
1.0 A
0.5 A
6 | Lutron
NO
NC
24 Vmaximum
QSE-IO Output
Wallbox Input Closure Interface
QSE-CI-WCI
Control Interface
369681a 1 09.05.12
QS Wallbox Closure Interface

The QSE-CI-WCI (WCI) is a control interface for use
with HomeWorks QS systems, Quantum systems,
and QS standalone applications. The WCI integrates a
contact closure keypad with a Lutron lighting control
system. The contact closure keypad must be provided
by the customer. The WCI provides up to eight
contact closure inputs (CCIs). The CCIs accept
maintained or momentary signals. The CCIs are
programmable through the Homeworks QS and
Quantum system setup software. For QS standalone
applications, the CCIs are programmable using the
button, DIP switch, and LEDs on the WCI.
Shown actual size.
Features
t1SPWJEFTDPOUBDUDMPTVSFJOQVUT $$*T
NBJOUBJOFE
or momentary.
t8PSLTXJUI*&$1&-7/&$ Class 2, low-voltage, dry
contact closures.
t5IF$$*DBOCFTFUVQUPTJNVMBUFFYJTUJOH-VUSPO
keypad functionality or custom-configured to meet
project-specific requirements.
t1MBDFJOUIFXBMMCPYCFIJOEBDPOUBDUDMPTVSFLFZQBE
(See Mounting).
t1SPWJEFTBXBZJOUFSGBDFCFUXFFOUIF-VUSPO
lighting system and a contact closure keypad (not
supplied).
t'PSVTFJO)PNFXPSLT QS systems, Quantum
systems, and QS standalone applications.
Additional Programming Details
t*O)PNFXPSLT QS and Quantum systems, the
$$*TBSFJOEJWJEVBMMZQSPHSBNNBCMFUISPVHIUIF
appropriate setup software.
t'PS24TUBOEBMPOFBQQMJDBUJPOT UIF%*1TXJUDIBMMPXT
for selection of CCI control options:
8JUIPSXJUIPVUSBJTFMPXFSDPOUSPMT
- With all momentary or all maintained CCIs.
t-&%TQSPWJEFJOTUBOUGFFECBDLEVSJOHTFUVQBOE
diagnostics;
- Confirmation when programming.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
7FSJmDBUJPOPGXIJDIDPOUBDUTBSFDMPTFE
*OEJDBUJPOPGDPNNVOJDBUJPONJTXJSFNBMGVODUJPO
t1SPHSBNNJOHCVUUPOBMMPXTGPSFBTFPGQSPHSBNNJOH
and resetting to factory default.
t1MBDFJOUIFXBMMCPYCFIJOEBDPOUBDUDMPTVSFLFZQBE
Functionality in QS Standalone Systems
t(3"'*,&ZF24 24(3Y
- Inputs activate Scenes

- Toggle Zones between a Preset and Off
t&OFSHJ4BWS/PEFTM 24/PS24/&
- Inputs activate Scenes

- Toggle Zones between a Preset and Off
t.PUPS.PEVMF 24&$*.
8JOEPXUSFBUNFOU0QFO4UPQ$MPTF
- Toggle assigned windows treatments between
Open and Close
t$POUBDU$MPTVSF*OUFSGBDF 24&*0
t4JWPJB QS
8JOEPXUSFBUNFOU0QFO1SFTFU$MPTF
- Supports venetian window treatments
4VQQPSUTQSPHSBNNBCMFQSFTFUT QSFTFUTXIFO
BQQMZJOH3BJTF-PXFS
Page
QSE-CI-WCI
Control Interface
369681a 2 09.05.12
Specifications
Mounting
Regulatory Requirements
t$&NBSLFE
t$PNQMJFTXJUIBQQMJDBCMF*&$TUBOEBSET
t*G6-MJTUJOHJTSFRVJSFEQMFBTFDPOUBDU-VUSPO
Input Power
t0QFSBUJOH7PMUBHF7-N"
t-PX7PMUBHF*&$1&-7/&$ Class 2 wiring provides
power, derived from QS link. Consumes one Power
%SBX6OJU 1%6

Contact Closure Input Types
t5IF24&$*8$* 8$*
JTDPNQBUJCMFXJUICPUI
momentary and maintained contact closure inputs
(CCIs).
t$POUBDUDMPTVSFLFZQBENVTUIBWFBMPXWPMUBHF ESZ
contact closure rating.
t$$*TNVTUIBWFBOPOTUBUFTBUVSBUJPOWPMUBHFMFTT
UIBO7BUV"BOEBOPGGTUBUFMFBLBHFDVSSFOUPG
MFTTUIBOV"$POUBDUNBOVGBDUVSFSPGUIFDPOUBDU
closure keypad for details.
t5IFTJHOBMQVMTFGPSUIF$$*NVTUCFHSFBUFSUIBO
NT$POUBDUNBOVGBDUVSFSPGUIFDPOUBDUDMPTVSF
keypad for details.
t5IF8$*JTOPUEFTJHOFEPSSBUFEUPXPSLXJUI
MJOFNBJOTWPMUBHFTXJUDIFT6TFXJUIMJOFNBJOT
voltage switches will result in premature failure.
Environment
t"NCJFOU0QFSBUJOH5FNQFSBUVSF$ '
t3FMBUJWF)VNJEJUZMFTTUIBO OPODPOEFOTJOH
t'PSJOEPPSVTFPOMZ
Terminals
t&BDIUFSNJOBMBDDFQUTVQUPUXPNN2 "8(

wires, one twisted shielded pair 0.5 mm2 "8(

XJSFPSPOFNN2 "8(
XJSFUZQJDBM
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
t3FDPNNFOEFEUPCFQMBDFEJOUIFXBMMCPYCFIJOEB
contact closure keypad.
t-VUSPOSFDPNNFOETVTJOHBXBMMCPYXIJDIJTNN
(2 2JO
EFFQYNN 2 in) wide, when installing the
8$*/PUF4PNFBQQMJDBUJPOTNBZSFRVJSFBEFFQFS
XBMMCPY
t%POPUFYUFOEXJSFIBSOFTTMFOHUI
QS Link Limits
t"24-JOLDBOIBWFVQUP[POFT PVUQVUT
BOE
EFWJDFTJOBTUBOEBMPOFTZTUFNPSJOB)PNFXPSLT
QS or Quantum System.
t&BDI8$*DPVOUTBTEFWJDFPOUIF24-JOL
t$POTVNFT1%6POUIF24-JOL'PSNPSF
JOGPSNBUJPOPO1PXFS%SBX6OJUT TFFi1PXFS%SBX
6OJUTPOUIF24-JOLw -VUSPO1/ BU
XXXMVUSPODPNRT
t-JOLDPNNVOJDBUFTUPPUIFSEFWJDFTWJB*&$1&-7/&$
Class 2 wiring.
t'PMMPXBMMBQQMJDBCMFOBUJPOBMBOEMPDBMFMFDUSJDBMDPEFTGPS
proper circuit separation and protection.
t8JSJOHNBZCFUUBQQFEPSEBJTZDIBJOFE
t'PSXJSJOHMJNJUT TFFUIFDIBSUCFMPX
Length
Less than
150 m
(500 ft)
Wire Gauge
Common (terminal 1) one
1.0 mm2 (18AWG)
Power (terminal 2) one
1.0 mm2 (18 AWG)
LutronR Cable
GRX-CBL-346S
(non-plenum)
GRX-PCBL-346S
(plenum)

one twisted, shielded pair
0.5 mm2 (22 AWG)
150 m
Common (terminal 1) one
to 600 m 4.0 mm2 (12 AWG)
(492 ft
2) one
to 1969 ft) Power (terminal
4.0 mm2 (12 AWG)
one twisted, shielded pair
0.5 mm( (22 AWG)
GRX-CBL-46L
(non-plenum)
GRX-PCBL-46L
(plenum)
Page
QSE-CI-WCI
Control Interface
369681a 3 09.05.12
Side View
N
N )
5 in
(2
NN
(2 in)
Job Name:
Job Number:
NN JO
Front View
Back View
MUX MUX PWR COM
2 1
20 mm
JO
Model Numbers:
Page
QSE-CI-WCI
Control Interface
369681a 4 09.05.12
Wiring
QS Link Wiring
QS Wiring
MUX MUX PWR COM
2 1
MUX (White)
MUX (Purple)
PWR (Red)
COM (Black)
Contact Closure Wiring
12345678
White
Black
12345678
ON
7 8 COM
Grey
Blue
Purple
3 4 5 6
Yellow
Green
t$POOFDUUIFDPOUBDUDMPTVSFTUPUIFDPOUBDU
closure inputs (CCIs) and shared common
using supplied wiring harness.
t&OTVSFQSPQFSGVODUJPO BOEDBQBMMVOVTFE
CCI wires together, away from other
circuitry.
Note:"MMDPOUBDUDMPTVSFTNVTUTIBSFUIF
provided common. (Black)
1 2
Red
Orange
Contact closure wire colors
LEDs
QSE-CI-WCI
INPUTS
ENTRADA
ENTRES
COM
12345678
COM
CCI 1 (Red)
Contact
Closure
Contact
Closure
12345678
CCI 8 (White)
Common (Black)
Contact Closure Inputs
Communication
link wiring
Note: Connect CCI
wires appropriately
Contact closure input
12345678
LEDs
1 (Red)
2 (Orange)
3 (Yellow)
4 (Green)
5 (Blue)
6 (Purple)
7 (Gray)
8
9 (Black)
Contact Closure Inputs
Wallbox
Input Wiring Harness:

Approximately 178 mm (7 in) long with 13 mm (1/2 in) pre-stripped end.
Note: Do not extend wire harness length.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
369641a
07.04.12
QSE-CI-DMX Control Interface

The QSE-CI-DMX performs different functions
depending on the system in which it is
operating. The DMX channels (maximum of 32)
are mapped to HomeWorks QS zones and
can be programmed as 1-channel lighting,
1-channel integration, or 3-channel RGB/CMY.
The QSE-CI-DMX can be used to map any
HomeWorks QS zone to any single DMX512
channel. The QSE-CI-DMX can also be used
to simultaneously map any HomeWorks QS
zone to three DMX512 channels for RGB/CMY
color-control. The QSE-CI-DMX has an integral
RGB/CMY lookup table that maps
HomeWorks QS zone intensities to RGB/
CMY values (colors). The RGB/CMY lookup
table can be customized by using the
HomeWorks QS programming software.
In a HomeWorks QS system, only 32 DMX
channels can be programmed per device. The
32 channels can be any of the 512 available
addresses. DMX combiners can be used if
more than 32 DMX channels need to be
controlled from a single DMX universe.
If the QSE-CI-DMX is part of a
HomeWorksQS system, GRAFIK Eye QS
zones cannot be programmed to control DMX
channels.
Model Number
QSE-CI-DMX
www.lutron.com
Control Interface
Lutron | 1
369641a
07.04.12

Specifications
Model Number
QSE-CI-DMX
Power
24 V- 60 mA
Typical Power
Consumption
1.2 W; 2 Power Draw Units (PDUs)

Test conditions: Status lights normal operation, DMX link connected, device powered at
24V-
Regulatory
Approvals
CE, S C-tick, CUL, UL
Environment
Indoor use only; 32 F to 104 F (0 C to 40 C); 0 to 90% humidity, non-condensing
Power Failure
Power failure memory: should power be interrupted, the DMX will return to its previous
state when power is restored
Wiring
Control wire must be 1 pair 18 AWG (1.2 mm2) IEC PELV/NEC Class 2 for power and
1 pair 22 AWG to 18 AWG (0.5 mm2 to 1.0 mm2) IEC PELV/NEC Class 2 twisted/shielded
for data (see Wiring)
Communications
Connects to QS-wired device link on HomeWorks QS processor
Link Capacities
QSE-CI-DMX counts as one device toward link maximum of 100 devices.
ESD Protection
Meets or exceeds the IEC 61000-4-2 standard.
Surge Protection
Meets or exceeds IEC 61000-4-5 standard.
Mounting
Surface mount on wall, mount on rack (LUT-19AV-1U), or mount in LV14, LV21, PNL8, or
LUT-5x10-ENC enclosures
Dimensions
4.26 in (108.2 mm) x 5.26 in (133.6 mm) x 1.06 in (26.9 mm)
DIP Switches
Dip switches do not operate when QSE-CI-DMX is part of a HomeWorks QS system.
Warranty
www.lutron.com/TechnicalDocumentLibrary/Intl_Warranty.pdf
2 | Lutron
369641a
07.04.12

Dimensions
Side View
Front View
4.26
(108.2)
Mounting holes
5.26
(133.6)
2.50
(63.5)
3.75
(95.3)
1.06
(26.9)
Mounting Hole Detail
0.18 (4.6) diameter

0.25
(6.4)
0.34 (8.6) diameter
0.18 (4.6) diameter
#6 or #8 (M3 or M4) screw recommended
www.lutron.com
Lutron | 3
369641a
07.04.12

Mounting Options
Wire Strip Length
Mount where terminal blocks, switches, and LEDs are accessible, using #6 or #8
(M3 or M4) screws (not included). Strip 3/8 in (10 mm) of insulation from wires.
Each data link terminal will accept up to two 18 AWG (1.0 mm2) wires. Connect
wiring as shown in the Wiring section.
Choose from the following mounting methods:
3/8 in
(10 mm)
1: Panel Mounting
LV14
LV21
PNL8
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PWR
PGM
STAT
DMX TX
DMX RX
QS LNK TX
QS LNK RX
L(+) N(-)
L(+) N(-)
120 - 240 V
24 V
120 - 240 V
24 V
QSE-CI-DMX
24 V
60 mA
243C IND. CONT. EQ.
www.lutron.com/qs
QSPS-DH-1-60
QSPS-DH-1-60
22.5 - 25 V
DMX
2 3
22.5 - 25 V
QS
NC
DATA+
DATA-
4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PWR
STAT
DMX TX
DMX RX
QS LNK TX
QS LNK RX
PGM
PWR
PGM
STAT
DMX TX
DMX RX
QS LNK TX
QS LNK RX
Mount the control

interface in a LV14,
LV21, or PNL8
enclosure. The LV14
enclosure can hold
only one control
interface. The LV21
and PNL8 enclosures
can hold up to two
interfaces.
QSE-CI-DMX
QSE-CI-DMX
24 V
24 V
60 mA
60 mA
243C IND. CONT. EQ.
243C IND. CONT. EQ.
www.lutron.com/qs
www.lutron.com/qs
DMX
QS
DMX
2 3
4 3 2 1
QS
L(+) N(-)
NC
DATA+
DATA-
NC
DATA+
DATA2 3
4 3 2 1
120 - 240 V
24 V
QSPS-DH-1-60
2: Enclosure Mounting
LUT-5x10-ENC
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PWR
PGM
STAT
DMX TX
DMX RX
QS LNK TX
QS LNK RX
PWR
STAT
DMX TX
DMX RX
QS LNK TX
QS LNK RX
PGM
QSE-CI-DMX
QSE-CI-DMX
24 V
24 V
60 mA
60 mA
243C IND. CONT. EQ.
www.lutron.com/qs
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DMX
QS
DMX
4 3 2 1
2 3
QS
NC
DATA+
DATA-
2 3
NC
DATA+
DATA-
QSE-CI-DMX
24 V
243C IND. CONT. EQ.
www.lutron.com/qs
PWR
PGM
STAT
DMX TX
DMX RX
QS LNK TX
QS LNK RX
If conduit is desired
for wiring, use the
LUT-5x10-ENC to
mount one control
interface.
22.5 - 25 V
4 3 2 1
60 mA
243C IND. CONT. EQ.
www.lutron.com/qs
DMX
QS
NC
DATA+
DATA2 3
4 3 2 1
3: Rack Mounting
LUT-19AV-1U
NC
STAT
DMX TX
DMX RX
QS LNK TX
QS LNK RX
STAT
DMX TX
DMX RX
QS LNK TX
QS LNK RX
PWR
PGM
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
243C IND. CONT. EQ.
60 mA
24 V
60 mA
QSE-CI-DMX
PGM
STAT
DMX TX
DMX RX
QS LNK TX
QS LNK RX
DATA+
DATA-
NC
NC
DATA+
DATA-
24 V
QSE-CI-DMX
PWR
PWR
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
QS
243C IND. CONT. EQ.
60 mA
QSE-CI-DMX
4 3 2 1
DMX
www.lutron.com/qs
243C IND. CONT. EQ.
24 V
2 3
QS
www.lutron.com/qs
243C IND. CONT. EQ.
60 mA
4 3 2 1
DMX
www.lutron.com/qs
QSE-CI-DMX
PGM
2 3
QS
NC
DATA+
DATA-
www.lutron.com/qs
24 V
4 3 2 1
DMX
DATA+
DATA-
2 3
QS
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PGM
STAT
DMX TX
DMX RX
QS LNK TX
QS LNK RX
4 3 2 1
DMX
PWR
2 3
Place the unit in the LUT-19AV-1U AV

rack which will hold up to four control
interfaces.
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
4: Direct Wall Mounting

Mount the control interface directly on a
wall. When mounting, provide sufficient
space for connecting cables.
4 | Lutron
Wall
369641a
07.04.12

Wiring
QS Link Wiring
t
Wire the QSE-CI-DMX Interface to the IEC PELV/NEC Class 2 QS link using the MUX terminal.
t The QS-wired communications link is limited to 100 devices and 512 switch legs
(each DMX channel = 1 switch leg); 32DMXchannels per QSE-CI-DMX control interface.
t Wiring may be daisy-chain, star, or T-tap configuration.
t Total length of wire on a QS link must not exceed 2000 ft (610 m).
Drain/Shield
Note: Do not connect

drain/shield to ground
(earth) or wallstation/
control interfaces.
Connect the bare drain
wires and cut off the
outside shield.
Data Link:
18 AWG (1.0 mm2)
4: MUX
(2) 12 AWG (2.5 mm2)
3: MUX
2: 24 V- power
(2) 12 AWG (2.5 mm2)
1: Common
Note: Use Lutron Cable GRX-CBL-46L
Note: 12AWG (2.5mm2) conductors for

Common (terminal 1) and
24V- power (terminal 2)
will not fit in terminals;
use 18AWG (1.0mm2) pigtails (< 6in)
DMX512 Link Wiring

t
t
t
t
t
Connect the DMX link terminals on the QSE-CI-DMX interface to input terminals on DMX512-controlled
equipment.
Each terminal on the QSE-CI-DMX accepts two 18 AWG (1.0 mm2) wires.
Link must be 1000 ft (305 m) or less.
Link must begin and end with link terminators (Lutron part number LT-1).
Three pins on the DMX connector for connecting the QSE-CI-DMX to DMX512-controlled equipment.
Data Link:
18 AWG (1.0 mm2)
www.lutron.com
2: Data
3: Data +
NC: Not connected
1: Common
Lutron | 5
369703a
10.15.12
QS Sensor Module
The QS Sensor Module (QSM) is a ceiling-mounted device
that integrates Lutron wireless and wired sensors through
the wired QS Link on a HomeWorks QS processor.
t 5IF24.VTFT$MFBS$POOFDU RF Technology for
communication with up to 10 Radio Powr SavrTM
occupancy/vacancy sensors and 10 Pico wireless
controls.
t 5IF24.DPOOFDUTVQUPGPVS-VUSPO wired occupancy
sensors.
t /PMJOFWPMUBHFDPOOFDUJPOTBSFSFRVJSFECFDBVTFUIF
24.JTQPXFSFECZUIF24-JOL
Model Numbers
/VNCFSPG8JSFE*OQVUT
Mounting Method
QSM_-_W-_
2o.)[
64" $BOBEBBOE.FYJDP
3o.)[
&VSPQFBO6OJPOBOE6OJUFE"SBC&NJSBUFT
4o.)[
4JOHBQPSFBOE$IJOB
5o.)[
*OEJB
7433.0 434.7 MHz
Hong Kong
X/P3'
/VNCFSPG8JSFE*OQVUT
44
X/POF
Mounting Method
C$FJMJOH.PVOU
J+VODUJPO#PY$FJMJOH.PVOU
*$POUBDU-VUSPOGPSGSFRVFODZDIBOOFMDPEFDPNQBUJCJMJUZXJUIZPVSHFPHSBQIJDSFHJPOJGJUJTOPUJOEJDBUFEBCPWF
1 | Lutron
www.lutron.com
Technical Support: U.S.A. 800.523.9466

Europe +44.(0)20.7680.4481
369703a
10.15.12
QS Sensor Module
Specifications
Model Numbers
Power
Typical Power
Consumption
Environment
Communications
Link Capacities
ESD Protection
Surge Protection
Power Failure
Mounting
Wiring
Warranty
2 | Lutron
24.8$ 24.98$ 24.8+ 24.98+

24.8$ 24.98$
24.8$ 24.98$
24.98$
24.8$ 24.98$
24.98$
24 V-N"NBY XJSFEJOQVU
N"NBY OPXJSFEJOQVU
81PXFS%SBX6OJUT 1%6T
QMVT1%6TGPSFBDIXJSFETFOTPS
'PSNPSFJOGPSNBUJPOBCPVU1%6T QMFBTFTFFUIF)PNF8PSLT QS Wiring and
Power Guidelines document on the HomeWorks243FTPVSDF8FCTJUF
D6-64 '$$ *$ 4$5 $& 53" 81$
"NCJFOUPQFSBUJOHUFNQFSBUVSFUP' UP$
UPIVNJEJUZ OPODPOEFOTJOH*OEPPSVTFPOMZ
The QSM communicates with the system through the Wired QS Link. When
communicating via RF, all wireless sensors and PicoXJSFMFTTDPOUSPMTNVTUCF
within 30 ft (9 m) through typical construction materials.
5IF24.DPVOUTBTEFWJDFUPXBSEUIFMJOLNBYJNVNPGEFWJDFT8JSFE
sensors increase the PDU (Power Draw Units) of the QSM.
Tested to withstand electrostatic discharge without damage or memory loss, in
BDDPSEBODFXJUI*&$
JOBDDPSEBODFXJUI*&&&$3FDPNNFOEFE1SBDUJDFPO4VSHF
7PMUBHFTJO-PX7PMUBHF"$1PXFS$JSDVJUT
1PXFSGBJMVSFNFNPSZ4IPVMEQPXFSCFJOUFSSVQUFE UIF24.XJMMSFUVSOUPJUT
previous state when power is restored.
5PFOTVSFPQUJNBMXJSFMFTTSBOHF 24.VOJUTTIPVMECFNPVOUFEJOUIFNJEEMF
PGOPONFUBMDFJMJOHUJMFPSESZXBMM WJTJCMFGSPNJOTJEFUIFTQBDF*OTUBMMBUJPO
OFBSNFUBMPUIFSUIBOBKVODUJPOCPYNBZSFEVDF3'SBOHF
24-JOLUP"8( UPNN2
*&$1&-7/&$$MBTTXJSJOH
.BYJNVN24-JOLMFOHUIGU N
*OQVUUP"8( UPNN2
*&$1&-7/&$$MBTTXJSJOH
Use LutronDBCMF(39$#-4 TUBOEBSE
PS(391$#-4 QMFOVN

XXXMVUSPODPN5FDIOJDBM%PDVNFOU-JCSBSZ)PNF8PSLT@8BSSBOUZQEG
XXXMVUSPODPN5FDIOJDBM%PDVNFOU-JCSBSZ)PNF8PSLT@*OUM@8BSSBOUZQEG
www.lutron.com

Europe +44.(0)20.7680.4481
369703a
10.15.12
QS Sensor Module
Dimensions
Front View
Side View
Back View
24.8$TIPXO
4.04 in
(102.67 mm)
1.17 in
(29.82 mm)
Mounting
-C Models
-J Models
$FJMJOH
$FJMJOH
$FJMJOH
$FJMJOH
$FJMJOHUIJDLOFTTSBOHFGPS$NPEFMT
.JOJO NN
to
.BYJO NN
Use appropriate Mud Ring for ceiling tile thickness
Use Mud Ring with hole spacing

TIPXOCFMPX
(Mud Ring not included with any
QSM models)
2.75 in (70 mm)

3 | Lutron
www.lutron.com

Europe +44.(0)20.7680.4481
369703a
10.15.12
QS Sensor Module
Wiring: QS Link and Wired Inputs
Red
7-
Blue or Gray
44JHOBM
Back View
24.8$TIPXO
$0.$PNNPO
Black
Occupancy
sensor
Input 31
22 to 14 AWG (0.5 to 2.5 mm2)
Lutron$BCMF(39$#-4 TUBOEBSE

PS(391$#-4 QMFOVN
.BY8JSFE*OQVUXJSFMFOHUIGU N

per input
QS Link
.69
.69
24 V
$PNNPO
22 AWG to 14 AWG (0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2)

.BY24-JOLXJSFMFOHUIGU N
Only on QSM models with wired inputs.
4 | Lutron
www.lutron.com

Europe +44.(0)20.7680.4481
369703a
10.15.12
QS Sensor Module
System Wiring Diagram
$POUSPMQPXFS
120-240 V~
Wired occupancy sensors (up to 4)

Note: Only models with wired inputs
QS Link
L(+) N(-)
L(+) N(-)
120 - 240 V
24 V
QSPS-DH-1-60
120 - 240 V
24 V
QSPS-DH-1-60
22.5 - 25 V
22.5 - 25 V
PWR
ERR
P
L1
L1 TX/RX
L2
L2 TX/RX
L2 TX/RX
QSM
Radio Powr SavrTM

Pico wireless
occupancy/
control (up to
vacancy sensor (up
10 per QSM)
to 10 per QSM)
PWR
ERR
P
L1
L1 TX/RX
L2
HomeWorks QS
Keypad
HomeWorks QS
Processor panel
HomeWorks
Remote Power
Module (RPM) panel
5 | Lutron
www.lutron.com

Europe +44.(0)20.7680.4481
Enclosures, Panels, and

Power Modules
369604c
12.04.12
Low-Voltage Enclosure
Low-voltage enclosures may be surface-mounted
in an electrical closet or equipment room. Both
the number of enclosures and the types of
components within them are customized to
t the size, lighting plan, and design of a home.
Low-voltage enclosures can be distributed
throughout the home near the rooms they
are controlling, to provide maximum exibility
during installation of the low-voltage wiring.
Low-voltage enclosures cannot house Remote
Power Modules (RPMs).
14 in (35.6 cm) Low-Voltage Enclosure
The 14 in (35.6 cm) low-voltage enclosure provides
a compact housing for mounting one processor or
one system interface and up to two wire landing
boards (QS-WLB). The enclosure accepts one
120 V~ (L-LV14-120) or 220-240 V~ (L-LV14-230)
feed to power the panel, which is self-contained in
an enclosed area, thus allowing access to only the
low-voltage connections when the enclosure cover Low-Voltage Enclosure
is removed.
Model Number
L-LV14-120
120 V~
L-LV14-230
220-240 V~
Low-Voltage Enclosure Cover
1 | Lutron

Europe +44.(0)20.7680.4481
369604c
12.04.12
Specifications
Model Numbers
L-LV14-120, L-LV14-230
Power
120 V~ 50/60 Hz 2 A, (L-LV14-120)

220-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 1 A (L-LV14-230)
UL, CSA
CE, S C-tick (L-LV14-230)
Environment
Ambient operating temperature: 32 F to 104 F (0 C to 40 C)

Ambient operating humidity: 0% to 90% humidity, non-condensing.
Indoor use only.
Mounting
Enclosure may be surface-mounted. Mount the enclosure so that

line-voltage wiring will be at least 6ft(1.8m) from audio or electronic
equipment and wiring.
Mount Enclosure using the following method
(mounting hardware is not provided):
Surface Mount Use keyholes with bolts sufficient for 100 lb (45kg)
load, 0.25 in (M6) bolts recommended.
NOTICE: This equipment is air-cooled. Mount in a location where there is
at least 12in (305mm) of clearance in front of the enclosure.
NOTICE: Power supply will hum slightly and internal relays will click
while in use. Mount in a location where such noise is acceptable.
Dimensions
Enclosure: 13.3in (337mm) x 9.2in (235mm) x 3.16in (80mm)

Cover: 13.32in (338mm) x 9.32in (237mm)
Construction
Enclosure: 16-gauge powder coated sheet metal.

Cover: 16-gauge powder coated metal cover. Cover is attached using
four phillips-head screws.
Capacity
Enclosure can accommodate one processor or system interface device

and two wire landing boards (QS-WLB).
Line-Voltage
Connections
Use copper wire only, supply conductors rated at 167 F (75 C).
Use supplied wire connections to connect to corresponding power supply
harnesses.
Warranty
www.lutron.com/TechnicalDocumentLibrary/HomeWorks_Warranty.pdf
www.lutron.com/TechnicalDocumentLibrary/HomeWorks_Intl_Warranty.pdf
2 | Lutron

Europe +44.(0)20.7680.4481
369604c
12.04.12
Mounting
Front View
Side View
Ceiling
Dedicated feed*
Emergency feed**
Line voltage only
NEUTRAL
V+
V+
COM
COM
MUX
L1
L2
HOT
5 4 3 2 1
MUX
MUX
MUX
5 4 3 2 1
500-10561 Rev. B
See Feed Requirements below
Alternate IEC
PELV/NECR
Class 2 entry
points
Wall
GROUND
Do not use
these
knockouts
Do not use
these
knockouts
10/100
L1
1 2
L2
24 V
2 A
24 V
500 mA
COM
PWR
10/100
3 4 5
NEUTRAL
V+
COM
MUX
V+
COM
L1
L2
HOT
5 4 3 2 1
MUX
MUX
5 4 3 2 1
MUX
Note: Follow
NECR guidelines
for minimum
conduit bend
radius.
500-10561 Rev. B
Alternate IEC
PELV/NECR
Class 2 entry
points
GROUND
10/100
L1
1 2
L2
24 V
2 A
24 V
500 mA
COM
PWR
10/100
3 4 5
IEC PELV/NECR
Class 2 wiring only
for control links and
Ethernet connection
Note: An outlet
must be installed
within 6 ft (1.8 m)
of the panel.
Outlet should not
be on the same
circuit as the panel.
Required for
system start-up.
Feed Requirements
*Lutron recommends using a dedicated circuit for lighting control devices.
**Emergency feed is recommended so that the system status can be monitored during an
emergency event. If this is not required, normal power can be used.
3 | Lutron

Europe +44.(0)20.7680.4481
369604c
12.04.12
Configuration
Terminal Shield
Processor or Interface
(HQP6-2 shown)
Power Supply
(QSPS-DH-1-60 shown)
QS Wire Landing Board
QS-WLB (up to 2)
4 | Lutron

Europe +44.(0)20.7680.4481
369-381b
12.14.11
Low-voltage enclosures may be either
surface-mounted or flush-mounted in an
electrical closet or equipment room. Both
the number of enclosures and the types of
components within them are customized to fit
the size, lighting plan, and design of a home.
Low-voltage enclosures can be distributed
throughout the home near the rooms they are
controlling, to provide maximum flexibility during
installation of the low-voltage wiring.
21-inch Low-Voltage Enclosure
The 21-inch low-voltage enclosure provides
a compact housing for mounting up to two
HomeWorks QS processors or up to two
system interfaces and up to five wire landing
boards (QS-WLB).
The enclosure accepts one 120 V~
(HQ-LV21-120) or 220-240 V~ (L-LV21-230)
feed to power the panel, which is self-contained
in an enclosed area, thus allowing access to only
the low-voltage connections when the enclosure
cover is removed.
Model Number
HQ-LV21-120
120 V~ Low-Voltage
Enclosure
L-LV21-230
220-240 V~ Low-Voltage
Enclosure
Low-Voltage Enclosure Cover
www.lutron.com
Lutron | 1
369-381b
12.14.11
Specifications
Model Numbers
HQ-LV21-120
L-LV21-230
Power
120 V~ Power Input 50 / 60 Hz 2 A (HQ-LV21-120)

220-240 V~ Power Input 50 / 60 Hz 2 A (L-LV21-230)
UL, CSA, NOM (HQ-LV21-120)

CE, S C-tick (L-LV21-230)
Environment
Ambient operating temperature: 32 F to 104 F (0vC to 40 C)

Ambient operating humidity: 0-90% humidity, non-condensing. Indoor use
only.
Mounting
Enclosure may be surface-mounted or recess-mounted. Enclosure fits

between standard 16 in (41 cm) on-center stud framing. Mount the
enclosure so that line-voltage wiring will be at least 6 ft (1.8 m) from audio
or electronic equipment and wiring.
Mount Enclosure using one of the following methods (mounting
hardware is not provided):
a. Surface Mount Use keyholes with bolts sufficient for 100 lb (45 kg)
load, 1/4 in (M6) bolts recommended.
b. Recess Mount Use screws sufficient for 100 lb (45 kg) through
the corners of the enclosure. Mount enclosure fully into the stud bay,
with the back flush against the inner wall surface. Enclosure is 4.088
in (104 mm) deep past cover mounting tabs (including pedestal).
Enclosure cover dimensions are 21.5 in x 15.386 in (546 mm x
391 mm).
NOTICE: This equipment is air-cooled. Mount in a location where the
vented cover will not be blocked. 12 in (305 mm) of clearance in front of
the vents is required.
NOTICE: Power supply will hum slightly and internal relays will click while
in use. Mount in a location where such noise is acceptable.
Dimensions
Enclosure: 21 in (533 mm) x 14.375 in (365 mm) x 4.088 in (104 mm)

Cover: 21.5 in (546 mm) x 15.386 in (391 mm)
Construction
Enclosure: 16-gauge powder coated sheet metal.

Cover: 16-gauge powder coated metal cover. Cover is attached using
four philips-head screws.
Capacity
Enclosure can accomodate two processors or system interface devices

and five wire landing boards (QS-WLB).
Examples: 1 Processor and 1 System Interface;
2 Processors; or 2 Interfaces
Line-Voltage Connections
Use copper wire only, supply conductors rated at 167 F (75 C). Use
supplied wire connections to connect to corresponding power supply
harnesses.
Warranty

2 | Lutron
12.14.11
369-381b
Dimensions and Mounting
14.375 (365)
13.285 (337)
Measurements shown as:

in (mm)
7.750 (197)
Terminal
Shield
Surface Mounting
Pedestal (4x)
Line voltage
wiring entry
(non-IEC
PELV / NEC
Class 2)
Power Supply
DIN rail
End Stop (5x)
Input
Power
Switch
-7
+7
18
(457)
21
(533)
0.312
(7.9)
20
(508)
0.430
(10.9)
0.624
(15.8)
11.5 (292)
www.lutron.com
IEC PELV / NEC Class 2 ONLY
Lutron | 3
369-381b
12.14.11
Configuration
L(+) N(-)
120 - 240 V
L(+) N(-)
24 V
QSPS-DH-1-60
120 - 240 V
24 V
QSPS-DH-1-60
22.5 - 25 V
Power Supply
QSPS-DH-1-60
(up to 2)
22.5 - 25 V
HQP6-2-120
(up to 2)

QS-WLB
(up to 5, 1 included)
4 | Lutron
369-662a
08.27.12

The wire landing board is a wiring aid consisting
of a printed circuit board with one set of five
terminal blocks. Each terminal block can accept
up to two 18 AWG (1.0 mm2) wires and is
connected pin-to-pin, to simplify wiring.
The wire landing board can be installed in a
low-voltage enclosure or at the bottom of a
feed-through panel.
QS-WLB
Model Number
QS-WLB
www.lutron.com
Lutron | 1
369-662a
08.27.12

Specifications
Model Number
QS-WLB
Low-Voltage Connections
One set of ve terminal blocks. Each terminal block has 5terminals

that will each accept up to two 18 AWG (1.0mm 2) wires.
Environment
Ambient operating temperature: 32 to104F(0to40C). Ambient

operating humidity: 0-90% humidity, non-condensing. Indoor use
only.
Mounting
Mounts in the following enclosures: L-LV14-120, L-LV14-230,

L-LV21-230, HQ-LV21-120, and HWI-PNL-8
Warranty
Dimensions
1.45 (36.8)
4.036
(102.5)
2 | Lutron

Europe +44.(0)20.7680.4481
369-662a
08.27.12

Configuration Example
DMX
Keypad(s)
SivoiaQS
Shade / Drapery
HomeWorksQS
Keypad
GRAFIK Eye
QS control
unit
QS Contact
Closure Interface
t5JHIUFOUFSNJOBMCMPDLTUPUPJO-MC UP/tN
%POPUPWFSUJHIUFO
t5FSNJOBMJTVTFEUPDPOOFDUUIF24DBCMFTIJFMEESBJOXJSFUISPVHIPVUUIFTZTUFN
www.lutron.com
Lutron | 3
369-600a
01.10.12
Control panels
Control panels are available in two different
sizes, each of which may be either
surface-mounted or recess-mounted in an
electrical closet or other equipment room. The
number of control panelsand the types of
components within themmay be specified to
fit the size, lighting plan, and design of a home.
Control panels may be distributed throughout
the home for added flexibility during installation
of the line-voltage wiring.
Control panels may contain optional
components (sold separately) including Filter
Choke Assembly, Module Interface, PowerKit,
Power Supply Unit, Processor(s), Remote
Power Module(s) (RPM), Ten Volt Modules
(TVM), and Wire Landing Board(s).
HWI-PNL-5
HWI-PNL-5-CE
Shown with optional

RPMs and one Module
Interface installed
HWI-PNL-8
HWI-PNL-8-CE
Shown with optional

RPMs installed
Model Numbers
HWI-PNL-5
HWI-PNL-5-CE
HWI-PNL-8
HWI-PNL-8-CE
www.lutron.com
Lutron | 1
369-600a
01.10.12
Control panels
Specifications
Model Numbers
HWI-PNL-5; HWI-PNL-5-CE
HWI-PNL-8; HWI-PNL-8-CE
Power
120 V~ Power Input 50 / 60 Hz 2 A (HWI-PNL-5, HWI-PNL-8)

220-240 V~ Power Input 50 / 60 Hz 2 A (HWI-PNL-5-CE, HWI-PNL-8-CE)
Capacity
HWI-PNL-5, HWI-PNL-5-CE: Five RPMs* in any combination and one

Module Interface
HWI-PNL-8, HWI-PNL-8-CE: Eight RPMs* in any combination, one Module
Interface, one PowerKit, one Processor, up to two Power Supply units and/or Wire
Landing Boards (WLB)
* 120 V~ HW-RPM-4A, HW-RPM-4U, HW-RPM-4FSQ, HW-RPM-4M, HW-RPM-4R
220-240 V~ HW-RPM-4A, HW-RPM-4E, HW-RPM-4U, HW-RPM-4M, HW-RPM-4R
UL, CSA, NOM (HWI-PNL-5, HWI-PNL-8)

CE (HWI-PNL-5-CE, HWI-PNL-8-CE)
Environment
Ambient operating temperature: 32 to 104 F (0 to 40 C), 0 to 90% humidity,

non-condensing. Indoor use only.
Cooling
Passive cooling
Line-Voltage Connections
DIN rail-mounted terminal blocks provided for line-voltage remote power module,
module interface, and power supply wiring
DIN Rail Terminal Blocks
Terminal blocks will accept one 18 to 10 AWG (6.0 to 0.75 mm2) wire. Terminal blocks
should be tightened to 3.5 to 5.0 in-lb (0.40 to 0.57 Ntm).
Ground Bar Terminals
PNL-5, PNL-5-CE, PNL-8: 23 ground termination points;

PNL-8-CE: 46 ground termination points
Miswire Protection
All terminal blocks are shipped with bypass jumpers installed. After verifying that
each circuit is wired correctly, remove the bypass jumpers for system operation
Dimensions
HWI-PNL-5 and HWI-PNL-5-CE

Control Panel: 14.375 in (365 mm) x 32 in (813 mm) x 3.875 in (98 mm)
Cover: 15.875 in (403 mm) x 32.5 in (826 mm)
Control Panel: 14.375 in (365 mm) x 59 in (1498 mm) x 4.125 in (105 mm)
Cover: 15.875 in (403 mm) x 59.5 in (1511 mm)
Mounting
Control Panel may be surface-mounted or recess-mounted. Control Panel fits between

standard 16 in (41 cm) on-center stud framing. Mount the Control Panel so that line-voltage
wiring will be at least 6 ft (1.8 m) from audio or electronic equipment and wiring. Mount
Control Panel using one of the following methods (mounting hardware is not provided):
a. Surface-Mount Use keyholes with bolts sufficient for 100 lb (45 kg) load, 1/4 in
(M6) bolts recommended.
b. Recess-Mount Use screws sufficient for 100 lb (45 kg) through the corners of
the Control Panel. Mount Control Panel fully into the stud bay, with the back flush
against the inner wall surface. Control Panel is 4.09 in (104 mm) deep past cover
mounting tabs (including pedestal).
NOTICE: This equipment is air-cooled. Mount in a location where the vented cover
will not be blocked. 12 in (305 mm) of clearance in front of the vents is required.
NOTICE: Power supply will hum slightly and internal relays will click while in use.
Mount in a location where such noise is acceptable.
Construction
Control Panel: 16-gauge galvanized sheet metal (unpainted).

Cover: Painted (black) metal cover with ventilation holes. Cover is attached using
phillips-head screws (included)
Warranty

2 | Lutron
369-600a
01.10.12
Control panels

14.375
(365)
Preferred Power Wiring Entry
7.0
(178)
29.0
(740)
diameter:
0.313 (8)
Recess
Mount
with 4
Screws
diameter:
0.625 (16)
Terminal
Blocks
32.0
(810)
7.0
(178)
15.0
(381)
Module
Interface*
Location
UP
+7
-7
RPM*
Locations
(5 max.)
Mount Panel
Vertically
Alternate
Power Wiring
Entry
Control Wiring
Entry
IEC PELV / NEC
Class 2

2.0
(52)
8.0
(203)
Power Wiring
Entry
2.4
(61)
Recess Mount
with 4 Screws
diameter:
0.313 (8)
diameter:
0.625 (16)
Surface Mount
with Keyholes
RPM* Locations
(8 max.)
Terminal Blocks
41.8 (1062)
59.0 (1500)
UP
-7
+7
11.0
(280)
14.8 (376)
Mount Panel
Vertically
14.4
(366)
15.0
(381)
* Components sold separately
www.lutron.com
Control Wiring Entry

IEC PELV / NEC Class 2
Lutron | 3
369-600a
01.10.12
Control panels
Configurations
RPM*
Locations
(5 max.)
Terminal
Blocks
Module
Interface*
Location
Metal Barrier
RPM* Locations
(8 max.)
Terminal Blocks
Processor*
Module
Interface*
Space for optional PowerKit,
Power Supply Unit, Processor(s),
Wire Landing Boards*
Note: Filter choke assembly may be installed in place of module 8.
0-10 V modules may be installed in place of module 8 and metal barrier. See Application Note #234 Using a Ten Volt Module (TVM) Kit to Control
LED and Fluorescent Fixtures (http://resi.lutron.com/TechnicalInformation/AppNotesFAQs/tabid/180/Default.aspx) for more details.
* Components sold separately
4 | Lutron
06.22.12
369-548a
Control Power Panels with Breakers

Control power panels with breakers are available
in two different sizes, each of which may be
either surface-mounted or recess-mounted, in
an electrical closet or other equipment room.
The number of remote power panelsand the
types of components within themmay be
specified to fit the size, lighting plan, and
design of a home.
Control power panels may be distributed
throughout the home for added flexibility during
installation of the line-voltage wiring.
HWBP-2S
Control power panels with breakers may

contain remote power modules (RPMs) and a
control power module interface. Panels with
breakers may not contain processors.
Control power panels with breakers require only
one feed from the main distribution panel, reducing
the number of wiring connections required (feedthrough panels require up to nine separate feeds).
The HWBP-2S, HWAP-8D, HWBP-8D and
PBK8 include factory-installed wiring from
standard breakers to the terminal blocks.
HWAP-8D power panels include
commercial-grade combination Arc-Fault
Circuit InterruptFr (AFCI) breakers in place
of the standard breakers.
Shown with optional

RPMS & module
interface installed
HWBP-8D
Shown with optional

RPMS & module
interface installed
Model Numbers
Single Phase 3-Wire
120/240 V~ 50/60 Hz 175 A
HWBP-2S-15-120L3 15 A
HWAP-8D-20-120L3 20 A
HWAP-8D-15-120L3 15 A
HWBP-8D-20-120L3 20 A
HWBP-8D-15-120L3 15 A
PBK8-40-13-CE
20 A
HWBP-2S-20-120L3 20 A
PBK8-40-13-10-CE
20 A
Three Phase 4-Wire

120/208 V~ 50/60 Hz 175 A
HWBP-2S-15-120L4 15 A
HWBP-2S-20-120L4 20 A
HWAP-8D-15-120L4 15 A
HWAP-8D-20-120L4 20 A
HWBP-8D-15-120L4 15 A
HWBP-8D-20-120L4 20 A
PBK8-40-13-CE
www.lutron.com
Shown with optional

output breakers RPMS
& module interface installed
1 | Lutron
369-548a
06.22.12

Specifications
Model Numbers
HWBP-2S-15-120L3, HWAP-8D-15-120L3, HWBP-8D-15-120L3, HWBP-2S-20-120L3,

HWAP-8D-20-120L3, HWBP-8D-20-120L3, HWBP-2S-15-120L4, HWAP-8D-15-120L4,
HWBP-8D-15-120L4, HWBP-2S-20-120L4, HWAP-8D-20-120L4, and HWBP-8D-20-120L4
PBK8-40-13-CE, PBK8-40-13-10-CE
Power
Single phase 3-wire: 120 V~/240 V~ 50/60 Hz 175 A

Three phase 4-wire: 120 V~/208 V~ 50/60 Hz 175 A
Regulatory Approvals HW Models: UL, CSA, NOM
PBK8 Models: CE, S C-tick
Environment
Ambient operating temperature: 32 F to 104 F (0 C to 40 C), 0 to 90% humidity,

Cooling
Passive cooling.
Line-VoMtage
Connections
Use copper wire only, supply conductors 140 F to 167 F (60 C to 75 C).
DIN rail-mounted terminal blocks provided for line-voltage remote power module
and Module Interface power wiring.
DIN Rail Terminal

Blocks
Terminal blocks will accept one 18 AWG to 10 AWG (1.0 mm2 to 2.5 mm2) wire or two
18 AWG to 16 AWG (1.0 mm2 to 1.5 mm2) wires. Terminal blocks should be tightened to
3.5 in-lb to 5.0 in-lb (0.40 Ntm to 0.57 Ntm).
Ground Bar
Terminals
HW Models: 24 ground termination points.

PBK8 Models: 40 ground termination points.
Miswire Protection
All terminal blocks are shipped with bypass jumpers installed. After verifying that each
circuit is wired correctly, remove the bypass jumpers for system operation.
Arc Fault Circuit

InterruptFr (AFCI)
Breakers
HWAP-8D panels are equipped with commercial-grade combination (AFCI) breakers for
protection against series arcs, parallel arcs, and line-to-ground arcs. Refer to FAQ #235 Using
Arc-Fault Breakers with HomeWorks for detailed information. HWABP-8D panels can be
ordered with AFCI breakers or the AFCI breakers can be installed in the field. Contact
Lutron Customer Service for ordering details.
Dimensions
-8D Models: 1518 in (384 mm) x 59 in (1500 mm) x 418 in (105 mm)
-2S Models: 1518 in (384 mm) x 24 in (610 mm) x 418 in (105 mm)
PBK8 Models: 1678 in (427 mm) x 63 in (1600 mm) x 4 in (102 mm)
Mounting
Control power panel may be surface-mounted or recess-mounted. Mount the control panel so
that line-voltage wiring will be at least 6ft(1.8m) from audio or electronic equipment and wiring.
Mount control power panel with breakers using one of the following methods
(mounting hardware is not provided):
a. Surface Mount Use keyholes with bolts sufficient for 100 lb (45kg) load, 1/4 in
(M6) bolts reDommended.
b. Recess Mount Use screws sufficient for 100 lb (45kg) through the corners of the
control power panel with breakers. Mount control panel fully into the stud bay, with
the back flush against the inner wall surface. HW models are 4 18in(105mm) deep
and PBK8 models are 4 in (102 mm) past cover mounting tabs (including pedestal).
NOTICE: This equipment is air-cooled. Mount in a location where the vented cover will
not be blocked. 12in (305mm) of clearance in front of the vents is required.
NOTICE: Power supply will hum slightly and internal relays will click while in use.
Mount in a location where such noise is acceptable.
Construction
Control Power Panel with Breakers: 16-gauge galvanized sheet metal (unpainted).
Cover: Painted (black) metal cover with ventilation holes.
Cover is attached using phillips-head screws (included).
Warranty
http://www.lutron.com/technicaldocumentlibrary/homeworks_warranty.pdf
http://www.lutron.com/TechnicalDocumentLibrary/HomeWorks_Intl_Warranty.pdf
2 | Lutron

Europe +44.(0)20.7680.4481
369-548a
06.22.12

Dimensions & Mounting
-2S Models
1518
(384)
8
(203)
1 116
(27)
Load Wiring Entry

5/16 (8) dia.
2112
(546)
5/8 (16) dia.

Keyholes for surface
mounting (4 places)
24
(610)
Module
Interface
Mounting
Screw
Locations
1 716
(37)
1 1316
(46)
10 34
(273)
Terminal Blocks
Up
-7
+7
Mount Panel
Vertically
Main Feed Entry
Screws for Recess

Mounting (4 places)
Ground Lug

(IEC PELV/NEC Class 2)
Note: The panel is 4 18 (105) deep past cover mounting tabs.
-8D Models
2
(51)
8
(203)
Load Wiring Entry
2
(51)
5/16 (8) dia.
5/8 (16) dia.

Keyholes for
surface mounting
(4 places)
59
(1500)
411316
(1062)
Terminal Blocks
Up
-7
11
(280)
Screws
for recess
mounting
(4 corners)
Mount Panel
Vertically
Module Interface
Mounting Screw
Locations
14 1316
(376)
+7
14 38
(365)
15 8
(384)
1
Main Feed Entry
Ground Lug

Note: The panel is 4 18 (105) deep past cover mounting tabs.
www.lutron.com
3 | Lutron
369-548a
06.22.12

Dimensions & Mounting (Continued)
PBK8 Models
13
(330)
Load Wiring Entry
218
(54)
5/16 (8) dia.
5/8 (16) dia.

Keyholes for surface
mounting (4 places)
4412
(1130)
Terminal Blocks
Mount Panel
Vertically
Up
-7
+7
13
(330)
Module
Interface
Mounting
Screw
Locations
16 8
(416)
3
Screws
for recess
mounting
(4 corners)
16 78
(37)
18
(457)
Main Feed Entry
Ground Lug

The panel is 4 (102) deep past cover mounting tabs.
Notes:
1. PBK8-40-13-CE has one 3-phase, 4-pole, 40 A main input breaker; eight (8) 13 A branch circuit input breakers; and one (1) 13 A input control breaker.
2. PBK8-40-13-10-CE also has thirty-two (32) 10 A output breakers
4 | Lutron

Europe +44.(0)20.7680.4481
369-548a
06.22.12

Configurations
-2S Models
Note: Only 4R modules may be used with HWBP-2S
RPM
Locations
(2 max)
Terminal
Blocks
Breakers
Module
Interface
Main
Lugs
-8D Models
Metal Barrier
RPM
Locations
(8 max)
Terminal
Blocks
Breakers
Module
Interface
Main
Lugs
www.lutron.com
5 | Lutron
369-548a
06.22.12

Configurations (Continued)
PBK8
Metal Barrier
RPM
Locations
(8 max)
Terminal Blocks
Module
Interface
Control breaker
Input breakers
Main
Lugs
6 | Lutron

Europe +44.(0)20.7680.4481
369-547a
06.22.12
Remote Power Modules

Remote Power Modules (RPMs) are used to control lighting, motor,
and fan loads. There are several different models of RPMs. Each model
controls specific load types. The RPMs are mounted in remote power
panels. Models HWI-PNL-8, HWAP-8D and HWBP-8D hold up to eight
RPMs, HWI-PNL-5 holds up to five RPMs, and HWAP-2S and HWBP-2S
hold up to two RPM-4R modules.
All RPMs must be connected to a module interface housed within the
same panel enclosure. RPMs within an enclosure are connected to
the module interface using a Lutron-provided harness. To minimize the
effects of single power supply failure, each RPM is powered by its own
internal power supply.
Model Numbers
HW-RPM-4A-120
HW-RPM-4A-230
120 V~
Adaptive Dimming Module
220-240 V~
Adaptive Dimming Module
HW-RPM-4E-230-CE
220-240 V~
ELV Dimming Module
HW-RPM-4FSQ-120
120 V~
Quiet Fan Speed Control Module
HW-RPM-4M-120
HW-RPM-4M-230
120 V~
Motor Control Module
220-240 V~
Motor Control Module
HW-RPM-4R
HW-RPM-4U-120
100-277 V~
Power Relay Module
120 V~
Dimming Module
HW-RPM-4U-230-CE
220-240 V~
Dimming Module
HW-RPM-4U-240
240 V~
Dimming Module
www.lutron.com
1 | Lutron
369-547a
06.22.12

Specifications
Model Numbers
HW-RPM-4A-120, HW-RPM-4A-230, HW-RPM-4E-230-CE, HW-RPM-4FSQ-120,

HW-RPM-4M-120, HW-RPM-4M-230, HW-RPM-4R, HW-RPM-4U-120,
HW-RPM-4U-230-CE, and HW-RPM-4U-240
Power
HW-RPM-4A-120, HW-RPM-4FSQ-120, HW-RPM-4M-120, and HW-RPM-4U-120
120 V~ 50 / 60 Hz:
220-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz: HW-RPM-4A-230, HW-RPM-4M-230, HW-RPM-4U-230-CE and HW-RPM-4U-240
100-277 V~ 50 / 60 Hz: HW-RPM-4R
Capacity
HWAP-8D, HWBP-8D, and HWI-PNL-8, remote power panels will hold up to 8 RPMs.
HWI-PNL-5 remote power panel will hold up to 5 RPMs.
HWAP-2S and HWBP-2S remote power panels will hold up to 2 HW-RPM-4R modules.
Number of Outputs
Regulatory Approvals UL, CSA, NOM

Environment

0 to 90% humidity, non-condensing. Indoor use only.
Cooling
Passive cooling.
Line-Voltage
Connections
Separate line-voltage feeds at the DIN rail terminal blocks for each RPM. Terminal blocks
TIPVMECFUJHIUFOFEUPJOMCUPJOMC /tNUP/tN

Low-Voltage
Communications
Communication harness (included).
Wiring
Terminal blocks will accept one 18 AWG to 10 AWG (1.0 mm2 to 2.5 mm2) wire or two
18 AWG to 16 AWG (1.0 mm2 to 1.5 mm2) wires.
HW-RPM-4M-120, HW-RPM-4M-230 and HW-RPM-4R: Require the installation of
four additional gray terminal blocks (included) and three additional black terminal blocks
(included) to be mounted on to the DIN rail assembly. HW-RPM-4R gray terminal
blocks accept one 18 AWG to 8 AWG (1.0 mm2 to 10 mm2) wire or two 16 AWG to
12 AWG (1.5 mm2 to 4.0 mm2) wires.
Addressing
Manual rotary switch. Counts as 1 of 8 RPM addresses per module interface.
Diagnostics
LED provided to indicate proper communications with module interface.
ESD Protection
Surge Protection
Air Gap
HW-4U-120, HW-4U-230-CE HW-RPM-4A-120, HW-RPM-4A-230 HW-4FSQ-120,

and HW-RPM-4M-230: Provided when all four circuits are off.
HW-RPM-4R: Individual output airgap is provided when each circuit is off.
Fail Safe Operation
Rotary switch on the RPM allows for manual operation of each load.
Dimensions
378 in (99 mm) wide x 7 in (178 mm) high
Lamp Buzz
Lamp debuzzing coils are available from Lutron to reduce lamp filament buzzing.
(Lutron model HW-HIFC-10-2, LDC-10-TCP, or LDC-16-TCP).
Interface Suppression
EMI/RFI suppression circuitry
Warranty
2 | Lutron

Europe +44.(0)20.7680.4481
06.22.12
369-547a

Load Type and Ratings
Model
HW-RPM-4A-120
HW-RPM-4A-230
Load
Types1
INC, MLV,
ELV, NCC,
F2W
LED2
INC, MLV,
ELV, NCC
LED2
HW-RPM-4E-230-CE
INC, ELV3
HW-RPM-4FSQ-120
Fan Motor4
HW-RPM-4M-120
INC
Motor
(Bi-directional)
HW-RPM-4M-230
INC
Motor
(Bi-directional)
HW-RPM-4R
HW-RPM-4U-120
HW-RPM-4U-230-CE
HW-RPM-4U-240
Lighting
Motor
INC,5 MLV,5
NCC, F2W,
SFL
LED2
INC, MLV,
NCC, SFL
LED2
INC, MLV,
NCC,SFL
LED2
Voltage/
Frequency
Minimum Maximum Load Per: Technology

Load
Output
Module
120 V~
50/60 Hz
10 W
220-240 V~
10 W
50/60 Hz
220-240 V~
10 W
50/60 Hz
120 V~
0.25 A
50/60 Hz
120 V~
50/60 Hz
10 A
16 A
400 W
1600 W RTISS-TET6
8A
13 A
300 W
1200 W
10 A
16 A
N/A
2A
8A
Quiet control
circuitry
3A
0A
5 A (1/4 HP)
16 A
1.5 A
220-240 V~
0A
50/60 Hz
5 A (1/4 HP)
100-277 V~
0A
50/60 Hz
16 A
(1/3 HP)
64 A
120 V~
50/60 Hz
16 A
16 A
400 W
1600 W
10 A
13 A
300 W
1200 W
16 A
16 A
300 W
1200 W
25 W
220-240 V~
40 W
50/60 Hz
220-240 V~
40 W
50/60 Hz
16 A
Mechanical
interlocked
relays
SoftswitchR7
RTISS8
EquippedR
1 For higher wattages or for load types other than those listed, a Power Booster or Interface is required. For more details, refer to the HomeWorksR software.
2 This load type is not UL Listed or CSA Certified for use with this control. NOTICE: To avoid the risk of equipment damage, make sure that the LED
lighting system used conforms to the Compatibility Guidelines for LutronR Controls and LED Lighting Systems found at www.lutron.com/led.
3 Only use with ELV transformers. If used with MLV transformers, the module may be damaged and the warranty will be void.
4 Control up to 4 ceiling fans (1 per circuit). Do not use to control fans that have integrated fan speed controls (i.e., fan with a remote control). This
module may hum or buzz when at medium-high fan setting. Do not connect to lighting loads. Damage to the module could result.
5 In rare cases, incandescent lamps and MLV transformers will buzz or hum. The HW-HIFC-10-2 filter choke assembly reduces this hum. The
filter choke assembly can be installed in place of module 8 in an HWI-PNL-8 remote power panel.
6 RTISS-TETM: (Real-Time Illumination Stability System-Trailing Edge). Same as RTISS, but operates on the trailing edge of the A/C sine wave. This
allows for true instantaneous voltage compensation.
7 Softswitch: Lutron Softswitch circuitry prevents the relay contacts from arcing. Even when fully loaded, the arc reduction extends a relays
average rated life to more than 1,000,000 on/off cycles.
8 RTISS Equipped (Real-Time Illumination Stability System). This Lutron filter circuit technology compensates for incoming line-voltage variations,
such as changes in Root Mean Square (RMS) voltage, frequency shifts, harmonics, and line noise.
www.lutron.com
3 | Lutron
369-547a
06.22.12

Dimensions & Mounting
378
(99)
7
(178)
HWI-PNL-8 shown
Wiring
HW-RPM-4A-120, HW-RPM-4A-230, HW-RPM-4E-230-CE, HW-RPM-4FSQ-120,
HW-RPM-4U-120, HW-RPM-4U-230-CE and HW-RPM-4U-240
Removable
Bypass Jumpers
or
120 V
220-240 V
Dimmed
Dimmed
Dimmed
Dimmed
Hot
Hot
Hot
Hot
1
2
3
4
Hot
Neutral
From
Distribution
Panel
Red 1
Red 2
Red 3
Red 4
Black
White
Load
Load
Load
Load
Neutral
Neutral
Neutral
Neutral
1
2
3
4
Rotary Address Switch
4-Pin connector for Module
Interface Assembly Harness
4 | Lutron

Europe +44.(0)20.7680.4481
369-547a
06.22.12

Wiring (Continued)
HW-RPM-4M-120 and HW-RPM-4M-230
Input 120-240 V
from Distribution Panel (20 A)
Input Neutral from Distribution Panel

Red 1
Yellow 1
Yellow 2
Lower
Raise
Lower
Raise
Red 2
Red 3
Yellow 3
Red 4
Yellow 4
Black
White
HW-RPM-4R
Input 100-277 V~ from Distribution Panel
Red 1
Black 1
Control Power
Control Neutral
Red 2
Input Neutral from Distribution Panel
Black 2
Red 3
Black 3
Red 4
Black 4
www.lutron.com
5 | Lutron
369-547a
06.22.12

Address Switch position for
HW-RPM-4A-120, HW-RPM-4A-230,
HW-RPM-4E-230-CE, HW-RPM-4FSQ-120,
HW-RPM-4R, HW-RPM-4U-120, HW-RPM-4U-230-CE
and HW-RPM-4U-240
Position
Module Output/Purpose
0
All outputs OFF
1-8
Address for normal operation
9, A
Not used
B
Output 1 ON
Use for temporary lighting and zone testing
C
Output 2 ON
D
Output 3 ON
E
Output 4 ON
F
All outputs ON
Address Switch position for
HW-RPM-4M and HW-RPM-4M-230
Position
0
1-8
9, A-D
E
F
Module Output/Purpose
All relays OFF
Address for normal operation
Not used All outputs OFF
All raise relays ON
Use for directional motor testing
All lower relays ON
Use for directional motor testing
Zone Diagnostic LED Status

(HW-RPM-4A-120 and HW-RPM-4A-230 only)
Zone LED
Status
Load
Status
Description
Off
OFF
Normal; Load Off
Continuously on ON
1 blink per second ON
Incandescent/electronic dimmer
Magnetic dimming
Error Codes
1 blink; pause;
repeat
OFF
Load short circuit/overload1
2 blinks; pause;
repeat
OFF
Inductive load2
3 blinks; pause;
repeat
ON Full Shorted component3
4 blinks; pause;
repeat
OFF
DC detection4
Multiple errors5
10 blinks per sec. All
outputs
OFF
1
2
Locate and repair fault. Cycle power to RPM.

Check software configuration. MLV load detected with ELV software
setting.
Replace RPM. Internal device (FET) shorted.
Possible faulty MLV load.
Multiple errors exist on this output. The relay has opened to protect
the modules and all 4 outputs will be off.
Enlarged view of Address Switch
Diagnostic LED status for

HW-RPM-4A-230 HW-RPM-4E-230-CE,
HW-RPM-4FSQ-120, HW-RPM-4R, HW-RPM-4U-120,
HW-RPM-4U-230-CE and HW-RPM-4U-240
LED Status
Possible Cause
Off
No power or defective module
1 blink per sec.

Heartbeat
Normal operation
1 blink per
7 seconds
Lighthouse
Not communicating with processor:

tOpen control harness
4 blinks;
pause; repeat
tModule in manual override
tModule set on invalid or diagnostic address

t4ZTUFNOPUQSPQFSMZconfigured
or addressed in HomeWorks
software
10 blinks per sec. tZone error on one or more outputs
6 | Lutron

Europe +44.(0)20.7680.4481
369-545a
06.22.12
HomeWorks Module Interface

A Module Interface controls up to eight
Remote Power Modules (RPMs) in a remote
power panel enclosure. The Module Interface
manages communication between the RPMs
and a processor. A Module Interface is powered
from its own internal power transformer.
A Module Interface installs in HWI-PNL-8,
HWBP-8D, HWAP-8D, or PBK8 with up to
eightRPMs, in HWI-PNL-5 with up to five RPMs,
or in HWBP-2S with up to two RPM-4Rs.
A manual override input is provided on each
Module Interface, allowing a pre-determined
lighting scene to be activated from designated
override switches installed anywhere in
the area.
Each processor has communication links that can
be configured as power panel links dedicated to
control up to 16 Module Interfaces. This connection
must be daisy-chained and requires two pair IEC
PELV/NEC Class 2 wire one pair 18 AWG
(1.0 mm2), one pair 18 AWG to 22 AWG
(1.0 mm2 to 0.5 mm2) twisted shielded.
Lutron wire model GRX-CBL-346S-500
may be used.
Model Number
HWI-MI-120
HWI-MI-230
www.lutron.com
Module Interface
(HWI-MI-120)
120 V~ Module Interface

220-240 V~ Module Interface
Lutron | 1
369-545a
06.22.12

Specifications
Model Number
HWI-MI-120, HWI-MI-230
Power
HWI-MI-120: 120 V~ 50/60 Hz 1 A HWI-MI-230: 230 V~ 50/60Hz 0.5A

The Module Interface is powered by a separate line-voltage feed at the
DIN rail terminal blocks and should not have terminal 2 connected on the
processor communications link connector.
Typical Power
Consumption
2W
Regulatory
Approvals
UL, CSA, NOM (HWI-MI-120)

CE, S C-tick (HWI-MI-230)
Environment

0 to 90% humidity, non-condensing. Indoor use only.
Cooling Method
Passive cooling.
Low-VoMtage
Wire Type
Two pair IEC PELV/NEC Class 2 wire one pair 18 AWG (1.0 mm2),
one pair 18 AWG to 22 AWG (1.0 mm2 to 0.5 mm2) twisted shielded.
Lutron wire model GRX-CBL-346S-500 may be used.
Low-Voltage
Maximum wire length of 1000 ft (305 m). Must be wired in a daisy-chain
Wiring Configuration conguration. Terminators are required if total cable length exceeds 50 ft (15 m).
Low-Voltage
Connections
One 4-pin removable terminal block. Each of the four terminals will accept up
to two 18 AWG (1.0 mm2) wires.
Addressing
Via rotary switch. Counts as 1 of the 16 Module Interface addresses on a

power panel link.
Diagnostics
Three LEDs for troubleshooting communications with the processor and the RPMs.
ESD Protection
Surge Protection
Miswire Protection
All terminal block inputs are over-voltage and miswire protected against wire
reversals and shorts.
Fail Safe Operations
The manual override scene is activated for all RPMs connected to the Module Interface by closing a switch that is wired between the two manual override
terminals. The switch (or relay) contacts must be rated for switching 50 mA at
30 V-. A single switch can be used for multiple Module Interfaces wired in
parallel, but proper polarity must be maintained across all units. In this conguration, the switch must be rated for the sum of the current for all of the Module
Interfaces connected (i.e., six Module Interfaces wired to a single manual override switch requires a switch rated for 300 mA at 30 V-).
Mounting Dimensions 13 18 in x 3 in x 3 58 in (333 mm x 76 mm x 92 mm)

Mounting
Mount in the lower right-hand corner of a panel enclosure

(HWI-PNL-8, HWBP-8D, HWAP-8D, HWI-PNL-5, or HWBP-2S)
Output
Compatible with HW-RPM-4U dimming module, HW-RPM-4A adaptive

dimming module, HW-RPM-4FSQ fan speed module, HW-RPM-4M motor
module, and HW-RPM-4R power relay module.
Warranty
http://www.lutron.com/technicaltocumentlibrary/homeworks_warranty.pdf
Lutron | 2

Europe +44.(0)20.7680.4481
06.22.12
369-545a

Dimensions
3
(76)
358 (91)
1318
(333)
Configurations
Preferred Power
Wiring Entry
Module
Location
(8 total)
Preferred Power
Wiring Entry
Module
Location
(5 total)
HWI-MI-120
Module
Interface
HWI-MI-120
Module Interface
Control wiring
IEC PELV / NEC
Class 2
Alternate Power
Wiring Entry
8 Module Panel
www.lutron.com
Control wiring
IEC PELV / NEC
Class 2
Alternate Power
Wiring Entry
5 Module Panel
Preferred
Power
Wiring
Entry
HWI-MI-120
Module
Interface
HWI-MI-120
Module
Interface
Alternate
Power
Wiring
Entry
Control wiring
IEC PELV / NEC
Class 2
2 Module Panel
Lutron | 3
Power Module with EcoSystemR
LQSE-2ECO-D
EcoSystemR Controller
369-611a 1 02.17.12
ECO 1 ECO 2
COM
QS
MUX
The Power Module with EcoSystemR unit is a

DIN-rail mounted Eco Link controller for EcoSystemR
ballasts, drivers and devices. It provides Eco Link
power and control for two independent Eco Links
with up to 64 ballasts or drivers each.
MUX
Hi Temp Power Module with EcoSystem
Features
t1SPWJEFT&DP4ZTUFNR Link power for either one
or two links of EcoSystemR ballasts or drivers
(up to 250 mA per link).
t1PXFSGBJMVSFNFNPSZSFUBJOTDPOUSPMVOJU
programming in the event of a power loss.
t*ODMVEFT24MJOLGPSDPOOFDUJPOUPB
HomeWorksR24TZTUFN
t1PXFS.PEVMFXJUI&DP4ZTUFNR unit can be used in
a HomeWorksR24TZTUFNUPDPOUSPMBOENBOBHF
light in an entire home or building.
Test
LQSE-2ECO-D
Power
www.lutron.com +44.(0)20.7680.4481
Z096
230 V~ 50/60 Hz 80 mA
Patent: 7,391,297
Up
8 mm
Eco Link 1
Ballast
Ballast
Ballast
Ballast
Up to 64
ballasts on
each link
Eco Link 2
230 V~
Control Power
Power
Module with
EcoSystem unit
HomeWorksR24
Wallstation
Power
Module
24
Contact
HomeWorksR 24 Closure
Processor
Interface
GRAFIK
EyeR24
Up to 100
UPUBM24
devices
24-JOL
SivoiaR 24
Shade / Drapery
24
Power
Supply
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
LQSE-2ECO-D
369-611a 2 02.17.12
Specifications
Power
t7~ 50/60 Hz, 80 mA
t-JHIUOJOHTUSJLFQSPUFDUJPONFFUT"/4**&&&TUBOEBSE
6000 V~ and current surges of up to 3000 A.
t4UBOECZQPXFS8
t#56TIPVSXIFOGVMMZMPBEFE
t&DP-JOL0VUQVU7- 250 mA maximum per Link.
Standards
t*&$
t-VUSPO2VBMJUZ4ZTUFNTSFHJTUFSFEUP*40
t$&
t$UJDLS
Environment
t"NCJFOU5FNQFSBUVSF0QFSBUJOH3BOHF$UP$
t3FMBUJWFIVNJEJUZMFTTUIBOOPODPOEFOTJOH
t$BMJCSBUJPOQPJOUNBYJNVN$
t'PSJOEPPSVTFPOMZ
Terminals
t.BJOTXJSJOH NN2 to 4,0 mm2
t&DP-JOL8JSJOH NN2 to 4,0 mm2
t24-JOL8JSJOH NN2 to 4,0 mm2
Mounting
t*OUFOEFEUPNPVOUXJUIJOBO*1 NJOJNVN
SBUFE
consumer panel or breaker panel with integrated
DIN rail and dead cover
t8JEUI%*/NPEVMFT NN

Programming Requirements
t4FUVQBOEQSPHSBNNJOHPGUIF1PXFS.PEVMF
with EcoSystem unit is done through the
HomeWorks24QSPHSBNNJOHTPGUXBSF
t)PNF8PSLT24TPGUXBSFWFSTJPOPSIJHIFS
required.
t"VUPNBUJDSFQMBDFNFOUPGBTJOHMFGBJMFECBMMBTU
or driver.
t4JNQMFNFUIPEPGSFQMBDJOHNVMUJQMFGBJMFE
ballasts or drivers.
t&DP4ZTUFNR Digital Link can be wired as Mains
voltage or IEC PELV for maximum wiring exibility.
EcoSystemR Digital Link Limits
t6QUPEcoSystemR-compatible uorescent ballasts
and/or LED drivers per EcoSystemR digital link.
t&DP4ZTUFNR-compatible uorescent ballasts and LED
drivers on the EcoSystemR digital link do not count as
24EFWJDFT
QS Link Limits
t"24MJOLJOBHomeWorks24TZTUFNDBOIBWFVQ
to 512 zones (outputs) and 100devices. A ballast or
driver counts as 1 zone.
t&BDIPower Module with EcoSystemR unit counts as
one device toward the 100 device limit.
t"NBYJNVNPGGVMMZMPBEFEEcoSystemR digital links
NBZCFDPOOFDUFEUPBTJOHMF24MJOL
HomeWorksR QS Wallstations
t)PNF8PSLTR24XBMMTUBUJPOTDBOCFDPOmHVSFEUP
control Power Module with EcoSystemR units with the
HomeWorksR24QSPHSBNNJOHVUJMJUZ
t-&%JOEJDBUPSEJTQMBZTUIFTUBUVTPGQSPHSBNNFEMJHIUT
Troubleshooting and Maintenance

Features
t.BJOUBJOTSFEVOEBOUNFNPSZPGCBMMBTUQSPHSBNNJOH
for ease of single or multiple ballast replacement.
t"GUFSJOTUBMMBUJPO i5&45wCVUUPOWFSJmFT&DP-JOLXJSJOH
POBMMmYUVSFT
t4UBUVT-&%TWFSJGZDPOOFDUJPOTUPDPOUSPMTUBUJPOT
t"GUFSJOTUBMMBUJPO Power Module with EcoSystemR unit
JEFOUJmFTCBMMBTUDPNNVOJDBUJPOGBJMVSFT
EcoSystemR
t$POUSPMVQUP&DP4ZTUFNR-compatible devices
(ballast or LED drivers) per EcoSystemR Digital
Link (up to 128 devices per Power Module with
EcoSystemR unit).
t%JHJUBMMZEFmOFBSFBTBOE[POFT
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
LQSE-2ECO-D
369-611a 3 02.17.12
Overview of Wiring Terminals and Mechanical Dimensions

PELV
COM
Eco
Link 1*
MUX
QS
MUX
QS
Link
ECO 1 ECO 2
NN
Test
LQSE-2ECO-D
Power
www.lutron.com +44.(0)20.7680.4481
Eco
Link 2*
Z096
230 V~ 50/60 Hz 80 mA
Patent: 7,391,297
Up
8 mm
NN
Mains
Wiring
* Wire according to local codes.
60,6 mm
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
LQSE-2ECO-D
369-611a 4 02.17.12
Wiring: Mains Voltage

Wiring from Distribution to Power Module Unit
COM
MUX
QS
MUX
t5VSOPGGBMMDJSDVJUCSFBLFSTPSJTPMBUPSTGFFEJOHUIF
Power Module unit at the distribution panel.
ECO 1 ECO 2
Test
LQSE-2ECO-D
Power
www.lutron.com +44.(0)20.7680.4481
t3VOMJOF OFVUSBM BOEFBSUIHSPVOE wires from a

230 V~ 50/60Hz feed to the Power Module with
EcoSystemR unit.
Z096
230 V~ 50/60 Hz 80 mA
Patent: 7,391,297
Up
8 mm
Emergency Lighting Applications

t6TFOPSNBM OPOFTTFOUJBM
QPXFSPOMZUPQPXFSUIF
Power Module with EcoSystemR unit.
t&DP4ZTUFNR ballasts and drivers are programmed to

enter emergency mode when the Eco link looses
power.
t8IFOOPSNBMQPXFSESPQTPVU UIFPower Module

with EcoSystemR unit will not power the Eco Links.
When this occurs, ballasts powered from emergency
feeds go to their emergency mode, full light output by
default.
Mains Wiring and PELV Separation
t5IFPower Module with EcoSystemR unit is designed
to separate mains wiring from IEC/PELV circuits.
N
L
t'PMMPXBQQSPQSJBUFMPDBMBOEOBUJPOBMDPEFTUPBWPJE
violating required separation guidelines.
Distribution
Panel
Earth/Ground
N Neutral
L Mains/Line
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
LQSE-2ECO-D
369-611a 5 02.17.12
Wiring: Eco Link
ECO 1 ECO
E
2
COM
MUX
QS
MUX
Power Module with EcoSystemR unit will supply

power to two independent Eco Links, which support
a maximum of 64 ballasts per link.
Test
LQSE-2ECO-D
Power
www.lutron.com +44.(0)20.7680.4481
Z096
230 V~ 50/60 Hz 80 mA
Patent: 7,391,297
Up
8 mm
Eco Wiring
t&DP4ZTUFNR Digital Link can be wired as Mains
voltage or IEC PELV for maximum wiring flexibility.
t5IF-JOLJTQPMBSJUZJOTFOTJUJWFBOEDBOCFXJSFEJO
any topology.
Eco Link 1
Eco Link 2
Eco 1
Eco 2
Eco 1
Eco 2
t$POTVMUBMMOBUJPOBMBOEMPDBMFMFDUSJDBMDPEFTGPS
separation requirements.
Wire CrossSectional Area
4,0 mm2
2,5 mm2
1,5 mm2
1,0 mm2
Maximum EcoSystemRcompliant Link Wire Length

829 m
518 m
311 m
N
EcoSystemR Digital Link

EcoSystemR H-Series Ballast
EcoSystemR LED
Up to 64 EcoSystemR ballasts
or LED drivers
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
LQSE-2ECO-D
369-611a 6 02.17.12
Wiring: QS Link
IEC PELV QS Link Wiring
CO
COM
MUX
X
MUX
t-JOLDPNNVOJDBUFTVTJOH*&$1&-7XJSJOH
QS
Hi Temp Power Module with

th EcoSystem
EcoSystem
EcoSyst
em
Test
LQSE-2ECO-D
2ECO-D
2ECO-
Power
www.lutron.com
on.com +44.(0)20.7680.448
+44.(0)20.7680.4481
7680.4481
1
ECO 1 ECO 2
Z096
Hz 80 mA
m
230 V~ 50/60 Hz
Patent: 7,391,297
Up
t'PMMPXBMMBQQMJDBCMFOBUJPOBMBOEMPDBMDPEFTGPS
t8JSJOHNBZCFEBJTZDIBJOFEPSUUBQQFE
8 mm
t5PUBMMFOHUIPG24MJOLNVTUOPUFYDFFEN
t%P/05DPOOFDUUFSNJOBM
t8JSF(BVHF
1PXFS UFSNJOBMTBOE
QBJS NN(
%BUB UFSNJOBMTBOE
QBJS NN( to 1,0mm(
twisted and shielded
- Can use LutronR cable GRX-CBL-346S-500
(1) COM
(2)
No Connection
(3) MUX
(4) MUX
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
Adaptive Power Module
HomeWorksR QS
Phase Adaptive Fixture Controller

369-583c 1 06.12.12

The Adaptive Power Module family is a group of
modular products for the control of lighting loads.
This document describes the following product:
Adaptive Power Module (model LQSE-4A-D)
Features
Adaptive Power Modules can be used in a
HomeWorksR QS system.
Automatically selects leading edge or trailing edge
dimming for incandescent/halogen, electronic/magnetic
low voltage and neon/cold cathode light sources.
Controls dimmable CFL/LED loads, contact LutronR
for compatibility with CFL/LED light sources.
RTISSR technology ensures that each output dims
smoothly and is flicker-free.
Unit is 12 DIN modules (216 mm) wide.
800 W Max 500 W Max 500 W Max 500 W Max
Hi Temp
Prog
Power
230 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 10 A
Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4
LQSE-4A-D
Input
DIN Rail Power Module
CCI
Option
Def
Opt1
Opt2
Opt3
www.lutron.com +44.(0)20.7702.0657
LQSE-4A-D
Provides air gap off (when all zones are off).

Integral protection for common temporary overcurrent and over-voltage conditions.
LEDs on front of unit provide diagnostic information.
Includes QS link for seamless integration of lights and
controls.
System Example
Emergency Contact Closure Input
Input
Hi Temp
Program
0-10 V Power Module

LQSE-4T10-D
Power
www.lutron.com +44.(0)20.7680.4481
230 V~ 50/60 Hz 50 mA
8 mm
Adaptive Power
Module
1,2 Nm
Mains Only
Z096
COM
COM
QS
0,5 Nm
All Others
MUX
CCI
CCI
MUX
seeTouchR
QS Wallstation
HomeWorksR
QS Panel
HomeWorksR QS
Power Module
Zones
0-10 V50 mA
Def
Opt1
Opt2
Outputs 230 V~ 10 AX each
H
Option
L
3
GRAFIK
EyeR QS
Opt3
1
QS Contact
Closure
Interface
Up
QS Link
Up to 100
total QS
devices
Input
Hi Temp
Prog
Power
LQSE-4A-D
CCI
Option
Def
Opt1
Opt2
Opt3
www.lutron.com +44.(0)20.7702.0657
230 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 10 A
220240 V~ Control Power

800 W Adaptive load1
Notes:
1 See "Output Zone Ratings" in Specifications section, for specific

load types ratings.
Job Name:
Job Number:
S p e c i f i c at i o n S u b m i t ta l
Model Numbers:
Page
HomeWorksR QS

369-583c 2 06.12.12
Out of Box Functionality

This section describes the default functionality
when the unit is first installed.
Emergency Contact Closure Input (CCI)
When the CCI is open, the Energi Savr NodeT QS unit
will enter Emergency Mode, which will turn on all loads
to their emergency level and disable control
of local zones and QS devices.
When the CCI is closed or jumpered, Energi Savr
NodeT QS unit zones will return to the settings or levels
they were at prior to entering emergency mode.
Note: Unit will process any sensor events received
while in emergency mode after it exits emergency
mode.
Normal Mode Operation
By default each zone is set to unknown load
type. Each zone will switch load on or off until it is
configured via unit programming.
Zone and raise/lower buttons on the unit can be used to:
turn loads on and off.
dim loads up and down.
Input and sensor status LEDs (Occ, Photo, IR, and
switch) verify connections to dry contact
switches and sensors.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
HomeWorksR QS

369-583c 3 06.12.12
Specifications
Power
220-240 V~ 50/60 Hz
Lightning strike protection meets ANSI/IEEE standard
6000 V and current surges of up to 3000 A.
Standards
IEC/EN 60669-2-1
CE marked
LutronR Quality Systems registered to ISO 9001.2008
Output Zone Ratings

Automatically selects leading edge or trailing edge
dimming or can also be manually configured for a
specific load type.
Patented RTISSR circuitry compensates in real time for
incoming line frequency variations: up to 2% change
in frequency/second.
Internal relay provides an air gap off when all zones
are off.
Each zone has no minimum load requirement.
A, B
Each zone is rated for the following load types :
Environment
Terminals (Torque, wire gauge & type ratings)

Mains wiring: 1.2 Nm

0.2 - 4.0 mm
(single wire, solid or stranded)
0.2 - 1.5 mm
(two wires, solid or stranded)
Zone wiring: 1.2 Nm

0.2 - 4.0 mm
CCI wiring: 0.5 Nm

0.2 - 4.0 mm
Multi-function
Input Wiring: 0.5 Nm

0.14 - 1.5 mm
QS Link:
0.5 Nm

0.2 - 2.5 mm

0.2 - 1.0 mm
(two wires, solid or stranded)
Job Number:
Zone 1
Rating
Zone 2, 3 and 4
Rating (per zone)
Incandescent/Halogen
800 W
500 W
Electronic Low Voltage
800 W
Magnetic Low Voltage
See Mounting on page 6 for thermal specifications

Relative humidity: less than 90% non-condensing
For indoor use only
Job Name:
Load Type
Model Numbers:
Neon/Cold Cathode
A
500 W
C
500 VA (375 W )
500 VA (375 W )
800 VA (600 W )
800 VA (600 W )
C
C
dditional load type options are available in the Quantum Designer

A
Software, some may require an interface. Contact Lutron for details.
D
Contact Lutron for compatibility with dimmable CFL/LED light sources.

Actual lamp wattage.
Only use iron core transformers intended for use with an electronic
switch or dimmer per Clause 8.3 of IEC/EN 60669-2-1
One load type per zone.

Output must be directly connected to the load.
Contact Lutron for applications with load side
switching.
Run a separate neutral for each load circuit. A
common neutral connection is not recommended.
Unit may be powered by Ground Fault Interrupter (GFI)
or Residual Current Circuit Breaker with Overload
(RCBO) protected circuit if required. Load circuit wiring
(from breaker to unit to load) must be run in its own
non-metallic conduit, or nuisance tripping may occur.
Maximum 30.5 m between power module and load.
Page
HomeWorksR QS

369-583c 4 06.12.12
Mounting
See Lutron P/N 048466 at www.lutron.com for more
information on mounting and installation in panels with
integrated DIN rail.
Mount in IP20 (minimum) rated consumer panel or
breaker panel with integrated DIN rail.
Mount unit in orientation shown.
Unit may be mounted by unlocking the four mounting
clips on the back of the unit. Clips must be locked
once unit to securely attached the unit to the DIN rail.
Mount in an accessible and serviceable location.
Unit generates heat, maximum 75 BTUs/Hour
Mount unit such that:
-Ambient Temperature Operating Range (inside
mounting panel within 2 cm of unit): 0 C to 35 C
-Calibration point maximum: 70 C
-Derate unit or cool mounting panel as needed to
maintain the above temperature requirements.
Hi Temp
Prog
Power
230 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 10 A
LQSE-4A-D
Input
CCI
Option
Def
Opt1
Opt2
Opt3
www.lutron.com +44.(0)20.7702.0657
Locked
Unlocked
4 mounting clips on unit
Left Side View
Front View
90 mm
90 mm
Calibration
point
220 - 240 V~
216 mm
55 mm
70 mm
76 mm
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
HomeWorksR QS

369-583c 5 06.12.12
Overview of Wiring Terminals

LQSE-4A-D
EmergencyContact
Closure
Input
QS
Link
Hi Temp
Prog
Power
LQSE-4A-D
Input
CCI
Option
Def
Opt1
Opt2
Opt3
www.lutron.com +44.(0)20.7702.0657
230 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 10 A
Mains
Input
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Load
Neutrals
Mains
Wiring
DL1
DL2
DL3
DL4
Zone Zone
1
3
Zone Zone
2
4
Phase Adaptive Outputs
Page
HomeWorksR QS

369-583c 6 06.12.12
Verify Wiring
LQSE-4A-D
Unit ships with bypass connector pre-installed for load
wiring verification. Bypass connector is used to apply
power to loads to ideintify any load or wiring faults prior
to wiring loads to unit.
Load wiring must be verified before wiring loads to unit.
To verify wiring:
1. Turn off power.
2. Wire loads to provided connector.
3. Apply power, ensure the desired loads are
powered and properly wired.
4. T
urn off power and wire loads to DL terminals
on unit.
220 - 240 V~
DL1
DL2
DL3
DL4
a
c
Earth
Distribution Live
Panel
Neutral
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
HomeWorksR QS

369-583c 7 06.12.12
Mains Voltage Wiring

Input
Hi Temp
Prog
LQSE-4A-D
CCI
Option
Def
Opt1
Opt2
800
500 W Max 500 W Max
Opt3
PowerW Max 500 W Max
230 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 10 A
0 / 60 Hz 10 A
LQSE-4A-D
CCI
www.lutron.com +44.(0)20.7702.0657
Option
Def
Opt1
Opt2
Zone 1 Example
Opt3
www.lutron.com +44.(0)20.7702.0657
Earth
Live
Distribution
Panel
Neutral
DL1
DL2
DL3
DL4
Dim Live
(220-240 V~)
Neutral
Load
Wiring from Distribution to Adaptive Power Module

Turn off all circuit breakers or isolators feeding the
Adaptive Power Module at distribution panel.
Run live, neutral, and earth( ) wires from a
220-240 V~ 50/60 Hz feed to the DIN Rail
Power Module unit.
Run a separate neutral for each load circuit. A
common neutral connection is not recommended.
Mains Wiring and IEC PELV Separation
Follow appropriate local and national codes to avoid
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
HomeWorksR QS

369-583c 8 06.12.12
Wiring: Emergency Contact Closure

Input

Input
S1
S2
S3
S4
CCI
Type
Input
Hi Temp
Prog
Power
230 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 10 A
QSNE-4A-D
Photo Occ Switch
IR
Option
Def
Opt1
Opt2
Opt3
www.lutron.com +44.(0)20.7702.0657
Common
CCI
Note: Shown with

pre-installed jumper.
CCI
COM
Option
Def
Opt2
Contact Closure Input (CCI) wiring is

IEC PELV/NEC Class 2.
Follow all applicable national and local codes for
Turn off all breakers or isolators feeding the
Energi Savr NodeT QS unit at distribution panel
before servicing unit.
CCI is local control only and cannot control other
Energi Savr NodeT QS units over the QS link. CCI
on multiple Energi Savr NodeT QS units may be
connected to an Emergency or Manual override
device in parallel if event is intended to affect
multiple devices.
When in emergency mode, all zone outputs will
be at their programmed emergency light level
(configurable for each zone, default is 100%).
All sensors and controls are locked out.
Emergency contact closure input is normally closed
(NC). The Energi Savr NodeT QS unit is shipped
with a jumper pre-installed.
Note: The Energi Savr NodeT QS unit will default to
Emergency Mode if the CCI is left open. If no Emergency
Contact Closure Input is required, please leave the wire
jumper in the CCI terminals.
Opt1
IEC PELV Emergency Contact Closure Input
Opt3
www.lutron.com +44.(0)20.7702.0657
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
HomeWorksR QS

369-583c 9 06.12.12
Wiring: QS Link
QS Link IEC PELV Wiring
Link communicates using IECPELV/NEC Class2 wiring.
Turn off all breakers or isolators feeding the Adaptive
Power Module at distribution panel before servicing unit.
Follow all applicable national and local codes for proper
circuit separation and protection.
Wiring may be daisy chained or t-tapped.
Total length of QS link must not exceed 600 m.
For lengths under 150 m, use two 1,0 mm2
conductors for control power (24 V-, COM).
For lengths over 150 m, use two 4,0 mm2
conductors for control power (24 V-, COM).
Use one, twisted-shielded pair of 1,0 mm2
conductors for data link (MUX, _).
Hi Temp
Prog
Power
230 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 10 A
LQSE-4A-D
Input
CCI
Option
Def
Opt1
Opt2
Opt3
www.lutron.com +44.(0)20.7702.0657
(1) COM
W Max
(2) Do Not Connect Teminal 2
ne 4
(3) MUX
(4) MUX
H
M

seeTouchR QS
wallstations
QSE-CI-DMX
02.0657

seeTouchR QS
wallstations
QSE-CI-DMX
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Unit does not consume or supply PDUs on

the QS link. Do not connect the 24 V- wire
to unit.
Note: 24 V- wire must bypass the unit if other
devices on the link consume PDUs.
Page
LQSE-4M-D
4-Output AC Motor Controller

369614a 1 03.02.12

The Motor Control Power Module is an interface that
provides seamless integration of HomeWorks QS
systems with AC blinds, shades, louvers, projection
screens, or any compatible AC motor. It provides four (4)
independently controllable AC raise/lower outputs from
one common AC input feed.

LQSE-4M-D
120-240 V~ 50/60 Hz 6 A
Features
In HomeWorks QS systems, the Motor Control Power
Module's high-voltage outputs for motor loads are fully
programmable through the HomeWorks system
software.
System Example
LQSE-4M-D
4 motor control outputs, 1,5 A each (zones 1-4)

(cannot be used for non-motor loads)
seeTouchR QS
Wallstation
Power
Module
Unit
HomeWorksR
Panel
GRAFIK EyeR QS
Motor Control Power

Module
120-240 V
Control Power
Job Name:
Job Number:
LUTRON
QS Link
Link
Power
Supply
Model Numbers:
Up to
100
total QS
devices
Page
LQSE-4M-D

369614a 2 03.02.12
Specifications
QS Link Limits
tA QS link can have up to 100 zones (outputs) and
100 devices.
t&BDI Motor Control Power Module counts as 4 zones
(outputs) and 1 device on the QS link.
tThe Motor Control Power Module (LQSE-4M-D) unit
does not supply or consume power draw units. When
using accessories (such as a keypad), an additional
24 V power supply or a link power supply must
Output Capacity
provide power and/or power draw units.
For more information on Power Draw Units, see
t "NBYJNVNNPUPSMPBEQFSDIBOOFM
"Power Draw Units on the QS Link",
(not for lighting control)
-VUSPO1/ BUXXXMVUSPODPNRT
t&BDI[POFTVQQPSUTPOMZPOFNPUPSEPOPUXJSFNPUPST
in parallel
t3BJTFBOE-PXFSPVUQVUTBSFNFDIBOJDBMMZJOUFSMPDLFEUP
Normal Mode Operation
prevent simultaneously activating Raise/Lower outputs.
t;POF4FMFDUCVUUPOTFMFDUTUIFEFTJSFE[POFSBJTF
t%FTJHOFEUPXJUITUBOEPQFODMPTFDZDMFT
lower buttons control the selected zone.
t4VQQPSUT0QFO $MPTF BOE6OBGGFDUFEQSFTFUTPOMZ
Regulatory Requirements
all other presets are ignored.
t*&$&/ &/
t%PFTOPUTVQQPSUTIBEFHSPVQTPSBSFBT
t%PFTOPUTVQQPSUEJTDSFUFTIBEFMFWFMT
t$&
t%PFTOPUTVQQPSUTDFOFT
Input Power
50/60 Hz
t*OQVUWPMUBHF7
t"NBYJNVNUPUBMJOQVUDVSSFOU
t"UTUBOECZ OPNPUPSTCFJOHESJWFO
QPXFSJT
less than 1 W.
6 000 V and current surges of up to 3 000 A.
Other Power Specifications

t4UBOECZQPXFS
- 240 V N8
- 120 V N8
t#56IPVSXIFOGVMMZMPBEFE
Environment
t"NCJFOUUFNQFSBUVSFPQFSBUJOHSBOHF
JOTJEFNPVOUJOHQBOFM
$UP$
'UP'
t$BMJCSBUJPOQPJOUNBYJNVN$ '
t'PSJOEPPSVTFPOMZ
Terminals
t.BJOT8JSJOH UP NN2 (18 to 12 AWG)
t;POF8JSJOH UP NN2 (18 to 12 AWG)
t24-JOL8JSJOH4FF8JSJOH24-JOL
Configurable Parameters
t.JOJNVN0OUJNF BMTPDBMMFE+PH5JNF
UIFNJOJNVN
time for which the Raise/Lower relay will be turned on.
Configurable from 80 ms to 3520 ms in 80 ms
increments
%FGBVMUNT
t*OUFSMPDLEFMBZUIFUJNFCPUISFMBZTBSFEFFOFSHJ[FE
while switching from Raise to Lower, or from Lower to
Raise
Configurable to 320 ms, 560 ms, or 960 ms
%FGBVMUNT
t.BYJNVN0OUJNF BMTPDBMMFE5SBWFM5JNFPS5JNF
UP0GG
BGUFSUIJTUJNF UIFSFMBZJTUVSOFEPGGBTB
precaution.
Configurable from 10 seconds to 450 seconds in
10-seond increments
%FGBVMUTFDPOET
Mounting
t6TFBO*1 NJOJNVN
SBUFEDPOTVNFSQBOFMPS
CSFBLFSQBOFMXJUIJOUFHSBUFE%*/SBJM
t8JEUINPEVMFT NN JO
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
LQSE-4M-D

369614a 3 03.02.12
NN
(3,5 in)

LQSE-4M-D
120-240 V~ 50/60 Hz 6 A
NN
(6,4 in)
&RVBMUP
%*/NPEVMFT
60,6 mm
(2,4 in)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
LQSE-4M-D

369614a 4 03.02.12
Mains Voltage and Load Wiring
;POF4FMFDUCVUUPOT
LQSE-4M-D
Raise/Lower buttons
120-240 V~ 50/60 Hz 6 A
L N G
Button Functions
;POF4FMFDUCVUUPOT
Select desired zone
LED LED indicates which zone is
selected
Hot/Live
From Distribution Panel
Neutral Feed
Raise/
Open
Lower/
Close
3BJTF-PXFSCVUUPOT
Raise/Lower selected zone
LEDs indicate which
direction (Raise/Stop/Lower)
is active
LEDs
Motor Load
Wiring from Distribution Panel to

Motor Control Power Module unit at distribution panel.
t3VOIPUMJWF OFVUSBM BOEHSPVOEFBSUI ) wires from
a 120240 V
50/60 Hz feed to the Motor Control
Power Module.
WJPMBUJOHSFRVJSFETFQBSBUJPOHVJEFMJOFTCFUXFFO
.BJOTXJSJOHBOE*&$1&-7/&$ Class 2 wiring.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Note
#FGPSFQSPDFFEJOHXJUIUIFMJOFWPMUBHFNBJOTXJSJOH
set the upper/open and lower/close limits for each
motor. Refer to the manufacturer's instructions for your
specific motor.
Page
LQSE-4M-D

369614a 5 03.02.12
Wiring: QS Link
t-JOLDPNNVOJDBUFTVTJOH*&$1&-7/&$ Class 2
wiring.
t5PUBMMFOHUIPG24MJOLNVTUOPUFYDFFE
610 m (2 000 ft).
t'PSMFOHUITVOEFSN GU
VTF
1,0 mm2 "8(
DPOEVDUPSGPSDPOUSPMQPXFS $0.

t'PSMFOHUITPWFSN GU
VTF NN2 (12 AWG)
DPOEVDUPSGPSDPOUSPMQPXFS $0.

t6TFPOF UXJTUFETIJFMEFEQBJSPG NN2 (22 AWG)
for data link (MUX, MUX).
Motor Control Power

wer Module
M
LQSE-4M-D
120-240 V~ 50/60 Hzz 6 A
(1) COM
(2)
(no connect)
(3) MUX
(4) MUX
To additional
QS devices

Wire Gauge
Less than 150 m (500 ft)
Common (terminal 1)
1 1,0 mm2 (18 AWG)
1 twisted, shielded pair 0,5 mm2 (22 AWG)
150 to 610 m
(500 to 2000 ft)
Common (terminal 1)
1 4,0 mm2 (12 AWG)
1 twisted, shielded pair 0,5 mm2 (22 AWG)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:

(39$#-4 OPOQMFOVN
(391$#-4 QMFOVN
(39$#-- OPOQMFOVN
(391$#-- QMFOVN
Page
Switching/0-10 V Power Module
LQSE-4
Switching / 0-10 V Fixture Controller

369-610a 1 02.17.12
COM
MUX
CCI
QS
"m
All Others

Zones
0-10 V50 mA
Input
Hi Temp
Program
0-10 V Power Module

LQSE-4T10-D
Power
www.lutron.com +44.(0)20.7680.4481
8 mm
"m
Mains Only
Def
Z096
Option
Opt2
Opt3
1
Up
COM
MUX
CCI
QS
m
All Others
MUX
LQSE-4T10-D
CCI
Input
Hi Temp
System Example
Opt1
230 V~ 50/60 Hz 50 mA
COM
Features
t*ODMVEFT24MJOLGPSTFBNMFTTDPOOFDUJPOUPB
)PNF8PSLTR QS system.
t1PXFS.PEVMFVOJUTDBOCFVTFEJOB)PNF8PSLTR QS
system to control and manage light in an entire home or
building.
CCI
MUX
The Power Module family is a group of modular products

for the control of lighting loads. This document describes
the following products:
tModel Number: LQSE-4S10-D - Power Module unit for
Switching only
tModel Number: LQSE-4T10-D - Power Module unit for
0-10 V/Switching
COM
Power Module
Program
Switching Power Module

LQSE-4S10-D
Power
www.lutron.com +44.(0)20.7680.4481
230 V~ 50/60 Hz 50 mA
8 mm
m
Mains Only
Def
Z096
Opt1
H
Option
Opt2
Opt3
Up
LQSE-4S10-D
(4) switched outputs, 10 AX each (zones 1-4)

(4) 0-10 V outputs (zones 1-4)
(model LQSE-4T10-D only)
)PNF8PSLTR QS
Wallstation
Switching/0-10 V
Power Module
230 V
Control Power
Power
Module
)PNF8PSLTR
QS
Processor
QS
Contact
Closure
*OUFSGBDF
(3"'*,
EyeR QS
24-JOL
SivoiaR QS
Shades/Draperies
QS Power
Supply
Up to
100
total QS
devices
$POUBDU$MPTVSF*OQVU
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
LQSE-4

369-610a 2 02.17.12
Specifications
t)PNF8PSLTR QS wallstations can be congured to

Power
control Power Modules XJUIUIF)PNF8PSLTR QS
50/60 Hz
t7
programming utility.
t-JHIUOJOHTUSJLFQSPUFDUJPONFFUT"/4**&&&TUBOEBSE t-&%JOEJDBUPSEJTQMBZTUIFTUBUVTPGQSPHSBNNFEMJHIUT
6 000 V and current surges of up to 3 000 A.
QS Link Limits
t$VSSFOUESBXN"NBY
t"24MJOLJOB)PNF8PSLTR QS system can have up to
t4UBOECZQPXFS8
512 zones (outputs) and 100devices.
t&BDI1PXFS.PEVMFDPVOUTBTPOFEFWJDFUPXBSEUIF
100 device limit.
Standards
t*&$&/ &/
t$&
t$5JDLS
Environment
t"NCJFOU5FNQFSBUVSF0QFSBUJOH3BOHF JOTJEF
mounting panel): 0 C to 40 C
t'PSJOEPPSVTFPOMZ
Terminals
t.BJOTXJSJOH NN2 to 6,0 mm2
t78JSJOH NN2 to 2,5 mm2
t$$*8JSJOH NN2 to 6,0 mm2
t;POFXJSJOH NN2 to 6,0 mm2
Mounting
Manual Mode Operation

t;POFCVUUPOT
selects zone to control
t3BJTF-PXFSCVUUPOT
turns loads on and off
dim loads up and down (LQSE-4T10-D only)
NOTE:1SPHSBN *OQVU BOE0QUJPOCVUUPOTBSFOPU
used in LQSE models.
t5IF$$*CFIBWFTBTB.BOVBM0WFSSJEF$MPTVSF*OQVU
t*GUIF$$*JTPQFO UIF1PXFS.PEVMFVOJUXJMMFOUFS
.BOVBM0WFSSJEF.PEF XIJDIXJMMUVSOPOBMMMPBET
and disable control from other devices.
t8IFOUIF$$*JTDMPTFEPSKVNQFSFE GBDUPSZEFGBVMU

Power Module unit zones will return to the settings or
MFWFMTUIFZXFSFBUQSJPSUPFOUFSJOH.BOVBM0WFSSJEF
Mode.
t6TFBO*1 NJOJNVN
SBUFEDPOTVNFSQBOFMPS
CSFBLFSQBOFMXJUIJOUFHSBUFE%*/SBJM
t8JEUINPEVMFT NN
Output Zone Ratings

t&BDI[POFJTSBUFEBU"9GPSTXJUDIJOH3BUFEGPSSFsistive, capacitive, or inductive lighting loads as dened
CZ*&$&/
t Switched outputs utilize latching relays to maintain
relay state if control power is lost.
t 7SBUFEGPSN"NBYJNVNPVUQVU TPVSDFPS
TJOLQFS[POF
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
LQSE-4

369-610a 3 02.17.12
Overview of Wiring Terminals

LQSE-4T10-D
PELV
Contact
Closure
Input
Zone Zone Zone Zone

1
2
3
4
COM
MUX
"m
All Others
MUX
QS
Link
QS
COM
CCI
CCI
0-10 V Channels
Input
Hi Temp
Program
0-10 V Power Module

LQSE-4T10-D
Power
www.lutron.com +44.(0)20.7680.4481
8 mm
"m
Mains Only
Def
Z096
Opt1
Option
Opt2
230 V~ 50/60 Hz 50 mA

Zones
0-10 V50 mA
Opt3
Mains
Wiring
Zone
1
Zone Zone Zone

2
3
4
Up
Load power and switched outputs
LQSE-4S10-D
PELV
Input
Hi Temp
Program

LQSE-4S10-D
Power
www.lutron.com +44.(0)20.7680.4481
230 V~ 50/60 Hz 50 mA
8 mm
Mains
Wiring
m
Mains Only
COM
QS
m
All Others
MUX
QS
Link
MUX
CCI
CCI
COM
Contact
Closure
Input
Z096
Def
Opt1
H
Option
Opt2
Opt3
Zone
1
Up
Zone Zone Zone

2
3
4
Load power and switched outputs
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
LQSE-4

369-610a 4 02.17.12
COM
"m
All Others
MUX
QS
MUX
CCI
CCI
COM
LQSE-4T10-D
Input
Hi Temp
Program
0-10 V Power Module

LQSE-4T10-D
Power
www.lutron.com +44.(0)20.7680.4481
8 mm
Def
Z096
Opt1
Option
Opt3
1
NN
Opt2
230 V~ 50/60 Hz 50 mA
"m
Mains Only

Zones
0-10 V50 mA
Up

mm
Input
Hi Temp
Program

LQSE-4S10-D
Power
www.lutron.com +44.(0)20.7680.4481
230 V~ 50/60 Hz 50 mA
8 mm
m
Mains Only
Z096
COM
m
All Others
MUX
QS
MUX
CCI
CCI
COM
LQSE-4S10-D
Def
Opt1
H
Option
Opt2
Opt3
NN
M
Up
60,6 mm
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
LQSE-4

369-610a 5 02.17.12
Input
Hi Temp
Program
0-10 V Power Module

LQSE-4T10-D
Power
www.lutron.com +44.(0)20.7680.4481
230 V~ 50/60 Hz 50 mA
8 mm
"m
Mains Only
Z096
COM
"m
All Others
MUX
QS
MUX
CCI
CCI
COM
Mains Voltage Wiring

Zones
0-10 V50 mA
Def
Opt1
H
Option
Opt2
Opt3
Up
;POF
FYBNQMF
4XJUDIFE0VUQVUT
230 V
Live
Distribution
Panel
Switched
Live
Neutral
Load
L
Earth/Ground
N Neutral
L Mains/Live
Wiring from Distribution to Power Module unit

Power Module unit at distribution panel.
t3VOMJWF OFVUSBM BOEFBSUI ) wires from a
50/60 Hz feed to the Power Module unit.
230 V
Behavior During Power Failure

t3FMBZTEPOPUDIBOHFTUBUFXIFOQPXFSJTMPTUUP
the L/N/ terminals. Follow local and national
codes for emergency lighting requirements.
Mains Wiring and PELV Separation

t'PMMPXBQQSPQSJBUFMPDBMBOEOBUJPOBMDPEFTUP
avoid violating required separation guidelines.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
LQSE-4

369-610a 6 02.17.12
Wiring: 0-10 V
COM
"m
All Others
MUX
QS
MUX
CCI
CCI
COM
0-10 V Wiring
(LQSE-4T10-D only)
Hi Temp
Program
0-10 V Power Module

LQSE-4T10-D
Power
www.lutron.com +44.(0)20.7680.4481
"m
Mains Only
8 mm
Def
Z096
Opt1
Option
Opt2
230 V~ 50/60 Hz 50 mA
Up
Opt3
t7[POFTBSFEPVCMFJOTVMBUFEGSPNBMMPUIFS
inputs and outputs.
Zone 1 Zone
Zone 2 Zone
Z
3 Zone 4
Zones
0-10 VV
50 mA
Input
t7[POFTBSFOPUJOTVMBUFEGSPNFBDIPUIFS
They share the same common (negative
terminal).
0-10 V Wiring
t$POOFDUPOMZ4&-71&-7DJSDVJUT PSDPOOFDUPOMZ
non-SELV/PELV circuits to 0-10V zones 1-4. Do not
NJY4&-71&-7DJSDVJUTBOEOPO4&-71&-7DJSDVJUT
t'PMMPXBMMOBUJPOBMBOEMPDBMFMFDUSJDBMDPEFTGPS
Wiring: Manual Override Contact Closure Input
COM
"
"m
All Others
MUX
QS
MUX
CCI
CCI
COM
PELV Manual Override Contact Closure Input

Zones
0-10 V50 mA
Input
Hi Temp
Program
0-10 V Power Module

dule
LQSE-4T10-D
4T10-D
Power
www.lutron.com
on.com +44.(0)20.7680.4481
+
230 V~ 50/60 Hz 50 mA
"m
Mains Only
8 mm
Z096
Def
Opt1
H
Option
Opt2
t$POUBDU$MPTVSF*OQVU $$*
XJSJOHJT1&-7'PMMPXBMM
applicable national and local codes for proper circuit
separation and protection.
Opt3
1
Up
t8IFOJO.BOVBM0WFSSJEFNPEF BMMCBMMBTUTBOE
NPEVMFTXJMMCFBUUIFJSQSPHSBNNFE.BOVBM0WFSSJEFMJHIUMFWFM EFGBVMUJT
"MMPUIFSDPOUSPMTBSF
MPDLFEPVU
t.BOVBM0WFSSJEFDPOUBDUDMPTVSFJOQVUJTOPSNBMMZ
closed (NC). The Power Module unit is shipped with
BKVNQFSQSFJOTUBMMFE
CCI Common
Note: The Power Module unit will default to Manual

0WFSSJEF.PEFJGUIF$$*JTMFGUPQFO*GOPManual
0WFSSJEF contact input is required, please leave the
XJSFKVNQFSJOUIF$$*UFSNJOBMT
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
LQSE-4

369-610a 7 02.17.12
Wiring: QS Link
IEC PELV QS Link Wiring
Input
Hi Temp
Program
0-10 V Power Module

dule
LQSE-4T10-D
Power
www.lutron.com +44.(0)20.7680.4481
44.(0)20.7680.4481
230 V~ 50/60 Hzz 50 mA
"m
Mains Only
8 mm
Z096
COM
"m
All Others
MUX
QS
MUX
CCI
COM
t-JOLDPNNVOJDBUFTVTJOH*&$1&-7XJSJOH
CCI
Def
Opt1
H
Option
Opt2
Opt3
1
Zones
0-10 V50 mA
Up
t8JSF(BVHF
Power (terminals 1 and 2): 1 pair 1,0 mm2
Data (terminals 3 and 4): 1 pair 0,5 mm2 to
1,0 mm2, twisted and shielded.
$BOVTF-VUSPODBCMF(39$#-4
(1) COM
(no connection)
(2)
(3) MUX
(4) MUX
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
DALI Power Module
LQSE-2DAL-D
DALI Fixture Controller

369-650a 1 08.16.12
DALI 1 DALI 2
COM
QS
MUX
The DALI Power Module is a DIN-rail mounted

controller for DALI-compliant Digital Addressable
loads. It provides DALI bus power and control
for two independent DALI buses with up to
64ballasts each.
MUX
DALI Power Module
Hi Temp DALI Power Module
Features
t1SPWJEFTQPXFSGPSUXPCVTFTPG%"-* compliant
digital addressable loads (up to 250 mA per bus).
Z096
Test
LQSE-2DAL-D
Power
www.lutron.com +44.(0)20.7702.0657
230 V~ 50/60 Hz 80 mA
Up
8 mm
t&BDI%"-* Bus can control a maximum of

16zones.
t1PXFSGBJMVSFNFNPSZSFUBJOTQSPHSBNNJOHJO
the event of a power loss.
DALI Power Module -24&%"-%
t%"-* Power Module can be used in a

HomeWorks24TZTUFNUPDPOUSPMBOENBOBHF
light in an entire home or building.
DALI Bus 1
Ballast
Ballast
Ballast
Ballast
Up to 64
ballasts on
each link
DALI Bus 2
HomeWorks QS
Wallstation
DALI
Power Module
230 V~
Control Power
Power
Module
HomeWorks QS
Processor
QS
Contact
Closure
Interface
GRAFIK
&ZF QS
Up to 100
total QS
devices
QS Link
Sivoia QS
4IBEF%SBQFSZ
QS
Power
4VQQMZ
%"-*JTSFHJTUFSFEUSBEFNBSLPG;7&*;FOUSBMWFSCBOE&MFLUSPUFDIOJL
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
DALI Power Module
LQSE-2DAL-D

369-650a 2 08.16.12
Specifications
Power
t7~ 50/60 Hz 80 mA
6000 V~ and current surges of up to 3000 A.
t4UBOECZQPXFS8
t%"-*#VT0VUQVU7- 250 mA maximum per bus.
Standards
t*&$
t$&
t$5JDLS
Environment
t"NCJFOU5FNQFSBUVSF0QFSBUJOH3BOHF$UP$
t3FMBUJWF)VNJEJUZMFTTUIBOOPODPOEFOTJOH
t'PSJOEPPSVTFPOMZ
Terminals
t.BJOT8JSJOH NN2UP NN2 (18AWG to
12AWG)
t%"-*#VT8JSJOH NN2UP NN2 (18AWG to
12AWG)
t24-JOL8JSJOH NN2 (18AWG)
Mounting
t*OUFOEFEUPNPVOUXJUIJOBO*1 NJOJNVN
SBUFE
consumer panel or breaker panel with integrated DIN
rail and dead cover
t8JEUI%*/NPEVMFT NN

Programming and Compatibility Requirements
t5IF-24&%"-%DBOPOMZCFVTFEXJUIUIF
HomeWorks24TZTUFN
t4FUVQBOEQSPHSBNNJOHPGUIF%"-* Power Module
is done through the HomeWorksQS programming
software.
t)PNF8PSLTQS software version 3.1 or higher
required.
DALI Buses
t6QUP%"-* compliant loads on each bus can be
addressed and grouped into 16 zones.
t%"-* Power Module supplies 250 mA to power each
bus.
t%"-*#VTXJSFTBSFQPMBSJUZJOTFOTJUJWFBOE
UPQPMPHZGSFF
QS Link Limits
t"24MJOLJOB)PNF8PSLT24TZTUFNDBOIBWFVQ
to 512 zones (outputs) and 100devices. A ballast or
ESJWFSDPVOUTBT[POFVOMFTTTQFDJmDBMMZHSPVQFE
into zones from the HomeWorksQS software.
t&BDI%"-* Power Module counts as one device
toward the 100 device limit.
t"NBYJNVNPGGVMMZMPBEFE%"-*#VTFTNBZCF
connected to a single QS link.
t)PNF8PSLT QS wallstations can be congured to
control DALI Power Modules with the HomeWorks
24QSPHSBNNJOHVUJMJUZ
t-&%JOEJDBUPSEJTQMBZTUIFTUBUVTPGQSPHSBNNFEMJHIUT
Troubleshooting and Maintenance

Features
t.BJOUBJOTSFEVOEBOUNFNPSZPGCBMMBTUQSPHSBNNJOH
for ease of single or multiple ballast replacement.
t5PWFSJGZ%"-* lights connected to DALI bus 1 and
CVT
Enter Test Mode: Press and hold Test button on
the DALI1PXFS.PEVMFVOUJMUIF5FTU-&%TUBSUT
ashing.
Test:&BDIQSFTTPGFJUIFSUIFDALI 1 or DALI 2
CVUUPOXJMMDZDMFUIFMJHIUTCFUXFFOIJHIFOE
low-end and ash for that bus.
Exit Test Mode: Press and hold Test button until
5FTU-&%TUPQTnBTIJOH
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
DALI Power Module
LQSE-2DAL-D

369-650a 3 08.16.12
Overview of Wiring Terminals and Mechanical Dimensions

IEC PELV / NEC
Class 2
DALI
Bus 1*
NN
DALI
Bus 2*
DALI 1 DALI 2
COM
MUX
QS
MUX
QS
Link
Z096
Test
LQSE-2DAL-D
Power
www.lutron.com +44.(0)20.7702.0657
230 V~ 50/60 Hz 80 mA
Up
8 mm
NN
Mains
Wiring
* Wire according to local codes.
NN
/&$JTBSFHJTUFSFEUSBEFNBSLPGUIF/BUJPOBM'JSF1SPUFDUJPO"TTPDJBUJPO 2VJODZ .BTTBDIVTFUUT
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
DALI Power Module
LQSE-2DAL-D

369-650a 4 08.16.12
Wiring: Mains Voltage
COM
MUX
QS
MUX
Wiring from Distribution to Power Module
Test
LQSE-2DAL-D
Power
www.lutron.com +44.(0)20.7702.0657
Power Module unit at the distribution panel.
DALI 1 DALI 2
t3VOMJOF OFVUSBM BOEFBSUIHSPVOE wires from a

230V~ 50/60 Hz feed to the DALI Power Module.
Z096
230 V~ 50/60 Hz 80 mA
Up
8 mm
Emergency Lighting Applications

t6TFOPSNBM OPOFTTFOUJBM
QPXFSPOMZUPQPXFSUIF
DALI Power Module.
t8IFOOPSNBMQPXFSESPQTPVU UIF%"-* Power
Module will not power the DALI Buses. When this
PDDVST CBMMBTUTQPXFSFEGSPNFNFSHFODZGFFETHPUP
UIFJSFNFSHFODZNPEF GVMMMJHIUPVUQVUCZEFGBVMU
230
Power
L
www
8 mm
Mains Wiring and IEC PELV / NEC Class 2

Separation
t5IF%"-* Power Module is designed to separate
NBJOTXJSJOHGSPN*&$1&-7/&$ Class 2 circuits.
N
L
Distribution
Panel
Earth/Ground
N Neutral
L Mains/Live
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
DALI Power Module
LQSE-2DAL-D

369-650a 5 08.16.12
COM
MUX
QS
MUX
Wiring: DALI Bus
The DALI Power Module XJMMTVQQMZQPXFSGPSUXP

independent DALI#VT XIJDITVQQPSUTBNBYJNVN
of 64 ballasts per bus.
DALI 1 DALI 2
DALI Wiring
Z096
Test
LQSE-2DAL-D
Power
www.lutron.com +44.(0)20.7702.0657
230 V~ 50/60 Hz 80 mA
t%"-*XJSJOHJTOPU*&$1&-7/&$ Class 2.
Up
8 mm
t%"-*XJSJOHJTUSFBUFEBTNBJOTWPMUBHF BOEUIVTNBZ
be run within the same sheathing.
DALI
Bus 1
DALI 1
DALI
Bus 2
DALI 2
DALI 1
DALI 2
t&OTVSFUIBUUIFSFJTOPHSFBUFSUIBOB7 ~ drop
between the DALI Power Module and the end of the
DALI Bus.
t$POTVMUBMMOBUJPOBMBOEMPDBMFMFDUSJDBMDPEFTGPS
Wire Gauge
NN2 (12AWG)
NN2 (14AWG)
NN2 (16AWG)
NN2 (18AWG)
Bus Wire Length
N
N
N
N
DALI 1 DALI 2
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
DALI Power Module
LQSE-2DAL-D

369-650a 6 08.16.12
Wiring: QS Link
Hi Temp DALI Power

Power Module
Module
Test
2DAL-D
LQSE-2DAL-D
Power
www.lutron.com
on.com +44.(0)20.
+
+44.(0)20.7702.0657
44.(0)20.7702.0657
44.(0)20.
COM
CO
M
MUX
MU
QS
MUX
X
IEC PELV / NEC Class 2 QS Link Wiring

t-JOLDPNNVOJDBUFTVTJOH*&$1&-7/&$ Class 2
wiring.
DALI 1 DALI 2
Z096
230 V~ 50/60 Hz 80 mA
Up
8 mm
t8JSF(BVHF
o1PXFS UFSNJOBMTBOE
QBJS
NN((18AWG)
o%BUB UFSNJOBMTBOE
QBJS NN(UP NN(
(20AWG to 18AWG) twisted and shielded
Can use Lutron cable GRX-CBL-346S-500
(1) COM
(2)
No Connection
(3) MUX
(4) MUX
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
Power Supplies
03.04.11
369-404a
HomeWorks QS Power Supply

The HomeWorks QS Power Supply provides
power to the HomeWorks QS processor as well
as system devices and interfaces.
Featuring easy assembly on a DIN rail, the
power supply unit delivers 24 V - output
voltage and conforms with UL1310 for
IEC PELV / NEC Class 2 applications.
Use the HomeWorks QS design utility and
power draw documentation for power
management details.
L(+) N(-)
120 - 240 V
24 V
QSPS-DH-1-60
22.5 - 25 V

(QSPS-DH-1-60)
Model Number
QSPS-DH-1-60
www.lutron.com
HomeWorks QS
Power Supply
Lutron | 1
369-404a
03.04.11

Specifications
Model Number
QSPS-DH-1-60
Power
Input: 100 V~ to 240 V~ 50 Hz to 60 Hz 0.7 A

Output: 24 V - 2.5 A
Power Draw Units* (PDUs): supplies 75
* For more information about Power Draw Units (PDUs), please see
the HomeWorks QS Wiring and Power Guidelines document on
the HomeWorks QS Resource Web Site
Environment
Ambient operating temperature: 32 F to 131 F (0 C to

55 C) . Ambient operating humidity: 0% to 90% humidity,
Mounting
Mount using 1.38 in (35 mm) DIN rail.
Dimensions
3.54 in (90 mm) x 3.54 in (90 mm) x 2.40 in (61 mm)
Warranty
8 Year Limited Warranty. http://www.lutron.com/resiinfo
UL/cUL listed UL508, IEC PELV / NEC Class 2 as per

UL1310
Industrial Control Panel Supply
UL508
Class 2
UL1310
European Regulations
CE
Radiated Interference
EN 55011 Class B
EN 55022
Conducted Radio Interferance
EN 55011 Class B
EN 55022
Electrical Equipment for Machinery
EN 60204
Safety Transformers for

Power Supply Units
IEC 61558-2-17
Electronic Equipment for Use in

Electrical Power Installations
EN 50178/VDE 0160 (PELV)
SELV
IEC 60950 (SELV) and EN 60204 (PELV)
Safe Isolation
DIN VDE 0100-410

DIN VDE 0106-1010
Protection Against Electric Shock
DIN 57100-410
DIN VDE 0106-101
Limitation of Mains
Harmonic Currents
EN 61000-3-2
2 | Lutron
369-404a
03.04.11

Dimensions
2.17 (55)
3.54 (90)
1.73 (44)
L(+) N(-)
24 V
1.77 (45)
3.54 (90)
120 - 240 V
QSPS-DH-1-60
22.5 - 25 V
1.97 (50)
2.40 (61)
Mounting
t The power supply can be snapped onto any DIN rail in accordance with EN 60715. The device
must be mounted horizontally (connection terminal blocks on top).
Mount
To mount on a DIN rail, snap the device straight onto the DIN rail.
Remove
To remove from the DIN rail, pull the orange base latch outward then remove the device from the
DIN rail.
Mount
Montaje
Monter
Instale
www.lutron.com
Remove
Retire
Retirez
Retire
Lutron | 3
369-404a
03.04.11

Installation
t
NOTICE: The power supply unit is suitable for use in HomeWorks QS enclosures and applications ONLY.
NOTICE: Damage will result if this product is used with previous generations of HomeWorks products.
Must be installed by a qualified individual in accordance with all applicable regulations.
WARNING: Shock Hazard. Wiring with power ON could result in serious injury or death. To
avoid the risk of electric shock locate and remove fuse or lock circuit breaker in the OFF position
before installing or servicing equipment.
.PVOUUIF1PXFS4VQQMZJOBHomeWorks QS enclosure.
NOTICE: The Power Supply is intended for indoor use only. Operate between 32 F and 131 F
(0 C and 55 C), 0% to 90% humidity, non-condensing.
NOTICE: This equipment is air-cooled. Mount in a location where the vented cover will not be
blocked, minimum 1.18 in (30 mm) above and below is required to reduce the risk of overheating
and possible damage to equipment. Failure to provide adequate space for cooling may result in
overheating and void the warranty.
$POOFDUUIFJOQVUIBSOFTTGPSUIFQPXFSTVQQMZJOUPBQQSPQSJBUFUFSNJOBMCMPDLT"UUBDIPVUQVU
harness to appropriate terminals for the connected device.
7FSJGZBMMDPOOFDUJPOTCFGPSFUVSOJOHPOQPXFS
t
t
t
Wiring Diagram
L(+) N(-)
120 - 240 V
24 V

QSPS-DH-1-60
QSPS-DH-1-60
22.5 - 25 V
HQP6-2-120
Example above shows wiring connection from the HomeWorks QS Power Supply (QSPS-DH-1-60)
to a HomeWorks QS Processor (HQP6-2-120)
4 | Lutron
369-585a
11.11.11
HomeWorks QS PowerKit
The HomeWorks QS PowerKit is necessary
for installations that require the mounting of up
to 2 HomeWorks QS Processors (HQP6-2) in
HWI-PNL-8 or HWI-PNL-8-CE.
The HomeWorks QS PowerKit provides a
simple power connection method and has an
Input Power Switch that can be used to easily
remove power to the HomeWorks QS Power
Supply units and the equipment they feed.
The PowerKit provides a mounting method
for HomeWorks QS Power Supply units
(QSPS-DH-1-60), which are required to power
the HomeWorks QS Processors and provide
link power for devices.
(PNL-8-PWRKIT)
Model Number
PNL-8-PWRKIT
www.lutron.com
Lutron | 1
369-585a
11.11.11
Specifications
Model Number
PNL-8-PWRKIT
Power
120-240 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz 2A
Capacity
Can accommodate up to two HomeWorks QS Power

Supply units (QSPS-DH-1-60)
Environment
Ambient operating temperature: 32 F and 104 F

(0 C and 40 C). Ambient operating humidity: 0% to 90%
humidity, non-condensing. Indoor use only.
Mounting
Mount in HWI-PNL-8 or HWI-PNL-8-CE using screws and

washers provided
Connections
One Power Harness (quick connect to HWI-PNL-8)

Two Supply Harnesses (quick connect to
HomeWorks QS Power Supply units)
Warranty
8 Year Limited Warranty. http://www.lutron.com/

TechnicalDocumentLibrary/HomeWorks_Warranty.pdf
2 | Lutron
369-585a
11.11.11
Configuration Examples
L(+) N(-)
120 - 240 V

QSPS-DH-1-60
24 V
QSPS-DH-1-60
22.5 - 25 V
HomeWorks QS Module Interface

HWI-MI
HQP6-2
L(+) N(-)
120 - 240 V
24 V
QSPS-DH-1-60
22.5 - 25 V
HomeWorks QS Wire Landing Board

QS-WLB
L(+) N(-)
120 - 240 V
L(+) N(-)
24 V
QSPS-DH-1-60
120 - 240 V
24 V
QSPS-DH-1-60
22.5 - 25 V
www.lutron.com
22.5 - 25 V
Lutron | 3
Lutron Sivoia QS
230V Smart Panel Power Supply

086-101 REV B 1 03.26.09
Sivoia QS | 230V Smart Panel

power supply
The Sivoia QS Smart Panel power supply
(QSPS-P2-10-60) is a 24 V
hardwired
power supply that is used with Lutron QS
lighting or shading devices. QSPS-P2-10-60
simplifies the wiring and organizes installations that require multiple power supplies.
Each panel contains ten 30 W (60 W peak)
power supplies, designed for use with Lutron
QS lighting and shading devices.
QSPS-P2-10-60 is designed to be hardwired
into a standard 230 V~ circuit. The panel
contains fuses on each output to protect the
device in the event of a miswire.
Features
24 V supply that provides power to
shades, drapery drive units, keypads,
and accessories
Simple wiring scheme uses 4-conductor
low voltage link to provide power and
communication for both QS electronic drive
units (EDUs) and seeTouch QS keypads
Flexible wiring topology for easy installation
and integration
10 output panel provides power for 10 to 30
shades based on shade dimensions
Smart diagnostics reduce installation time
and system verification
Confirms system communication and
facilitates system installation
Provides easy system testing with manual
override buttons for shades and lighting
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
QSPS-P2-10-60
10 output Smart Panel power supply
Page 1
Lutron Sivoia QS

086-101 REV B 2 03.26.09
Specifications
Input Voltage
230 V~
Input current per

QSPS-P2-10-60
4A/Panel
Note: use only high magnetic breakers
Output Voltage
24 V
Output Current
2.5 A
Operating Frequency
50/60 Hz
ESD Protection
(+/-) 16kV
Miswire Protection
Fuse on each output

2 spares included
(5x20mm, 2.5 A fuse)
Wiring
Input wires to 230 V~ supply, output wires to Lutron QS

lighting or shading devices
Wiring type
Input wires: 10-14 AWG (6-2.5 mm) stranded

Output wires:
4 conductor 12-26 AWG (4-0.15 mm) stranded,
twisted/shielded
Connections
Terminal blocks
Maximum QSPS-P2-10-60
2 panels per dedicated 10 A circuit
Maximum QSPS-P2-10-60
2 panels per dedicated 10 A circuit
Maximum feed breaker size
30 A
Weight
25 lbs (11.3 kg)
CE
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 2
Lutron Sivoia QS

086-101 REV B 3 03.26.09
Dimensions
QSPS-P2-10-60
10.30 in (262 mm)
9.50 in (241 mm)
18.30 in
(465 mm)
with cover
Job Name:
Job Number:
3.90 in
(99 mm)
17.50 in
(444 mm)
without cover
Model Numbers:
Page 3
Lutron Sivoia QS

086-101 REV B 4 03.26.09
System Wiring Overview: QS Smart Panel Power Supply
Sivoia QS roller shade
Sivoia QS drapery track
seeTouch
QS keypad
Up to 125 ft (35 m)
of 4-conductor
twisted/shielded
18 AWG (1 mm2) wire
listed for application
Up to 125 ft (35 m)
of 4-conductor
twisted/shielded
18 AWG (1 mm2) wire
Up to 300 ft (90 m)
of 4-conductor
twisted/shielded
18 AWG (1 mm2) wire
QS Smart Panel power supply
GRAFIK Eye QS
(optional for total

light control)
Maximum 100 devices (Sivoia QS shades / drapery drive units, seeTouch QS keypads,
GRAFIK Eye QS main units, and QS power supplies) per link
Maximum 100 zones (Sivoia QS shades / drapery drive units and GRAFIK Eye QS lighting zones)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 4
Lutron Sivoia QS

086-101 REV B 5 03.26.09
QS Link Wiring
Link Rules
The following Link rules must be observed for proper operation.
- Maximum of 100 devices (such as a GRAFIK Eye QS, seeTouch QS keypad, smart panel
power supply [QSPS-P2-10-60], or Sivoia QS shade / drapery drive unit)
- Maximum of 100 zones - such as a Sivoia QS shade / drapery drive unit, or a lighting zone
on a GRAFIK Eye QS
- Maximum 2000 ft (600 m) of cable connecting all QSPS-P2-10-60 panels
- Maximum 2000 ft (600 m) of cable to devices wired to each QSPS-P2-10-60
- Only use cable with at least one twisted/shielded pair for communications (MUX and MUX)
QS Smart Panel Power Supply Wiring Guide

Maximum devices per one output
Shades + Controls
Maximum distance per one output based on wire guage

16 AWG
12 AWG
(1.5 mm2)
(4 mm2)
QSH-CBL-L-500
QSH-CBL-M-500
QSH-CBLP-L-500 QSH-CBLP-M-500
18 AWG
(1 mm2)
GRX-CBL-346S-500
None
Up to 8
seeTouch QS
keypads
1200 ft (350 m)
500 ft (150 m)
300 ft (90 m)
1 Sivoia QS shade* /
drapery drive unit
Up to 1
seeTouch QS
keypad
500 ft (150 m)
200 ft (60 m)
125 ft (35 m)
2 Sivoia QS roller 64TM,

30 sq ft
(2.75 sq m) each
None
3 Sivoia QS roller 64,

20 sq ft
(1.8 sq m) each
None
200 ft (60 m)
75 ft (20 m)
50 ft (15 m)
2 Sivoia QS roller 100,

50 sq ft
(4.6 sq m) each
None
* roller 64, roller 100, roller 200CW, roller 225TM, skylight
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 5
Lutron Sivoia QS

086-101 REV B 6 03.26.09
Sivoia QS System Wiring:

Smart Panel power supply, single shade per output
Sivoia QS
roller shade
Wire Type A
Sivoia QS
drapery track
Sivoia QS
skylight shade
Wire Type A
230 V~
50/60 Hz
230 V~
50/60 Hz
100 Devices
per link max.
100 Zones
QSPS-P2-10-60
10 Output Smart
Panel power supply
To other
QS Controls
Wire Type A
QSPS-P2-10-60
10 Output Smart Panel
power supply
Wire Type A
seeTouch QS keypads
Wiring Type Key

Type A
Job Name:
Job Number:
Communications Link: 4 Conductor (twisted and shielded), listed for application

Refer to wiring guide on pg. 5 for wire gauge based on distance
Maximum comm. link: Up to 2000 ft (600 m) connecting
all QSPS-P2-10-60 panels
Model Numbers:
Page 6
Lutron Sivoia QS

086-101 REV B 7 03.26.09

Smart Panel power supply, two shades per output*
Wire Type A
Wire Type A
230 V~
50/60 Hz
230 V~
50/60 Hz
Sivoia QS roller 64TM or

roller 100TM*
100 Devices
per link max.
100 Zones
Wire Type A
QSPS-P2-10-60
10 Output Smart
Panel power supply
To other
QS Controls
seeTouch QS keypads
Wire Type A
QSPS-P2-10-60
power supply
*Number of shades per output will

vary based on roller type and size of
roller shade. Refer to page 5 for
wiring guidelines
Wiring Type Key

Type A
Job Name:
Job Number:

Maximum comm. link: Up to 2000 ft (600 m)
connecting all QSPS-P2-10-60 panels
Model Numbers:
Page 7
Lutron Sivoia QS

086-101 REV B 8 03.26.09

Smart Panel power supply, three shades per output*
Wire Type A
Wire Type A
Sivoia QS roller 64TM*
230 V~
50/60 Hz
230 V~
50/60 Hz
100 Devices
per link max.
100 Zones
Wire Type A
QSPS-P2-10-60
10 Output Smart
Panel power supply
To other
QS Controls
seeTouch QS keypads
Wire Type A
QSPS-P2-10-60
power supply
*Number of shades per output will

vary based on roller type and size of
roller shade. Refer to page 5 for
wiring guidelines
Wiring Type Key

Type A
Job Name:
Job Number:

Model Numbers:
Page 8
Lutron Sivoia QS

086-101 REV B 9 03.26.09
Sivoia QS with GRAFIK Eye QS System Wiring:

Smart Panel power supply, single shade per output
Sivoia QS
roller shade
Sivoia QS
skylight shade
Sivoia QS
drapery track
Wire Type A
230 V~
50/60 Hz
230 V~
50/60 Hz
100 Devices
per link max.
100 Zones
QSPS-P2-10-60
10 Output Smart
Panel power supply
Wire Type A
Wire Type A
Wire Type A
QSPS-P2-10-60
power supply
To other
QS Controls
seeTouch QS
keypads
GRAFIK Eye QS
RS232
Interface
Wiring Type Key

Type A
Job Name:
Job Number:

Model Numbers:
Page 9
Lutron Sivoia QS

086-101 REV B 10 03.26.09
Limited Warranty
SCOPE
This limited warranty (Warranty) covers
the Lutron supplied (a) Sivoia QS Shade
System (Sivoia QS Shade System), (b) Sivoia QED
Shade System (Sivoia QED Shade System), (c)
manual shade system and (d) alternating current or a/c
shade system (each of the foregoing being a System).
Customer acknowledges and agrees that use of the
System constitutes acceptance of all terms and conditions of this Warranty.
LIMITED WARRANTY
Subject to the exclusions and restrictions described below, Lutron warrants that each System will be free from
manufacturing defects from the date of shipment by
Lutron for a period of (a) one year as to the wall controls,
interfaces, and system accessories of the Sivoia QS
Shade System (External Sivoia QS Components) and
(b) eight years as to the other Systems and the electronic drive unit (EDU), shade fabric, and shade hardware
of the Sivoia QS Shade System. If any manufacturing
defect exists in the External Sivoia QS Components, so
long as Customer promptly notifies Lutron of the defect
within the one year warranty period and, if requested by
Lutron, returns the defective part(s), Lutron will, at its option, either repair the defective part(s) or provide comparable replacement part(s). If any manufacturing defect
exists in any of the components of a System other than
the External SivoiaTM QS Components, so long as Customer promptly notifies Lutron of the defect within the
eight year warranty period and, if requested by Lutron,
returns the defective part(s), Lutron will, at its option,
either repair the defective part(s) or issue a credit to the
Customer against the purchase
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
price of comparable replacement part(s) purchased from

Lutron as provided below:
Number of Years
from Date
of Shipment
Up to 2
More than 2 but not
more than 5
More than 5 but not
more than 8
More than 8
Percentage
of Cost of
Replacement
Parts Credited
by Lutron
100%
50%
25%
0%
Replacement parts for the System provided

by Lutron or, at its sole discretion, an
approved vendor may be new, used, repaired,
reconditioned, and/or made by a different manufacturer.
EXCLUSIONS AND RESTRICTIONS
This Warranty will be void, and Lutron and its suppliers
will have no responsibility under this Warranty, if Lutron
or its representatives cannot access any components of
the System to inspect, diagnose problems with or repair
the System or any of its components as a result of concealment or inaccessibility of such components within a
building structure.
This Warranty does not cover, and Lutron and its suppliers are not responsible for:
1. Damage, malfunction or inoperability diagnosed by
Lutron or a Lutron approved third party as caused by
normal wear and tear, abuse, misuse, incorrect installation, neglect, accident, interference or environmental
factors, such as (a) use of incorrect line voltages fuses or
circuit breakers; (b) failure to install, maintain and operate the System pursuant to the operating instructions
provided by Lutron and the applicable provisions of the
National Electrical Code and of the Safety Standards of
Page 10
Lutron Sivoia QS

086-101 REV B 11 03.26.09
Limited Warranty (continued)
Underwriters Laboratories; (c) use of incompatible devices or accessories; (d) improper or insufficient ventilation;
(e) unauthorized repairs or adjustments or alterations;
(f) vandalism; (g) an act of God, such as fire, lightning,
flooding, tornado, earthquake, hurricane or other problems beyond Lutrons control; or (h) direct exposure to
corrosive materials.
2. On-site labor costs to diagnose issues with, and remove, repair, replace, adjust, reinstall and/or reprogram
the System or any of its components.
3. Components and equipment external to the System,
such as, non-Lutron lighting and automation systems;
building wiring audio-visual equipment; and non-Lutron
time clocks, photosensors and motion detectors.
4. The cost of repairing or replacing other property that
is damaged when any System does not work properly,
even if the damage was caused by the System.
THIS WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND OF FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO EIGHT
YEARS FROM THE DATE OF SHIPMENT, EXCEPT
THAT SUCH IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED
TO ONE YEAR FROM THE DATE OF SHIPMENT AS
TO THE EXTERNAL SIVOIA COMPONENTS.
NO LUTRON AGENT, EMPLOYEE OR REPRESENTATIVE HAS ANY AUTHORITY TO BIND LUTRON
TO ANY AFFIRMATION, REPRESENTATION OR
WARRANTY CONCERNING THE SYSTEMS. UNLESS AN AFFIRMATION, REPRESENTATION OR
WARRANTY MADE BY AN AGENT, EMPLOYEE OR
REPRESENTATIVE IS SPECIFICALLY INCLUDED
HEREIN, OR IN STANDARD PRINTED MATERIALS
PROVIDED BY LUTRON, IT DOES NOT FORM A
PART OF THE BASIS OF ANY BARGAIN BETWEEN
LUTRON AND CUSTOMER AND WILL NOT IN ANY
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
WAY BE ENFORCEABLE BY CUSTOMER.

IN NO EVENT WILL LUTRON OR ANY OTHER
PARTY BE LIABLE FOR EXEMPLARY, CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO DAMAGES
FOR PERSONAL INJURY, FAILURE TO MEET ANY
DUTY, INCLUDING OF GOOD FAITH OR REASONABLE CARE, NEGLIGENCE, OR ANY OTHER LOSS
WHATSOEVER), NOR FOR ANY REPAIR WORK
UNDERTAKEN WITHOUT LUTRONS PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT ARISING OUT OF OR IN ANY WAY
RELATED TO THE INSTALLATION, DEINSTALLATION, USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SYSTEM
OR OTHERWISE UNDER OR IN CONNECTION
WITH ANY PROVISION OF THIS WARRANTY, EVEN
IN THE EVENT OF THE FAULT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), STRICT LIABILITY, BREACH
OF CONTRACT OR BREACH OF WARRANTY OF
LUTRON OR ANY OTHER PARTY, AND EVEN IF
LUTRON OR SUCH OTHER PARTY WAS ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES THAT CUSTOMER MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL
DIRECT DAMAGES AND ALL DAMAGES LISTED
ABOVE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF LUTRON AND
OF ALL OTHER PARTIES UNDER THIS WARRANTY
ON ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF
OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE MANUFACTURE,
SALE, INSTALLATION, DELIVERY, USE, REPAIR,
OR REPLACEMENT OF THE SYSTEM, AND CUSTOMERS SOLE REMEDY FOR THE FOREGOING,
WILL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT PAID BY CUSTOMER FOR THE SYSTEM. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS, EXCLUSIONS AND DISCLAIMERS WILL
APPLY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT ALLOWED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS
ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.
Page 11
Lutron Sivoia QS

086-101 REV B 12 03.26.09
Limited Warranty (continued)
THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL

RIGHTS. YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS
WHICH VARY FROM STATE TO STATE. SOME
STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW
LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS OR THE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE
LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY
TO YOU.
WARRANTY CLAIMS, TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE
AND WARRANTY INFORMATION.
Contact the Lutron Technical Support Center at the
numbers provided on the following page or your local
Lutron sales representative with questions concerning
the installation or operation of the System or this Warranty, or to make a warranty claim. Please provide the
exact model number when calling.
Lutron, the Sunburst logo, Sivoia and

Sivoia QED are registered trademarks of
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 12
Lutron Sivoia QS

086-101 REV B 13 03.26.09
Technical and Sales Assistance
WORLD
HEADQUARTERS
7200 Suter Road
Coopersburg, PA 18036
United States
Tel: +1.610.282.3800
Fax:+1.610.282.1243
ASIAN HEADQUARTERS
Lutron GL Ltd.
15 Hoe Chiang Road
Singapore 089316
Tel: +65.6220.4666
Fax: +65.6220.4333
lutronsea@lutron.com
EUROPEAN
HEADQUARTERS
Lutron EA Ltd.
6 Sovereign Close
London, E1W 3JF
United Kingdom
Tel: +44.(0)20.7702.0657
Fax: +44.(0)20.7480.6899
CUSTOMER
SERVICE/ORDERING
USA +1.610.282.3800
08.00 - 20.00 EST
UK +44.(0)20.7702.0657
09.00 - 18.00 GMT
CUSTOMER SERVICE
/E-MAIL
shadinginfo@lutron.com
TECHNICAL SUPPORT
& SERVICES
USA +1.610.282.3800
24 hours/7 days
UK +44.(0)20.7702.0657
09.00 - 18.00 GMT
INTERNET:
www.lutron.com
Job Name:
Job Number:
ADDITIONAL LUTRON
SALES OFFICES:
www.lutron.com/shadingsolutions
Germany
Tel: +49.309.710.4590
Fax: +49.309.710.4591
FREEPHONE
00800-5887 6635
USA and Canada (24 hrs/7days):

call:
800.523.9466
France
90 rue de Villiers
92300 Levallois-Perret, France
Tel: +33.(0)1.41.05.42.80
Fax: +33.(0)1.41.05.01.80
FREEPHONE: 0800.90.12.18
lutronfrance@lutron.com
Other countries (8 a.m. 8 p.m. ET)

call:
+1 610.282.3800
fax:
+1 610.282.3090
email: shadinginfo@lutron.com
Spain-Madrid
Tel: +34.91.567.84.79
Fax: +34.91.567.84.78
Shades Customer Service
Spain-Barcelona
Tel: +34.93.496.57.42
Fax: +34.93.496.57.50

800.446.1503
call:
Hong Kong
Tel: +852.2104.7733
Fax: +852.2104.7633
Beijing
Tel: +86.10.5877.1817
Fax: +86.10.5877.1816
Shanghai
Tel: +86.21.6288.1473
Fax: +86.21.6288.1751
Singapore
LUTRON GL Ltd. - Singapore
15 Hoe Chiang Road
#7-03 Tower 15
Singapore 089316
Tel: +65.6220.4666
Fax: +65.6220.4333
Japan
Tel: +81.3.5575.8411
Fax: +81.3.5575.8420
Model Numbers:
2009 LUTRON Electronics Co., Inc.

Specification Submittal Sheet
for QS Smart Panel power supply
Page 13
Lutron | QS
Link Power Supply

086-108 1 02.05.09
QS | Link power supply

The QS Link power supply
(QSPS-P1-1-50/ QSPS-P2-1-50/
QSPS-P3-1-50) is a 24 V
plug in power
supply that is used with Lutron QS lighting
or shading devices.
The Link power supply plugs into a standard
receptacle. The power supply is protected
electronically in the event of a miswire,
and will automatically reset when wiring
is corrected.
Features
24 V supply that provides power to
shades, drapery drive units, keypads,
and accessories
Simple wiring scheme uses 4-conductor,
low voltage link to provide power and
communication for QS electronic drive units
(EDUs), seeTouch QS keypads and
QS integration interfaces
Mounting tabs and small size allow for
discrete installation
Universal input voltage (100-240 VAC)
enables global specification
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
QSPS-P1-1-50
Link power supply
Page 1
Lutron | QS
Link Power Supply

086-108 2 02.05.09
Specifications
Input Voltage
100-240 V~
Input current (MAX)
1A
Output Voltage
24 V
Operating Frequency
50/60 Hz
ESD Protection
(+/-) 16 kV
Miswire Protection
Electronic Automatic Reset
Input Wiring
Available with 3 types of line cords. All 6 ft (1.8 m)

Plugs into standard receptacle
QS Link Wiring
QSPS-P1-1-50
NEMA 5-15 Plug
QSPS-P2-1-50
CEE 7/7Plug
QSPS-P3-1-50
BS 1363 Plug
4-conductor (power and communication)

+24 V, COM, MUX, MUX
3-conductor (communication pass-through)
COM, MUX, MUX
Output connections
Detachable terminal blocks

12-26 AWG (4-0.15 mm) stranded, twisted/shielded
Weight
0.3 lb (0.14 kg)
Regulatory
UL (1310 CLASS2)
CE (IEC 61558)
CUL (CSA C22.2 #223)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 2
Lutron | QS
Link Power Supply

086-108 3 02.05.09
Dimensions
QSPS-P1-1-50
QSPS-P2-1-50
QSPS-P3-1-50
2.75 in
(70 mm)
3-pin connector
Communication to
additional Power supplies
1.2 in
(31 mm)
4-pin connector
Power and Communication
to QS shade or keypads
4 in
(102 mm)
Line voltage input
Job Name:
Job Number:
Com
+24 VDC
MUX
MUX
Com
MUX
MUX
Mounting tabs
Model Numbers:
Page 3
Lutron | QS
Link Power Supply

086-108 4 02.05.09
System Wiring Overview: QS Link power supply

Example: Powering one shade / drapery drive unit
(max of one shade / drapery drive unit per output of a power supply)
Example: Powering keypads
Open
Open
Open
Preset
Preset
Preset
Close
Close
Close
...up to 8 keypads
on link (B)
Example: Connecting to a GRAFIK Eye QS (Note: GRAFIK Eye QS powered from line voltage)
Open
Open
Open
Preset
Preset
Preset
Close
Close
Close
Devices powered by
GRAFIK Eye QS
Devices powered
by supply
Example: Connecting to a GRAFIK Eye QS (Note: GRAFIK Eye QS powered from line voltage)
Open
Open
Open
Preset
Preset
Preset
Close
Close
Close
Open
Open
Open
Preset
Preset
Preset
Close
Close
Close
Devices powered by
GRAFIK Eye QS
(Refer to GRAFIK Eye QS spec submittal
for maximum devices that can be powered by
GRAFIK Eye QS
Devices powered by supply
...up to 8 keypads
on link (B)
Communication link (3 conductor)

Communications used to connect power supplies to each other or to GRAFIK Eye QS
12-26 AWG (4-0.15 mm) standard, twisted/shielded
Power and communication link (4 conductor)
Provides power and communication to QS shades or keypads
12-26 AWG (4-0.15 mm) standard, twisted/shielded
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 4
Lutron | QS
Link Power Supply

086-108 5 02.05.09
QS Link Wiring
Link Rules
The following link rules must be observed for proper operation.
t
Use only cable with at least one twisted/shielded pair for communiations (MUX and MUX)
Total length of power supply link (A) wire plus device link (B) wire in entire system must be
less than 2000 ft (609 m)
Maximum devices powered

from one QSPS-PX-1-50
Shades
Controls
1 SIvoia QS
shade/drapery
drive unit
Up to 1
seeTouch QS
keypad
Up to 8
seeTouch QS
keypads*
None
Total wire length of link (B) based on wire gauge

12 AWG
(4 mm)
QSH-CBL-L-500
QSH-CBLP-L-500
16 AWG
(1.5 mm)
QSH-CBL-M-500
QSH-CBLP-M-500
18 AWG
(1 mm)
GRX-CBL-346S-500
250 ft
(75 m)
100 ft
(30 m)
50 ft
(15 m)
1200 ft
(350 m)
500 ft
(150 m)
300 ft
(90 m)
OR
* 2 seeTouch QS keypads may be exchanged for:
1 Ethernet & RS232 Control Interface (QSE-CI-NWK-E)
1 Contact Closure Input /Output Interface (QSE-IO)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 5
Lutron | QS
Link Power Supply

086-108 6 02.05.09
Technical and Sales Assistance

WORLD
HEADQUARTERS
7200 Suter Road
Coopersburg, PA 18036
United States
Tel: +1.610.282.3800
Fax:+1.610.282.1243
ASIAN HEADQUARTERS
Lutron GL Ltd.
15 Hoe Chiang Road
Singapore 089316
Tel: +65.6220.4666
Fax: +65.6220.4333
lutronsea@lutron.com
EUROPEAN
HEADQUARTERS
Lutron EA Ltd.
6 Sovereign Close
London, E1W 3JF
United Kingdom
Tel: +44.(0)20.7702.0657
Fax: +44.(0)20.7480.6899
CUSTOMER
SERVICE/ORDERING
USA +1.610.282.3800
08.00 - 20.00 EST
UK +44.(0)20.7702.0657
09.00 - 18.00 GMT
CUSTOMER SERVICE
/E-MAIL
shadinginfo@lutron.com
TECHNICAL SUPPORT
& SERVICES
USA +1.610.282.3800
24 hours/7 days
UK +44.(0)20.7702.0657
09.00 - 18.00 GMT
INTERNET:
www.lutron.com
Job Name:
Job Number:
ADDITIONAL LUTRON
SALES OFFICES:
www.lutron.com/shadingsolutions
Germany
Tel: +49.309.710.4590
Fax: +49.309.710.4591
FREEPHONE
00800-5887 6635

call:
800.523.9466
France
90 rue de Villiers
92300 Levallois-Perret, France
Tel: +33.(0)1.41.05.42.80
Fax: +33.(0)1.41.05.01.80
FREEPHONE: 0800.90.12.18
lutronfrance@lutron.com
Other countries (8 a.m. 8 p.m. ET)

call:
+1 610.282.3800
fax:
+1 610.282.3090
email: shadinginfo@lutron.com
Spain-Madrid
Tel: +34.91.567.84.79
Fax: +34.91.567.84.78
Shades Customer Service
Spain-Barcelona
Tel: +34.93.496.57.42
Fax: +34.93.496.57.50

call:
800.446.1503
Hong Kong
Tel: +852.2104.7733
Fax: +852.2104.7633
Beijing
Tel: +86.10.5877.1817
Fax: +86.10.5877.1816
Shanghai
Tel: +86.21.6288.1473
Fax: +86.21.6288.1751
Singapore
LUTRON GL Ltd. - Singapore
15 Hoe Chiang Road
#7-03 Tower 15
Singapore 089316
Tel: +65.6220.4666
Fax: +65.6220.4333
Japan
Tel: +81.3.5575.8411
Fax: +81.3.5575.8420
Model Numbers:
2009 LUTRON Electronics Co., Inc.

Specification Submittal Sheet
for QS Link power supply
Page 6
Power Boosters and

Load Interfaces
NGRX-PB
Power Interfaces
pb-1 01.29.07
NGRX-PB Power Booster

Description
Provides capability for a zone on a GRAFIK Eye
3000 Series Control Unit to control a larger
load. Allows the zone to dim or switch a fullyloaded circuit of lighting.
Dims or switches most popular lighting sources
and load types.
Models available for 120 V
, 220-240 V
(non-CE), 230 V
(CE), or 100 V
input
power.
Works with:
GRAFIK Eye 3000 Series Control Units

LP Dimming Panels
HomeWorks Remote Power Panels
Neutral-referenced wallbox dimmers by Lutron.
Models and Capacities

Input Power
Capacity
Model Number
120 V
2000 W/VA1
NGRX-PB-WH
2400 W/VA
NGRX-PB-AU-WH
220-240 V
230 V
(non-CE)
(CE)
1200 W/VA (flush mount with faceplate)

NGRX-PB-CE-WH
1840 W/VA (surface mount without faceplate)
1600 W/VA
100 V
NGRX-PB-JA-WH
Two Power Boosters may be used on a zone to

double the capacity. Use the HP Dimming Module
System for zones that exceed the capacity of the
Power Booster.
Measured current will not exceed continuous load rating due to voltage drop in the dimmer.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 1
NGRX-PB
Power Interfaces
pb-2 01.29.07
Specifications
Power
Input power: 120 V
, 220-240 V
(non-CE),
230 V
(CE), or 100 V
. All voltages 50/60
Hz, phase-to-neutral.
Load (output) power: Phase independent of
Control Unit.
Sources/Load Types
Operates these sources with a smooth continuous

Square Law dimming curve or on a full conduction
non-dim basis:
Incandescent (Tungsten)
Halogen
Magnetic Low-Voltage Transformer1
Lutron Tu-WireTM Electronic Fluorescent Dimming
Ballast
Neon/Cold Cathode
Key Design Features
Patented RTISSTM circuitry compensates in real
time for incoming line voltage variations: No visible
flicker with +/-2% change in RMS voltage/cycle
and +/-2% Hz change in frequency/second.
Terminals
Accept up to two #12 AWG (2.5 mm2).
Environment
32 F - 104 F (0 C - 40 C). Relative humidity
less than 90% non-condensing.
Mounting
Surface or recess mount indoors only.
1Must
have iron core (magnetic) transformers
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 2
NGRX-PB
Power Interfaces
pb-3 01.29.07
Dimensions And Mounting

Recess or surface mount in 2-gang U.S.
wallbox 3.5 in. (89 mm) deep. Indoors only.
Power Booster generates heat; mount only
where ambient temperature is 32 F-104 F
(0 C-40 C).
Mount with arrows facing up to ensure
adequate cooling.
Allow 4.5 in. (114 mm) above and below unit
and between faceplates when mounting
several in a vertical layout.
For better heat dissipation, surface mount
without faceplate.
Mount so line (mains) voltage wiring is at
least 6 feet (1.8 m) from sound or electronic
equipment and wiring.
Mount Interface within 7 of true vertical.
Recess Mount with Faceplate
4 in.
(100 mm)
Surface Mount without Faceplate
Side View
4 9/16 in.
(116 mm)
2-Gang
U.S. Wallbox
11/16 in.
(17 mm)
1 7/8 in.
(48 mm)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 3
NGRX-PB
Power Interfaces
pb-4 01.29.07
Wiring
Pull #12 AWG (2.5 mm2) Copper (Cu) wires (75 C minimum)
for input power and load circuit.
Strip 1/2 in. (12 mm) insulation from wires before connecting.
Run separate neutral for load circuit - no common neutrals.
Neutral (N) terminal is for Control Unit, not the load neutral.
The Power Booster may be on the same circuit
as the Control Unit only if the total load does
not exceed the rating of the breaker.
Single-Feed Wiring for NGRX-PB 100 V
, 120 V
, and 220-240 V
DO NOT USE
ZONE IN
NEUTRAL N
EAR TH/GROUND
ZONE OUT
HOT/LIVE
Rear View of PB
H/L
N
TO NEUTRAL
TO HOT/LIVE
Feed from
Distribution
Panel
GRAFIK Eye 3000

Series Control Unit
TO APPLICABLE ZONE
Load Neutral
Load
Single-Feed Wiring for NGRX-PB-CE (230 V
ZONE OUT
ZONE IN
NEUTRAL N
EAR TH/GROUND
DO NOT USE
HOT/LIVE
Rear View of PB
H/L
N
TO NEUTRAL
TO HOT/LIVE
Feed from
Distribution
Panel
GRAFIK Eye 3000

Series Control Unit
TO APPLICABLE ZONE
Load Neutral
Load
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 4
NGRX-PB
Power Interfaces
pb-5 01.29.07
Multiple Power Feeds

The load breaker/MCB may be on a different phase than the control breaker/MCB.
Dual-Feed Wiring for NGRX-PB 100 V
, 120 V
, and 220-240 V
DO NOT USE
ZONE IN
NEUTRAL N
EAR TH/GROUND
ZONE OUT
HOT/LIVE
Rear View of PB
H/L
N
TO NEUTRAL
TO HOT/LIVE
Feed 1 from
Distribution
Panel
GRAFIK Eye 3000

Series Control Unit
TO APPLICABLE ZONE
Load
Load Neutral
Dual-Feed Wiring for NGRX-PB-CE (230 V
N
H/L
Feed 2 from
Distribution
Panel
ZONE OUT
ZONE IN
NEUTRAL N
EAR TH/GROUND
DO NOT USE
HOT/LIVE
Rear View of PB
H/L Feed 1 from

Distribution
N
Panel
TO NEUTRAL
TO HOT/LIVE
GRAFIK Eye 3000

Series Control Unit
TO APPLICABLE ZONE
Load Neutral
Load
Feed 2 from
N
H/L Distribution
Panel
With Other Lutron Lighting Controls

To wire a Power Booster to lighting control equipment other than a
GRAFIK Eye 3000 Series Control Unit:
Run a Neutral wire from the control equipment to Neutral N on the PB.
Run a dimmed hot wire from the control equipment to Zone In on the PB.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 5
ELVI
Power Interfaces
elvi-1 06.13.07
ELVI Electronic Low-Voltage Interface

Description
Provides capability for GRAFIK Eye 3000 Series
Control Units and LP Dimming Panels to dim
electronic transformer-supplied low-voltage
lighting.
Provides power and dimming for one zone.
Models available for 120 V , 220-240 V
(non-CE), 230 V
(CE), or 100 V
input
power.
Works with:

LP Dimming Panels

Input Power
Capacity
120 V
1000 W/VA ELVI-1000
220-240 V
230 V
(non-CE)
Model Number
1200 W/VA NGRX-ELVI-AU-WH

1200 W/VA NGRX-ELVI-CE-WH
(CE)
1000 W/VA NGRX-ELVI-JA-WH
100 V
Two ELVI Interfaces may be used

on a zone to double the capacity.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 1
ELVI
Power Interfaces
elvi-2 06.13.07
Specifications
Power
Input power: 120 V , 220-240 V
(non-CE),
230 V
(CE), or 100 V . All voltages 50/60 Hz,
phase-to-neutral.
Load (output) power: Phase independent of Control
Unit.
Sources/Load Types
Operates electronic low-voltage lighting with a
smooth continuous Square Law dimming curve or
on a full conduction non-dim basis.
Does not affect sound rating of electronic
transformers.
Does not cause lights to flicker or interact
anywhere in dimming range.
Dims to 0% (blackout).
Works only with electronic (solid-state) low-voltage
transformers that are manufacturer-approved for
reverse-phase control dimming.
Incandescent and electronic low-voltage sources
may be controlled on the same zone. Up to 30% of
the ELVI capacity may be used for incandescent
lighting.
Key Design Features
Patented RTISSTM circuitry compensates in real time
for incoming line voltage variations: No visible flicker
with +/-2% change in RMS voltage/cycle and +/2% Hz change in frequency/second.
Terminals
Environment
32 - 104 F (0 - 40 C). Relative humidity less than
90% non-condensing.
Mounting
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 2
ELVI
Power Interfaces
elvi-3 06.13.07

ELVI Interface generates heat; mount only
where ambient temperature is 32 - 104 F
(0 - 40 C).
adequate cooling.
Allow 4.5 in. (114 mm) above and below
unit and between faceplates when mounting several in a vertical layout.
without faceplate.
least 6 feet (1.8 m) from sound or electronic equipment and wiring.
4 in.
(100 mm)
Side View
4 9/16 in.
(116 mm)
2-Gang
U.S. Wallbox
11/16 in.
(17 mm)
1 7/8 in.
(48 mm)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 3
ELVI
Power Interfaces
elvi-4 06.13.07
Wiring
Pull #12 AWG (2.5 mm2) Copper (Cu) wires (75 C minimum) for input
power and load circuit.
Run separate neutral for load circuit - no common neutrals. Neutral (N)
terminal is for Control Unit, not the load neutral.
Single Power Feed

The ELVI Interface may be on the same circuit
as the Control Unit only if the total load does
not exceed the rating of the breaker.
Single-Feed Wiring for NGRX-ELVI 100 V
, 120 V
, and 220-240 V
DO NOT USE
ZONE IN
NEUTRAL N
EAR TH/GROUND
ZONE OUT
HOT/LIVE
Rear View of ELVI
H/L Feed from

Distribution
N Panel
TO NEUTRAL
TO HOT/LIVE
GRAFIK Eye 3000

Series Control Unit
TO APPLICABLE ZONE
Load Neutral
Load
Single-Feed Wiring for NGRX-ELVI-CE (230 V
ZONE OUT
ZONE IN
NEUTRAL N
EAR TH/GROUND
DO NOT USE
HOT/LIVE
Rear View of ELVI
H/L Feed from

N
TO NEUTRAL
TO HOT/LIVE
Distribution
Panel
GRAFIK Eye 3000

Series Control Unit
TO APPLICABLE ZONE
Load Neutral
Load
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 4
ELVI
Power Interfaces
elvi-5 06.13.07
Wiring -
Dual-Feed Wiring for NGRX-ELVI 100 V
, 120 V
, and 220-240 V
DO NOT USE
ZONE IN
NEUTRAL N
EAR TH/GROUND
ZONE OUT
HOT/LIVE
Rear View of ELVI
H/L
N
TO NEUTRAL
TO HOT/LIVE
Feed 1 from
Distribution
Panel
GRAFIK Eye 3000

Series Control Unit
TO APPLICABLE ZONE
Load Neutral
Load
N
H/L
Dual-Feed Wiring for NGRX-ELVI-CE (230 V
Feed 2 from
Distribution
Panel
ZONE OUT
ZONE IN
NEUTRAL N
EAR TH/GROUND
DO NOT USE
HOT/LIVE
Rear View of ELVI
H/L Feed 1 from

Distribution
N
Panel
TO NEUTRAL
TO HOT/LIVE
GRAFIK Eye 3000

Series Control Unit
TO APPLICABLE ZONE
Load Neutral
Feed 2 from
N
H/L Distribution
Load
Panel
Two ELVI Interfaces on a Zone (120 V
DO NOT USE
ZONE IN
NEUTRAL N
EAR TH/GROUND
ZONE OUT
HOT/LIVE
DO NOT USE
ZONE IN
NEUTRAL N
EAR TH/GROUND
H/L
N
TO NEUTRAL
TO HOT/LIVE
TO APPLICABLE ZONE
Load
Load
Load Neutral
N
H/L
Job Name:
Job Number:
Example)
Rear View of ELVI
Rear View of ELVI
ZONE OUT
HOT/LIVE
and 220-240 V
Model Numbers:
Load Neutral
Feed 1 from
Distribution
Panel
GRAFIK Eye 3000

Series Control Unit
N
H/L
Feed 2 from
Distribution
Panel
Page 5
FDBI
Power Interfaces
fdbi-1 06.13.07
FDBI Fluorescent Dimming Ballast Interface

Description
Provides capability for GRAFIK Eye 3000 Series
Control Units and LP Dimming Panels to dim
fluorescent lights that have Lutron Hi-Lume
and Eco-10TM (Eco-Series) line-voltage control
Electronic Dimming Ballasts.
Models available for 120 V , 220-240 V
(non-CE), or 100 V
input power.
Works with:

LP Dimming Panels

Input Power
Capacity
Model Number
120 V
16 A
GRX-FDBI-16A-120
10 A
NGRX-FDBI-AU-WH
16 A
NGRX-FPB1V-JA-WH
220-240 V
(non-CE)
100 V
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 1
FDBI
Power Interfaces
fdbi-2 06.13.07
Specifications
Power
Input power: 120 V , 220-240 V
(non-CE), or
100 V .
All voltages 50/60 Hz, phase-to-neutral.
Load (output) power: Phase independent of Control
Unit.
Sources/Load Types
Operates Lutron Hi-lume and Eco-10TM (Eco-Series)
line-voltage control Electronic Fluorescent Dimming
Ballasts with a smooth continuous Square Law dimming
curve.
Key Design Features
Patented RTISSTM circuitry compensates in real time for
incoming line voltage variations: No visible flicker with
+/-2% change in RMS voltage/cycle and +/-2% Hz
change in frequency/second.
Terminals
Environment
32 - 104 F (0 - 40 C). Relative humidity
less than 90% non-condensing.
Mounting
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 2
FDBI
Power Interfaces
fdbi-3 06.13.07

FDBI Interface generates heat; mount only
where ambient temperature is 32 - 104 F
(0 - 40 C).
adequate cooling.
Allow 4.5 in. (114 mm) above and below
unit and between faceplates when mounting several in a vertical layout.
without faceplate.
least 6 feet (1.8 m) from sound or electronic equipment and wiring.
4 in.
(100 mm)
Side View
4 9/16 in.
(116 mm)
11/16 in.
(17 mm)
1 7/8 in.
(48 mm)
2-Gang
U.S. Wallbox
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 3
FDBI
Power Interfaces
fdbi-4 06.13.07
Wiring
Pull #12 AWG (2.5 mm2) Copper (Cu) wires (75 C minimum) for
input power and load circuit.
Run separate neutral for load circuit - no common neutrals.
Neutral (N) terminal is for Control Unit, not the load neutral.
Single Power Feed
The FDBI may be on the same circuit as the
Control Unit only if the total load does not
exceed the rating of the breaker.
Neutral N
Zone In
SW Hot
Hot/Live
Earth/Ground
Zone Out
Rear View of FDBI
Hot/Live Feed from

Neutral Distribution
Panel
TO NEUTRAL
TO HOT/LIVE
GRAFIK Eye 3000

Series Control Unit
Black
Orange
TO APPLICABLE ZONE
Dimming Ballast
Earth/Ground
White
Load Neutral

Neutral N
Zone In
SW Hot
Earth/Ground
Hot/Live
Zone Out
Rear View of FDBI
Black
Dimming Ballast
Hot/Live Feed 1 from

Distribution
Neutral Panel
TO NEUTRAL
TO HOT/LIVE
GRAFIK Eye 3000

Series Control Unit
TO APPLICABLE ZONE
Orange
White
Load Neutral
Earth/Ground
Hot/Live Feed 2 from

Distribution
Neutral Panel
With Other Lutron Lighting Controls

To wire an FDBI Interface to a fluorescent dimmer:
Run a Neutral wire from the control equipment to Neutral N on the FDBI.
Run a dimmed hot wire from the control equipment to Zone In on the FDBI.
R
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 4
369-663a
08.31.12

A Ten Volt Module (GRX-TVM2) can control
various LED and fluorescent load types when
the lighting fixtures use a low-voltage signal
ballast or LED driver.
The GRX-TVM2 can be considered as an output
module in a Homeworks QS system; it is used
to control load types such as: 0-10V sink,
0-10V source, Pulse Width Modulation (PWM),
and TridonicDSI with the addition of a Module
Interface (MI). Each TVM has two outputs which
can be individually programmed to control any
of these load types.
The Ten Volt Module Kit (HW-TVMKIT-120,
HW-TVMKIT-230) contains the parts required
to install TVMs (TVMs and TVM Kits are sold
separately). Each TVM Kit can accommodate up
to 12 TVMs, for a total of 24circuits per panel.
Customers can mount the TVM Kit in their
own enclosure or add it to an existing Lutron
enclosure* (HWI-PNL-8, HWAP-8, HWBP-8,
PBK-8).
The ISO2 (included in the TVM Kit) provides
isolated power to the TVMs. Each ISO2 can
provide no more than 750 mA of current
equal to 6 fully loaded TVMs or up to 12 partially
loaded TVMs.
Model Numbers
GRX-TVM2
Ten Volt Module
HW-TVMKIT-120
Ten Volt Module Kit (120V~)
HW-TVMKIT-230
Ten Volt Module Kit (230V~)
163198
Low-Voltage Transformer for

120 V Kit (replacement)
163227
GRX-TVM-ISO2
Low-Voltage Transformer for

230 V Kit (replacement)
ISO2 (replacement)
GRX-TVM2
DIN Rail and

Mounting Hardware
Low-voltage Barrier
and Mounting Hardware
24 V~ Transformer
Addressing Harness
Isolator
GRX-TWM-ISO2
DIN Rail End Stops
HW-TVMKIT-120
HW-TVMKIT-230
The HW-TVMKIT is mounted in place of Remote Power Module (RPM) #8
www.lutron.com
Lutron | 1
369-663a
08.31.12

Specifications
Model Number
GRX-TVM2 (Ten Volt Module)

HW-TVMKIT-120 (120V~ Ten Volt Module Kit)
HW-TVMKIT-230 (230V~ Ten Volt Module Kit)
Replacement Kit Accessories:
Low-Voltage Transformer for 120V Kit: 163198
Low-Voltage Transformer for 230V Kit: 163227
ISO2 : GRX-TVM-ISO2
Power
TVM: 12V - 50mA per circuit

TVMKIT-120
ISO2: 24V ~ 50/60Hz 750mA per ISO2
Transformer Input: 120V ~ 50/60Hz 40W
Transformer Output: 24V ~ 1.6A IEC PELV / NEC Class 2
TVMKIT-230
ISO2: 24V ~ 50/60Hz 750mA per ISO2
Transformer Input: 220V ~ 240V ~ 50Hz 40W
Transformer Output: 24V ~ 1.6A IEC PELV / NEC Class 2
Capacity
Each GRX-TVM2 can control up to 2 circuits

Each HW-TVMKIT-xxx can hold up to 12 GRX-TVM2s
Low-voltage
Connections
11-pin harness connects ISO2 to each TVM2.

Low-voltage MI harness connects the ISO2 units to panel interface.
Environment
Ambient operating temperature: 32 to 104F (0 to 40C). Ambient

operating humidity: 090% humidity, non-condensing. Indoor use only.
Mounting
Mounts in HWI-PNL-8, HWAP-8, HWBP-8, PBK-8 in place of Remote

Power Module (RPM) #8
Warranty
2 | Lutron

Europe +44.(0)20.7680.4481
369-663a
08.31.12

Installation
DIN Rail Stop
TVM2
(not included in kit)
LV Barrier
DIN Rail
ISO2
Addressing Harness
24 V~
Transformer
DH
DH
DH
DH
RPM Harness
DH
DH
DH
DH
DH
DH
DH
Wiring
Transformer
Hot/
Line
Neutral
Primary Leads
Labeled L
and N
www.lutron.com
Lutron | 3
369-663a
08.31.12

Connecting the Low-voltage Signal Wires
Output 1 +
Output 1
Ballast / Driver
Output 2 +
Output 2
Ballast / Driver
Shown connected to permanent
Hot / Line or RPM output.
See ballast / driver manufacturer for
appropriate recommendations*
GRX-TVM2
ISO2 Wiring Example

Plug Labeled
ISO TVM
ISO
Secondary
Leads
RPM
Harness
Ground
Wire
Transformer
Plug
Labeled
ISO
Addressing
Harness
Some ballasts / drivers require a permanent Hot / Line connection while others must be switched off in conjunction with the TVM. Consult ballast / driver
manufacturer instructions for details.
4 | Lutron

Europe +44.(0)20.7680.4481
GRX-TVI
Power Interfaces
369-247a 1 03.22.10
GRX-TVI Ten Volt Interface

Features
t1SPWJEFT7DPOUSPMBOECBMMBTUTXJUDIJOHDBQB
CJMJUJFTUPTXJUDIBOEEJNnVPSFTDFOUBOE-&%MJHIUT
t4XJUDIFTBOEEJNT7FMFDUSPOJDEJNNJOHCBM
MBTUTQPXFSFECZ7 CBMMBTUNVTUQSPWJEF
7TPVSDF
4XJUDIFTVQUP"PGFMFDUSPOJD
DBQBDJUJWFCBMMBTUT
t4XJUDIFTNPUPSTVQUP)1!7
)1!7
t6QUPmWF5FO7PMU*OUFSGBDFTNBZCFDPOOFDUFE
UPPOF$POUSPM6OJU[POF5IJTBMMPXTPOF[POFUP
DPOUSPMVQUPmWF"DJSDVJUTPG&MFDUSPOJD%JNNJOH
#BMMBTUTPSmWFNPUPST
t1SPWJEFT7 QPXFSUPMPBET
t3FRVJSFT7 PS7 QPXFSGPS
JOUFSOBMPQFSBUJPOT
Compatible Controls
Wiring
Diagram
Family
Product
3FTJEFOUJBM
4ZTUFNT
)831.6
* +
)831."
* +
)8*81.%
" #
8BMMCPY1PXFS.PEVMF
$PNNFSDJBM
4ZTUFNT
)Y%/%
$ %
)87'%#"
& '
3Y/%
$ %
33%/%
$ %
-131.6
* +
-131."
* +
(3"'*,&ZF
$POUSPM6OJU
" #
(11BOFMT
, -
Wiring
Diagram
Family
Product
8BMMCPY
'MPVSFTDFOU
XJSF
%JNNFST
":'1
& '
%7'1
& '
%74$'1
& '
-9'1-
& '
."'".
( )
.4$'".
( )
/'
& '
/'1
& '
/5'
& '
/5'1
& '
4'1
& '
4'1
& '
414'"
( )
414'".
( )
7'
& '
75'".
( )
/PUF5IFTFDPOUSPMTEPOPUDPOGPSNUP*&$TUBOEBSEGPS
7PVUQVUTJHOBMUIFZDBOOPUSFBDIUIF7NJOJNVN
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
GRX-TVI
Power Interfaces
369-247a 2 03.22.10
Specifications
Switching Load Types and Capacities
Standards
t6--JTUFEJO64BOE$BOBEB
t/0.
t$&
t$5JDL
4PVSDF-PBE5ZQF
'MVPSFTDFOU
t-VUSPO&DP 57&4FSJFT
t&MFDUSPOJD$BQBDJUJWF
/PO%JN
t0UIFSNBOVGBDUVSFSTh7
CBMMBTUT
Power
t-PBE PVUQVU
QPXFS7
EFOUPGMJHIUJOHDPOUSPM
1IBTFJOEFQFO
0-10 V Dimming Control

t0VUQVUSBUJOH"N"4JOLTDVSSFOUPOMZ
CBMMBTUNVTUTPVSDFQSPWJEF7TVQQMZ

7NJOJNVN 7NBYJNVN
7
7

7

"
"
"
"
"
-&%
"
"
*ODBOEFTDFOU
"
"
-PXWPMUBHF
"
"
.FUBM)BMJEF
"
"
/FPO$PME$BUIPEF
"
"
.PUPS
)1!7
)1!7
$&
Zone Capacity
t6QUPmWF5FO7PMU*OUFSGBDFTQFS$POUSPM6OJU[POF
Key Design Features
t$PNQMJFTXJUI4UBOEBSE6-
t1SPWJEFTB$MBTTJTPMBUFE7PVUQVUTJHOBMUIBU
DPOGPSNTUP&/BOE*&$
t"DDFQUTBQIBTFDPOUSPMTJHOBM 7 PS
7 )[

Terminals
t&BDIUFSNJOBMBDDFQUTVQUPUXP"8( NN

DPOEVDUPST
Physical Design
t8BMMNPVOUFE*OEPPSVTFPOMZ5ZQFFODMPTVSF
t8FJHIUMCT LH

Environment
t5FNQFSBUVSF'UP' $UP$
tIVNJEJUZ OPODPOEFOTJOH
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
GRX-TVI
Power Interfaces
369-247a 3 03.22.10

t.PVOUPOMZXIFSFBNCJFOUUFNQFSBUVSFJT'UP
' $UP$

t"MMPXJO NN
CFUXFFO*OUFSGBDFTXIFO
NPVOUJOHTFWFSBMJOBWFSUJDBMMBZPVU
t.PVOUTPUIBUMJOF NBJOT
WPMUBHFXJSJOHJTBUMFBTU
GU N
GSPNTPVOEPSFMFDUSPOJDFRVJQNFOUBOE
XJSJOH
t.PVOUXJUIJOPGUSVFWFSUJDBM
Front View
DPWFSDMPTFE
Side View
Front View
DPWFSPQFO
0VUQVU1PXFSBOE
4XJUDIJOHUP-PBE
.PVOUJOH)PMFT
JO NN
EJB
7%JNNJOH
$POUSPM
$POUSPM$JSDVJU
COOPERSBURG, PA 18036 U.S.A.
Switched
Incandescent
Rating
16A
GRX-TVI
0-10V INTERFACE CONTROL
Control Input:
100-120V,
220-240V 50/60Hz
Switches:
100-277VAC
GRX-TVI Input Rating

IH2 0.02A
IDH2 0.1A
Fluorescent
5A
Magnetic Low-voltage
16A
Electronic Low-voltage
16A
0-10V
Motor
1/4 HP@120V
1/2 HP@277V
Max. 0.3A
JO
NN
Output Rating
JO
NN
220- 100240V 120V

H2
N2
Control Inputs
DH2
H1
100277V
N1
N1
SH1
Load Switched
0-10V
Max 0.3A
GROUND
CONNECTIONS
JO
NN
JO
NN
JO
NN
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
GRX-TVI
Power Interfaces
369-247a 4 03.22.10
Wiring Diagrams
t&BDIUFSNJOBMDBOBDDFQUVQUPUXP"8(
NN
DPOEVDUPST
t-)JTUIF-JWF)PUGFFEUPQPXFSUIFMPBE
t-) POUIFDPOUSPMDJSDVJUUFSNJOBMT
TVQQMJFTPQ
FSBUJOHQPXFSGPSUIF5FO7PMU*OUFSGBDF
t8JSJOH%JBHSBNT" $ & ( BOE*TIPXB(39
57*XJSFEGSPNPOFEJTUSJCVUJPOQBOFM*GUIFQPXFS
SFRVJSFNFOUPGUIFDPNQMFUFTZTUFNJTMFTTUIBOBO
.$#DJSDVJUCSFBLFSSBUJOH POFGFFEDBOCFKVNQ
FSFEJOTJEFUIFFODMPTVSF BTTIPXO

t8JSJOH%JBHSBNT# % ' ) BOE+TIPXB(3957*
XJSFEGSPNUXPTFQBSBUFEJTUSJCVUJPOQBOFMTUIBUNBZ
CFEJGGFSFOUQIBTFTPSWPMUBHFT
t$IPPTFUIFDPSSFDU-)UFSNJOBMGPSZPVSPQFSBU
JOHQPXFS
o-FBWFPOFUFSNJOBMFNQUZEPOPUVTFCPUI
o%POPUDPOOFDU7UPFJUIFS-)UFSNJOBM
o.BLFTVSF-)JTPOUIFTBNFQIBTFBT%-
%) %JNNFE-JWF%JNNFE)PU
GSPNUIFMJHIUJOH
DPOUSPM
t3VOTFQBSBUFOFVUSBMTGPSMPBEDJSDVJUOPDPNNPO
OFVUSBMT
t/&$$MBTT*&$1&-7 7XJSJOHGSPNBCBM
MBTUUPUIF(3957*NVTUCFTFQBSBUFEGSPNUIF
QPXFSXJSJOH&OUFSUIF$MBTT1&-7XJSFTUISPVHI
UIFLOPDLPVUBEKBDFOUUPUIF7UFSNJOBMCMPDLT
5IF/PNFYCBSSJFSFOTVSFTTFQBSBUJPOBOEJTnFY
JCMFUPBMMPXBDDFTTUPUIFUFSNJOBMT5IFCBSSJFS
NVTUCFJOQMBDFXIFOJOTUBMMBUJPOJTDPNQMFUF
Wiring Diagram A: HomeWorks Wallbox Power Module/GRAFIK Eye Control Unit 1 Distribution Panel
(3957*
L2/H2 is the Hot/Live feed that powers
the internal circuitry of the GRX-TVI.
Use L2/H2 220-240V/CE only if your
line/mains voltage is 220-240 V.
Use L2/H2 100-127V only if your
NOTICE: 7$POUSPM4JHOBM8JSFT
%0/05$0//&$550-*/&70-5"(&
-VUSPOJTOPUMJBCMFGPSEBNBHFEVFUP
NJTXJSJOH
HomeWorks8BMMCPY
1PXFS.PEVMF
)8*81.%
7#BMMBTU
&BSUI(SPVOE
4XJUDIFE)PU-JWF
/FVUSBM
OR
GRAFIK Eye
$POUSPM6OJU
7#BMMBTU
&"35)(306/%
$0//&$5*0/4
%JNNFE)PU-JWF
&BSUI(SPVOE
/FVUSBM
5PBEEJUJPOBMCBMMBTUT
)PU-JWF
6TF" "$&
NBYJ
NVNDJSDVJUCSFBLFS.$#
)PU-JWF
%JTUSJCVUJPO
1BOFM
Note: Ballast must provide

a 0-10 V source only!
/FVUSBM
&BSUI(SPVOE
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
GRX-TVI
Power Interfaces
369-247a 5 03.22.10
Wiring Diagram B: HomeWorks Wallbox Power Module/GRAFIK Eye Control Unit 2 Distribution Panels
(3957*
%0/05$0//&$550-*/&70-5"(&
NJTXJSJOH
HomeWorks8BMMCPY
1PXFS.PEVMF
)8*81.%
7#BMMBTU
&BSUI(SPVOE
4XJUDIFE)PU-JWF
/FVUSBM
OR
GRAFIK Eye
$POUSPM6OJU
7#BMMBTU
&"35)(306/%
$0//&$5*0/4
%JNNFE)PU-JWF
&BSUI(SPVOE
/FVUSBM
)PU-JWF
6TF" "$&
NBYJ
)PU-JWF
%JTUSJCVUJPO
1BOFM"

/FVUSBM
&BSUI(SPVOE
)PU-JWF
%JTUSJCVUJPO
1BOFM#
/FVUSBM
&BSUI(SPVOE
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
GRX-TVI
Power Interfaces
369-247a 6 03.22.10
Wiring Diagram C: HomeWorks Maestro/RadioRA/RadioRA 2 Dimmers 1 Distribution Panel

(3957*

%0/05$0//&$550-*/&70-5"(&
NJTXJSJOH
7#BMMBTU
Note: %JNNFSNVTUCF
XJSFEPOUIFMPBETJEF
3FNPUF
%JNNFS
#SBTT
&BSUI(SPVOE
%JNNFS
#MVF
#SBTT
4XJUDIFE)PU-JWF
/FVUSBM
#MVF
7#BMMBTU
&"35)(306/%
$0//&$5*0/4
4JMWFS
#MBDL
#MBDL
&BSUI(SPVOE
/FVUSBM
)PU-JWF
6TF" "$&
NBYJ
Job Name:
Job Number:
)PU-JWF
%JTUSJCVUJPO
1BOFM

/FVUSBM
&BSUI(SPVOE
Model Numbers:
Page
GRX-TVI
Power Interfaces
369-247a 7 03.22.10
Wiring Diagram D: HomeWorks Maestro/RadioRA/RadioRA 2 Dimmers 2 Distribution Panels

(3957*

%0/05$0//&$550-*/&70-5"(&
NJTXJSJOH
Note: %JNNFSNVTUCF
XJSFEPOUIFMPBETJEF
3FNPUF
%JNNFS
#SBTT
7#BMMBTU
&BSUI(SPVOE
%JNNFS
#MVF
#SBTT
4XJUDIFE)PU-JWF
/FVUSBM
#MVF
7#BMMBTU
&"35)(306/%
$0//&$5*0/4
4JMWFS
#MBDL
#MBDL
&BSUI(SPVOE
/FVUSBM
)PU-JWF
6TF" "$&
NBYJ
)PU-JWF
%JTUSJCVUJPO
1BOFM"

/FVUSBM
&BSUI(SPVOE
)PU-JWF
%JTUSJCVUJPO
1BOFM#
/FVUSBM
&BSUI(SPVOE
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
GRX-TVI
Power Interfaces
369-247a 8 03.22.10
Wiring Diagram E: Ariadni/Diva/Lyneo/Skylark/Nova/Nova T /Vareo

3-wire Fluorescent Dimmers 1 Distribution Panel
(3957*

XBZ
4XJUDI
#SBTT
(PME
%0/05$0//&$550-*/&70-5"(&
NJTXJSJOH
7#BMMBTU
%JNNFS
&BSUI(SPVOE
$PQQFS
#MBDL
#MVF
$PQQFS
#MBDL
7JPMFU
PS#MVF
3FE
:FMMPXPS
0SBOHF
8IJUF
4XJUDIFE)PU-JWF
/FVUSBM
7#BMMBTU
&"35)(306/%
$0//&$5*0/4
&BSUI(SPVOE
6TF" "$&
NBYJ
)PU-JWF
%JTUSJCVUJPO
1BOFM
/FVUSBM

&BSUI(SPVOE
4JOHMFQPMFEJNNFSTVTFCMBDLGPSUIFIPUMJWFXJSF3FGFSUPUIFTJOHMFQPMF
EJNNFShTJOTUBMMBUJPOJOTUSVDUJPOTUPJEFOUJGZUIFIPUMJWFXJSFGPSUIBUQSPEVDU
5IFSFEXJSFJTOPUVTFE$BQPGGUIFSFEXJSFVTJOHBXJSFDPOOFDUPS%POPU
XJSFUIFSFEXJSFUPHSPVOEPSUPBOZPUIFSXJSJOH
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
GRX-TVI
Power Interfaces
369-247a 9 03.22.10
Wiring Diagram F: Ariadni/Diva/Lyneo/Skylark/Nova/Nova T /Vareo

3-wire Fluorescent Dimmers 2 Distribution Panels
(3957*

XBZ
4XJUDI
#SBTT
(PME
%0/05$0//&$550-*/&70-5"(&
NJTXJSJOH
7#BMMBTU
%JNNFS
&BSUI(SPVOE
$PQQFS
#MBDL
#MVF
$PQQFS
#MBDL
7JPMFU
PS#MVF
3FE
:FMMPXPS
0SBOHF
8IJUF
4XJUDIFE)PU-JWF
/FVUSBM
7#BMMBTU
&"35)(306/%
$0//&$5*0/4
&BSUI(SPVOE
6TF" "$&
NBYJ
)PU-JWF
%JTUSJCVUJPO
1BOFM"
/FVUSBM

&BSUI(SPVOE
)PU-JWF
%JTUSJCVUJPO
1BOFM#
/FVUSBM
&BSUI(SPVOE
4JOHMFQPMFEJNNFSTVTFCMBDLGPSUIFIPUMJWFXJSF3FGFSUPUIFTJOHMFQPMF
EJNNFShTJOTUBMMBUJPOJOTUSVDUJPOTUPJEFOUJGZUIFIPUMJWFXJSFGPSUIBUQSPEVDU
5IFSFEXJSFJTOPUVTFE$BQPGGUIFSFEXJSFVTJOHBXJSFDPOOFDUPS%POPU
XJSFUIFSFEXJSFUPHSPVOEPSUPBOZPUIFSXJSJOH
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
GRX-TVI
Power Interfaces
369-247a 10 03.22.10
Wiring Diagram G: Maestro/Spacer System/Vierti

3-wire Fluorescent Dimmers 1 Distribution Panel
(3957*

$PNQBOJPO
%JNNFS
%0/05$0//&$550-*/&70-5"(&
NJTXJSJOH
%JNNFS
7#BMMBTU
&BSUI(SPVOE
#SBTT
#MVF
#SBTT
4JMWFS
#MBDL
#MVF
:FMMPXPS
0SBOHF
4XJUDIFE)PU-JWF
/FVUSBM
7#BMMBTU
&"35)(306/%
$0//&$5*0/4
#MBDL
&BSUI(SPVOE
6TF" "$&
NBYJ
)PU-JWF
%JTUSJCVUJPO
1BOFM
/FVUSBM

&BSUI(SPVOE
5IFCSBTTTDSFXUFSNJOBMJTOPUVTFE5JHIUFOUIFCSBTTTDSFXUFSNJOBM%P
OPUDPOOFDUUIFCSBTTTDSFXUFSNJOBMUPHSPVOEPSUPBOZPUIFSXJSJOH
8IFOVTFEBTBTJOHMFQPMFEJNNFS UIFCMVFTDSFXUFSNJOBMJTOPUVTFE
8IFOVTFEBTBTJOHMFQPMFEJNNFS UJHIUFOUIFCMVFTDSFXUFSNJOBMEPOPU
DPOOFDUUIFCMVFTDSFXUFSNJOBMUPHSPVOEPSUPBOZPUIFSXJSJOH
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
10
GRX-TVI
Power Interfaces
369-247a 11 03.22.10
Wiring Diagram H: Maestro/Spacer System/Vierti

3-wire Fluorescent Dimmers 2 Distribution Panels
(3957*

$PNQBOJPO
%JNNFS
%0/05$0//&$550-*/&70-5"(&
NJTXJSJOH
%JNNFS
7#BMMBTU
&BSUI(SPVOE
#SBTT
#MVF
#SBTT
4JMWFS
#MBDL
#MVF
:FMMPXPS
0SBOHF
4XJUDIFE)PU-JWF
/FVUSBM
7#BMMBTU
&"35)(306/%
$0//&$5*0/4
#MBDL
&BSUI(SPVOE
6TF" "$&
NBYJ
)PU-JWF
%JTUSJCVUJPO
1BOFM"
/FVUSBM

&BSUI(SPVOE
)PU-JWF
%JTUSJCVUJPO
1BOFM#
/FVUSBM
&BSUI(SPVOE
5IFCSBTTTDSFXUFSNJOBMJTOPUVTFE5JHIUFOUIFCSBTTTDSFXUFSNJOBM%P
OPUDPOOFDUUIFCSBTTTDSFXUFSNJOBMUPHSPVOEPSUPBOZPUIFSXJSJOH
8IFOVTFEBTBTJOHMFQPMFEJNNFS UIFCMVFTDSFXUFSNJOBMJTOPUVTFE
8IFOVTFEBTBTJOHMFQPMFEJNNFS UJHIUFOUIFCMVFTDSFXUFSNJOBMEPOPU
DPOOFDUUIFCMVFTDSFXUFSNJOBMUPHSPVOEPSUPBOZPUIFSXJSJOH
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
11
GRX-TVI
Power Interfaces
369-247a 12 03.22.10
Wiring Diagram I: HomeWorks Remote Power Module/LP Module 1 Distribution Panel

(3957*
5FSNJOBM
#MPDLT
%0/05$0//&$550-*/&70-5"(&
NJTXJSJOH
31.-1
.PEVMF
7#BMMBTU
&BSUI(SPVOE
4XJUDIFE)PU-JWF
/FVUSBM
&BSUI(SPVOE
#MBDL
3FE.PEVMF0VUQVU
6TF" "$&
NBYJ
Job Name:
Job Number:
7#BMMBTU
&"35)(306/%
$0//&$5*0/4
8IJUF
)PU-JWF
%JTUSJCVUJPO
1BOFM

/FVUSBM
&BSUI(SPVOE
Model Numbers:
Page
12
GRX-TVI
Power Interfaces
369-247a 13 03.22.10
Wiring Diagram J: HomeWorks Remote Power Module/LP Module 2 Distribution Panels

(3957*
5FSNJOBM
#MPDLT
%0/05$0//&$550-*/&70-5"(&
NJTXJSJOH
31.-1
.PEVMF
7#BMMBTU
&BSUI(SPVOE
4XJUDIFE)PU-JWF
/FVUSBM
7#BMMBTU
&"35)(306/%
$0//&$5*0/4
8IJUF
&BSUI(SPVOE
#MBDL
3FE.PEVMF0VUQVU
6TF" "$&
NBYJ

)PU-JWF
%JTUSJCVUJPO
1BOFM"
/FVUSBM
&BSUI(SPVOE
)PU-JWF
%JTUSJCVUJPO
1BOFM#
/FVUSBM
&BSUI(SPVOE
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 13
GRX-TVI
Power Interfaces
369-247a 14 03.22.10
Wiring Diagram K: GP Panel 1 Distribution Panel

(3957*
%0/05$0//&$550-*/&70-5"(&
NJTXJSJOH
(11BOFM
/FVUSBM
7#BMMBTU
%JNNFE)PU-JWF
)PU-JWF
&BSUI(SPVOE
4XJUDIFE)PU-JWF
/FVUSBM
-PBE
5FSNJOBMT
DJSDVJU
TIPXO
&BSUI(SPVOE
7#BMMBTU
&"35)(306/%
$0//&$5*0/4
&BSUI(SPVOE
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
14
GRX-TVI
Power Interfaces
369-247a 15 03.22.10
Wiring Diagram L: GP Panel 2 Distribution Panels

(3957*
%0/05$0//&$550-*/&70-5"(&
NJTXJSJOH
(11BOFM
/FVUSBM
7#BMMBTU
%JNNFE)PU-JWF
)PU-JWF
&BSUI(SPVOE
4XJUDIFE)PU-JWF
/FVUSBM
-PBE
5FSNJOBMT
DJSDVJU
TIPXO
7#BMMBTU
&"35)(306/%
$0//&$5*0/4
&BSUI(SPVOE
&BSUI(SPVOE
6TF" "$&
NBYJ
Job Name:
Job Number:
)PU-JWF
%JTUSJCVUJPO
1BOFM

/FVUSBM
&BSUI(SPVOE
Model Numbers:
Page
15
LUT-LBX
Power Interfaces
369-477a 1 09.01.11
LUT-LBX Synthetic Minimum Load
Description
t1SPWJEFTDBQBCJMJUZGPSDFSUBJO-VUSPOEJNNFSTUP
DPOUSPMMPXXBUUBHFMPBETGSPNXBUUTVQUPUIF
EJNNFSTNJOJNVNSBUJOH
t1SFTFOUTBTJNVMBUFEMPBEUPUIFEJNNFSUPNFFU
UIFNJOJNVNMPBESFRVJSFNFOUTFWFOXIFOUIF
BDUVBMMPBEJTTNBMMFS
t8PSLTXJUIGPSXBSEQIBTFPSMFBEJOHFEHFEJNNFSTBOESFWFSTFQIBTFPSUSBJMJOHFEHFEJNNFST
t.PEFMTBWBJMBCMFGPS7~BOE7~
JOQVUQPXFS
t5IJTiMPBETJEFwFRVJQNFOUJOTUBMMTPOUIF[POF
XJSJOHJOQBSBMMFMXJUIUIFMJHIUJOHMPBE
t%JTTBQBUFTBNBYJNVNPGXBUUTXIFOUIF
DPOUSPMMJOHEJNNFSJTOFBSIJHIFOE
Works with:
t(3"'*,&ZFR4FSJFTDPOUSPMVOJUT
t-131.%JNNJNH.PEVMFT
t)PNF8PSLTR31.%JNNJOH.PEVMFT
t)PNF8PSLTR81.%JNNJOH.PEVMFT
t/FVUSBMSFGFSFODFE-VUSPOEJNNFST
t5XPXJSF-VUSPOEJNNFST
Available Models
Input Power
Model Number
120 V~
LUT-LBX-WH
220 - 240 V~
LUT-LBX-CE-WH
SPECIFIC ATIO N SU BM ITTAL

Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 1
LUT-LBX
Power Interfaces
369-477a 2 09.01.11
Specifications
Input
t7~N")[ -65-#9
t7~N")[ -65-#9$&
t1PXFSEJTTJQBUJPOMFTTUIBOXBUUT
Sources/Load Types*
0QFSBUFTUIFTFTPVSDFTXIFOXJSFEJOQBSBMMFM
XJUIUIFMPBE
t*ODBOEFTDFOU 5VOHTUFO
t)BMPHFO
t.BHOFUJD-PX7PMUBHF5SBOTGPSNFS
t&MFDUSPOJD-PX7PMUBHF5SBOTGPSNFS
t-VUSPO5V8JSFR&MFDUSPOJD'MVPSFTDFOU%JNNJOH
#BMMBTU
t/FPO$PME$BUIPEF
t-&%MJHIUJOH SFGFSUP"QQMJDBUJPO/PUFGPS
GVSUIFSEFUBJMT
Terminals
"DDFQUTVQUPUXP"8( NN2
XJSFT
Environment
' $
3FMBUJWFIVNJEJUZ
MFTTUIBOOPODPOEFOTJOH
Mounting
4VSGBDFPSSFDFTTNPVOUJOEPPSTPOMZ
EMC Immunity
t4VSHFQSPUFDUJPOVQUPL7 "
*&&&TUE$
t&4%QSPUFDUJPOVQUPL7
*5IFEJNNFSNVTUCFSBUFEGPSUIFMPBEUZQFCFJOH
VTFE5IF-65-#9EPFTOPUDIBOHFUIFBQQSPWFE
MPBEUZQFTPGUIFEJNNFS KVTUUIFNJOJNVNMPBE
SFRVJSFNFOU'PSFYBNQMF .-7MPBETNVTUTUJMMCF
VTFEXJUI.-7EJNNFST

Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 2
LUT-LBX
Power Interfaces
369-477a 3 09.01.11

t3FDFTTPSTVSGBDFNPVOUJOQSPWJEFEY
KVODUJPOCPY -VUSPO1/
JO
NN
EFFQ*OEPPSTPOMZ
t-65-#9HFOFSBUFTIFBUNPVOUPOMZXIFSF
BNCJFOUUFNQFSBUVSFJT'
$

t.PVOUXJUIBSSPXTPOZPLFGBDJOHVQUP
FOTVSFBEFRVBUFDPPMJOH
t"MMPXJO NN
BCPWFBOECFMPXVOJU
BOECFUXFFOGBDFQMBUFTXIFONPVOUJOH
TFWFSBMJOBWFSUJDBMMBZPVU
t'PSCFUUFSIFBUEJTTJQBUJPO TVSGBDFNPVOU
XJUIPVUGBDFQMBUF
t.PVOUTPMJOF NBJOT
WPMUBHFXJSJOHJTBU
MFBTUGU N
GSPNTPVOEPSFMFDUSPOJD
FRVJQNFOUBOEXJSJOH
t.PVOU*OUFSGBDFXJUIJOPGUSVFWFSUJDBM
JO
NN
Side View
JO
NN
JO
NN
Y
+VODUJPO
#PY
JO
NN

Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 3
LUT-LBX
Power Interfaces
369-477a 4 09.01.11
Wiring
t1VMMUP"8( NN2
$PQQFS $V
XJSFT $NJOJNVN
GPSJOQVUQPXFSBOEMPBEDJSDVJU
t4USJQJO NN
JOTVMBUJPOGSPNXJSFTCFGPSFDPOOFDUJOH
Single-Zone Wiring
%JNNFS
$JSDVJU
)PU-JWF
%JNNFE)PU-JWF
/FVUSBM
JGOFDFTTBSZ
DIMMED HOT/LIVE
NEUTRAL
EARTH/GROUND
120 V~ LUT-LBX
220-240 V~
LUT-LBX-CE
-PX8BUUBHF-PBE
-65-#9 $&
/FVUSBM
Dual-Zone Wiring
%JNNFS
$JSDVJU
)PU
%JNNFE)PU-JWF ;POF
%JNNFE)PU-JWF
;POF
/FVUSBM
JGOFDFTTBSZ
DIMMED HOT/LIVE
NEUTRAL
EARTH/GROUND
120 V~ LUT-LBX
220-240 V~
LUT-LBX-CE
-PX8BUUBHF-PBE
-65-#9 $&
/FVUSBM

Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 4
Ballasts and Drivers
Fluorescent Dimming Ballasts
EcoSystemR H-Series
Architectural Dimming
369266e 1 03.08.12
EcoSystemR H-Series Ballasts Overview

EcoSystemR H-Series digitally addressable ballasts
provide a low-cost, flexible solution for any space in
any application. Industry leading dimming to less than
1% meets the needs of the most demanding
applications. Individual control with the EcoSystemR
Digital Link eliminates the need to rewire, reduces
design time, and provides a scalable solution from a
small area to an entire building.
EcoSystem H-Series, case type M

JO NN
8YJO NN
)Y
JO NN
-
Features
t$POUJOVPVT nJDLFSGSFFEJNNJOHGSPNUPPS
less for T8, and 1% for T5 and T5HO lamps.
t$PNQBUJCMFXJUI&OFSHJ4BWS/PEFT with EcoSystemR
unit, GRAFIK EyeR QS control unit, PowPakT dimming
module with EcoSystemR unit, and QuantumR
software, allowing for integration into an existing or
planned EcoSystemR lighting control solution.
t1SPHSBNNFESBQJETUBSUEFTJHOQSFIFBUTMBNQ
cathodes before applying full arc voltage to ensure
full-rated lamp life while dimming and cycling.
tQFSGPSNBODFUFTUFEBOECVSOFEJOBUGBDUPSZ
t-BNQTUVSOPOUPBOZEJNNFEMFWFMXJUIPVUHPJOHUP
full brightness.
t-PXIBSNPOJDEJTUPSUJPOUISPVHIPVUUIFFOUJSF
dimming range maintains power quality.
t'SFRVFODZPGPQFSBUJPOFOTVSFTUIBUCBMMBTUEPFTOPU
interfere with infrared devices operating between
38 kHz and 42 kHz.
t#BMMBTUTNBJOUBJODPOTJTUFOUMJHIUPVUQVUGPSEJGGFSFOU
lamp lengths, ensuring fixture-to-fixture uniformity
t6MUSBRVJFUPQFSBUJPO
t#BMMBTUQSPUFDUFEGSPNNJTXJSFTPGBOZJOQVUQPXFSUP
control lead, or from lamp leads to each other and/or
ground.
t&OEPGMBNQMJGFQSPUFDUJPODJSDVJUSZFOTVSFTTBGF
operation throughout entire lamp life.
t/POWPMBUJMFNFNPSZSFTUPSFTBMMCBMMBTUTFUUJOHTBGUFS
power failure.
tDPNQBUJCMFXJUIBMMEcoSystemR digital controls.
t$VTUPNCBMMBTUGBDUPSTBWBJMBCMFGPS6-PS$4"MJTUFE
products. Design tool and specifications can be found
at www.lutron.com/ballasttool
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
EcoSystem H-Series, case type G

JO NN
8YJO NN
)Y
JO NN
-
Page
EcoSystemR H-Series
369266e 2 03.08.12
Specifications
Standards
Performance
t$BMJGPSOJB&OFSHZ$PNNJTTJPO-JTUFE
t6--JTUFE FWBMVBUFEUPUIFSFRVJSFNFOUTPG6-

t$4"DFSUJmFE FWBMVBUFEUPUIFSFRVJSFNFOUTPG
$/P

t$MBTT1UIFSNBMMZQSPUFDUFE
t.FFUT"/4*$)JHI'SFRVFODZ#BMMBTU
Standard.
t.FFUT'$$1BSU/PO$POTVNFSSFRVJSFNFOUTGPS
&.*3'*FNJTTJPOT
t.FFUT"/4*$$BUFHPSZ"TVSHFQSPUFDUJPO
standards up to and including 4 kV.
t.BOVGBDUVSJOHGBDJMJUJFTFNQMPZ&4%SFEVDUJPO
practices that comply with the requirements of
"/4*&4%4
t-VUSPOR Quality Systems registered to
*40
Ballast Wiring & Mounting
t#BMMBTUJTHSPVOEFEWJBBNPVOUJOHTDSFXUPUIF
fixture.
t#BMMBTUNPVOUTVTJOHUXPTDSFXT PSTIFFUNFUBM
GFBUVSFBOEPOFTDSFX
XJUIJOBnVPSFTDFOUmYUVSF
t1PXFSBOEMBNQXJSJOHUFSNJOBMTBDDFQUPOF
UP"8( UPNN(
TPMJEDPQQFSXJSF
per terminal.
tLamp Seasoning
Refer to the lamp manufacturer's requirements for
lamp seasoning requirements prior to dimming.
Environment
t.JOJNVNMBNQTUBSUJOHUFNQFSBUVSF' $
t4PVOE3BUJOH$MBTT"
t.BYJNVNCBMMBTUDBTFUFNQFSBUVSF$
t%JNNJOH3BOHFUPNFBTVSFE3FMBUJWF
-JHIU0VUQVU 3-0
GPS5 UP3-0GPS5
and T5HO.
t-BNQ4UBSUJOHQSPHSBNNFESBQJETUBSU
t-BNQ$VSSFOU$SFTU'BDUPSMFTTUIBO
t-BNQ'MJDLFSOPOFWJTJCMF
t-JHIU0VUQVU7BSJBUJPODPOTUBOUMJHIUPVUQVUGPS
MJOFWPMUBHFWBSJBUJPOTPG
t-BNQ-JGFBWFSBHFMBNQMJGFNFFUTPSFYDFFETSBUJOH
of lamp manufacturer.
t1PXFS'BDUPSHSFBUFSUIBO
t5PUBM)BSNPOJD%JTUPSUJPO 5)%
MFTTUIBO*
t0QFSBUJOH7PMUBHF6OJWFSTBMJOQVU7~,
7~ 7~BUPS)[
t'SFRVFODZPG0QFSBUJPOHSFBUFSUIBOL)[
t#BMMBTU'BDUPS #'
GPS5MBNQTBOEGPS
T5 and T5HO lamps
t4UBOECZ1PXFSMFTTUIBO8
%JNNJOH3BOHFGPS5MBNQT
BF
Dimming Range
(Max/Min [BF])
Dimming
Ratio

%JNNJOH3BOHFGPS5BOE5)0MBNQT
BF
Dimming Range
(Max/Min [BF])
Dimming
Ratio

Warranty
t5-year limited warranty with LutronR field service
DPNNJTTJPOJOH ZFBSTUBOEBSEXBSSBOUZ
GSPNEBUF
PGQVSDIBTF'PSBEEJUJPOBM8BSSBOUZJOGPSNBUJPO
please visit www.lutron.com/ResourceLibrary/
XBSSBOUZ-JNJUFE$PNNQEG
* .PEFMT&)%5.6 &)%5.6 &)%5.6
BOE&)%5.6IBWFMFTTUIBO 5)%

Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
EcoSystemR H-Series
369266e 3 03.08.12
EcoSystemR H-Series Ballasts for Linear and U-Bend T8 Lamps

For proper dimming all lamps must comply to accepted standards, 17, 25 and 32 W lamps (NEMA LL9-2000)
Lamp
Type
Lamps Case EcoSystem

Lamp
Size H-Series
per
Watts
(length) Ballast
Ballasts
Input
Ballast
Voltage Current
(V ~)
(A)
Ballast
Factor
(BF)
Input System System Ballast

Power Lumens* Efficacy* Efficacy
Factor
(lm/W)
(lm)
(W)
(BEF)
Relative
System
Efficacy
(RSE)
1
T8 and 8
U-Bend (48 in
<DN>
&)%5.6

34.8
33.6
33.2

86
89

2.98

&)%5.6

41.6

86
86
84

2.82

&)%5.6

68.4

66.5

88
89

1.46
1.49

&)%5.6

91
91

1.52
1.51

&)%5(6

99.6

94
88

&)%5(6

112.8
113.6

92
93
93

&)%5.6

31.2
26.4

61

62
3.21

3.28

&)%5.6

56.4
55.2
55.4

69
69

1.81
1.81

&)%5.6

21.6
21.6
22.2

59
4.63
4.63
4.51

&)%5.6

43.2
41.6

62

63
2.38
2.31
2.41

8
(36 in
<DN>
8
(24 in
<DN>
* Actual number may vary with lamp model. Please consult lamp manufacturer for lamp-specific data.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
EcoSystemR H-Series
369266e 4 03.08.12
EcoSystemR H-Series Ballasts for T5 Linear Lamps

For proper dimming all lamps must comply to accepted standards, 14 W (60081-IEC-6520), 21 W (60081-IEC-6530) and 28 W (60081-IEC-6640)
Lamp
Type
Lamp
Watts
(length)
T5 Linear 8
(45.2 in
<DN>
8
(33.4 in
<DN>
8
(21.6 in
<DN>

Size H-Series
per
Ballast
Ballasts
Input
Ballast
Voltage Current
(V ~)
(A)
Ballast
Factor
(BF)

Factor
(lm/W)
(lm)
(W)
(BEF)
Relative
System
Efficacy
(RSE)
&)%5.6

33.6
31.2

86
93
88
2.98
3.21

&)%5.6

62.4
62.4
59.8

93
93

&)%5.6

26.3
26.3
26.6

3.81
3.81

&)%5.6

48.6
48.5

86
86

&)%5.6

19.2
19.2
19.4

5.21
5.21
5.16

&)%5.6

EcoSystemR H-Series Ballasts for T5HO Linear Lamps

For proper dimming all lamps must comply to accepted standards, 24 W (60081-IEC-6620), 39 W (60081-IEC-6730) and 54 W (60081-IEC-6840)
Ballast
Factor
(BF)

Factor
(lm/W)
(lm)
(W)
(BEF)
&)%5.6

64.8
62.4

1.54

&)%5.6

115.2
116.3

88

86

&)%5.6

44.4
44.9

2.25
2.23

&)%5.6

81.4

83
83
86
1.19
1.19
1.23

&)%5.6

28.8

69

3.33

3.61

&)%5.6

54.6
55.2
55.4

1.83
1.81
1.81

Lamp
Watts
(length)

Size H-Series
per
Ballast
Ballasts
T5HO
Linear
8
(45.2 in
<DN>
8
(33.4 in
<DN>
8
(21.6 in
<DN>
Relative
System
Efficacy
(RSE)
Input
Ballast
Voltage Current
(V ~)
(A)
Lamp
Type
* Actual number may vary with lamp model. Please consult lamp manufacturer for lamp-specific data.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
EcoSystemR H-Series
369266e 5 03.08.12
Case Dimensions
"
JO NN
#
JO NN
NPVOUJOHDFOUFS
$
JO NN
%
JO NN
"
JO NN
#
JO NN

NPVOUJOHDFOUFS
$
JO NN
%
JO NN
&
JO NN
G
A
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
EcoSystemR H-Series
369266e 6 03.08.12
EcoSystemR H-Series Wiring Diagrams

EcoSystem Digital Link Overview
LINE
NEU
N/C
HOT
Class 2
Bus
t5IF&DP4ZTUFNR%JHJUBM-JOLXJSJOH &BOE&

connects the digital ballasts and drivers together to form
E1
a lighting control system.
E2
t4FOTPSTEPOPUEJSFDUMZDPOOFDUUP&DP4ZTUFNR
#BMMBTU5FSNJOBMT
H-Series ballasts.
t/PXJSFQIBTFDPOUSPMXJUI&DP4ZTUFNR H-Series
ballasts.
t&BOE& &DP4ZTUFNREJHJUBMMJOLXJSFT
BSFQPMBSJUZ
insensitive and can be wired in any topology.
t"O&OFSHJ4BWS/PEF5. with EcoSystem unit, GRAFIK
NEU
N/C
Eye QS control unit with EcoSystem, or Quantum
HOT
dimming module with EcoSystem provides power for
E1
the EcoSystem digital link which supports up to 64
E2
digital ballasts or LED drivers, 64 occupant sensors, 16
#BMMBTU5FSNJOBMT
daylight sensors and 64 wall stations or IR receivers.
t1PX1BL5. dimming module with EcoSystem
To the EcoSystemR
Digital Link Supply
provides power for the EcoSystem digital link which
supports up to 32 digital ballasts or LED drivers, 6
Notes
occupant sensors, 1 daylight sensor and 9 Pico
wireless controllers.
t5IF&DP4ZTUFNR Digital Link Supply does not have
t"MM&DP4ZTUFNR Digital Link programming is completed
to be located at the end of the Digital Link.
by using the Energi Savr App for Apple iPad, iPod
t&DP4ZTUFNR Digital Link length is limited by the wire
Touch or iPhone mobile digital device; GRAFIK EyeR
HBVHFVTFEGPS&BOE&BTGPMMPXT
QS with EcoSystemR; PowPakT dimming module with
Wire Gauge
Digital Link Length
EcoSystemR; or QuantumR System.
(max)
"8(
GU
EcoSystem Digital Link Wiring
"8(
GU
t#BMMBTU&DP4ZTUFNR Digital Link terminals accept one
"8(
GU
UP"8( UPNN(
TPMJEDPQQFSXJSFQFS
terminal.
"8(
GU
t.BLFTVSFUIBUUIFTVQQMZCSFBLFSUPUIF%JHJUBM#BMMBTU
and EcoSystemR Digital Link Supply is OFF when wiring.
Wire Size
Digital Link Length
t$POOFDUUIFUXPDPOEVDUPSTUPUIFUXP%JHJUBM#BMMBTU
(max)
terminals E1 and E2 as shown.
NN(
825 m
t6TJOHUXPEJGGFSFOUDPMPSTGPS&BOE&XJMMSFEVDF
2.5 mm(
515 m
confusion when wiring several ballasts together.
1.5 mm(
N
t5IF&DP4ZTUFNR%JHJUBM-JOLNBZCFXJSFE$MBTTPS
NN(
N
*&$1&-7/&$R$MBTT$POTVMUBQQMJDBCMFFMFDUSJDBM
NN(
155 m
codes for proper wiring practices.
LINE
Class 2
Bus
"QQMF J1BE J1PE5PVDI BOEJ1IPOFBSFUSBEFNBSLTPG"QQMF*OD SFHJTUFSFEJOUIF64BOEPUIFSDPVOUSJFT
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
EcoSystemR H-Series
369266e 7 03.08.12
Wiring Diagrams for T8, T5, and T5HO linear lamps

Wiring to One Lamp (C case shown)
#MVF
BLU
BLU
Red
RED
RED
Wiring to Two Lamps (C case shown)

#MVF
BLU
BLU
Yellow
YEL
YEL
RED
RED
Red
Wiring to Three Lamps (G case shown)

#MVF
BLU
BLU
YEL
YEL
Yellow
#MVF
Striped
B/W
B/W
Red
RED
RED
NOTICE
t.BYJNVNCBMMBTUUPMBNQTPDLFUMFBEMFOHUIJTGU N

t8JSFDPMPSTTIPXOBSFMBCFMFEPOUIFCBMMBTU CVUNBZWBSZEFQFOEJOHVQPOmYUVSFDPOTUSVDUJPO
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
EcoSystemR H-Series
369266e 8 03.08.12
EcoSystemR Power Wiring Diagrams

Neutral 3
E1
E1
E2
Digital
Bus
NEU
N/C
HOT
LINE
Constant Hot (Black)2, 3
EcoSystem
H-Series
Ballast
E2
Ground1
#BMMBTUJTHSPVOEFEWJBUIFDBTF
8JSFDPMPSTTIPXOBSFGPS-VUSPOR controls and ballasts only. Dimming control wires may not match ballast wire colors.
3
.VTUOPUCFXJSFEUPBTXJUDIJOHEFWJDFPSTZTUFNGVODUJPOBMJUZXJMMCFMPTU
1
2
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page
EcoSystemR H-Series
369266e 9 03.08.12
ATTENTION ELECTRICIANS
AND CONTRACTORS
Lamp Sockets
Ballast/Socket Leads
-VUSPOSFRVJSFTBOE/&." recommends sockets

DPNQMZJOHXJUI*&$*OTQFDUTPDLFUTGPS
NBSLTUPFOTVSFUIFTPDLFUDPNQMJFTXJUI*&$
5XPFYBNQMFTPGUIFTFNBSLTBSFE
and Q. Sockets must have a Z mark as well.
6TF3BQJE4UBSUTPDLFUT
Lead lengths from ballast to socket must not

FYDFFEGU N
GPS5 5 BOE5)0MJOFBS
lamps.
DO NOT use Instant Start sockets. See Lutron

"QQ/PUFPS/&."EPD-4%
Ballast Operating Temperature

#BMMBTUDBTFUFNQFSBUVSFNVTUOPUFYDFFE$
at any point on the ballast.
Wiring and Grounding
Lamp Socket Wiring Tester

6TF4PDLFU5FTUFS '%#-48555
UPWFSJGZ
proper lamp holder wiring.
#BMMBTUBOEMJHIUJOHmYUVSFNVTUCFFGGFDUJWFMZ
HSPVOEFE#BMMBTUTNVTUCFJOTUBMMFEQFSOBUJPOBM
and local electrical codes.
Available for purchase at www.lutronstore.com

Lamp Mounting
For proper lamp performance, lamps must be
mounted at the correct height from the grounded
metal surface. Having a fluorescent lamp too close
to the grounded metal will make the minimum
intensity too low and reduce lamp life. Having a
fluorescent lamp too far away from the grounded
metal will make the lamp flicker or not turn on at all.
Refer to the table below for lamp mounting height
requirements.
ATTENTION
FACILITIES MANAGERS
PERFORMANCE
Lamp Seasoning
$POTVMUMBNQNBOVGBDUVSFSTSFDPNNFOEBUJPOTPO
lamp seasoning prior to dimming.
Lamp Mounting Height Requirements

Lamp Type
Lamp Mounting Height
T8 Linear
1/8 to 3/4 in (3.2 to 19.1 mm)
T5 Linear
1/16 to 3/8 in (1.6 to 9.5 mm)

Lamp Socket
(side view)
Lamp
Mounting height
Ballast
Grounded
metal
IMPORTANT: Lamps must never touch ground

plane and should be placed without obstruction.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
SERVICE
Replacement Parts
6TF-VUSPO replacement parts with exact model
OVNCFST$POTVMU-VUSPOJGZPVIBWFBOZRVFTUJPOT
Further Information
For further information, please visit us at
www.lutron.com/ballasts or contact our 24-hour
5FDIOJDBM4VQQPSU$FOUFSBU
Page
LED Dimming Driver
Hi-lume A-Series L3D
369-325 Rev. D
1 10.25.11
Hi-lume A-Series Driver Overview

EcoSystem or 3-wire control
Hi-lume A-Series Driver is a high-performance LED
driver that provides smooth, continuous 1% dimming
for virtually any LED fixture, whether it requires constant current or constant voltage. It is the most
versatile LED driver offered today due to its compatibility with a wide variety of LED arrays, multiple form
factors, and numerous control options.
Features
t$POUJOVPVT nJDLFSGSFFEJNNJOHGSPNUP
t$PNQBUJCMFXJUI&OFSHJ4BWS/PEF with EcoSystem
unit, GRAFIK Eye 24DPOUSPMVOJU 1PX1BL
dimming module with EcoSystem, and Quantum
systems, allowing for integration into a planned or
existing EcoSystem lighting control solution. Please
see chart at the end of this document or contact
Lutron for details regarding compatible controls.
t4UBOEBSEXJSFMJOFWPMUBHFQIBTFDPOUSPMUFDIOPMPHZ
for consistent dimming performance and compatibility
with all LutronXJSFnVPSFTDFOUDPOUSPMT
t1SPUFDUFEGSPNNJTXJSFTPGJOQVUQPXFSUP
EcoSystem control inputs.
tQFSGPSNBODFUFTUFEBUGBDUPSZ
tCVSOFEJOBUGBDUPSZ
t"SBUFEMJGFUJNFPG IPVST!U c = 149 F ($

t6-SFDPHOJ[FEGPS6OJUFE4UBUFTBOE$BOBEB
t'$$1BSUDPNQMJBOUGPSDPNNFSDJBMBQQMJDBUJPOT
BU7 ~PS7 ~.
t1VMTF8JEUI.PEVMBUJPO 18.
PS$POTUBOU$VSSFOU
3FEVDUJPO $$3
EJNNJOHNFUIPETBWBJMBCMF4FF
"QQMJDBUJPO/PUFGPSEFUBJMT
t'PSNPSFJOGPSNBUJPOQMFBTFHPUP
www.lutron.com/HilumeLED
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Hi-lume A-Series, case type K

JO NN
8YJO NN
)Y
JO NN
-
Hi-lume A-Series, case type M

JO NN
8YJO NN
)YJO
NN
-
Page 1
LED Dimming Driver
369-325 Rev. D
2 10.25.11
Specifications
Standards
Performance
t%JNNJOH3BOHFUP
t0QFSBUJOH7PMUBHF7 ~BU)[
t"SBUFEMJGFUJNFPG IPVST!U c = 149 F ( $

$POUBDU-VUSPOGPSEFSBUJOHJOGPSNBUJPO
t1BUFOUFEUIFSNBMGPMECBDLQSPUFDUJPO
t-&%TUVSOPOUPBOZEJNNFEMFWFMXJUIPVUHPJOH
to full brightness.
t/POWPMBUJMFNFNPSZSFTUPSFTBMMESJWFSTFUUJOHTBGUFS
power failure.
t1PXFS'BDUPS BU8
t4UBOECZ1PXFS$POTVNQUJPO 8
BU8
t*OSVTI$VSSFOU "
t*OSVTI$VSSFOU-JNJUJOH$JSDVJUSZFMJNJOBUFTDJSDVJU
CSFBLFSUSJQQJOH TXJUDIBSDJOHBOESFMBZGBJMVSF
t0QFODJSDVJUQSPUFDUFE
t4IPSUDJSDVJUQSPUFDUFE
t5VSOPOUJNFTFDPOE
t18.%JNNJOH'SFRVFODZ)[
Environmental
t4PVOE3BUJOH$MBTT"
t3FMBUJWF)VNJEJUZ.BYJNVNOPODPOEFOTJOH
t.JOJNVNPQFSBUJOHBNCJFOUUFNQFSBUVSF
t a' $

Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
t.FFUT"/4*$DBUFHPSZ"TVSHFQSPUFDUJPO
TUBOEBSETVQUPBOEJODMVEJOHL7
t'$$1BSUDPNQMJBOUGPSDPNNFSDJBMBQQMJDBUJPOT
BU7 ~PS7 ~.
"/4*&4%4
t-VUSPOR2VBMJUZ4ZTUFNTSFHJTUFSFEUP*40

t6-SFDPHOJ[FE
t$MBTTPVUQVUBWBJMBCMF
t.PEFMTBWBJMBCMFUPNFFU-&%%SJWFSSFRVJSFNFOUT
for Energy Star 1.1.
Driver Wiring & Mounting
t%SJWFSJTHSPVOEFECZBNPVOUJOHTDSFXUPUIF
grounded fixture (or by terminal connection on the
,DBTF

t5FSNJOBMCMPDLTPOUIFESJWFSBDDFQUPOFTPMJEXJSF
QFSUFSNJOBMGSPNUP"8( UPNN(

t'JYUVSFNVTUCFHSPVOEFEJOBDDPSEBODFXJUIMPDBM
and national electrical codes.
t.BYJNVNESJWFSoUPo-&%MJHIUFOHJOFXJSFMFOHUIJT
GU N

Page 2
LED Dimming Driver
369-325 Rev. D
3 10.25.11
How to Build a Model Number: Hi-lume A-Series

L 3 DA4U1U _ _ - _ _ _ _ _
example: L3DA4U1UKS-HC070
For further assistance selecting your model
OVNCFS DPOUBDUPVS-&%$FOUFSPG&YDFMMFODF
BUPS-&%4!MVUSPODPN
Case Size:
,$PNQBDU
.4UJDL
Current Level (for Constant Current):

"""
Voltage Level (for Constant Voltage):
777
Case Style:
S = Studded

,DBTFPOMZ
//PO4UVEEFE
Driver Output:
$$POTUBOUDVSSFOUESJWFS
XJUIQVMTFXJEUINPEVMBUJPO 18.
EJNNJOH
"$POTUBOUDVSSFOUESJWFS
XJUIDPOTUBOUDVSSFOUSFEVDUJPO $$3
EJNNJOH
7$POTUBOUWPMUBHFESJWFS
EJNNJOH
LED Load Output Range (see the following pages for more detail):
$MBTT$POTUBOU7PMUBHF
$MBTT$POTUBOU$VSSFOU
"7o7
&"o"7o7
*TPMBUFE/PO$MBTT
$POTUBOU$VSSFOU
#7o7
'"o"7o7
:"o"7o7
$7o7
("o"7o7
;"o"7o7
%7o7
)"o"7o7
*"o"7o7
*TPMBUFE/PO$MBTT
$POTUBOU7PMUBHF
+"o"7o7
97o7
-"o"7o7
,"o"7o7
."o"7o7
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 3
LED Dimming Driver
369-325 Rev. D
4 10.25.11
A Output Range, Voltage Driver Models

Driver Type
Output Dimming Method
$POTUBOU7PMUBHF%SJWFS 1VMTF8JEUI.PEVMBUJPO 18.

$MBTT
Output Voltage
Output Current
Output Power
o7
o"
o8
Standards Recognition
Voltage Driver Operation Range:

Output Current vs. Output Voltage
Output Power vs. Output Voltage
3.5
3.3
40
3
3.3 A Max.
35
30
Output Power (W)
Output Current (A)
2.5
A
1.5
25
20
15
1
10
0.5
5
5 W Min.
0
0
10 12
20
30
40
50
60
10 12
20
Output Voltage (V)
30
40
50
60
Output Voltage (V)
Typical Performance Specifications:

Parameter
120 V
240 V
277 V
Test Conditions
t a $
7 8MPBE
.BY-JHIU0VUQVU
K enclosure
*OQVU$VSSFOU
N"
N"
N"
Power Factor

5)%
14%
17%
16%
Driver Efficiency
81%

Driver Efficiency vs. Output Power at 120 V
90
90
85
85
80
80
12.0 V
12.0 V
10.0 V
Efficiency (%)
Efficiency (%)
10.0 V
75
75
70
70
65
65
60
60
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
Output Power (W)
Job Name:
Job Number:
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
Output Power (W)
Model Numbers:
Page 4
LED Dimming Driver
369-325 Rev. D
5 10.25.11
B Output Range, Voltage Driver Models

Driver Type

$MBTT
Output Voltage
Output Current
Output Power
o7
o"
o8

3.5
40
3
40 W Max.
35
30
Output Power (W)
Output Current (A)
2.5
1.5
25
B
20
15
1
10
0.5
5
5 W Min.
0
0
10 12.5
20
30
40
50
60
10 12.5
20
Output Voltage (V)
30
40
50
60
Output Voltage (V)

Parameter
120 V
240 V
277 V
Test Conditions
t a $
7 8MPBE
.BY-JHIU0VUQVU
K enclosure
*OQVU$VSSFOU
N"
N"
N"
Power Factor

5)%

8%
9%
Driver Efficiency

86%
87%
90
90
20.0 V
20.0 V
85
85
18.0 V
18.0 V
12.5 V
12.5 V
80
Efficiency (%)
Efficiency (%)
80
75
75
70
70
65
65
60
60
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
Output Power (W)
Job Name:
Job Number:
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
Output Power (W)
Model Numbers:
Page 5
LED Dimming Driver
369-325 Rev. D
6 10.25.11
C Output Range, Voltage Driver Models

Driver Type

$MBTT
Output Voltage
Output Current
Output Power
o7
o"
o8

3.5
40
3
35
30
40 W Max.
Output Power (W)
Output Current (A)
2.5
1.5
25
C
20
15
1
10
0.5
5
5 W Min.
0
0
0
20.5 24
10
30
40
50
60
20.5 24
10
Output Voltage (V)
30
40
50
60
Output Voltage (V)

Parameter
120 V
240 V
277 V
Test Conditions
t a $
7 8MPBE
.BY-JHIU0VUQVU
K enclosure
*OQVU$VSSFOU
N"
N"
N"
Power Factor

5)%

12%
Driver Efficiency
86%
87%
88%
90
90
24 V
24 V
85
85
20.5 V
20.5 V
80
Efficiency (%)
Efficiency (%)
80
75
75
70
70
65
65
60
60
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
Output Power (W)
Job Name:
Job Number:
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
Output Power (W)
Model Numbers:
Page 6
LED Dimming Driver
369-325 Rev. D
7 10.25.11
D Output Range, Voltage Driver Models

Driver Type

$MBTT
Output Voltage
Output Current
Output Power
o7
o"
o8

3.5
40
3
35
30
Output Power (W)
Output Current (A)
2.5
40 W Max.
1.5
25
D
20
15
10
0.5
5
5 W Min.
0
0
0
10
20
24.5
38 40
30
50
60
10
20
Output Voltage (V)
24.5
30
38 40
50
60
Output Voltage (V)

Parameter
120 V
240 V
277 V
Test Conditions
t a $
7 8MPBE
.BY-JHIU0VUQVU
K enclosure
*OQVU$VSSFOU
N"
N"
N"
Power Factor

5)%
6%
9%
11%
Driver Efficiency
87%
88%
88%
90
90
38 V
36 V
85
85
24.5 V
24.5 V
80
80
Efficiency (%)
Efficiency (%)
36 V
75
38 V
75
70
70
65
65
60
60
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
Output Power (W)
Job Name:
Job Number:
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
Output Power (W)
Model Numbers:
Page 7
LED Dimming Driver
369-325 Rev. D
8 10.25.11
E Output Range, Current Driver Models

Driver Type
Output Voltage
$POTUBOU$VSSFOU%SJWFS $POTUBOU$VSSFOU3FEVDUJPO $$3

o7
$MBTT
Output Current
Output Power
o"
o8
Standards Recognition*
6-SFDPHOJ[FEGPS64"POMZ$BOBEJBOTUBOEBSETEPOPUBMMPX$MBTTSBUFEEFWJDFTUPFYDFFE7
Current Driver Operation Range:

Output Voltage vs. Output Current
Output Power vs. Output Current

40
60
54
35
30
Output Power (W)
Output Voltage (V)
50
40
30
20
54 V Max.
25
20
E
15
10
30 V Min.
10
5
0.20 0.35 0.50
0.7
1.05
1.4
2.1
0.20 0.35 0.50
0.7
1.05
Output Current (A)
1.4
1.75
2.1
Output Current (A)

Parameter
120 V
240 V
277 V
Test Conditions
t a $
" 8MPBE
.BY-JHIU0VUQVU
K enclosure
*OQVU$VSSFOU
N"
N"
N"
Power Factor

5)%

12%
Driver Efficiency


90
90
85
85
0.50 A
0.50 A
0.35 A
0.35 A
80
0.20 A
Efficiency (%)
Efficiency (%)
80
75
0.20 A
75
70
70
65
65
60
60
6
12
15
18
21
24
27
Job Name:
Job Number:
12
15
18
21
24
27
Output Power (W)
Output Power (W)
Model Numbers:
Page 8
LED Dimming Driver
369-325 Rev. D
9 10.25.11
F Output Range, Current Driver Models

Driver Type
Output Voltage

o7
$MBTT
Output Current
Output Power
o"
o8


40
60
54 V Max.
40 W Max.
54
35
30
F
Output Power (W)
Output Voltage (V)
50
40
30
20
F
25
20
30 V Min.
15
10
10
5
0.35
0.51
0.7
1.00
1.4
1.75
2.1
0.35 0.51
0.7
Output Current (A)
1.00
1.4
1.75
2.1
Output Current (A)

Parameter
120 V
240 V
277 V
Test Conditions
t a $
" 8MPBE
.BY-JHIU0VUQVU
K enclosure
*OQVU$VSSFOU
N"
N"
N"
Power Factor

5)%
8%
9%
11%
Driver Efficiency
84%
86%
86%
90
90
85
85
0.51 A
0.70 A
1.00 A
0.51 A
0.70 A
1.00 A
80
Efficiency (%)
Efficiency (%)
80
75
75
70
70
65
65
60
60
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
Job Name:
Job Number:
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
Output Power (W)
Output Power (W)
Model Numbers:
Page 9
LED Dimming Driver
369-325 Rev. D
10 10.25.11
G Output Range, Current Driver Models

Driver Type
Output Voltage
$POTUBOU$VSSFOU%SJWFS 1VMTF8JEUI.PEVMBUJPO 18.
o7
$MBTT
03
$POTUBOU$VSSFOU3FEVDUJPO $$3
Output Current
Output Power
o"
o8


40
60
35
50
Output Power (W)
Output Voltage (V)
30
40
30
20
25
20
20 V Max.
15
10
10
8
8 V Min.
0
0.20
0.35
0.7
1.05
1.4
1.75
2.1
0.20 0.35
0.7
Output Current (A)
1.05
1.4
1.75
2.1
Output Current (A)

Parameter
120 V
240 V
277 V
Test Conditions
t a $
" 8MPBE
.BY-JHIU0VUQVU
K enclosure
*OQVU$VSSFOU
N"
N"
N"
Power Factor

5)%
11%
16%

Driver Efficiency

79%
90
90
85
85
0.50 A
0.70 A
0.70 A
80
80
Efficiency (%)
Efficiency (%)
0.50 A
0.35 A
75
0.20 A
0.35 A
75
0.20 A
70
70
65
65
60
60
2
10
12
14
Job Name:
Job Number:
10
12
14
Output Power (W)
Output Power (W)
Model Numbers:
Page 10
LED Dimming Driver
369-325 Rev. D
11 10.25.11
H Output Range, Current Driver Models

Driver Type
Output Voltage
o7
$MBTT
03
Output Current
Output Power
o"
o8


40
60
35
50
Output Power (W)
Output Voltage (V)
30
40
38
30
H
20
25
38 V Max.
20
15
15
10
10
5
15 V Min.
0
0.20
0.35
0.7
1.05
1.4
1.75
2.1
0.20
0.35
0.7
Output Current (A)
1.05
1.4
1.75
2.1
Output Current (A)

Parameter
120 V
240 V
277 V
Test Conditions
t a $
" 8MPBE
.BY-JHIU0VUQVU
K enclosure
*OQVU$VSSFOU
N"
N"
N"
Power Factor

5)%
7%

12%
Driver Efficiency
84%

90
90
85
85
80
0.70 A
Efficiency (%)
Efficiency (%)
80
0.50 A
75
0.35 A
70
0.70 A
75
0.50 A
0.35 A
70
0.20 A
0.20 A
65
65
60
60
3
13
18
23
Job Name:
Job Number:
13
18
23
Output Power (W)
Output Power (W)
Model Numbers:
Page 11
LED Dimming Driver
369-325 Rev. D
12 10.25.11
I Output Range, Current Driver Models

Driver Type
Output Voltage
o7
$MBTT
03
Output Current
Output Power
o"
o8


40
60
35
50
Output Power (W)
Output Voltage (V)
30
40
30
20
20 V Max.
25
20
15
I
I
10
10
8
8 V Min.
0
0.35
0.71
1.05
1.4
1.75
2.1
0.20 0.35
0.7
Output Current (A)
1.05
1.4
1.75
2.1
Output Current (A)

Parameter
120 V
240 V
277 V
Test Conditions
t a $
" 8MPBE
.BY-JHIU0VUQVU
K enclosure
*OQVU$VSSFOU
N"
N"
N"
Power Factor

5)%

14%
Driver Efficiency
82%
81%
81%
90
90
85
85
0.71 A
1.05 A
80
Efficiency (%)
Efficiency (%)
1.05A
0.71A
80
75
75
70
70
65
65
60
60
6
12
15
18
21
Output Power (W)
Job Name:
Job Number:
12
15
18
21
Output Power (W)
Model Numbers:
Page 12
LED Dimming Driver
369-325 Rev. D
13 10.25.11
J Output Range, Current Driver Models

Driver Type
Output Voltage
o7
$MBTT
03
Output Current
Output Power
o"
o8


40
60
38 V Max.
35
50
Output Power (W)
Output Voltage (V)
30
40
38
30
J
20
15
25
J
20
15
10
10
5
15 V Min.
0
0.71
0.35
1.05
1.4
1.75
2.1
0.35
0.71
Output Current (A)
1.05
1.4
1.75
2.1
Output Current (A)

Parameter
120 V
240 V
277 V
Test Conditions
t a $
" 8MPBE
.BY-JHIU0VUQVU
K enclosure
*OQVU$VSSFOU
N"
N"
N"
Power Factor

5)%
6%
9%

Driver Efficiency

86%
86%
90
85
85
80
80
0.71 A
Efficiency (%)
Efficiency (%)

90
1.05 A
75
0.71 A
70
70
65
65
60
1.05 A
75
60
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
Job Name:
Job Number:
15
20
25
30
35
40
Output Power (W)
Output Power (W)
10
Model Numbers:
Page 13
LED Dimming Driver
369-325 Rev. D
14 10.25.11
K Output Range, Current Driver Models

Driver Type
Output Voltage
o7
$MBTT
03
Output Current
Output Power
o"
o8


40
60
35
20 V Max.
50
Output Power (W)
Output Voltage (V)
30
40
30
20
25
20
K
15
10
10
8
8 V Min.
5
0.7
0.35
1.06
1.4 1.5
1.75
2.1
0.35
0.7
1.4 1.5
1.05
Output Current (A)
1.75
2.1
Output Current (A)

Parameter
120 V
240 V
277 V
Test Conditions
t a $
" 8MPBE
.BY-JHIU0VUQVU
K enclosure
*OQVU$VSSFOU
N"
N"
N"
Power Factor

5)%

17%

Driver Efficiency
81%

82%
90
90
85
85
1.06 A
1.20 A
1.50 A
1.50 A
80
Efficiency (%)
Efficiency (%)
1.20 A
1.06 A
80
75
75
70
70
65
65
60
60
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
Job Name:
Job Number:
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
Output Power (W)
Output Power (W)
Model Numbers:
Page 14
LED Dimming Driver
369-325 Rev. D
15 10.25.11
L Output Range, Current Driver Models

Driver Type
Output Voltage
o7
$MBTT
03
Output Current
Output Power
o"
o8


40
60
35
50
Output Power (W)
Output Voltage (V)
30
40
40 W Max.
30
L
20
15
L
25
20
15 V Min.
15
10
10
5
0.7
0.35
1.06
1.4 1.5
1.75
2.1
0.35
0.7
1.4 1.5
1.05
Output Current (A)
1.75
2.1
Output Current (A)

Parameter
120 V
240 V
277 V
Test Conditions
t a $
" 8MPBE
.BY-JHIU0VUQVU
K enclosure
*OQVU$VSSFOU
N"
N"
N"
Power Factor

5)%
9%

12%
Driver Efficiency

90
85
85
80
80
Efficiency (%)
Efficiency (%)

90
1.20 A
1.06 A
1.50 A
75
1.50 A
75
70
70
65
65
60
1.20 A
1.06 A
60
16
19
22
25
28
31
34
37
40
Job Name:
Job Number:
19
22
25
28
31
34
37
40
Output Power (W)
Output Power (W)
16
Model Numbers:
Page 15
LED Dimming Driver
369-325 Rev. D
16 10.25.11
M Output Range, Current Driver Models

Driver Type
Output Voltage
o7
$MBTT
03
Output Current
Output Power
o"
o8


40
60
35
50
Output Power (W)
Output Voltage (V)
30
40
30
30 W Max.
20
25
M
20
15
10
10
8
8 V Min.
5
0
0
0
0.35
0.7
1.05
1.4 1.51
1.75
2.1
0.35
0.7
1.4 1.51
1.05
1.75
2.1
Output Current (A)
Output Current (A)

Parameter
120 V
240 V
277 V
Test Conditions
t a $
" 8MPBE
.BY-JHIU0VUQVU
K enclosure
*OQVU$VSSFOU
N"
N"
N"
Power Factor

5)%
12%
12%
12%
Driver Efficiency

81%
81%
90
85
85
80
80
Efficiency (%)
Efficiency (%)

90
75
1.51 A 1.75 A
2.10 A
75
1.51 A 1.75 A
70
70
65
65
60
2.10 A
60
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
Job Name:
Job Number:
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
Output Power (W)
Output Power (W)
12
Model Numbers:
Page 16
LED Dimming Driver
369-325 Rev. D
17 10.25.11
X Output Range, Voltage Driver Models

Driver Type
*TPMBUFE /PO$MBTT
Output Voltage
Output Current
Output Power
o7
o"
o8

3.5
40
3
35
30
Output Power (W)
Output Current (A)
2.5
1.5
40 W Max.
25
X
20
15
1
10
0.5
5 W Min.
X
0
0
0
10
20
30
38.5 40
50
60
10
20
30
38.5 40
50
60
Output Voltage (V)
Output Voltage (V)

Parameter
120 V
240 V
277 V
Test Conditions
t a $
7 8MPBE
.BY-JHIU0VUQVU
K enclosure
*OQVU$VSSFOU
N"
N"
N"
Power Factor

5)%
7%
6%
8%
Driver Efficiency
88%
89%
89%
90
90
85
85
38.5 V
38.5 V
80
Efficiency (%)
Efficiency (%)
80
48.0 V
75
60.0 V
48.0 V
75
60.0 V
70
70
65
65
60
60
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
Output Power (W)
Job Name:
Job Number:
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
Output Power (W)
Model Numbers:
Page 17
LED Dimming Driver
369-325 Rev. D
18 10.25.11
Y Output Range, Current Driver Models

Driver Type
Output Voltage
o7
*TPMBUFE /PO$MBTT
03
Output Current
Output Power
o"
o8


40
60
35
50
Output Power (W)
Output Voltage (V)
30
Y
40
30
20
60 V Max.
25
20
Y
15
10
30 V Min.
10
5
0
0
0
0.20
0.35 0.50
0.7
1.05
1.4
1.75
2.1
0.20
0.35 0.50
0.7
1.05
Output Current (A)
1.4
1.75
2.1
Output Current (A)

Parameter
120 V
240 V
277 V
Test Conditions
t a $
" 8MPBE
.BY-JHIU0VUQVU
K enclosure
*OQVU$VSSFOU
N"
N"
N"
Power Factor

5)%
8%
9%
9%
Driver Efficiency

86%
86%
90
90
0.50 A
0.50 A
85
85
0.35 A
0.35 A
0.20 A
0.20 A
80
Efficiency (%)
Efficiency (%)
80
75
75
70
70
65
65
60
60
6
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
Job Name:
Job Number:
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
Output Power (W)
Output Power (W)
Model Numbers:
Page 18
LED Dimming Driver
369-325 Rev. D
19 10.25.11
Z Output Range, Current Driver Models

Driver Type
Output Voltage
o7
*TPMBUFE /PO$MBTT
03
Output Current
Output Power
o"
o8


40
60
60 V Max.
40 W Max.
35
50
40
Output Power (W)
Output Voltage (V)
30
30
20
25
30 V Min.
20
15
10
10
5
0
0
0
0.35 0.51
0.7
1.00
1.4
1.75
2.1
0.35 0.51
0.7
Output Current (A)
1.4
1.00
1.75
2.1
Output Current (A)

Parameter
120 V
240 V
277 V
Test Conditions
t a $
" 8MPBE
.BY-JHIU0VUQVU
K enclosure
*OQVU$VSSFOU
N"
N"
N"
Power Factor

5)%

8%
8%
Driver Efficiency
84%
86%
86%
90
90
85
85
0.51 A
0.51 A
0.70 A
0.70 A
1.00 A
80
1.00 A
Efficiency (%)
Efficiency (%)
80
75
75
70
70
65
65
60
60
15
20
25
30
35
40
Job Name:
Job Number:
20
25
30
35
40
Output Power (W)
Output Power (W)
15
Model Numbers:
Page 19
LED Dimming Driver
369-325 Rev. D
20 10.25.11
K Case: Case Dimensions
J*
A
I*
H*
B
E D
F
G
K Case: Connector Location Dimensions
K*
K*
Q

5ISFBEFE
Studs*
L
M
N
R*
Q
"
#
$
%
&
JO NN
JO NN
JO NN
JO NN
JO NN

NPVOUJOHDFOUFS
'
(
)
*
+
,
JO NN
JO NN
JO NN
JO NN
JO NN
JO NN
-
.
/
0
1
2
JO NN
JO NN
JO NN
JO NN

JO NN
JO NN
3 JO NN
* Applies to studded K case only.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 20
LED Dimming Driver
369-325 Rev. D
21 10.25.11
K Case: Side Entry Connector Location Dimensions (Non-Studded)
4
5
6
7
JO NN
JO NN
JO NN
JO NN
U
V
M Case: Case Dimensions
"
#

$
%
JO NN
JO NN
NPVOUJOHDFOUFS
JO NN
JO NN
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 21
LED Dimming Driver
369-325 Rev. D
22 10.25.11
Wiring Diagram for 3-Wire Control

Switched Hot (Black)
To
3-wire
Dimming
Control
Dimmed Hot (Orange)
+V 3 (Red)
LED
light
engine
Hi-lume
A-Series
-V 3 (Black)
Neutral (White)
Ground2
Ground1 (Green)
Wiring Diagram for EcoSystem Digital Control

Switched Hot (Black)
To
Line
Voltage
+V 3 (Red)
Neutral (White)
Ground1 (Green)
LED
light
engine
Hi-lume
A-Series
-V 3 (Black)
2
Ground
E1 (Purple)
To
EcoSystem
Digital Link
E2 (Purple)
Note:$PMPSTTIPXODPSSFTQPOEUPUFSNJOBMCMPDLTPOESJWFS
1
Ground wire connection available on K case models only.

Fixture and driver case must be grounded in accordance with local and national electrical codes.

.BYJNVNESJWFSoUPo-&%MJHIUFOHJOFXJSFMFOHUIJTGU N

Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 22
LED Dimming Driver
369-325 Rev. D
23 10.25.11
Compatible Controls
t(VBSBOUFFEQFSGPSNBODFTQFDJmDBUJPOTXJUIUIFDPOUSPMTMJTUFEJOUIFDIBSUCFMPX
t'PSBTTJTUBODFTFMFDUJOHDPOUSPMT DPOUBDUPVS-&%$FOUFSPG&YDFMMFODFBUPS-&%4!MVUSPODPN
Product
Part Number
/PWB5*
/PWB
Fixtures per Control1
Measured Light
Output Range
120 V
277 V
120 V
277 V
/5'
/5'
o
o
o
/5'1
/5'1
o
o
o
/'
/'
o
o
o
/'1
/'1
o
o
o
o
o
7BSFP
7'
4LZMBSL
4'1
SF-12P-277-
o
o
o
4'1
4'1
o
o
o
%7'1
%7'1
o
o
o
%74$'1
%74$'1
o
o
o
Ariadni
":'1
":'1
o
o
o
7JFSUJ
75'"
o
o
o
.BFTUSP
."'".
."'".
o
o
o
.4$'".
.4$'".
o
o
o
o
o
o
Diva
.BFTUSP8JSFMFTT
.3''"/%7
3BEJP5PVDI
35"39'
o
o
o
Spacer System
SPSF-6A-
SPSF-6A-277-
o
o
o
414'".
414'".
o
o
o
Lyneo Lx
-9'1-
-9'1-
o
o
o
RadioRA 2
33%'"/%7
o
o
o
)PNF8PSLT QS
)23%'"/%7
o
o
o
Interfaces2
1)1.'
o
o
1)1.'%7
o
o
o
GRX-FDBI-16A
o
o
o
1PX1BLEJNNJOH.PEVMFXJUI 3.+&$0%7#
EcoSystem
QFS&DP4ZTUFNMJOL
o
&OFSHJ4BWS/PEF with
EcoSystem
24/&$04 24/&$04
QFS&DP4ZTUFNMJOL
o
GRAFIK Eye QS with

EcoSystem
QSGRJ-_E,
QSGR-_E
QFS&DP4ZTUFNMJOL
o
Quantum
7BSJPVT
QFS&DP4ZTUFNMJOL
o
1
'JYUVSFTQFS$POUSPMWBMVFBTTVNFTB8mYUVSF/VNCFSPGmYUVSFTNBZCFIJHIFSJGXBUUBHFJTMFTTUIBO8BOENBZCFMPXFSJG
ganged. See control specification submittal sheet for details.
2 'PSVTFXJUIXJSFDPOUSPMTPS$PNNFSDJBM4ZTUFNT 3BEJP3" Systems or Home Systems applications.
NOTE: $POUBDU-VUSPO5FDIOJDBM4VQQPSUGPSEFSBUJOHSVMFTXIFOVTJOHXBMMCPYDPOUSPMTPOUIF)JMVNF A-Series LED Driver in
multi-gang applications.
For the list of compatible controls, visit lutron.com/HiLumeLEDBOETFMFDUi&DP4ZTUFNXJSF$POUSPM3FQPSU$BSEw
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 23
LED Dimming Driver
369-325 Rev. D
24 10.25.11
EcoSystem Wiring Diagrams

EcoSystem Digital Link Overview
LINE
GND
NEU
DH
Digital
Bus
t5IF&DP4ZTUFN%JHJUBM-JOLXJSJOH &BOE&

SH
connects the digital ballasts and drivers together to form
E1
E2
a lighting control system.
t&BDI&DP4ZTUFN%JHJUBM-JOLTVQQPSUTVQUPEJHJUBM
ballasts, LED drivers or EcoSystem.PEVMFT FH
Driver Terminals
$#.+" $91+"
PDDVQBODZTFOTPST
PDDVQBODZTFOTPSTXJUI&OFSHJ4BWS/PEF with
EcoSystem
EBZMJHIUTFOTPST BOEXBMMTUBUJPOT
or IR receivers.*
t4FOTPSTEPOPUEJSFDUMZDPOOFDUUP)J-VNF A-Series
GND
LED drivers.
NEU
DH
t&BOE& &DP4ZTUFNEJHJUBMMJOLXJSFT
BSFQPMBSJUZ
SH
insensitive and can be wired in any topology.
E1
E2
t"O&OFSHJ4BWS/PEF with EcoSystem unit, GRAFIK
Eye QS control unit with EcoSystem 1PX1BL
dimming module with EcoSystem, or Quantum
Driver Terminals
system provides power for the EcoSystem%JHJUBM-JOL
5PUIFEcoSystem Digital Bus and additional drivers
and supports system programming.*
and/or ballasts
t"MM&DP4ZTUFN%JHJUBM-JOLQSPHSBNNJOHJTDPNQMFUFE
by using the Energi Savr App for Apple iPad, iPod
Notes
Touch or iPhone mobile digital devices, GRAFIK Eye
t5IF&DP4ZTUFNR%JHJUBM-JOL4VQQMZEPFTOPUIBWF
QS with EcoSystem 1PX1BL dimming module with
UPCFMPDBUFEBUUIFFOEPGUIF%JHJUBM-JOL
EcoSystem, or Quantum System.
t&DP4ZTUFNR%JHJUBM-JOLMFOHUIJTMJNJUFECZUIFXJSF
HBVHFVTFEGPS&BOE&BTGPMMPXT
EcoSystem Digital Link Wiring
LINE
Digital
Bus
t%SJWFS&DP4ZTUFN%JHJUBM-JOLUFSNJOBMTPOMZBDDFQU
POFUP"8( UPNN(
TPMJEDPQQFSXJSF
per terminal.
t.BLFTVSFUIBUUIFTVQQMZCSFBLFSUPUIF%JHJUBM%SJWFS
and EcoSystem%JHJUBM-JOL4VQQMZJT0''XIFOXJSJOH
t$POOFDUUIFUXPDPOEVDUPSTUPUIFUXP%JHJUBM%SJWFS
terminals E1 and E2 as shown.
t6TJOHUXPEJGGFSFOUDPMPSTGPS&BOE&XJMMSFEVDF
confusion when wiring several drivers together.
t5IF&DP4ZTUFN%JHJUBM-JOLNBZCFXJSFE$MBTTPS
*&$1&-7/&$$MBTT$POTVMUBQQMJDBCMFFMFDUSJDBM
codes for proper wiring practices.
1PX1BL dimming module with EcoSystem provides power for
the EcoSystem%JHJUBM-JOLBOEDBOTVQQPSUEJHJUBMCBMMBTUT -&%
drivers or EcoSystem.PEVMFT 8JSFMFTT0DDVQBODZ4FOTPST
8JSFMFTT%BZMJHIU4FOTPS BOE1JDP8JSFMFTT$POUSPMMFST
Wire Gauge
Digital Link Length

(max)
"8(
GU
"8(
GU
"8(
GU
"8(
GU
Wire Size
Digital Link Length

(max)
NN(
828 m
NN(
N
NN(
N
NN(
N
NN(
N
"QQMF J1BE J1PE5PVDI BOEJ1IPOFBSFUSBEFNBSLTPG"QQMF*OD SFHJTUFSFEJOUIF64BOEPUIFSDPVOUSJFT
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 24
LED Dimming Driver
369-325 Rev. D
ELECTRICIANS AND CONTRACTORS
FACILITIES MANAGERS
Driver Leads
SERVICE
.BYJNVNESJWFSoUPo-&%MJHIUFOHJOFXJSFMFOHUIJT
GU N

Warranty

Driver and lighting fixture must be grounded.
Drivers must be installed per national and local
electrical codes.
LED Load Replacement
'PS$MBTTSBUFEESJWFST UIF-&%MPBEDBOCF
changed while the driver is installed and powered.
Maximum Driver Operating Temperature
Driver case temperature (t c
NVTUOPUFYDFFE6-
conditions of acceptability in end product.
25 10.25.11
For warranty information, please visit

IUUQXXXMVUSPODPN5FDIOJDBM%PDVNFOU-JCSBSZ
#BMMBTUBOE%SJWFS8BSSBOUZQEf
Replacement Parts
8IFOPSEFSJOH-VUSPO replacement parts please
QSPWJEFUIFGVMMNPEFMOVNCFS$POTVMU-VUSPOJGZPV
have any questions.
Further Information
www.lutron.com/hilumeLED or contact our
-&%$POUSPM$FOUFSPG&YDFMMFODFBU
PS-&%T!MVUSPODPN
'PS IPVSMJGFUJNF ESJWFSDBTFUFNQFSBUVSF U c
NVTUOPUFYDFFE' $

Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 25
LED Dimming Driver
Hi-lumeR A-Series LTE
369-543 Rev. A
1 10.25.11
Hi-lumeR A-Series Driver Overview

Forward Phase Control
Hi-lume A-Series Driver is a high-performance LED
driver that provides smooth, continuous 1% dimming
for virtually any LED fixture, whether it requires
constant current or constant voltage. It is the most
versatile LED driver offered today due to its
compatibility with a wide variety of LED arrays,
multiple form factors, and numerous control options.
Features
t$POUJOVPVT nJDLFSGSFFEJNNJOHGSPNUP
t(VBSBOUFFEDPNQBUJCJMJUZXJUITFMFDUFE/PWB5*,
Maestro Wireless, Radio RA )PNF8PSLT QS,
(SBmL&ZF24 (SBmL4ZTUFN, Quantum and
Stanza dimmers. Please see chart at the end of this
document or contact Lutron for details regarding
compatible controls.
tQFSGPSNBODFUFTUFEBUGBDUPSZ
tCVSOFEJOBUGBDUPSZ
t"SBUFEMJGFUJNFPG IPVST!U c = 149 F ($

t6-SFDPHOJ[FEGPS6OJUFE4UBUFTBOE$BOBEB
t'$$1BSUDPNQMJBOUGPSDPNNFSDJBMBOESFTJEFOUJBM
BQQMJDBUJPOTBU7 ~.
t1VMTFXJEUINPEVMBUJPO 18.
PSDPOTUBOUDVSSFOU
SFEVDUJPO $$3
EJNNJOHNFUIPETBWBJMBCMF4FF
"QQMJDBUJPO/PUFGPSEFUBJMT
t'PSNPSFJOGPSNBUJPOQMFBTFHPUP
www.lutron.com/HilumeLED
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Hi-lume A-Series, case type K

JO NN
8YJO NN
)Y
JO NN
-
Hi-lume A-Series, case type M

JO NN
8YJO NN
)YJO
NN
-
Page 1
LED Dimming Driver
369-543 Rev. A
2 10.25.11
Specifications
Standards
Performance
t%JNNJOH3BOHFUP
t0QFSBUJOH7PMUBHF7 ~BU)[
'PSXBSE1IBTF$POUSPM
t"SBUFEMJGFUJNFPG IPVST!U c = 149 F ( $

$POUBDU-VUSPOGPSEFSBUJOHJOGPSNBUJPO
t1BUFOUFEUIFSNBMGPMECBDLQSPUFDUJPO
t-&%TUVSOPOUPBOZEJNNFEMFWFMXJUIPVUHPJOH
to full brightness.
t/POWPMBUJMFNFNPSZSFTUPSFTBMMESJWFSTFUUJOHTBGUFS
power failure.
t1PXFS'BDUPS BU8
BU8
t*OSVTI$VSSFOU "
t*OSVTI$VSSFOU-JNJUJOH$JSDVJUSZFMJNJOBUFTDJSDVJU
CSFBLFSUSJQQJOH TXJUDIBSDJOHBOESFMBZGBJMVSF
t0QFODJSDVJUQSPUFDUFE
t4IPSUDJSDVJUQSPUFDUFE
t5VSOPOUJNFTFDPOE
t18.%JNNJOH'SFRVFODZ)[
Environmental
t4PVOE3BUJOH$MBTT"
t3FMBUJWF)VNJEJUZ.BYJNVNOPODPOEFOTJOH
t.JOJNVNPQFSBUJOHBNCJFOUUFNQFSBUVSF U a

' $

Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
t.FFUT"/4*$DBUFHPSZ"TVSHFQSPUFDUJPO
TUBOEBSETVQUPBOEJODMVEJOHL7
t'$$1BSUDPNQMJBOUGPSDPNNFSDJBMBOE
residential applications.
"/4*&4%4
t-VUSPOR2VBMJUZ4ZTUFNTSFHJTUFSFEUP*40

t6-SFDPHOJ[FE
t$MBTTPVUQVUBWBJMBCMF
t.PEFMTBWBJMBCMFUPNFFU-&%%SJWFSSFRVJSFNFOUT
for Energy Star 1.1.
Driver Wiring & Mounting
t%SJWFSJTHSPVOEFECZBNPVOUJOHTDSFXUPUIF
grounded fixture (or by terminal connection on the
,DBTF

t5FSNJOBMCMPDLTPOUIFESJWFSBDDFQUPOFTPMJEXJSF
QFSUFSNJOBMGSPNUP"8( UPNN(

t'JYUVSFNVTUCFHSPVOEFEJOBDDPSEBODFXJUIMPDBM
and national electrical codes.
t.BYJNVNESJWFSoUPo-&%MJHIUFOHJOFXJSFMFOHUIJT
GU N

Page 2
LED Dimming Driver
369-543 Rev. A
3 10.25.11
How to Build a Model Number: Hi-lume A-Series

LTE A4U1U _ _ - _ _ _ _ _
example: LTEA4U1UKS-HC070
For further assistance selecting your model
OVNCFS DPOUBDUPVS-&%$FOUFSPG&YDFMMFODF
BUPS-&%4!MVUSPODPN
Case Size:
,$PNQBDU
.4UJDL
Current Level (for Constant Current):

"""
Voltage Level (for Constant Voltage):
777
Case Style:
S = Studded

,DBTFPOMZ
//PO4UVEEFE
Driver Output:
$$POTUBOUDVSSFOUESJWFS
EJNNJOH
"$POTUBOUDVSSFOUESJWFS
XJUIDPOTUBOUDVSSFOUSFEVDUJPO $$3
EJNNJOH
7$POTUBOUWPMUBHFESJWFS
EJNNJOH
LED Load Output Range (see the following pages for more detail):
$MBTT$POTUBOU7PMUBHF
$MBTT$POTUBOU$VSSFOU
"7o7
&"o"7o7
*TPMBUFE/PO$MBTT
$POTUBOU$VSSFOU
#7o7
'"o"7o7
:"o"7o7
$7o7
("o"7o7
;"o"7o7
%7o7
)"o"7o7
*"o"7o7
*TPMBUFE/PO$MBTT
$POTUBOU7PMUBHF
+"o"7o7
97o7
-"o"7o7
,"o"7o7
."o"7o7
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 3
LED Dimming Driver
369-543 Rev. A
4 10.25.11
A Output Range, Voltage Driver Models

Driver Type

$MBTT
Output Voltage
Output Current
Output Power
o7
o"
o8

3.5
3.3
40
3
3.3 A Max.
35
30
Output Power (W)
Output Current (A)
2.5
A
1.5
25
20
15
1
10
0.5
5
5 W Min.
0
0
10 12
20
30
40
50
60
Output Voltage (V)
10 12
20
30
40
50
60
Output Voltage (V)

Parameter
Value
Test Conditions
t a $
7 8MPBE
.BY-JHIU0VUQVU
K enclosure
7 XJUIPVUBEJNNFS
*OQVU$VSSFOU
N"
Power Factor

5)%
16%
Driver Efficiency


90
85
Efficiency (%)
80
12.0 V
10.0 V
75
70
65
60
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
Output Power (W)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 4
LED Dimming Driver
369-543 Rev. A
5 10.25.11
B Output Range, Voltage Driver Models

Driver Type

$MBTT
Output Voltage
Output Current
Output Power
o7
o"
o8

3.5
40
3
40 W Max.
35
30
Output Power (W)
Output Current (A)
2.5
1.5
25
B
20
15
1
10
0.5
5
5 W Min.
0
0
10 12.5
20
30
40
50
60
Output Voltage (V)
10 12.5
20
30
40
50
60
Output Voltage (V)

Parameter
Value
Test Conditions
t a $
7 8MPBE
.BY-JHIU0VUQVU
K enclosure
7 XJUIPVUBEJNNFS
*OQVU$VSSFOU
N"
Power Factor

5)%
9%
Driver Efficiency


90
85
20.0 V
18.0 V
Efficiency (%)
80
12.5 V
75
70
65
60
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
Output Power (W)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 5
LED Dimming Driver
369-543 Rev. A
6 10.25.11
C Output Range, Voltage Driver Models

Driver Type

$MBTT
Output Voltage
Output Current
Output Power
o7
o"
o8

3.5
40
3
35
30
40 W Max.
Output Power (W)
Output Current (A)
2.5
1.5
25
C
20
15
1
10
0.5
5
5 W Min.
0
0
0
20.5 24
10
30
40
50
60
Output Voltage (V)
10
20.5 24
30
40
50
60
Output Voltage (V)

Parameter
Value
Test Conditions
t a $
7 8MPBE
.BY-JHIU0VUQVU
K enclosure
7 XJUIPVUBEJNNFS
*OQVU$VSSFOU
N"
Power Factor

5)%

Driver Efficiency
84%

90
85
24 V
Efficiency (%)
80
20.5 V
75
70
65
60
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
Output Power (W)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 6
LED Dimming Driver
369-543 Rev. A
7 10.25.11
D Output Range, Voltage Driver Models

Driver Type

$MBTT
Output Voltage
Output Current
Output Power
o7
o"
o8

3.5
40
3
35
30
Output Power (W)
Output Current (A)
2.5
40 W Max.
1.5
25
D
20
15
10
0.5
5
5 W Min.
0
0
0
10
20
24.5
30
38 40
50
60
Output Voltage (V)
10
20
24.5
30
38 40
50
60
Output Voltage (V)

Parameter
Value
Test Conditions
t a $
7 8MPBE
.BY-JHIU0VUQVU
K enclosure
7 XJUIPVUBEJNNFS
*OQVU$VSSFOU
N"
Power Factor

5)%

Driver Efficiency
86%

90
36 V
38 V
85
24.5 V
Efficiency (%)
80
75
70
65
60
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
Output Power (W)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 7
LED Dimming Driver
369-543 Rev. A
8 10.25.11
E Output Range, Current Driver Models

Driver Type
Output Voltage

o7
$MBTT
Output Current
Output Power
o"
o8


40
60
54
35
30
Output Power (W)
Output Voltage (V)
50
40
30
20
54 V Max.
25
20
E
15
10
30 V Min.
10
5
0.20 0.35 0.50
0.7
1.05
1.4
2.1
Output Current (A)
0.20 0.35 0.50
0.7
1.05
1.4
1.75
2.1
Output Current (A)

Parameter
Value
Test Conditions
t a $
" 8MPBE
.BY-JHIU0VUQVU
K enclosure
7 XJUIPVUBEJNNFS
*OQVU$VSSFOU
N"
Power Factor

5)%

Driver Efficiency


90
85
0.50 A
0.35 A
Efficiency (%)
80
75
0.20 A
70
65
60
6
12
15
18
21
24
27
Output Power (W)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 8
LED Dimming Driver
369-543 Rev. A
9 10.25.11
F Output Range, Current Driver Models

Driver Type
Output Voltage

o7
$MBTT
Output Current
Output Power
o"
o8


40
60
54 V Max.
40 W Max.
54
35
30
F
Output Power (W)
Output Voltage (V)
50
40
30
20
F
25
20
30 V Min.
15
10
10
5
0.51
0.35
0.7
1.00
1.4
1.75
2.1
Output Current (A)
0.35 0.51
0.7
1.00
1.4
1.75
2.1
Output Current (A)

Parameter
Value
Test Conditions
t a $
" 8MPBE
.BY-JHIU0VUQVU
K enclosure
7 XJUIPVUBEJNNFS
*OQVU$VSSFOU
N"
Power Factor

5)%

Driver Efficiency
82%

90
85
0.70 A
1.00 A
80
Efficiency (%)
0.51 A
75
70
65
60
15
20
25
30
35
40
Output Power (W)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 9
LED Dimming Driver
369-543 Rev. A
10 10.25.11
G Output Range, Current Driver Models

Driver Type
Output Voltage
o7
$MBTT
03
Output Current
Output Power
o"
o8


40
60
35
50
Output Power (W)
Output Voltage (V)
30
40
30
20
25
20
20 V Max.
15
10
10
8
8 V Min.
0
0.20
0.35
0.7
1.05
1.4
1.75
2.1
Output Current (A)
0.20 0.35
0.7
1.05
1.4
1.75
2.1
Output Current (A)

Parameter
Value
Test Conditions
t a $
" 8MPBE
.BY-JHIU0VUQVU
K enclosure
7 XJUIPVUBEJNNFS
*OQVU$VSSFOU
N"
Power Factor

5)%
12%
Driver Efficiency


80
0.70 A
75
0.50 A
70
Efficiency (%)
0.35 A
65
0.20 A
60
55
50
45
2
10
12
14
Output Power (W)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 10
LED Dimming Driver
369-543 Rev. A
11 10.25.11
H Output Range, Current Driver Models

Driver Type
Output Voltage
o7
$MBTT
03
Output Current
Output Power
o"
o8


40
60
35
50
Output Power (W)
Output Voltage (V)
30
40
38
30
H
20
25
38 V Max.
20
15
15
10
10
5
15 V Min.
0
0.20
0.35
0.7
1.05
1.4
1.75
2.1
Output Current (A)
0.20
0.35
0.7
1.05
1.4
1.75
2.1
Output Current (A)

Parameter
Value
Test Conditions
t a $
" 8MPBE
.BY-JHIU0VUQVU
K enclosure
7 XJUIPVUBEJNNFS
*OQVU$VSSFOU
N"
Power Factor

5)%
8%
Driver Efficiency


90
85
0.70 A
0.50 A
Efficiency (%)
80
0.35 A
75
70
0.20 A
65
60
3
13
18
23
Output Power (W)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 11
LED Dimming Driver
369-543 Rev. A
12 10.25.11
I Output Range, Current Driver Models

Driver Type
Output Voltage
o7
$MBTT
03
Output Current
Output Power
o"
o8


40
60
35
50
Output Power (W)
Output Voltage (V)
30
40
30
20
20 V Max.
25
20
15
I
I
10
10
8
8 V Min.
0
0.35
0.71
1.05
1.4
1.75
2.1
Output Current (A)
0.20 0.35
0.7
1.05
1.4
1.75
2.1
Output Current (A)

Parameter
Value
Test Conditions
t a $
" 8MPBE
.BY-JHIU0VUQVU
K enclosure
7 XJUIPVUBEJNNFS
*OQVU$VSSFOU
N"
Power Factor

5)%
11%
Driver Efficiency


90
85
80
1.05 A
Efficiency (%)
0.71 A
75
70
65
60
6
12
15
18
21
Output Power (W)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 12
LED Dimming Driver
369-543 Rev. A
13 10.25.11
J Output Range, Current Driver Models

Driver Type
Output Voltage
o7
$MBTT
03
Output Current
Output Power
o"
o8


40
60
38 V Max.
35
50
Output Power (W)
Output Voltage (V)
30
40
38
30
J
20
15
25
J
20
15
10
10
5
15 V Min.
0
0.71
0.35
1.05
1.4
1.75
2.1
Output Current (A)
0.35
0.71
1.05
1.4
1.75
2.1
Output Current (A)

Parameter
Value
Test Conditions
t a $
" 8MPBE
.BY-JHIU0VUQVU
K enclosure
7 XJUIPVUBEJNNFS
*OQVU$VSSFOU
N"
Power Factor

5)%

Driver Efficiency
84%

90
85
Efficiency (%)
80
1.05 A
75
0.71 A
70
65
60
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
Output Power (W)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 13
LED Dimming Driver
369-543 Rev. A
14 10.25.11
K Output Range, Current Driver Models

Driver Type
Output Voltage
o7
$MBTT
03
Output Current
Output Power
o"
o8


40
60
35
20 V Max.
50
Output Power (W)
Output Voltage (V)
30
40
30
20
25
20
K
15
10
10
8
8 V Min.
5
0.7
0.35
1.06
1.4 1.5
1.75
2.1
Output Current (A)
0.35
0.7
1.05
1.4 1.5
1.75
2.1
Output Current (A)

Parameter
Value
Test Conditions
t a $
" 8MPBE
.BY-JHIU0VUQVU
K enclosure
7 XJUIPVUBEJNNFS
*OQVU$VSSFOU
N"
Power Factor

5)%
12%
Driver Efficiency


90
85
1.20 A
80
1.50 A
Efficiency (%)
1.06 A
75
70
65
60
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
Output Power (W)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 14
LED Dimming Driver
369-543 Rev. A
15 10.25.11
L Output Range, Current Driver Models

Driver Type
Output Voltage
o7
$MBTT
03
Output Current
Output Power
o"
o8


40
60
35
50
Output Power (W)
Output Voltage (V)
30
40
40 W Max.
30
L
20
15
L
25
20
15 V Min.
15
10
10
5
0.7
0.35
1.06
1.4 1.5
1.75
2.1
Output Current (A)
0.35
0.7
1.05
1.4 1.5
1.75
2.1
Output Current (A)

Parameter
Value
Test Conditions
t a $
" 8MPBE
.BY-JHIU0VUQVU
K enclosure
7 XJUIPVUBEJNNFS
*OQVU$VSSFOU
N"
Power Factor

5)%
9%
Driver Efficiency
82%

90
85
Efficiency (%)
80
1.20 A
1.06 A
1.50 A
75
70
65
60
16
19
22
25
28
31
34
37
40
Output Power (W)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 15
LED Dimming Driver
369-543 Rev. A
16 10.25.11
M Output Range, Current Driver Models

Driver Type
Output Voltage
o7
$MBTT
03
Output Current
Output Power
o"
o8


40
60
35
50
Output Power (W)
Output Voltage (V)
30
40
30
30 W Max.
20
25
M
20
15
10
10
8
8 V Min.
5
0
0
0
0.35
0.7
1.05
1.4 1.51
1.75
2.1
0.35
0.7
1.05
1.4 1.51
1.75
2.1
Output Current (A)
Output Current (A)

Parameter
Value
Test Conditions
t a $
" 8MPBE
.BY-JHIU0VUQVU
K enclosure
7 XJUIPVUBEJNNFS
*OQVU$VSSFOU
N"
Power Factor

5)%
14%
Driver Efficiency


90
85
Efficiency (%)
80
75
70
1.51 A
1.75 A
2.10 A
65
60
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
Output Power (W)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 16
LED Dimming Driver
369-543 Rev. A
17 10.25.11
X Output Range, Voltage Driver Models

Driver Type
*TPMBUFE /PO$MBTT
Output Voltage
Output Current
Output Power
o7
o"
o8

3.5
40
3
35
30
Output Power (W)
Output Current (A)
2.5
1.5
40 W Max.
25
X
20
15
1
10
0.5
5 W Min.
X
0
0
0
10
20
30
38.5 40
50
60
10
20
30
38.5 40
50
60
Output Voltage (V)
Output Voltage (V)

Parameter
Value
Test Conditions
t a $
7 8MPBE
.BY-JHIU0VUQVU
K enclosure
7 XJUIPVUBEJNNFS
*OQVU$VSSFOU
N"
Power Factor

5)%

Driver Efficiency
86%

90
85
38.5 V
60.0 V
Efficiency (%)
80
48.0 V
75
70
65
60
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
Output Power (W)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 17
LED Dimming Driver
369-543 Rev. A
18 10.25.11
Y Output Range, Current Driver Models

Driver Type
Output Voltage
o7
*TPMBUFE /PO$MBTT
03
Output Current
Output Power
o"
o8


40
60
35
50
Output Power (W)
Output Voltage (V)
30
Y
40
30
20
60 V Max.
25
20
Y
15
10
30 V Min.
10
5
0
0
0
0.20
0.35 0.50
0.7
1.05
1.4
1.75
2.1
Output Current (A)
0.20
0.35 0.50
0.7
1.05
1.4
1.75
2.1
Output Current (A)

Parameter
Value
Test Conditions
t a $
" 8MPBE
.BY-JHIU0VUQVU
K enclosure
7 XJUIPVUBEJNNFS
*OQVU$VSSFOU
N"
Power Factor

5)%
11%
Driver Efficiency
84%

90
85
0.50 A
Efficiency (%)
80
0.35 A
75
0.20 A
70
65
60
6
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
Output Power (W)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 18
LED Dimming Driver
369-543 Rev. A
19 10.25.11
Z Output Range, Current Driver Models

Driver Type
Output Voltage
o7
*TPMBUFE /PO$MBTT
03
Output Current
Output Power
o"
o8


40
60
60 V Max.
40 W Max.
35
50
40
Output Power (W)
Output Voltage (V)
30
30
20
25
30 V Min.
20
15
10
10
5
0
0
0
0.35 0.51
0.7
1.00
1.4
1.75
2.1
Output Current (A)
0.35 0.51
0.7
1.00
1.4
1.75
2.1
Output Current (A)

Parameter
Value
Test Conditions
t a $
" 8MPBE
.BY-JHIU0VUQVU
K enclosure
7 XJUIPVUBEJNNFS
*OQVU$VSSFOU
N"
Power Factor

5)%
8%
Driver Efficiency


90
85
0.70 A
0.51 A
1.00 A
Efficiency (%)
80
75
70
65
60
15
20
25
30
35
40
Output Power (W)
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 19
LED Dimming Driver
369-543 Rev. A
20 10.25.11
K Case: Case Dimensions
J*
A
I*
H*
B
E D
F
G
K Case: Connector Location Dimensions
K*
K*
Q

5ISFBEFE
Studs*
L
M
N
R*
Q
"
#
$
%
&
JO NN
JO NN
JO NN
JO NN
JO NN

NPVOUJOHDFOUFS
'
(
)
*
+
,
JO NN
JO NN
JO NN
JO NN
JO NN
JO NN
-
.
/
0
1
2
JO NN
JO NN
JO NN
JO NN

JO NN
JO NN
3 JO NN
* Applies to studded K case only.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 20
LED Dimming Driver
369-543 Rev. A
21 10.25.11
K Case: Side Entry Connector Location Dimensions (Non-Studded)
4
5
6
7
JO NN
JO NN
JO NN
JO NN
U
V
M Case: Case Dimensions
"
#

$
%
JO NN
JO NN
NPVOUJOHDFOUFS
JO NN
JO NN
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 21
LED Dimming Driver
369-543 Rev. A
22 10.25.11
Wiring Diagram for Forward Phase Control

+V 2 (Red)
Dimmed Hot (Black)

To
Forward Phase
Dimming
Control
LED
light
engine
Hi-lume
A-Series
-V 2 (Black)
Neutral (White)
Ground
Ground (Green)
Note:$PMPSTTIPXODPSSFTQPOEUPUFSNJOBMCMPDLTPOESJWFS
(
SPVOEXJSFDPOOFDUJPOBWBJMBCMFPO,DBTFNPEFMTPOMZ'JYUVSFBOEESJWFSDBTFNVTUCFHSPVOEFEJOBDDPSEBODFXJUIMPDBMBOE
national electrical codes.
2
.BYJNVNESJWFSoUPo-&%MJHIUFOHJOFXJSFMFOHUIJTGU N

Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 22
LED Dimming Driver
369-543 Rev. A
23 10.25.11
Compatible Controls
t(VBSBOUFFEQFSGPSNBODFTQFDJmDBUJPOTXJUIUIFDPOUSPMTMJTUFEJOUIFDIBSUCFMPX
t'PSBTTJTUBODFTFMFDUJOHDPOUSPMT DPOUBDUPVS-&%$FOUFSPG&YDFMMFODFBUPS-&%4!MVUSPODPN
Product
Part Number
Fixtures per Control

(120 V only)
Measured Light
Output Range
/PWB5*
/5-7$1/
o
o
Maestro Wireless
.3'/%
o
o
RadioRA8
33%/%
o
o
RadioRA 2 Adaptive dimmer*
33%/"
o
o
RadioRA8
3"/%
o
o
RadioRA8
3"/%
o
o
)PNF8PSLT248
)23%/%
o
o
)PNF8PSLT248
)23%/%
o
o
)PNF8PSLT QS Adaptive dimmer*
)23%/"
o
o
)PNF8PSLT QS WPM
)23+81.%
o
QFSPVUQVU
o
)PNF8PSLT8EJNNFS
)3%/%
o
o
)PNF8PSLT8EJNNFS
)8%/% )3%/%
o
o
)PNF8PSLT WPM
)8*81.%
o
QFSPVUQVU
o
(3"'*,&ZF QS
24(3 24(3+
o
QFSPVUQVU
o
(3"'*,&ZF
(39 (39
o
QFSPVUQVU
o
31.6.PEVMF
-$1 )PNF8PSLT,
(3"'*,4ZTUFNT, Quantum
)831.6
-131.6
o
QFSPVUQVU
o
RPM-4A Module*
-$1 )PNF8PSLT,
(3"'*,4ZTUFNT, Quantum
)831."
-131."
o
QFSPVUQVU
o
(11BOFMT
7BSJPVT
o
o
Stanza
4;/%
o
o
NOTE: $POUBDU-VUSPO5FDIOJDBM4VQQPSUGPSEFSBUJOHSVMFTXIFOVTJOHXBMMCPYDPOUSPMTPOUIF)JMVNF A-Series LED Driver in

multi-gang applications.
For the list of compatible controls, visit lutron.com/HiLumeLEDBOETFMFDUi'PSXBSE1IBTF$POUSPM3FQPSU$BSEw
* Phase adaptive dimmers must be configured to forward-phase mode.
Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 23
LED Dimming Driver
369-543 Rev. A
ELECTRICIANS AND CONTRACTORS
FACILITIES MANAGERS
Driver Leads
SERVICE
.BYJNVNESJWFSoUPo-&%MJHIUFOHJOFXJSFMFOHUIJT
GU N

Warranty

Driver and lighting fixture must be grounded.
Drivers must be installed per national and local
electrical codes.
LED Load Replacement
'PS$MBTTSBUFEESJWFST UIF-&%MPBEDBOCF
changed while the driver is installed and powered.
Maximum Driver Operating Temperature
Driver case temperature (t c
NVTUOPUFYDFFE6-
conditions of acceptability in end product.
24 10.25.11
For warranty information, please visit

IUUQXXXMVUSPODPN5FDIOJDBM%PDVNFOU-JCSBSZ
#BMMBTUBOE%SJWFS8BSSBOUZQEf
Replacement Parts
When ordering Lutron replacement parts please
QSPWJEFUIFGVMMNPEFMOVNCFS$POTVMU-VUSPOJGZPV
have any questions.
Further Information
www.lutron.com/hilumeLED or contact our
-&%$POUSPM$FOUFSPG&YDFMMFODFBU
PS-&%T!MVUSPODPN
'PS IPVSMJGFUJNF ESJWFSDBTFUFNQFSBUVSF U c
NVTUOPUFYDFFE' $

Job Name:
Job Number:
Model Numbers:
Page 24
Supporting
Documentation
Wiring and Power

Guidelines
International Edition
Revision A
Overview
The wiring of a HomeWorks QS system has been made simpler through a reduction in
the number of link types and a higher capacity of device addresses on each link
compared to previous HomeWorks systems. The purpose of this document is to
provide guidelines for how to wire and power HomeWorks QS devices.
Processor / Network Link:

Each HomeWorks QS processor has two RJ-45 Ethernet ports connected by an internal
network switch. The Ethernet ports are used to connect processors together in a multiProcessor project, to connect Processors to the home network or other systems for
integration and to connect processors to the HomeWorks QS software utility for
activation, transfer and diagnostics. In a multi-Processor project, each Processor must
be connected to the same Ethernet network for proper system operation. To provide
for the most flexibility in network architecture, Ethernet cable should be run:
1. Between each processor and the home LAN or router.
2. Between each processor location in the home.
Having this Ethernet wiring in place will allow the Processor / Network Link to be
connected in a variety of possible configurations, as described in the HomeWorks QS
Networking Guide. Each network configuration has different benefits, but wiring in this
method provides the most flexibility, especially since the homes networking hardware
and software configurations may change over time. Please refer to the HomeWorks QS
Networking Guide for details (http://resi.lutron.com/Portals/3/Support/App Notes FAQs/HWQS/HomeWorks QS Networking.pdf).
Configurable Links:
Each HomeWorks QS Processor has two RS-485 configurable links that can be individually
defined to be one of three types:
HomeWorks Power Panel Link (16 MI addresses / 256 zones)
o Module Interfaces (MI) and Remote Power Modules (RPM)

HomeWorks QS RF Link (100 devices / 100 zones)
o
Dynamic Keypad, RF Sensors Occupancy / Vacancy, Sivoia QS Wireless

Shades, seeTouch Tabletop Keypads, GRAFIK Eye QS Main Units
HomeWorks QS Wired Device Link (100 devices / 500 zones)

o
Control Interfaces, Dynamic Keypad, wired seeTouch Keypads, GRAFIK Eye QS

Main Units, Sivoia QS shades
The link capacities shown above are the number of logical link addresses or devices that
can be controlled on the link. In addition, you must be sure that the power
requirements of the devices on each link are planned.
HomeWorks Power Panel Link:

HomeWorks / HomeWorks QS Power Panels, Module Interfaces and Remote Power
Modules are powered by line-voltage feeds, and therefore do not get powered from the
link. Module Interfaces are connected to the Processor on either link when configured
as a Power Panel Link. The same standard Lutron 4-conductor cable (GRX-CBL-346S)
that has been used in previous versions of HomeWorks can be used. This cable has
one pair of 18-gauge and one pair of 22-gauge twisted/shielded conductors. Pin 2
should not be connected to the processor or Module Interfaces, as the power is
supplied to the MI from a separate 24V~ transformer included with the MI. The Power
Panel Link wiring can be daisy-chained from one MI to the next and has a limit of 1000
feet of total wire length. Refer to the HomeWorks Power Panel Link example on page
9.
HomeWorks QS RF Link:
HomeWorks QS RF Link devices are often powered by line-voltage, as is the case with
dimmers, by a local power supply, as is the case with Sivoia QS Wireless Shades or RF
Dynamic Keypads, or by batteries, as is the case with Radio Powr Savr sensors and Pico
Wireless Controls. These devices do not get wired to the RF link.
Hybrid Repeaters are required to enable RF communication in HomeWorks QS, and at
least one Hybrid Repeater must be wired to each RF Link configured on the processor.
Each additional Hybrid Repeater (up to 4 total Hybrid Repeaters per link) can be wired
to the Processor RF Link, placed within 60 feet of another Hybrid Repeater (wireless),
or wired to the RF Link on another Hybrid Repeater. Each Hybrid Repeater can be
powered by the RF link on the processor (24VDC) or by a 9VDC plug-in transformer.
The three main power and wiring options are:
1. Wired to RF Link for power and communication
2. Wired to RF Link for communication, locally powered
3. RF communication, locally powered
Refer to the HomeWorks QS RF Link example on page 10.
Lutron standard 4-conductor cable (GRX-CBL-346S) can be used with a maximum
length of 1000 ft per wire run.
Sivoia QS Wireless shades are most often powered locally by individual plug-in power
supplies (QSPS-P2-1-50 or QSPS-P3-1-50). Sivoia QS Wireless shades can also be
powered by the ten-output smart power panel (QSPS-P2-10-60), if the wiring is
practical. Each Sivoia QS Wireless shade requires its own RF Receiver, regardless of
how the shade is powered.
Radio Powr Savr Sensors and Pico Wireless Controls are battery powered and do not
require any wiring. Tabletop Keypads can also run on battery power or be powered
locally with a 9VDC plug-in transformer.
HomeWorks QS Wired QS Device Link:

HomeWorks QS Wired QS Device Links consist mainly of devices that are powered by
the QS Wired Link or dedicated power supplies and therefore the wiring and power
requirements must be planned carefully. The power draw of each device is represented
in Power Draw Units, or PDUs. The table at the end of this document defines the
PDU count for the various wired devices. Refer to page 11 for the HomeWorks QS
Wired QS Device Link example.
Wired seeTouch Keypads, wired Dynamic Keypads, and interface devices all draw power
from the QS Wired Link.
Lutron standard 4-conductor cable (GRX-CBL-346S) can be used to wire these devices.
The QS Wired Link can be wired in daisy-chain, T-Tap, or star configurations, with a
maximum wire length of 2000 feet per link. For ease of wiring, Wire Landing Boards
(QS-WLB) can be used to land wire in the processor enclosure or a separate enclosure.
Additionally, smart power panels (QSPS-P2-10-60) can be used to distribute power and
provide multiple wire connections.
Pin 2 should not be connected to GRAFIK Eye QS main units and Wallbox Power
Modules, as these devices source their own power and do not require power from the
QS Link.
Sivoia QS Wired shades can be powered locally by individual plug-in power supplies
(QSPS-P2-1-50 or QSPS-P3-1-50), or from the ten-output smart power panel (QSPS-P210-60). Powering one shade per output of the chosen power supply is a fail-safe wiring
method. Each of these power supplies provides one or more 4-conductor terminals to
be connected to the devices requiring power and communication, and an additional
3-conductor terminal block for landing the communication wiring (Common, MUX,
MUX) from the processor.
Shades may require larger gauge power conductors to achieve the necessary wire run
length. See the table at http://www.lutron.com/TechnicalDocumentLibrary/QS Power
Supply Wiring and Power Draw Unit Guidelines.pdf for details. For example, one QS
shade, powered by a QSPS-P2-10-60, with 16AWG power conductors (QSH-CBL-M-500)
can have a maximum wire run of 200 ft.
In some cases, depending on the size of the shade, the QSPS-P2-10-60 power panel
outputs can power two or three shades per output. This can save wire and labor and is
useful on dual shade applications in cases where the shades are not large. Consult the
Lutron Shading Solutions Product Guide (367-1455) for details and shade sizes where
this is practical.
Powering the QS Link:

In planning how to assign devices to your QS Wired Link(s), it is helpful to consider the
power requirements of the devices and power supplies you will use to power your
devices. A table of Power Supply PDU outputs and device PDU requirements is shown
below. All QS Wired Link devices are powered from 24VDC. Because the QS Wired
Link can support as many as 100 devices, multiple power supplies will sometimes be
necessary. It is common to power shades with dedicated power supplies, rather than
from the QS Wired Link. Refer to page 6 for the HomeWorks QS Power Supply
example. The chart on page 7 shows the Power Draw Units (PDUs) supplied by each
power supply and consumed by each device.
HomeWorks QS Power Supply Example:
Table of Power Draw Units PDUs

Power Supplies
Model Number
QS din-rail power supply (1 output)
QSPS-DH-1-60
75
QS smart panel power supply (10 output)
QSPS-P2-10-60
QS plug-in power supply (1 output)
QSPS-P2-1-50
QSPS-P3-1-50
50 per
output
8
QS Devices
Model Number
HQP6-2-
HWQS Hybrid Repeater (w/o plug-in)
HQR-REP-
HWQS Hybrid Repeater (using plug-in)
HQR-REP-
HWQS seeTouch Keypad
Various
HWQS Dynamic Keypad (wired only)
HQ-W-DK420-
HWQS CCI/CCO Interface
QSE-IO
HWQS RS-232 Interface
QSE-CI-NWK-E
HWQS DMX Interface
QSE-CI-DMX
GRAFIK Eye QS Main Unit
QSGRx-
DIN-Rail Power Module
LQSE-
Sivoia QS Wired Shade
PDU
Output
PDUs
Required
8
See Sivoia QS Power Supply

Guidelines
Sivoia QS Wireless Shade
Wiring and Power Guidelines Intl Edition Rev A
Page 7
Page 8
HomeWorks Power Panel Link Example:
Page 9
HomeWorks QS RF Link Example:
Page 10
Networking Guide
Revision A
HomeWorks QS Networking Guide
Page 1
Table of Contents
Overview ............................................................................................. 3
Best Practices....................................................................................... 3
Single Processor Connected to a Router ................................................. 4
Multiple Processors, All Connected to a Router........................................ 5
Single Processor Directly Connected to a PC ........................................... 6
Multiple Processors Daisy Chained Together ........................................... 7
Multiple Processors Maximum System.................................................. 9
Maximum Ethernet Hops ......................................................................10
How To Change Network Settings.........................................................11
Basic Networking Local Area Networks ...............................................13
Basic Networking Wide Area Networks ...............................................15
Page 2
Overview
HomeWorks QS has a very flexible networking architecture. The purpose of this guide is to aid the
installer in determining the best approach for how to wire and configure the Processor Link (Ethernet).
Many of the topics contained in this document are advanced. Consult a networking professional and
provide him/her with this document.
Best Practices
1. Every processor in your project must be connected together using the Processor Link (Ethernet)
for successful system operation. This can be through a router/switch or daisy-chained from one
processor to the next using the built-in Ethernet switch. Ethernet replaces the inter-processor
link used in HomeWorks Illumination systems.
2. A good practice is to run Ethernet wiring from a router/switch to each LV-21 enclosure, and daisy
chain the Ethernet between the two processors in each LV-21 enclosure.
3. If your system has 4 or fewer processors, it is best to daisy chain the Processor Link (Ethernet)
from one processor to the next and connect the first processor to the router. This ensures that
the lighting system will continue to function in the event of a router failure.
4. Ethernet wiring should be run from a router/switch to every processor in the project in case the
processors need to be connected to the network. Ethernet wiring should also be run between
each processor location. Having the wiring in place will allow for future networking architecture
changes and provides the most flexibility.
5. A Wi-Fi enabled router may be used to connect the laptop to the HomeWorks QS system. This
will allow the installer to carry the laptop around during the programming and activation of the
system. Wi-Fi may also be needed if the homeowner wants to utilize an iPod or iPad to integrate
to the HomeWorks QS system.
6. HomeWorks QS processors should be kept on quiet Ethernet networks or dedicated subnets.
This will ensure Internet and home network traffic does not interfere with the operation of the
lighting system.
7. Only one Ethernet port on the processor needs to be used when Ethernet is run to each
processor from a router. Either of the Ethernet ports may be used in this case.
Page 3
Single Processor Connected to a Router
Ethernet
Laptop PC
Wi-Fi
or
Ethernet
Example A DHCP
WiFi/Ethernet enabled PC
IP address
DHCP
Subnet mask DHCP
Wi-Fi
Router
Wi-Fi Router
IP address
192.168.1.1
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
DHCP range
192.168.1.100-150
DHCP Enabled
Processor
IP address
DHCP
Subnet mask DHCP
When to use
This is the fastest way to setup your system. Every device will use DHCP and the router allocates IP
addresses. Using a Wi-Fi router will allow you to carry your laptop around during activation and
programming. Either one of the Ethernet ports on the processor can be connected to the router.
Example B Static IP
IP address
DHCP
Subnet mask DHCP
Wi-Fi Router
IP address
192.168.1.1
DHCP range
192.168.1.100-150
DHCP Enabled
IP address
192.168.1.2
When to use
The processor is set up with a static IP address and the router will use DHCP to allocate IP addresses for the
PC and other devices. Use this on jobs where the processor is accessed via integration using telnet so that
the integration device (touchscreen, iPhone, etc) can always find the processor at the same IP address. The
static IP address should be outside the range of DHCP addresses. Either one of the Ethernet ports on the
processor can be connected to the router.
Page 4
Multiple Processors, All Connected to a Router

Laptop PC
Ethernet
Wi-Fi
or
Ethernet
Wi-Fi
Router
Processor 1
Example C DHCP
IP address
DHCP
Subnet mask DHCP
Wi-Fi Router
IP address
192.168.1.1
DHCP range
192.168.1.100-150
DHCP Enabled
Processor 2
Processor 16
HomeWorks QS Processors
IP address 1
DHCP
IP address 2
DHCP
IP address n
DHCP
Subnet mask DHCP
When to use
This is the fastest way to setup your system. Every device will use DHCP and the router allocates IP
addresses. Using a Wi-Fi router will allow you to carry your laptop around during activation and
programming. Either one of the Ethernet ports on the processor can be connected to the router. Every
processor must be connected to the router. Up to 16 processors can be connected using this method.
Example D Static IP
IP address
DHCP
Subnet mask DHCP
Wi-Fi Router
IP address
192.168.1.1
DHCP range
192.168.1.100-150
DHCP Enabled
IP address 1
192.168.1.2
IP address 2
192.168.1.3
IP address n
192.168.1.n+1
When to use
The processors are set up with static IP addresses and the router will use DHCP to allocate IP addresses for
the PC and other devices. Use this on jobs where the processors are accessed via integration using telnet so
that the integration device (touchscreen, iPhone, etc) can always find the processors at the same IP
addresses. The static IP addresses should be outside the range of DHCP addresses. Either one of the
Ethernet ports on the processor can be connected to the router. Every processor must be connected to the
router. Up to 16 processors can be connected using this method.
Page 5
Single Processor Directly Connected to a PC

Ethernet
Laptop PC
Processor
Example E Direct Ethernet Connection DHCP

Ethernet enabled PC
Standard Ethernet Cable Required
IP address
DHCP
Subnet mask DHCP
IP address
DHCP
Subnet mask DHCP
When to use
This connection method should only be used when no router is available. A standard Ethernet cable can be
used to connect the PC and the processor. There is no DHCP server available in this case, but the PC and
processor will revert to using Link Local IP addresses after about two minutes. Either one of the Ethernet
ports on the processor can be connected to the PC. Note: Processors ship with DHCP enabled. With the
above configuration it may take up to two minutes for the HWQS software to recognize the processor after
the Ethernet cable is connected.
Example F Direct Ethernet Connection Static IP

Ethernet enabled PC
IP address
192.168.1.3
IP address
192.168.1.2
When to use
This connection method should only be used when no router is available. A standard Ethernet cable can be
used to connect the PC and the processor. Both the PC and the processor will need to use static IP
addresses. Either one of the Ethernet ports on the processor can be connected to the PC. Note: Processors
ship with DHCP enabled. With the above configuration it may take up to two minutes for the HWQS software
to recognize the processor after the Ethernet cable is connected.
Page 6
Multiple Processors Daisy Chained Together

Laptop PC
Proc 1
Proc 2
Proc 3
Proc 4
Proc 5
Ethernet
Example G Daisy Chain with Direct Ethernet Connection (No Router) DHCP
IP address
DHCP
IP address 1
DHCP
Subnet mask DHCP
IP address 5
DHCP
Subnet mask DHCP
When to use
This connection method should only be used when no router is available and the processors are not on an
Ethernet network. A standard Ethernet cable can be used to connect the PC to one of the processors. Each
processor has two Ethernet ports to allow daisy-chaining the processors together using Ethernet cables.
Every processor must be connected to another processor or the PC. The PC and the processors will need to
use static IP addresses. It is not recommended to exceed 5 processors connected using this method. Note:
Processors ship with DHCP enabled. With the above configuration it may take up to two minutes for the
HWQS software to recognize the processor after the Ethernet cable is connected.
Example H Daisy Chain with Direct Ethernet Connection (No Router) Static IP
IP address
192.168.1.100
IP address 1
192.168.1.2
IP address 5
192.168.1.6
When to use
This connection method should only be used when no router is available and the processors are not on an
Ethernet network. A standard Ethernet cable can be used to connect the PC to one of the processors. Each
processor has two Ethernet ports to allow daisy-chaining the processors together using Ethernet cables.
Every processor must be connected to another processor or the PC. The PC and the processors will need to
use static IP addresses. It is not recommended to exceed 5 processors connected using this method. Note:
Processors ship with DHCP enabled. With the above configuration it may take up to two minutes for the
HWQS software to recognize the processor after the Ethernet cable is connected.
Page 7
Laptop PC
Ethernet
Wi-Fi
or
Ethernet
Wi-Fi
Router
Proc 1
Proc 2
Example I Daisy Chain with Router

WiFi Router
IP address
192.168.1.1
IP address
DHCP
Subnet mask DHCP
DHCP range
192.168.1.100-150
DHCP Enabled
Proc 3
Proc 4
IP address 1
DHCP or
192.168.1.2
IP address 4
192.168.1.5
When to use
This connection method should only be used when it is not possible to connect Ethernet between the router
and each processor. Standard Ethernet cables can be used to connect the PC and all of the processors.
Each processor has two Ethernet ports to allow daisy-chaining the processors together using Ethernet cables.
Every processor must be connected to another processor or the router. The PC and the processors can use
DHCP or static IP addresses. The static IP addresses should be outside the range of DHCP addresses. It is
not recommended to exceed 4 processors connected using this method.
Page 8
Multiple Processors Maximum System
Wi-Fi
Router
Proc 1
Proc 2
Proc 3
Proc 4
Ethernet
Proc 9
Proc 10
Proc 11
Proc 12
Proc 13
Proc 14
Proc 15
Proc 16
Wi-Fi
or
Ethernet
Proc 5
Proc 6
Proc 7
Proc 8
Laptop PC
Example J Hybrid Ethernet Connection

WiFi Router
IP address
DHCP
IP address
192.168.1.1
Subnet mask DHCP
DHCP range
192.168.1.100-150
DHCP Enabled
IP address 1
DHCP or
192.168.1.2
IP address 16 192.168.1.17
When to use
This connection method can be used when Ethernet wiring cannot be run from a router to each individual
processor. Typically two processors will be mounted in each LV-21 enclosure. These processors should be
daisy-chained together with a single Ethernet connection between the LV-21 and the router. Standard
Ethernet cables can be used to connect the PC and all of the processors. Each processor has two Ethernet
ports to allow daisy-chaining the processors together using Ethernet cables. Every processor must be
connected to another processor or the router. The PC and the processors can use DHCP or static IP
addresses. The static IP addresses should be outside the range of DHCP addresses. Up to 16 processors
can be connected in the system, however it is not recommended to have more than 2 processors daisychained together when using this method.
Page 9
Maximum Ethernet Hops

For optimal system performance, no more than 5 Ethernet hops should exist between any two processors
or any processor and the PC in the HomeWorks QS system. An Ethernet hop is best described as a
connection between two devices (router, switch, processor, or PC). In the following example, there is
only 1 Ethernet hop between processor 1 and processor 2, but there are 3 Ethernet hops between
processor 2 and processor 3.
1 Hop
1 Hop
1 Hop
1 Hop
Processor 1
Connection Method
Processor 2
Ethernet
Hops
Processor 3
Notes
A DHCP, Single Processor
1 Processor
B Static IP, Single Processor
1 Processor
C DHCP, Multiple Processors Connected

Through Router
D Static IP, Multiple Processors Connected

Through Router
E Direct Ethernet Connection, Single

Processor DHCP
1 Processor, defaults to using Link

Local IP addresses
F Direct Ethernet Connection, Single

Processor Static IP
1 Processor
G Direct Ethernet Connection to 1 Processor,

Multiple Processors Daisy Chained DHCP
Up to 5
H Direct Ethernet Connection to 1 Processor,

Multiple Processors Daisy Chained Static IP
Up to 5
I 1 Processor Connected Through Router,

Multiple Processors Daisy Chained
Up to 5
Not recommended for more than 4

processors.
J Hybrid of Processors Connected Through

Router and Daisy Chained
Up to 5
Not recommended to have more

than 2 processors daisy-chained.
Page 10
Uses Link Local IP addresses. Not

recommended for more than 5
processors.
Not recommended for more than 5
processors.
How To Change Network Settings

Step 1: Change your PC network settings
A. This step is only necessary when setting up a static IP address on your laptop or PC.
B. Go to the control panel and select Network Settings. Depending on whether you are connecting
wirelessly or through a wire, right click and select Properties on either your LAN or Wireless network
connection.
C. Highlight the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) settings and press the Properties button.
D. Change the settings accordingly and save.
*NOTE: Windows XP shown. Contact operating system provider or a

networking professional for other operating systems.
Page 11
Step 2: Change network settings on router

A. Connect your computer to your Wi-Fi router.
B. Open your web browser and type in your routers IP address:
a. Linksys and Belkin default 192.168.1.1
b. D-Link and Netgear default 192.168.0.1
c. Other routers consult your routers documentation
d. If using DHCP, this is typically listed as the default gateway address.
C. Enter the user name and password. These vary by manufacturer and model. Some common ones
are admin:admin or admin:password. Please consult your routers documentation.
D. Navigate to the Network setup, modify, and save your settings.
*NOTE: Linksys shown. For others, refer to router documentation.
Step 3: Change network settings on processors

A.
B.
C.
D.
Connect your processor(s) to your network.

Open the Project Properties in the HomeWorks QS software.
Uncheck the DHCP box beside the processor(s) and enter a static IP address in the IP Address field.
Set the gateway address and subnet mask to match the settings of your network.
Page 12
Basic Networking Local Area Networks

What is a network?
A network is a set of devices that are connected together to exchange digital information or commands.
Devices can include desktop computers, laptops, Wi-Fi routers, or HomeWorks QS Processors. A local
area network, or LAN, is a network of devices that are connected together by physical wires or over Wi-Fi
and are in close physical proximity to each other.
What is an IP address?
An IP address, or Internet Protocol address, is a unique way to identify a device on your network. An IP
address is analogous to a house number. On any given street, all the house numbers are unique just as
on any given network all the IP addresses are unique.
An IP address consists of 4 octets of numbers ranging from 0 to 255.
Example
IP address: 192.168.1.100
How does a device on my network get an IP address?

Devices can get an IP address in multiple ways:
1. The device can have a static IP address assigned to it. The static IP address can be manually changed
using configuration software for that device. See What is a static IP address?
2. A network device can hand out IP addresses when the network is powered up. See What is DHCP?
3. A device can choose its own IP address if set to DHCP and no network device is handing out IP
addresses. See What is Link Local?
What is DHCP?
DHCP, or Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, defines a series of events which would allow devices to
systematically allocate IP addresses. In networks where DHCP is used, one device, called the DHCP host,
is responsible for handing out IP addresses to all the other devices. The IP addresses are temporary and
are re-allocated any time the host or devices are powered up.
The DHCP host hands out IP addresses from a range that was set up during the hosts configuration.
Devices that would like to receive IP addresses from the DHCP host are set up to obtain IP addresses
automatically using DHCP. The DHCP host is usually your home router.
Example
DHCP IP address range: 192.168.1.100 to 192.168.1.149
What is a static IP address?

A static IP address is an IP address that doesnt change. A static IP address is manually configured before
the network is used. Static IP configuration requires careful planning so that all devices have unique IP
addresses.
What is Link Local?

If a device is configured to use DHCP but no DHCP server exists on the network, the device may choose
to implement the Link Local protocol. This protocol allows the device to assume an IP address and
verifies that no other device is using that IP address. This process may take up to two minutes. Link
Local IP addresses all begin with 169.254.x.x.
Example
Link Local IP address: 169.254.1.123
Page 13
Can I mix a DHCP network with a static IP addresses?

Yes, however careful planning must be given to the static IP addresses. The static IP addresses cannot
be the same as the DHCP hosts IP address and must fall outside of the range of the IP addresses the
DHCP host hands out.
Example
Router (DHCP host) IP address: 192.168.1.1
Router DHCP range: 192.168.1.100 to 192.168.1.150
HomeWorks QS Processor static IP address: 192.168.1.2
Wi-Fi laptop using DHCP: given out from router. Changes each time laptop is connected to
network
What is a subnet mask?

A subnet mask is used to tell what messages are for this network and which are for another network. A
subnet mask consists of 4 octets of numbers ranging from 0 to 255. The subnet masks should match on
all devices that are part of the same network.
Example
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
The 255 in the first three octets forces the listening device to listen to any messages where the
first three octets of the incoming IP address match. If the receiving devices IP address is
192.168.1.100 and the incoming message is from IP address 192.168.1.2, then the device should
listen.
What is a straight through or patch Ethernet cable?

A straight through or patch Ethernet cable (often referred to as simply an Ethernet cable) is a cable
consisting of 4 pairs of twisted wire with an RJ-45 connector on each end. The wires connect straight
through from one connector to the other (i.e. pin 1 connects to pin 1, pin 2 connects to pin 2, etc). This
is the most common type of network cable and is used when connecting a device to a network through a
router or switch.
What is a crossover Ethernet cable?

A crossover Ethernet cable is similar to a straight through Ethernet cable, with the exception that the
pairs of wire are reversed from one connector to the other. This allows the transmit pairs on one
connector to connect to the receive pairs on the other connector. This cable is often used when
connecting two devices directly without a router in between, however is not necessary in HomeWorks
QS.
Page 14
Basic Networking Wide Area Networks

What is a Wide Area Network?
A wide area network is collection of networks that are not physically connected together. Accessing your
home network remotely from an office or other place away from your home is a WAN. The Internet is
the most commonly known Wide Area Network.
How does your home network connect to the Internet?

Your home network is connected to the Internet via a gateway device. Cable modems and DSL modems
are examples of gateway devices. Sometimes gateway devices are also routers.
What is a gateway IP address?

A gateway is a device that connects your network to the Internet such as a cable modem or DSL router.
The gateway address only needs to be setup when you want to remotely access a device on your
network from another device on the Internet. If your network is not connected to the Internet, then the
gateway address is not used. If your device does not need to be accessed from the Internet, then the
gateway address is also not used. The gateway address on a device should be set to the address of the
gateway device. In most cases this is your network router.
Example
Router IP address: 192.168.1.1
Gateway address of devices attached to router: 192.168.1.1
Page 15
www.lutron.com
World Headquarters 1.610.282.3800
Technical Support Center 1.800.523.9466 (Available 24/7)
Customer Service 1.888.LUTRON1
01/2011 Lutron Electronics Co., Inc.

HWQS International Technical Specification Guide A.11

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

HWQS International Technical Specification Guide A.11

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

HomeWorks QS

Technical Specification Guide

Last Rev Date

Last Rev Date

Contact Closure Input/Output

Front Room Equipment

Back Room Equipment

TOC Rev A.11, 7/9/2013

Wallbox Closure Interface (WCI)

Enclosures, Panels, and Power Modules

Specification Sheet Coming Soon

Last Rev Date

Power Boosters and Load Interfaces

EcoSystem Ballasts and Drivers

TOC Rev A.11, 7/9/2013

Front Room Equipment

HomeWorks QS Wired seeTouch Architectural Keypads

HomeWorks QS wired seeTouch architectural

HomeWorks QS Wired seeTouch Architectural Keypads

Engraved Replacement Kit

Engraved Replacement Kit

Engraved Replacement Kit

Engraved Replacement Kit

Engraved Replacement Kit

Engraved Replacement Kit

Engraved Replacement Kit

Engraved Replacement Kit

Engraved Replacement Kit

Engraved Replacement Kit

Engraved Replacement Kit

Engraved Replacement Kit

Engraved Replacement Kit

Engraved Replacement Kit

Dual Group Keypad

Engraved Replacement Kit

HQWA-W1RLDN HQWA-W2RLDN HQWA-W3BDN

*XX in the model number represents color / finish code. See

24/7 Technical Support 800.523.9466

HomeWorks QS Wired seeTouch Architectural Keypads

Engraved Replacement Kit

Engraved Replacement Kit

Engraved Replacement Kit

Engraved Replacement Kit

Engraved Replacement Kit

Engraved Replacement Kit

Engraved Replacement Kit

Engraved Replacement Kit

Engraved Replacement Kit

Engraved Replacement Kit

Engraved Replacement Kit

Engraved Replacement Kit

Engraved Replacement Kit

Engraved Replacement Kit

Dual Group Keypad

Engraved Replacement Kit

*XX in the model number represents color / finish code. See

HomeWorks QS Wired seeTouch Architectural Keypads

See pages 2 and 3 for complete lists of model numbers.

UL, cUL, NOM, FCC, IC, COFETEL

Ambient operating temperature: 32 F to 104 F (0 C to 40 C),

Connects to QS wired device link on Homeworks QS processor.

Tested to withstand electrostatic discharge without damage or memory

Tested to withstand surge voltages without damage or loss of